The Auto Cad Reference Guide

The AutoCAD®Reference Guide
Springer
New York
Berlin
Heidelberg
Barcelona
Budapest
Hong Kong
London
Milan
Paris
Santa Clara
Singapore
Tokyo
Dorothy Kent
The AutoCAD@
Reference Guide
Release 13
Third Edition
Springer
Dorothy Kent
100 Coventry Lane
Lower Gwynedd, PA 19002-2071
USA
Autodesk, AutoCAD, AutoLISP, AME, and ARX are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
ACAD and DXF are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Kent, Dorothy, 1955-
The AutoCAD reference guide: release 13/Dorothy Kent. - 3rd
ed.
p. cm.
ISBN-13:978-0-387-94723-5 (softcover: alk. paper)
1. Computer graphics. 2. AutoCAD (Computer file). I. Title.
T385.K42 19%
620' .0042 '02855369-dc20 95-5035
Printed on acid-free paper.
© 19%, 1991, 1989 Dorothy Kent
All rights reserved. This work may not be translated or copied in whole or in part without the written
permission of the publisher (Springer-Verlag New York, Inc., 175 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010,
USA), except for brief excerpts in connection with reviews or scholarly analysis. Use in connection with
any form of information storage and retrieval, electronic adaptation, computer software, or by similar
or dissimilar methodology now known or hereafter developed is forbidden.
The use of general descriptive names, trade names, trademarks, etc., in this publication, even if the
former are not especially identified, is not to be taken as a sign that such names, as understood by the
Trade Marks and Merchandise Marks Act, may accordingly be used freely by anyone.
Production managed by Francine McNeill; manufacturing supervised by Jeffrey Taub.

Photocomposed copy prepared from the author's PostScript files.
987654321
ISBN-13:978-0-387-94723-5 e-ISBN-13:978-1-4612-2400-6
001: 10.1007/978-1-4612-2400-6
Preface v
PREFACE
Getting Faster Answers About AutoCAD
Whether you are a beginning AutoCAD user, a part-time user, or even a long-standing
user, it is virtually impossible to remember every nuance and every option for every
AutoCAD command and variable. We have all had questions like "Can I do it this way
with that command?" or "How do I get this sequence to work?" It is more important to
know where to find information about AutoCAD commands than to remember it all. This
reference guide is designed to give you fast access to AutoCAD's commands, variables,
and key topics. Each command, variable, and topic is presented alphabetically and
described simply and to the point. The complexities of commands and variables are
explained with tips and warnings learned from experience.
Why This Book Is Different

This guide pulls AutoCAD commands, variables, and topics into one easy-to-use refer-
ence that brings important information about every AutoCAD command and variable to
your fmgertips. The guide is not limited to a mere listing of commands and variables and
what they do. It also helps you
¢ Find commands and variables quickly to get key descriptions
¢ Get tips and warnings that will save you time
¢ See example sequences and screen shots illustrating how to use commands and
variables
¢ Identify variables for use with commands, menu macros, and AutoLISP
Who Does This Book Benefit?

This book is intended to be used by a person having some basic knowledge of AutoCAD.
It describes each command and the various options available for that command. It is
intended to help those who want to know of possible alternatives to a particular com-
mand. The inclusion of tips and warnings helps save time and increase productivity. This
book is also helpful to experienced users who may need some quick answers to questions
about the various AutoCAD commands and variables.
How to Use the AutoCAD Reference Guide

We recommend that you keep the reference guide right next to your computer for easy
access. Using the guide is simple. The commands, variables, and topics are listed in
vi Preface
alphabetical order. Just use the handy thumb tabs to help you turn to the command or
variable you want and start reading. Related commands and variables are cross-referenced
for easy location.
Assumptions
We have assumed that the reader is using AutoCAD Release 13 for Windows and a
mouse as their input or pointing device.
How to Get Information From the AutoCAD Screen

If you are new to AutoCAD, or unfamiliar with AutoCAD's screen display, take a
moment to review the information that you can get directly from AutoCAD's drawing
display:
AuloCAD · UNNAMED)
..
Command PrompI .
ToegleBunono
t/ Selecting the word AutoCAD at the top of the Screen Menu always takes you back
to the root or main menu.
Preface vii
t/ Selecting the * * * * (asterisks) near the top of the Screen Menu brings up a
submenu of Object Snap and other frequently used commands. As soon as you
choose an option, you are returned to the previous screen menu.
t/ X,Y coordinates (lower left hand comer) display the location of the cross hairs as
absolute X,Yvalues or as a distance and angle (polar), or they can be turned off.
t/ Commands (located from the Pull-down menus, Screen menus, and Dialog boxes)
containing three dots, or ellipsis (... ), indicates that a dialog box will appear if the
command is chosen.
t/ Commands (located from the Pull-down menus) containing an arrow pointing to the
right ( > ) indicates that the menu is cascading, or that another menu is opened when
moving the pointing device over the command.
t/ The Command line or prompt, located at the bottom of the screen, is where
AutoCAD is waiting for you to issue a command or for you to respond to
information necessary to complete the command. If you want to repeat the last
command, you can press the space bar or the <Enter> key.
t/ The icon in the lower left-hand comer (called the Ucsicon) orients you to the
current coordinate system. This icon is replaced when paper space is active or when
working in perspective projection.
t/ You can move docked and floating Toolbars by clicking the mouse on the small
gray area surrounding the toolbar icons. After you clicked on the point do not
release the mouse button until you have dragged the toolbar to a new location. If the
toolbar is floating you can click on the top of the toolbar containing the toolbar's
name.
What the Guide Tells You About Each Command
We have tried to make your access to each command, variable, and topic as straight-
forward as possible. Each entry follows the same basic format:
Command Name: You will find the commands, variables, and topics arranged alpha-
betically with thumb tabs at each letter division. All commands and variables that can be
accessed transparently or activated while another command is active are prefaced with an
apostrophe ('). Commands listed in lowercase are not actually commands but discuss
important topics.
Description: This is a general description of the command.
Initiate The Command By... Lists the various ways to access each command and variable.
The Toolbar refers to the floating and docked pictures, or icons, of the commands; Pull-
down refers to the menu bar across the top of the screen; Screen menu refers to the menu
on the right-hand side of the screen; Keyboard refers to what you type at the keyboard in
order to invoke the command.
viii Preface
Prompts: This section demonstrates the prompting text that AutoCAD displays in the
Command line when input is requested.
Options: Lists the various options, including a description, that are available for each
command and variable. Since dialog boxes often set system and environment variables,
we have included the variable names, in lowercase, along the outside of the individual
dialog boxes.
Tips & Warnings: Provides timesaving tips and helpful warnings to help prevent problems
and to increase productivity.
Type, Initial Default, Subsequent Default, Value: This information is provided for the
different types of system and environment variables. Type lets you know whether it is an
environment or a system variable; Initial Default lists the default AutoCAD settings;
Subsequent Default tells you whether the setting is for the current drawing session only or
is saved with the drawing file, or whether the setting is saved to the configuration file,
thereby making it the default setting no matter what drawing you are editing; Value tells
you whether the variable is stored as an integer, real, or 3-D or 2-D point or text string.
Related Variables: Lists any related or affected system variables for the command or
variable.
Associated Commands: Gives cross-references to other commands that interact with or
are similar to the command or variable.
Example: Gives a Command prompt and response and/or illustration to demonstrate how
the command is used.
Acknowledgments ix
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
About the Author

Dorothy Kent is a published author and a veteran AutoCAD end-user and trainer. Since
1983, she has taught industry professionals and their support staff how to be productive
with AutoCAD. This includes creating customized training and implementation programs.
Kent has been a guest speaker at Autodesk University, is a member of the Editorial
Advisory Board of Cadalyst Magazine, and has worked with Autodesk's Customer
Education and Training Department developing training materials for their Learning
Resource Series publications. Kent had previously published her best seller "AutoCAD
Reference Guide" with New Riders Publishing and was a contributor to "Inside AutoCAD
Special Edition."
For information regarding customized AutoCAD training programs, you can contact Kent
at 100 Coventry Lane, Suite 300, Lower Gwynedd, PA 19002-2071. Dorothy welcomes
questions and comments about The AutoCAD Reference Guide, as well as corrections and
suggestions for future releases and revisions. She can be reached via the Internet at
71044.1014@compuserve.com.
Acknowledgments
Many thanks go to Phillip Dollan for his technical editing, guidance, and encouragement.
Harry Hellerman, Tom Miles, and Nathaniel Rafalski reviewed the material making sure I
never lost sight of the spirit of the book.
I wish to express my appreciation to the many individuals at Springer-Verlag who were
instrumental in producing The AutoCAD Reference Guide, and especially to my editor
Martin Gilchrist.
Throughout the years I have had the privilege to come into contact with hundreds of
people, but I especially want to thank the following individuals for their continued sup-
port throughout the years: Colleen Barlow, Grace Gallego, Roy Harkow, Wayne
Hodgens, Phillip Leverault, Art Liddle, Martha Lubow, Sandy Lurins, J.e. Malitzke,
Mark Middlebrook, Kevin Pashuk, Philip Quick, Charles Winick, and the staff at the
Thompson School of Applied Science, University of New Hampshire.
A special thanks to all the people who have shared their thoughts, ideas, and experiences
that have ultimately provided me with the knowledge to write this book.
A very personal thank you goes to all my family and especially to my parents, Florence
and Harry Kent, for their continued love and support.
Contents xi
CONTENTS
Preface ............................................................................ v
Acknowledgments ............................................................. ix
Commands by Function ...................................................... .
Appendix A 605
Appendix B 608
Appendix C 610
Appendix D 612
Commands by Function 1
COMMANDS BY FUNCTION
General Information
• Because of AutoCAD's flexibility there are many ways to create and edit drawings.
We recommend that you experiment using different combinations of commands and
drawing aids.
• Draw full size and define the drawing scale when you are ready to Plot. Drawing full
size gives you the following advantages:
o Editing is accomplished using the actual dimensions.
o You can easily merge other drawing files that have also been created full
size.
o If your drawing contains multiple scales, use paper space viewports
(Mview) and the Zoom command to depict the different scales.
o The same drawing can be plotted as often as you want on any size paper
and at any scale. Of course, paper size is limited to your output (printer
or plotter) device. When Plotting to different scales you will probably
need to modify the height of your annotation (text and dimension text).
See Appendix C for a listing of plot scale factors, text heights, and the
amount of space available for the different paper sizes.
• Enter the exact sizes for all the geometry or objects. When you dimension you can set
up parameters to have the dimensions automatically rounded to your specification.
Since AutoCAD retains the original values you can always revert back to the original
values if necessary.
• Create prototype or template files. Preset information that is typical to the different
types of drawings you create (i.e., titleblock, layers, colors, linetypes, dimension
styles) and save that information to one or more drawing files. There are a number of
ways to access prototype drawings, but the easiest method is to specify the prototype
drawing when using the New command. In any case, almost everything you do can be
changed after the fact by using the various editing commands.
Drawing Setup
The commands that set drawing parameters are very flexible. They can be set before or
after you start drawing, or you can use their default settings. We recommend that you
modify these settings based on the types of drawings you produce. Most of these settings
help in communicating your ideas, while other settings speed up the drawing display.
2 Commands by Function
Color or Ddcolor
You can defme the default color for new geometry regardless of its Layer assignment,
or you can set the default color to the current layer. Colors are important because you
can assign line widths to the different colors during the Plot command. You can also
assign line widths to Plines, Mlines and Traces regardless of their color assignment.
We recommend that you set the default color to the current Layer (Bylayer) instead of
setting a specific color to objects. That is, layers are assigned colors, not the individual
objects. Therefore, if you change a layer's color, all objects on that layer are globally
updated.
Ddim
Lets you standardize the appearance of dimensions.
Layer or Ddlmodes
Separates the geometry by placing objects on different Layers. These Layers can be
visible or invisible, and they can determine the Color and Linetype of objects.
Limits
Defmes the actual size of the space your drawing represents.
Linetype or Ddltype
You can define the default Linetype for new geometry regardless of its Layer
assignment, or you can set the default Linetype to the current Layer. We recommend
that you set the default Linetype to the current Layer (Bylayer) instead of setting a
specific Linetype to objects. That is, Layers are assigned linetypes, not individual
objects. Therefore, if you change a Layer's Linetype, all objects on that layer are
globally updated.
Lineweights
See Color or Ddcolor.
Ltscale
Determines the spacing for all linetypes except Continuous. Since this value is
indirectly linked to the plot scale factor, we recommend that you use Appendix C to
help determine the value.
Mistyle
Lets you standardize Mline appearance.
Mvsetup
A routine containing a variety of commands and options that set up your Units, Limits,
Viewports, and tilteblock.
Regenauto
Suppress drawing Regenerations that usually occur after exiting certain commands.
Style
Lets you standardize Text appearance.
Units or Ddunits
Define whether the inputting of measurements for creating and editing geometry is
based on Decimal, Metric, Architectural, or Engineering units.
Viewports I Mview
Enables you to look at the drawing from various viewing angles and from various
zoom ratios. Mview is used when paper space is enabled.
Viewres
Controls the speed and display resolution of Arcs, Circles, Ellipses, and Linetypes.
Drafting Tools I Drawing Aids

The following commands and variable settings are helpful tools when using drawing,
editing, and inquiry commands. The settings assigned to these tools can be changed as
needed, and are often accomplished transparently or while another command is active.
Aperture
Controls the size of the target box located at the intersection of the cross hairs during
Object Snap (Osnap) selection.
Blipmode
Controls the display of the small, temporary blips or cross marks that appear when
entering points or selecting objects.
Coords
Coords is a three-way toggle tracking the X,Y coordinates on the status line bar on the
lower left of your AutoCAD display.
Ddemodes
Sets the default values for the following commands: Color (Ddcolor), Layer
(Ddlmodes), Linetype (Ddltype), text Style, linetype scale (Celtscale), Elevation, and
Thickness.
Ddgrips or Grip
Grips provide a quick method of selecting objects and modifying them. Use Grips as
an alternative to the Move, Copy, Stretch, Rotate, Scale, and Mirror commands.
Ddptype
Displays and sets the current Point style and size.
Ddrmodes
Lets you quickly access Ortho, Fill, Qtext, Blips, Highlight, Groups, Snap, Grid, and
setting up the drawing for working in Isometric mode.
Ddselect
Lets you quickly set values to Pickfirst, Pickadd, Pickdrag, Pickauto, Pickstyle, and
Pickbox.
Grid
Displays reference dots at any user-defmed increment. It helps you get a perspective
on the space you are working in and the size of your drawing objects. This is similar to
placing graph paper underneath a paper drawing when working on the drafting board.
Group
Creates a named selection set of objects. These grouped objects can be manipulated
together or individually.
Highlight
Determines whether objects appear dotted (highlighted) during the selection set
process or remain in their original format.
Mirrtext
Determines whether mirrored text is reflected or retains the same text direction.
Ortho
Constrains the construction of most objects to horizontal and vertical directions. Ortho
also controls the angle at which you pick the second point in many of the drawing and
editing commands.
Snap
Restricts your cross hair's movement to a specified increment. Use Snap to quickly
create uniform-looking schematics.
Ucsicon
Determines the visibility and location of the UCS icon. It is used as a marker to
graphically display the origin and viewing plane of the current UCS.
Create Accurate Drawings

Ddosnap I Osnap
Osnap helps you locate precise points on objects.
Dducs
Restores, Deletes, and Renames saved User Coordinate Systems (UCS).
point entry I coordinate entry
Describes the various ways of entering the size and location of objects.
point filter
Is a method of locating points in relation to existing geometry.
selection sets
Selection sets are used to locate object(s) during editing and inquiry commands.
UCS
Redefmes the location of 0,0 and the direction of the X, Y, and Z axes.
Geometric Construction or Draw Commands

Geometric shapes are often referred to as objects and sometimes as entities or elements.
Objects can be divided into two main categories - 2-Dimensional (2-D) and
3-Dimensional (3-D). Three-dimensional objects can be further divided into 3 groups -
wire-frame, surface, and solid. Your particular application will determine which grouping
or combination of 3-D objects you will reference.
Drawings can contain any combination of 2-D and 3-D objects. However, you will find it
easier to modify drawings that reference only one of the 3-D categories. This is because
edit and display commands (such as Move, Hide, and Render) work differently depending
on the construction of the 3-D object.
2-D OBJECTS
2-D objects are planar. They can reside anywhere in space, but only on one plane. There
are some exceptions, such as Line and Spline. Assigning a Thickness to a 2-D object
gives it a height, or Z dimension.
3Dpoly
Creates a 3-D Polyline where each vertex can be located anywhere in 3-D space.
Arc
Draws partial circles.
Boundary
Provides a simple and fast way to construct complex shapes by converting Lines, Arcs,
Circles, Ellipses, Polylines, and Splines into Polylines, or Regions.
Circle
Draws Circles.
Donut
Draws solid-filled rings and circles made out of Polyline Arcs.
Ellipse
Draws Ellipses and Elliptical Arcs.
Line
Creates 2-D and 3-D straight Line segments.
Mline
Creates parallel lines and arcs that are fused together and act as one object. Mlines are
time-savers when drawing walls, roadways, HV AC, and double line piping draw-ings.
You can quickly edit Mlines using the Mledit command, and you can preset the
number of Mlines, including their Color and Linetype, using the Mlstyle command.
Pline
Polylines are a series of 2-D lines and arc segments that share the same vertices and
are processed as a single object. Plines can be assigned line widths and have special
editing features when using commands such as Fillet, Chamfer, and Offset.
Point
Creates a point in X,Y,Z space. These points are often used as reference markers.
Polygon
Creates 2-D polygons.
Ray
Creates semi-infInite lines that are often used as construction or reference lines.
Rectang
Creates a rectangular closed Polyline.
Region
Creates a solid from existing closed objects. This is one way to fuse objects together,
and is useful when calculating areas.
Sketch
Give you the ability to draw freehand by creating contiguous, short line segments with
an imaginary pen. These short line segments can be either Lines or Plines.
Solid
Draws solid fIlled polygons.
Spline
Creates a smooth curved object. This is often used to create irregularly shaped curves
such as Civil engineering contour lines.
Trace
Creates line segments that can be assigned a width.
Xline
Creates lines whose endpoints extend into infInity that are often used as construction or
reference lines.
3-D OBJECTS
Wire-Frame Models
Wire-frame models are the least dynamic of the 3-D objects. They are used to describe
simple 3-D construction, since all pointS, lines, and curves that defIne edges and surfaces
are visible. You can use all the 2-D objects to create wire-frame models. Although they
are planar, they can reside anywhere in space. You can assign heights to these objects,
giving the illusion of surfaces and solids. However, they contain no mass, and you may
get unexpected results when using some of the display and editing com-mands. Two
objects that can contain 3-D points anywhere in space are 3-D Poly and Spline. Since they
are also used for 2-D modeling, we have defined them with the 2-D objects. Simple
building layouts, single line piping, and conduit drawings are sometimes drawn using
wire-frame techniques.
Surface or Mesh Models
Surface or mesh modeling defines edges and surfaces. The surfaces, closed planes
bounded by three or more line segments, are created with polygonal meshes. Since these
meshes are planar they can only approximate curved surfaces. If physical information
(i.e., volume, weight, etc.) about the objects is required, you will need to use the
commands that create solids.
Special routines are provided to help with creating unusual mesh patterns. This is
particularly useful when creating topographical drawings. Architectural drawings showing
interior layouts also work well with surface models. Using the Hide, Shade, and Render
commands further enhances the drawings display.
3D
Activates nine 3-D Polygon mesh routines that create the following objects: Box, cone,
Dish, Dome, Mesh, Pyramid, Sphere, Torus, and Wedge.
3Dface
Create surfaces or opaque objects defined by either three or four corner points. Most
of the 3-D wire-frame objects are made up of 3-D Faces. This command is not used by
itself as much as it's used to create other surfaces.
3Dmesh
Creates 3-D Polygon meshes. Since the 3Dmesh command is tedious, requmng
inputting individual vertex points, we recommend using the automated mesh
commands: 3D, Edgesurf, Revsurf, Rulesurf, and Tabsurf.
Box (Ai_box)
Creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Box.
Cone (ACcone)
Creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Cone.
Dish (Ai_dish)
Creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Dish.
Dome (ACdome)
Creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Dome.
Edgesurf
Generates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) by approximating a Coons surface patch from
four adjoining objects.
Mesh (ACmesh)
Creates 3-D Polygon meshes.
Prace
Creates arbitrary polyface meshes. The mesh, composed of vertices and faces, is
mainly used for AutoLISP and ADS applications.
Pyramid (ACpyramid)
Creates three and four sided 3-D Polygon mesh Pyramids.
Revsurf
Generates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) by revolving a selected profile or path curve
around an axis.
Rulesurf
Generates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) depicting the ruled surface between two
objects.
Sphere (ACsphere)
Creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Sphere.
Tabsurf
Generates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) by extruding an object (path curve) through
space along a direction vector.
Torus (AUorus)
Creates a 3-D Toroidal polygon mesh (surface).
Wedge (ACwedge)
Creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Wedge.
Solid Models
Solid objects are probably the easiest 3-D objects to create and manipulate. You are not
only provided with commands to create the objects, but you are also given routines to
combine solids to create even more complex solid shapes. Additionally, you can obtain
physical data about each solid, such as volume, weight, and center of gravity, and easily
obtain cross-sectional views. Data pertaining to solids can be exported to other types of
computer programs for Finite Element Analysis (PEA) and Numerical Control (NC)
Milling.
Box
Creates a 3-D Solid box.
Cone
Creates a 3-D Solid cone containing a circular or elliptical base.
Cylinder
Creates a 3-D Solid cylinder.
Extrude
Generates Solids by extruding 2-D objects.
Interfere
Creates composite Solids from two or more Solids that overlap or interfere.
Intersect
Creates composite Solids or Regions from two or more Solids or Regions that overlap
or intersect.
Revolve
Generates Rolids by revolving a 2-D object about an axis.
Sphere
Creates a 3-D Solid sphere.
Torus
Creates a 3-D Solid torus.
Wedge
Creates a 3-D Solid wedge.
Drawing Repetition
Array /3Darray
Copies objects in rectangular or polar (circular) patterns. Use this command for objects
you want to copy that are equidistant apart. For example, Polar Arrays are handy for
creating flange bolt holes, and Rectangular Arrays are convenient for laying out
structural steel columns and parking lot spaces.
Block (symbol)
Defmes and fuses one or more objects into a single object. You can globally update all
Blocks in a drawing containing the same name by creating another Block and assigning
it the same name. Once Blocks are created they are placed in the drawing using the
Ddinsert or Insert command.
Copy
Creates a replica of one or more objects.
grip editing
Grips let you edit and (at the same time) copy objects. The edit options include
Stretch, Scale, Move, Mirror, and Rotate.
Insert or Ddinsert
Merges Blocks or other drawing files into the current drawing.
Minsert
Lets you insert multiple copies of a Block in a rectangular pattern.
Mirror I Mirror3d
Reflects a copy of selected objects.
Offset
Copies 2-D objects parallel to itself.
Wblock (symbol)
Writes a drawing, part of a drawing or a Block to a disk file as a new drawing.
Making Changes
Almost everything can be modified in an AutoCAD drawing. You may find that at times
it's easier, faster, or more convenient to fix something after the fact. For example, you
may find it distracting to keep changing the current layer when working on a design. In
that case, you can leave the current layer alone and later change the objects to their
intended layer.
See Hatch for special hatch editing commands; Dimensioning for special dimension
editing commands; and Annotation for special Text, Mtext, and Attribute editing
commands.
Align
Moves and rotates objects in 2-D and 3-D space.
Break
Erases portions of objects or separates objects at a designated point.
Chamfer
Creates a beveled edge from non-parallel Lines, Polylines, Rays, and selected solid
shapes.
Change I Chprop I Ddchprop I Ddmodify
Modifies objects and their properties.
Divide
Marks an object at equal-length segments.
Erase
Deletes objects from the drawing.
Explode I Xplode
Converts complex objects into their individual components.
Extend
Lengthens an object to a boundary or implied boundary.
Fillet
Creates an arc with a predefmed radius between any two Arcs, Circles, Lines,
Polylines, Rays, Splines, and selected solid shapes.
grip editing
Grips let you edit and (at the same time) copy objects. The edit options include
Stretch, Scale, Move, Mirror, and Rotate.
Lengthen
Changes the length of objects.
Measure
Marks an object at equal segment lengths.
Mledit
Edits Mlines (multiple parallel lines).
Move
Relocates objects anywhere in 3-D space.
Oops
Restores the last object, or group of objects, that was deleted by the most recent Erase,
Block, or Wblock command.
Pedit
Edits 2-D and 3-D Polylines and 3-D Polygon meshes.
Redo
Reverses the effects of the last Undo or U command.
Rotate I Rotate3d
Moves objects around a pivot or base point.
Scale
Changes the size of objects.
Section
Creates a Region from the cross section of a 3-D Solid at a designated plane.
Slice
Cuts a 3-D Solid with a cutting plane.
Splinedit
Edits Spline objects by modifying the control and fit data points.
Stretch
Lengthens or shortens objects.
Subtract
Creates a composite solid or Region by subtracting one set of solids from another set
of solids or one set of Regions from another set of Regions.
Trim
Clips portions of objects to the cutting edge or implied cutting edge of objects.
U (Undo 1)
Reverses the effects of the last command.
Undo
Lets you sequentially reverse previous commands individually, in groups, or to the
beginning of the current drawing session.
Union
Creates a composite solid or Region from two or more solids or Regions.
Hatching
Cross-hatching is often used to enhance sectional views and to show the type of material
the geometry represents. Architectural drawings often show glass, roofmg, and brick
materials; Mechanical drawings may show steel, iron, and bronze; and Structural detail
drawings frequently show earth, concrete, and steel.
Bhatch I Hatch
Hatch cross-hatches or pattern-fills an area enclosed by existing objects. Bhatch is
much more dynamic and flexible than Hatch. Bhatch objects can be easily modified
using the Hatchedit command.
Hatchedit
Modifies associative hatch (Bhatch) items by letting you change the pattern type, scale,
angle, and style.
Dimensioning
Creating, editing, and setting up dimensioning parameters (variables) can be
accomplished at the Command prompt or at the Dim prompt. You access the Dim prompt
by entering Dim at the Command prompt. The newer and more streamlined approach is to
work directly from the Command prompt.
Dimensioning commands automatically construct the appropriate dimension lines, arrow
heads, and extension (witness) lines, and they dimension text to drawings. Depending on
how you set up your drawing's dimensioning features, you can automatically update the
dimensions without having to recreate them.
Dimensioning commands are grouped into three major categories: construction, edit, and
style. These categories are supported by fifty-nine dimension variables, whose values you
can set to control dimension appearance. The following is a breakdown of the three
dimensioning command categories and dimension variables. Each list shows the
command name when activated at the Command prompt and its counterpart when
activated at the Dim prompt. When looking up individual commands, use the Command
prompt name.
Creating associative dimensions is the most important feature of dimensioning.
Associative dimensions can be dynamically updated individually or as part of a group.
Non-associative dimensions cannot be updated unless you edit each component of the
dimension, or re-dimension the object. We strongly suggest that you create associative
dimensions and dimension styles (Ddim). If necessary, convert only those that you feel
should be non-associative. Use the Explode command to convert associative dimensions
to non-associative. The variable to keep dimensions associative is named Dimaso.
CONSTRUCTION
Command prompt Dim prompt
*Leader *Leader
Dimaligned Aligned
Dimangular Angular
Dimbaseline Baseline
Dimcenter Center
Dimcontinue Continue
Dimdiameter Diameter
Dimlinear Horizontal
Rotated
Vertical
Dimordinate Ordinate
Dirnradius Radius
Tolerance (GD&T) (new command)
* Note: Leader and Dim: Leader work differently. See both commands individually for
more details.
EDIT
Dimstyle Update
Dimedit Hometext
Newtext
Oblique
Trotate
Dimtedit Tedit
STYLE
Ddim, Dimstyle Dimstyle
Restore
Save
Status
Variables
Dimoverride (Ddim, Dimstyle) Override
VARIABLES
Dimalt Dimasz Dimdec Dimlim Dimsho Dimtofl Dimtzin
Dimaltd Dimaunit Dimdle Dimpost Dimsoxd Dimtoh Dimunit
Dimaltf Dimblk Dimdli Dimmd Dimstyle Dimtol Dimupt
Dimalttd Dimblkl Dimexe Dimsah Dimtad Dimtolj Dimzin
Dimalttz Dimblk2 Dimexo Dimscale Dimtdec Dimtp
Dimaltu Dimcen Dimfit Dimsdl Dimtfac Dimtsz
Dimaltz Dimclrd Dimgap Dimsd2 Dimtih Dimtvp
Dimapost Dimclre Dimjust Dimsel Dimtix Dimtxsty
Dimaso Dimclrt Dimlfac Dimse2 Dimtm Dimtxt
Drawing Annotation
There are three different methods for creating text:
• Text and Dtext create lines of text where each line of text is a separate object.
• Mtext maintains one or more lines of text as one object.
• Attributes are similar to Text and Dtext, but the text height, justification, and font
are preset. They help maintain drafting standards and are often used in titleblocks.
Attribute information can be exported from the AutoCAD drawing and imported
into other database and spreadsheet programs.
Displaying Text
Attdisp or Ddattext
Controls the display of all inserted Attributes in the current drawing.
Fontalt
Defmes an alternative font when AutoCAD can't locate a font file.
Fontmap
Directs AutoCAD to an ASCII file containing substitute font information. This file is
used by AutoCAD when it can't locate fonts.
Qtext
Determines whether Text, Mtext, and Attributes are displayed as text or as boxes
representing the text.
Style
Defmes text formats.
Creating Text
Attdef or Ddattdef
Defines how Attribute text will be displayed, prompted for, and stored.
Dim: Leader
Creates Leader lines made up of the following: arrowhead, Lines, and Mtext. None of
the parts making up the leader (except the annotation) are associative or dynamic in
that they act as one object.
Dtext/Text
Creates one or more lines of Text on your drawing. Each line of Text is a separate
object.
Leader
Creates Leader lines made up of the following: arrowhead; straight or splined (curved)
Line segments; and Mtext, dimension information, or Tolerance dimensions. All of the
parts making up the Leader (except the annotation) are associative or dynamic in that
they act as one object.
Mtext
Creates multiple lines of text that are treated as one object. Mtext is similar to Text and
Dtext, but you can assign different properties (height, color, fonts) to individual
characters.
Spell Check
Dctcust
Sets the latest custom spelling file name including its location. The custom spelling file
is where you can enter the words you typically use in drawings, such as proper nouns
and industry-related terminology that is not always found in general-purpose
dictionaries.
Dctmain
Sets the latest main dictionary file name.
Spell
Checks the spelling in a drawing.
Editing Text
Attedit
Edit Attributes individually, or globally if they have the same block names, tag names,
or value.
Attredef
Modifies existing Attribute definitions (Attdef) contained in Blocks and updates any
existing Blocks.
Ddatte
Edit Attribute values with a dialog box.
Ddedit
Edits Text strings.
Ddmodify
Edits Text properties (height, style, etc.) and Text strings.
Mtexted
Assigns a text editor program to any command creating or editing Mtext objects.
Mtprop
Changes properties assigned to Mtext objects.
Drawing Information
Area
Calculates the Area of either an object (Circle, Polyline, or Region) or a series of
points that define an Area.
Help
Provides infonnation on commands and how they function, including cross-references
to the AutoCAD User's Guide.
List I Dblist
List provides detailed infonnation on selected objects within a drawing. Dblist (Data
Base List) provides information on all objects within a drawing.
Status
Displays a text screen of infonnation on the current drawing's Limits, extents, display,
drawing aid settings (Ddrmodes), and some system information.
Drawing Display
Ddview or View
Saves the current viewport or a user-definable window, and gives it a name for future
retrieval.
Ddvpoint or Vpoint
Specify the direction and angle for viewing a drawing by selecting a 3-D viewpoint.
Dispsilh
Controls the display of silhouette curves for 3-D Solid objects.
Dsviewer
Activates the Aerial View window. The Aerial View window provides a way to
quickly maneuver around your drawing using the Zoom and Pan commands. This
viewing tool can be accessed only if your hardware is configured to use the Whip
driver or the Windows accelerated display driver with the Display List option.
Dview
A tool for viewing 3-D models. Dview is similar to the Ddvpoint and Vpoint
commands. However, in Dview you can dynamically drag and rotate all or part of a 3-
D model. You can display a perspective view of the model and toggle back and forth
between parallel and perspective views. The Dview command is similar to the concept
of using a camera to view objects.
Fill
Controls whether Mline, Polyline, Solid, and Trace are displayed and plotted as filled,
or whether just the outline is displayed and plotted.
Hide
Performs a temporary hidden line removal on all objects in the current viewport.
Isolines
Determines the number of lines displayed on solids.
Isoplane
Defines which of the three isometric planes (top, left, right) you want to work in when
Isometric mode is enabled.
Layer or Ddlmodes
Separate the geometry by placing objects on different Layers. These Layers can be
visible or invisible, and they can determine the Color and Line type of objects.
Pan
Lets you scroll around your drawing without altering the current Zoom ratio.
Paper Space and Model Space
Paper space (Pspace) switches from drawing in Model space (Mspace) to Paper space.
Pspace is used to annotate, compose, and plot 2-D or 3-D drawings. Mspace is used to
create and dimension your drawing or model.
Plan
Displays the plan view of the current UCS (User Coordinate System), defined UCS, or
the WCS (World Coordinate System).
Redrawall/ Redraw
Cleans up the current viewport. Redrawall cleans up all the viewports. Blips are
removed, and any objects or parts of objects that disappeared or seemed erased due to
editing are redrawn.
Regenall/ Regen
Regen causes the current viewport to be regenerated. Regenall regenerates all
viewports. When a drawing is regenerated, all the data and geometry associated with
each object are recalculated. Changes made to some existing objects require a
regeneration before they are made visible.
Regenauto
Suppress some (not all) regenerations.
SpJframe
Detennines the display of Spline Fit Polyline frames and edges of 3-D Faces.
Splinesegs
Detennines the number of line segments generated for each Spline.
Splinetype
Detennines the type of Spline curve to generate with the Pedit Spline command.
Viewports / Mview
Enables you to look at the drawing from various viewing angles and from various
Zoom ratios. Mview is used when Paper space is enabled.
Visretain
Detennines whether an Xrefs Layer settings are based on its original values or those
of the current drawing.
Vplayer
Controls Layer visibility per viewport.
Zoom
Magnifies (Zooms in) or shrinks (Zooms out) the display in the current viewport.
Rendering and Shading

Matlib
Imports rendering materials from a library file to a drawing and exports rendering
materials from the drawing to a library file.
Psquality (Postscript Quality)
Controls the rendering quality of imported PostScript images.
Render
Creates a realistic shaded image of objects. The drawing can be rendered based on
predefined scenes, selected objects, or the current display. Light sources and different
types of material can be assigned to the drawing or selected objects. Most of the
default values for the Render command are based on the render preference (Rpret)
settings.
Renderunload
Unloads the rendering software from your computer's memory.
Replay
Displays GIF, TGA, and TIFF images.
Rmat
Lets you create, modify, preview, import, export, and delete finishing materials. It also
lets you assign these finishes to individual objects and to layers.
Rpref
Sets rendering preferences.
Saveimg
Saves images in TGA, TIFF, and GIF formats.
Scene
Provides a method to combine named views with 0 to 500 light sources.
Shade
Produces a shaded rendering of the current viewport.
Shadedge
Specifies how faces and edges are displayed when Shaded.
Shadedif
Specifies how the model is illuminated when Shaded.
Showmat
Lists the material and the attachment method assigned to selected objects.
Printing Your Drawing

Plot
The method used to get an output, or hard copy, of your drawing file. Plot directs your
drawing to a plotter (including dot matrix, inkjet, and laser printers) or to a plot file.
Plotter
Changes the plotter default based on its assigned number.
Managing Your Drawings: File Maintenance

Catalog
Activates the DOS (disk operating system) command, listing file names with the wide
Uw) option.
Contig
Lists the current AutoCAD configuration and lets you make changes to your system's
configuration.
Del
Del is an alias for the OS (operating system) command Del or Delete.
Dir
Activates the DOS (disk operating system) command Dir that lists file names.
End
Saves your drawing, exits AutoCAD, and returns you to Windows.
Files
Provides an alternative to the Windows FileManager and DOS (Disk Operating
System) commands for managing files.
Isavebak
Determines whether back-up (.bak) files are created when drawings are saved.
Isavepercent
Defmes the amount of wasted space (0 - 100) allowed in a drawing.
LogfileotT I Logfileon
Logfileon opens and writes the contents of the text window to a file; Logfileoff closes
the log file.
Makepreview
Creates a bitmap file (.hmp) of the current drawing display.
New
Lets you begin a new drawing.
Open
Lets you edit an existing drawing.
Qsave
Saves your drawing file.
Quit
Exits AutoCAD and returns you to Windows.
Rasterpreview
Detennines whether preview drawing images are saved with the file, and the type of
images that it creates.
Save and Saveas
Lets you your update your drawing file by using the Save Drawing As dialog box.
Managing Your Drawing's Environment

Menu
Activates a dialog box and lets you load and display a menu file in the current drawing.
This file defmes the pull-down and cursor menus, screen menus, image tile menus,
pointing-device button menus, digitizing-tablet menus, toolbars, keyboard accelerators,
help strings, and tool tips and menu groups.
Menuctl
Detennines whether the screen menu swaps to the same command entered from the
keyboard or remains unchanged.
Menuload and Menuunload
Menuunload unloads partial menu files, and Menuload loads partial menu files to an
existing base menu file.
Preferences
Lets you customize some of the AutoCAD settings and features.
Purge
Deletes or eliminates unused Blocks, Dimension Styles, Layers, Linetypes, Multiple
Line Styles, Shapes, and Text Styles.
Recover
Activates the Recover Drawing File dialog box and attempts to restore damaged
drawings.
Reinit
Re-initializes the I/O ports, plotter, digitizer, display, and program parameters
(acad.pgp) file.
Setvar
Sets and maintains variables as integers, reals, points, or text strings.
Tbcontig
Creates and customizes toolbars.
Toolbar
Displays, hides, and positions toolbars.
Tooltips
Controls the visibility of tool tips.
Sharing Information
Ameconvert
Converts AME solids or regions created from AME Release 2 or 2.1 to the Release 13
version of solid objects.
Appload
Gives you the ability to automate the loading and unloading of ADS, ARX, and
AutoLISP programs.
Attext or Ddattext
Extracts Attribute data from your drawing.
Bmpout
Creates a bitmapped file.
Copyclip
Copies objects to the Windows Clipboard.
Copyhist
Copies text from the current drawing's command line history window to the Clipboard.
Copylink
Copies the current drawing display to the Window's Clipboard.
Cutclip
Copies objects to the Windows Clipboard and erases them from the drawing.
Dxbin
Imports binary drawing exchange files (.dxb).
Export
Saves drawings or parts of drawings to other file formats.
Import
Brings different file formats into AutoCAD.
Insert I Ddinsert
Merges Blocks or other drawing files into the current drawing.
Insertobj
Uses the Windows OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) technology to allow you to
place other types of files inside your AutoCAD drawings.
Olelinks
Updates, modifies, and removes existing OLE links.
Pasteclip
Imports the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current drawing file.
Pastespec
Imports the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current drawing.
Saveasr12
Saves your drawing to the Release 12 version of AutoCAD.
Stlout
Creates a file in the Stereo-Lithography Apparatus (.st!) fonnat.
Wmfopts
Controls the way objects are defined when Importing WMF files.
Xbind
Makes selected external reference (Xret) file information a pennanent part of the
current drawing file.
Xref
Manages external drawing files and attaches them to your current drawing.
28 3D
3D
3D
3D activates nine 3-D Polygon mesh routines that create the following objects: box, cone,
dish, dome, mesh, pyramid, sphere, torus, and wedge. Each of these objects has the
appearance of being solid, but is actually made up of meshes or surfaces. You can bring
up the individual routines at the command prompt by adding the prefix Ai_.
For more information on these routines see the following :
Ai_dome Ai_shpere
Ai_mesh AUorus
Ai_pyramid Ai_wedge
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to look at these objects at
different angles and elevations.
~ Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands on these objects to make them appear
solid.
3DARRAY
3Darray copies objects in 3-D rectangular or polar (circular) patterns.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY...

Modify toolbar ~
3D Rectangular I!i!I 3D Polar
Screen menu CONSTRCT .. 3Darray:
Keyboard 3DARRAY
PROMPTS:
Rectangular or Polar array (Rip):
3DFACE 29
OPTIONS:
Rectangular • Copies objects in rows (X axis), columns (Y axis), and levels (Z
axis). Designate the number of rows, columns, and levels and the
distance between rows, columns, and levels. There must always
be at least two rows, two columns, or two levels. Entering a
negative distance causes the array to be located along the
negative X, Y, and Z axes.
Polar • Copies objects about an axis of rotation. You must specify the
number of items, angle to fill, center point, and axis of rotation.
The objects in the array may be optionally rotated.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Array, Copy, grips
EXAMPLE:
Rectangular
3DFACE
3Dface creates surfaces or opaque objects defined by either three or four corner points. If
you specify varying Z coordinates for the corner points, you end up with nonplanar faces .
You can specify the visibility of each edge during the 3-D Face construction.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY•.•

Surfaces toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SURFACES" 3Dface:

Keyboard 3DFACE
30 3DFACE
PROMPTS:
First point:
Second point:
Third point:
Fourth point:
OPTIONS:
I (invisibl) • Enter an I before specifying the first point of an invisible edge and
before any coordinate input, Filters, or Osnaps.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This command is not used by itself so much as it is used by other AutoCAD
routines to create surfaces.
~ Locating all the points in the same plane is equivalent to creating a Region object.
~ You can change the display of an edge using Ddmodify or the Edge command.
You can view all edges by setting the system variable Splframe to 1.
~ The Hide command displays 3-D Faces as opaque.
~ All meshes are made up of one or more 3-D Faces.
~ When extruding 3-D Faces, the invisible edges are modified and become visible.
RELATED VARIABLES: Splframe

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dmesh, Ddmodify, Edge, grips
EXAMPLE:
Command: 3DFACE 2
First point: pick point 1
Second point: pick point 2
Third point: I (next edge,
invisible), Pick Point 3 4 .3
Fourth point: pick point 4
Third point: pick point 5
Fourth point: Pick point 6 5 '---------" 6
Splfrome 0 Splfrorne 1
Third point: <Enter>
3DMESH
3Dmesh creates 3-D Polygon meshes. These meshes are actually 3-D Faces fused together
to act as one object. You specify the mesh size and location (X,Y,Z) in terms of the
number of vertices in two directions, M and N.
3DMESH 31
Since the 3-D Mesh command is tedious, requiring inputting individual vertex points, we
recommend using the automated mesh commands: 3D, Edgesurf, Revsurf, Rulesurf, and
Tabsurf.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY ...

Surfaces toolbar
Screen menu DRAW2'" SURFACES'" 3Dmesh:

Keyboard 3DMESH
PROMPTS:
Mesh M size:
Mesh N Slze:
Ver tex (0, 0):
OPTIONS:
Mesh M size • Specifies the number of vertices (2 - 256) on the M direction.
Mesh N size • Specifies the number of vertices (2 - 256) on the N direction.
The N direction is considered the direction in which you begin
to define the mesh.
Vertex (#, #) • Prompts you to enter each M,N vertex.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can edit 3-D Meshes using the Pedit command.
~ The 3-D Mesh's Grip definition points are the vertices. Picking any of the Grip
points lets you change the size and location.
~ Exploding a 3-D Mesh results in individual 3-D Faces.
RELATED VARIABLES: Surftype

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dface, Ai_Mesh, Ddmodify, Edgesurf, Explode,
grips, Pedit, Pface, Revsurf, Rulesurf, Tabsurf
32 3DMESH
EXAMPLE:
Command : 3DMESH
Mesh M size : 3
Mesh N size : 3
Vertex ( 0, 0 ) : 0,0,0
Vertex (0, 1) : 0,1, .5
Vertex (0, 2) : 0,2,0
Vertex (1, 0) : 1,0, .5 13,0
Vertex (1 , 1) : 1,1,1
Vertex (1, 2) : 1,2, .5
Vertex (2, 0) : 2,0,0
Vertex (2, 1) : 2,1,.5 1.0.0
Vertex (2, 2 ) : 2,2,0
3DPOLY (3-D POLYline)

The 3Dpoly command creates a 3-D Polyline where each vertex can be located anywhere
in 3-D space. 3-D Polylines cannot have arc segments, width, or tapers.

Surfaces toolbar ~
Screen menu DRAW2 ~ SURFACES ~ 3Dpoly:

Keyboard 3DPOLY
PROMPTS:
From point:
Close / Undo /< Endpoint of line >:
OPTIONS:
Close • Entering C (close) at the "To point" prompt closes the polyline
segments created during the command by connecting the start point to
the end point.
Undo • Entering U (Undo) at the "To point" prompt undoes the last polyline
segment and returns you to the previous point.
3DSOUT 33
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You end the command by canceling «Esc» or by pressing <Enter>.
~ The Pedit options available for 3-D Polylines are: Close, Edit vertex, Spline
Curve, Decurve, and Undo.
~ You can convert 3-D Polylines into Lines with Explode.
:!: In order to convert a 3-D Polyline into a Spline you must first convert it into a
polyline spline using the Pedit command. Once you convert a 3-D Polyline into a
Spline you cannot convert it back into a 3-D Polyline.
:!: 3-D Poly only supports Continuous Linetypes.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Pedit, Spline
3DSIN see IMPORT
3DSOUT see EXPORT

34 ABOUT
'ABOUT
About displays a dialog box containing the following information: AutoCAD copyright,
Release number, Serial number, Licensed to, and Obtained from. This information is
determined during the initial AutoCAD installation procedure and is modified when
running incremental patch updates. Once the software is installed you cannot change the
information.

Pull-down Help - About AutoCAD ...
Screen menu Help - About
Keyboard ABOUT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The message appearing inside the dialog box is read directly from an ASCII file
named acad.msg. This file is located with the AutoCAD program files and can be
modified with your own message using a text editor or word processor. This file
can be deleted.
RELATED VARIABLES: Acadver, Platform
,ACADPREFIX
Acadprefix displays the AutoCAD support directory path. This path is set with the
Environment option of the Preferences dialog box. Setting the path enables AutoCAD to
locate support files such as font definitions and Lisp routines. If the path is not set
correctly you may get the following error messages: Error loading dialog control file.
"BASE.del": Can't open file.

Keyboard ACADPREFIX
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ It is recommended that you set the directory path to locate any customized support
and font files.
AFLAGS 35
Type Initial default Subsequent default Value

System Variable System default, Read-only System default String
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Preferences
'ACADVER (ACAD VERsion)

Acadver displays the AutoCAD release or version number.

Keyboard ACADVER or ABOUT
System Variable System default, Read-only System default String
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: About
ACISIN see IMPORT
ACISOUT see EXPORT
'AFLAGS (Attribute FLAGs)

Aflags retains the setting of Invisible, Constant, Verify, and Preset for each attribute
definition (Attdef). These values are typically set during the Attdef or Ddattdef command.

Keyboard AFLAGS
36 AFLAGS
OPTIONS:
Aflags is bit-coded, and its value is the sum of the following:
o • No attribute mode chosen.
1 • Invisible
2 • Constant
4 • Verify
8 • Preset
System Variable o Initial default Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Attdisp
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Ddattdef
ACBOX
Ai_box creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Box.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY•••

Surfaces toolbar •
Screen menu DRAW 2 .. SURFACES" Box:
Keyboard ACBOX
PROMPTS:
Corner of box:
Length:
Cube/<Width>:
Height:
Rotation angle about Z axis:
OPTIONS:
Length • Specifies the length in the X axis.
Width • Specifies the width in the Yaxis.
Height • Specifies the height in the Z axis.
Cube • Determines the length, width, and height.
37
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Box at different
angles and elevations.
~ Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to enhance the Box's display.
~ Use the Rectang command to create a 2-D box, and the Box command to create a
solid box. Extruding a Polyline creates a solid box with the option to include a
taper.
~ Exploding a Box converts the meshes into 3-D Faces.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dmesh, Box, Rectang
EXAMPLE:
[CJ
I, L(>ngth ,I
Ace ONE
Ai30ne creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Cone.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY••.

Surfaces tool bar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SURFACES - Cone:

Keyboard ACCONE
38
PROMPTS:
Base center point:
Diameter/<radius> of base:
Diameter/<radius> of top <0>:
Height:
Number of segments <16>:
OPTIONS:
Base center point • Defmes the center of the Cone's base.
Radius of base • Specifies the radius of the Cone's base.
Diameter of base • Specifies the diameter of the Cone's base.
Top
o • Defmes the top of the Cone.
radius • Defmes the radius of the top of the Cone. A value greater
than zero defmes a truncated cone.
diameter • Defines the diameter of the top of the Cone. A value
greater than zero defines a truncated cone.
Height • Specifies the Cone's height.
Number of segments • Determines the number line segments generated for each
Spline.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Cone command to create a solid cone. Extruding a Circle and including a
taper angle creates a solid cone shape.
~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Cone at different
~ Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to make the Cone appear solid.
~ Exploding a Cone converts it into 3-D Faces.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D 3Dmesh, Cone
39
EXAMPLE:
top radius
t
to~
~
~
'd
~
base radius base radius
AI DISH
Ai_dish creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Dish.

Surfaces toolbar
Screen menu DRA W 2 - SURFACES - Dish:

Keyboard ACDISH
PROMPTS:
Center of dish:
Diamete r /< r adius>:
Number of longi t udinal segme n ts <16 > :
Number of latitudina l segments <8>:
OPTIONS:
Center of dish • Defines the center of the Dish.
Radius • Specifies the Dish's radius.
Diameter • Specifies the Dish's diameter.
Number of longitudinal segments • Determines the number of line segments

generated in the longitudinal direction.
Number of latitudinal segments • Determines the number of line segments
generated in the latitudinal direction.
40
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Dish at different
t> Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to make the Dish appear solid.
~ Exploding a Dish converts it into 3-D Faces.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D,3Dmesh
EXAMPLE:
latitudinal
radius
Ai_dome creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Dome.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY •••

Surfacestoolbar ~
Screen menu DRAW 2 .. SURFACES" Dome

Keyboard ACDOME
PROMPTS:
Center of dome:
Diameter/<radius>:
Number of longitudinal segments <16>:
Number of latitudinal segments <8>:
41
OPTIONS:
Center of dome • Defines the center of the Dome.
Radius • Specifies the Dome's radius.
Diameter • Specifies the Dome's diameter.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Dome at different
~ Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to make the Dome appear solid.
l Exploding a Dome converts it into 3-D Faces.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dmesh
EXAMPLE:
latitudinal
radius
ACMESH
Ai_mesh creates 3-D Polygon meshes. These meshes are actually 3-D Faces fused
together to act as one object. You specify the mesh size in terms of the number of vertices
in two directions, M and N. The size for the M and N mesh must be between 2 and 256.
42

Miscellaneous toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 -. SURFACES -. Mesh

Keyboard ACMESH
PROMPTS:
First corner:
Second corner:
Third corner:
Fourth corner:
Mesh M size:
Mesh N size:
OPTIONS:
Mesh M size • Specifies the number of vertices on the M direction.
Mesh N size • Specifies the number of vertices on the N direction. The N
direction is considered the direction in which you begin to
define the mesh.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the mesh at different
~ Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to make the mesh appear solid.
~ Use Grips to move the individual vertices in the X, Y, and Z directions.
~ Exploding a mesh converts it into 3-D Faces.
EXAMPLE:
CD @ @ 0)
tmffiE
CD f.A mesh
N mesh
= 3 Q)
= <)
~
Q) loA mesh
N mesh = 9
= 3 <V
43
AI PYRAMID
Ai_pyramid creates tbree- and four-sided 3-D Polygon mesh pyramids. All the sides can
meet in a single point at the top, or you can have a tbree- or four-pointed top.

Surfaces toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SURFACES - Pyramid:

Keyboard ACPYRAMID:
PROMPTS:
First base point:
Second base point:
Third base point:
Tetrahedron / <Fourth base point):
Ridge / Top / <Apex point) :
OPTIONS:
Tetrahedron • Creates a three-sided Pyramid.
Apex point • Defines the top point of the Pyramid.
Ridge • Creates a ridge line at the top of a Pyramid.
Top • Defines the top of a Pyramid.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Pyramid at different
~ Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to make the Pyramid appear solid.
! Exploding a pyramid converts it into 3-D Faces.

44
EXAMPLE:
top point
@~~
<D bose points<9
AI SPHERE
Ai_sphere creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Sphere.

Surfaces toolbar 0
Screen menu DRAW 2 ... SURFACES'" Sphere

Keyboard ACSPHERE
PROMPTS:
Center of sphere:
Diameter/<radius>:
Number of longitudinal segments <16>:
Number of latitudinal segments <16>:
OPTIONS:
Center of sphere • Defines the center of the Sphere.
Radius • Specifies the radius.
Diameter • Specifies the diameter.
45
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Sphere at different
to Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to make the Sphere appear solid.
! Exploding a Sphere converts it into 3-D Faces.
EXAMPLE:
latitudinal
radius •
ACTORUS
Ai_torus creates a 3-D toroidal polygon mesh (surface).

Surfaces tool bar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SURFACES - Torus:

Keyboard ACTORUS
PROMPTS:
Center of toru s:
Diame t er /< radius> of torus:
Diameter/<radius> of tube:
Segments around tube circumference <16>:
Segments around torus circumference <1 6> :
46
OPTIONS:
Center of torus • Defines the center of the Torus.
Radius of torus • Specifies the radius of the Torus.
Diameter of torus • Specifies the diameter of the Torus.
radius (torus) • Specifies the radius of the tube.
diameter (torus) • Specifies the diameter of the tube.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Torus at different
<t> Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to make the Torus appear solid.
~ Exploding a Torus converts it into 3-D Faces.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dmesh, Torus
EXAMPLE:
tube radius
orus radius
AI WEDGE
Ai_wedge creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Wedge.

Surfaces toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SURFACES - Wedge:

Keyboard ACWEDGE
ALIGN 47
PROMPTS:
Corner of wedge:
Length:
Wid t h:
Height:
Rotation angl e about Z a xis:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Wedge at different
t> Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to make the Wedge appear solid.
~ Exploding a Wedge converts it into 3-D Faces.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dmesh, Wedge
EXAMPLE:
IC~
I. .1 ~ifLeogth
ALIGN
Align lets you move and rotate objects in 2-D and 3-D space. You can specify up to three
source and three destination points. Temporary lines are drawn matching the source and
destination points.

Modify tool bar <$)
Screen menu MODIFY -. Align:

Keyboard ALIGN
48 ALIGN
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
1st source point:
1st destination point:
2nd source point:
2nd destination point:
3rd source point:
3rd destination point:
OPTIONS:
2d transformation • Rotation is done in the XY plane of the current ues.
3d transformation • Rotation is done in the plane defmed by the two destination
points and the second source point translated along the
vector from the first source point to the first destination
point.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: grips, Move, Rotate, Rotate3d
EXAMPLE:
~2"d "",co Po;"t
," '""'co po;O,] .

.. •. 2nd destination paint: ~
1" d,~;"o';O" pd"t ~ ~
BEFORE AFTER
AMECONVERT (Advanced Modeling Extension CONVERT)

Ameconvert converts AME solids or regions created from AME Release 2 or 2.1 to the
Release 13 version of solid objects.
ANGOIR 49

Solids toolbar .nI,"
Screen menu DRAW 2 .. SOLIDS" AMEconv:
Keyboard AMECONVERT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

! Since the new solids modeler is much more exact than its earlier version, named
AME, you may have to modify or recreate the converted geometry.
I ANGBASE (ANGle BASE)

Angbase sets the direction for angle O. This value is typically set with the Units or
Ddunits command.

Keyboard ANGBASE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> AutoCAD's default settings assume that angle 0 is at 3 o'clock, and angles are
measured in a counterclockwise direction.
t> You may get unexpected results if you set both the Aunits (systems of angle
measure) to surveyor's units and you change the Angbase (direction for angle E).
Try changing only one of the settings and see whether you get the desired results.
System Variable o (East, 3 o'clock) Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Angdir, Aunits, Auprec, Lunits, Luprec
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddunits, Units
I ANGDIR (ANGle DIRection)

Angdir detennines whether positive and negative angles are referenced clockwise or
counterclockwise. This value is typically set with the Units or Ddunits command.
50 ANGDIR

Keyboard ANGDIR
OPTIONS:
o • Angles are positive in a counterclockwise direction.
1 • Angles are positive in a clockwise direction.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Regardless of the units settings you can always default the angle to decimal
degrees, 0 at 3 o'clock, and positive angles referenced counterclockwise by using
two left angle brackets (<<) before a numeric angle. For example, inputting the
length of a line at @3«90 forces the line upward regardless of the units settings.
System Variable 0 Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Angbase, Aunits, Auprec, Lunits, Luprec
'APERTURE
Aperture controls the size of the target box located at the intersection of the cross hairs
during object snap (Osnap) selection. The size of the Aperture box may be changed by
specifying its height in pixels (1-50). A pixel is the smallest dot visible on the screen. You
can set this value with the Ddosnap command. The system variable (Setvar) that
maintains this setting is also named Aperture.

Keyboard APERTURE
PROMPTS:
Object snap target height (1-50 pixels) <10>:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Set the default to four or six pixels for the best visibility.
t> This box is sometimes confused with the Pickbox, used during the selection set
process. For less confusion set the Aperture and Pickbox to different sizes.
APPLOAD 51
l Don't make the Aperture setting so large or so small that it is difficult to pick
objects.
RELATED VARIABLES: Aperture, Osmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddosnap, Osnap, Setvar
I APPLOAD (APPlication LOAD)

Appload gives you the ability to automate the loading and unloading of ADS, ARX, and
AutoLISP programs.

Pull-down Tools - Applications ...
Screen menu TOOLS - Appload:
Keyboard APPLOAD
OPTIONS:
I
F1Iu to l.ogd _ _
Load AutoLiSP. ADS. and ARX Ales
-- - -- J
III filo ._ 1:
III fi';mnvo 1
Ii' S_List
I: Load I IflInlClld ci 1.1 fIciIl Ii t1elp _ I
Files to Load • Contains the list of programs or files selected from the File ...
button. This list is stored in a file named appload.dfs.
File... • Adds programs to the Files to Load list.
Remove • Deletes programs from the Files to Load list.
52 APPLOAD
Save List • If the box contains an X the file appload.dfs is updated when
selecting Load, Unload, or Exit. If the box is blank none of the
changes to the Files to Load list are saved.
Load • Loads the selected programs. The button is disabled if the
programs are already loaded.
Unload • Unloads ADS and ARX programs. This button is disabled if the
programs are already unloaded. You cannot unload AutoLISP
programs.
Exit • Returns to the Command prompt.
Help ... • General help program.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If you try to activate Appload and you receive any error messages it may be
because AutoCAD cannot locate the files named appload.lsp, appload.dcl, and
appload.dfs. These files are located in the AutoCAD support directory. Check the
Environment option of the Preferences command and verify that the Support
setting references the AutoCAD support directory.
ARC
Draws a segment of a circle in one of several ways.

Draw tool bar r
Screen menu DRAW 1 -. Arc:
Keyboard ARC or A
PROMPTS:
Center/<Start point):
Center/End/<Second point):
End point:
ARC 53
OPTIONS:
There are eight options to the Arc command. Combining these options with the ability to
continue an Arc tangent to the last Arc or Line provides ten ways to construct an Arc.
Prompts display the options available based on the order of the Arc's construction.
r Start, Second point, End • Three-pointed Arc.
r. Start, Center, End • Start point, center, and end point
Start, Center, Length •

!!J Start point, center, and length of chord
lEI Start, End, Direction • Start point, end point, and starting direction
~
Center, Start, End • Center, start point, and endpoint
l0 Start, End, Angle • Start point, end point, and included angle
l6] Start, Center, Angle • Start point, center, and included angle
~ Start, End, Radius • Start point, end point, and radius
~ Center, Start, Angle • Center, start point, and included angle
~ Center, Start, Length • Center, start point, and length of chord
p Continue • Creates an Arc tangent to the last Line or Arc

drawn
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If Arcs look like Polygons, this may be because of a low Viewres setting. You can
verify that the objects are Arcs by Regenerating the display. Regardless of their
appearance on-screen, the plotted output of the Arcs will be smooth.
~ Arcs are also created with the Pline, Mline, Ellipse, and Fillet commands, or by
editing Circles with Break or Trim.
~ You can convert an Arc into a Polyline Arc with the Pedit command.
54 ARC
~ When Grips are enabled, the Arc's Grip definition points are the endpoints and
midpoint. Picking any of the Grips lets you change the size and center point
location.
~ Using Osnap you can locate the Arc's center, midpoint, and endpoints.
~ You can continue drawing Arcs and Lines from the last point of an Arc or Line by
immediately entering a <Return> at the first command prompt.
~ If you type the letter A to activate the Arc command and you receive the error
message "Unknown command... "it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the
file named acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modified the file.
Acad.pgp is located in the AutoCAD support directory.
~ You can change the size of Arcs using the Grips, Ddmodify, or Scale commands.
~ Arcs, like Circles, may only be constructed in the counterclockwise direction

(except those created by the three-point method).
RELATED VARIABLES: Lastangle, Lastpoint
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ellipse, Fillet, Mline, Pline
AREA
The Area command calculates the area of either an object (Circle, Polyline, or Region) or
a series of points that defme an area. In addition to the Area, the perimeter of a closed
object or the length of an open Polyline is displayed. If a Polyline is not actually closed,
Area calculates the value that would result if a straight line segment passed through its
two endpoints. A running total may be calculated by adding and subtracting Areas. The
system variable (Setvar) that maintains this setting is also named Area.

Object Properties
Screen menu ASSIST" INQUIRY" Area

Keyboard AREA
PROMPTS:
(First point>/Object/Add/Subtract:
Next point:
Next point:
AREA 55
OPTIONS:
First/Next point • Accepts points that define a closed Area.
Object • Detennines the Area of Circles, Poly lines, and Regions.
Add • Keeps a running total of the Area.
Subtract • Subtracts an Area from the running total.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> An Area composed of contiguous Arcs and Lines may be calculated by combining
the objects into a Polyline or Region using the Pedit-Join, Region, or Boundary
command. Once the objects are converted, use the Object option of the Area
command to quickly retrieve the Area's value.
~ If the Polyline is not closed, Area computes the Polyline's area as though a straight
line connected its starting and ending points.
~ 3-D points may be used, but points and objects must lie in a plane parallel to the
X,Yplane of the current UCS.
~ Before subtracting an Area value, it must first have been added.
t> Preset Osnap to Endpoint and Intersection when picking the boundary of an Area
made up of multiple objects.
t> When calculating an Area enter the word Area at the Command prompt; when
requesting the Area's last computed value you must first enter the command Setvar
and then ask for Area. This is because Area is both a command and a system
variable.
~ Regardless of whether you are beginning a new drawing or editing an existing
drawing, the Setvar retains the last computed Area. Once you end the AutoCAD
session and return to the operating system, the value of Area defaults back to O.
~ The Area of Polylines are calculated to their centerlines regardless of their width
settings.
RELATED VARIABLES: Area, Perimeter
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dblist, List, Massprop, Setvar
56 AREA
EXAMPLE:
(First point>/Object/Add/Subtract: A
(First point>/Object/Subtract: pick point 1
(ADD mode) Next point: pick point 2
(ADD mode) Next point: (Enter>
Area = 4.50 square in. (0.0313 square ft.),Perimeter 0'-9"
Total area = 4.50 square in. (0.0313 square ft.)
(First point>/Object/Subtract: S
(First point>/Object/Add: 0
(SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: pick the inside rectangle
Area = 0.50 square in. (0.0035 square ft.),Perimeter = 0'-3"
(SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: pick the circle
Area = 0.20 square in. (0.0014 square ft.), Circumference
0'-1 9/16"
(SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: (Enter>
(First point>/Object/Add: (Enter>
Outer box is constructed from lines
Inner rectangle is constructed from polylines
1 2
r~
~ [D
l ,L-----~
~1.00-l
4 11-._ _ _ _ 3.00 _ _ _ _--1.1 3
ARRAY
Array copies objects in rectangular or polar (circular) patterns.
ARRAY 57

Modify toolbar
Rectangular
-::. Polar
Screen menu CONSTRCT ... Array:

Keyboard ARRAY
PROMPTS:
Rectangular or Polar array (R i p) <R):
OPTIONS:
Rectangular • Designates the number of rows and columns and the distance
between rows and columns for a Rectangular Array. There must
always be at least two rows or two columns. Entering a negative
distance causes the array to be located in the negative direction
- down and to the left.
Polar • Specifies a center point and provides two of the following three
questions: the number of items; the number of degrees to fill; or
the angle between items. The objects in the array may optionally
be rotated.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) Show the row and column spacing for a Rectangular Array by picking a point at
the "Unit cell ... " prompt and dragging a rectangle to indicate spacing and
direction.
\) Create diagonal arrays by changing your UCS, Snap rotation, or the system
variable Snapang.
\) A Polar Array rotates about a center point in a counterclockwise direction if you
specify a positive angle, clockwise if your response is a negative angle.
£ The Array's default is the last option chosen, but only for the current drawing
session.
£ The maximum number of rows, columns, and objects for polar arrays is 32,767.
RELATED VARIABLES: Snapang

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Darray, Copy, grips, Minsert
58 ARRAY
EXAMPLE:
Select objects: Select lines at 1
Rectangular or Polar array (Rip) <R>: P
Center point of array: pick point 2
Number of items: 20
Angle to fill (+=ccw, - =cw) <360>: <Enter>
Rotate objects as they are copied? <Y> <Enter>
POLAR ARRAY
BefDre Afler
ATTDEF (ATTribute DEFinition)

Attdef defmes how Attribute text will be displayed, prompted for, and stored. Once you
define the Attribute(s), you save it with the Block command. Other objects can be saved
with the Attribute. The Attribute data are requested when the Block is Inserted into the
drawing. You can achieve the same results using the Ddattdef dialog box.

Keyboard ATTDEF
PROMPTS:
Attribute modes - Invisible:N Constant:N Verify:N Preset:N
Enter (ICVP) to change, RETURN when done:
Attribute tag:
Attribute prompt:
Default attribute value:
Justify/Style/<Start point>:
Height <0.2000>:
Rotation angle <0>:
ATTDEF 59
OPTIONS:
Attribute modes • Mode settings are stored in the Aflags system variable.
Enter the first letter of each mode to change its setting to
Yes or No.
Invisible • Defines how the Attribute is displayed - Visible or
Invisible. Regardless of this setting, you can make all
Attributes visible, invisible, or return them to their original
visibility assignment with the Attdisp (attribute display)
command.
Constant • Sets a fixed, uneditable value for the Attribute.
Verify • Prompts you to confirm your responses once you Insert a
Block containing Attributes. Any values set to Constant are
not verified. This setting is only applicable if you enter
Attributes at the Command prompt. Inserting Attributes
using the dialog box ignores this setting.
Preset • Inserted Attributes automatically take on their default
setting. Unlike Constant, this can be modified.
Attribute tag • Assigns a name to the Attribute. This tag is sometimes used
as a link to an external database. There can be no spaces in
a tag name. You may want to keep tag names unique for
each drawing or for groups of drawings assigned to the
same project.
• Attribute tags are similar to field names used in databases
and spreadsheets. If you plan to link Attributes with other
computer programs you may want to use the same tag or
field names for consistency.
Attribute prompt • This becomes the text you see during Attribute insertion.
Typically this is in the form of a question or statement. If no
prompt is assigned, the tag becomes the Prompt.
Default Attribute • Determines the default Attribute value. This is optional.
value
60 ATTDEF
Justify/Style/ • Determines the text characteristics assigned to the

<Start point> Attribute.
• Specifies the text justification.

• Assigns a text Style. See the Style command for more
detailed information.
• Picks a starting point. If another Attribute was just
defined you can press <Enter> and align the Attribute
below the previous attribute.
Height <0.2000> • Determines the Attribute text's height. If the Style was
preset with a height the option is not accessible.
Rotation angle <0> • Specifies a rotation angle for the Attribute text.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Save time by keeping the Verify option set to No. You can always edit the
Attributes after the Attribute Block has been inserted.
~ When creating a Block with Attributes, select each Attribute individually in the
order you want the prompts to appear.
~ When inserting a Block with Attributes, Attribute prompts do not appear until after
the normal prompts for a Block insertion have been answered.
~ If you want to edit the information assigned to an Attribute definition use the
Change, Ddedit, or Ddmodify command. You can do this before you include the
Attribute in a Block defmition or you Insert and Explode an Attribute. Using
Ddedit lets you edit only the tag, prompt, and default values; Change is similar to
Ddedit but you can also change the information concerning text Style, Height,
Rotation, and location; using the Ddmodify command lets you change all values
assigned to the Attribute.
~ Since you cannot edit Constant Attributes, and they don't take advantage of the
Mirrtext variable, we recommend you use Preset for greater flexibility.
RELATED VARIABLES: Aflags, Texteval, Textfill, TextqIty
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdisp, Attedit, Attredef, Block, Ddattdef, Insert
ATTDISP 61
'ATTDIA (ATTribute DIAlog)

Attdia controls whether the Ddatte dialog box is activated during the insertion of Blocks
containing Attributes.

Keyboard ATTDIA
OPTIONS:
o • Prompts for Attribute information at the Command prompt.
• Prompts for Attribute information with the Ddatte dialog box.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

l If Attreq is set to 0 you will receive neither the Attribute dialog box nor Attribute
Command prompts. The Attributes are inserted based on their default values.
However, you can always edit the Attributes with the Ddatte command.
l If after Inserting a Block defined with Attributes the Attributes do not appear,
check the Attdisp setting.
System Variable o Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Attmode, Attreq
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attedit, Attdisp, Ddatte, Insert
'ATTDISP (ATTtribute DISPlay)

Attdisp controls the display of all inserted Attributes in the current drawing. Attdisp
overrides the visibility settings defined with the Attdef or Ddattdef command. The
Attmode system variable maintains this value.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY .••

Screen menu OPTIONS" DISPLAY" AttDisp:
Keyboard ATTDISP
PROMPTS:
Norma l/ON/OFF <Normal> :
62 ATTDISP
OPTIONS:
Nonnal • Displays Attributes the way they were originally defmed.
ON • Makes every Attribute visible.
OFF • Makes every Attribute invisible.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, You may want to create all Attributes as visible and control their display by
placing them on different Layers. Turn the Layers Off or Freeze them if you want
to have invisible Attributes.
! If you change the Attdisp mode and Regenauto is Off, you will need to Regenerate
your drawing to see the result.
RELATED VARIABLES: Aflags, Attmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Ddattdef, Layer
ATTEDIT (ATTribute EDIT)

Attedit lets you edit Attributes individually, or globally if they have the same block
names, tag names, or value.

Attribute toolbar ~
Keyboard ATTEDIT
PROMPTS:
Edit Attributes one at a time ? <Y>:
Block name specification <*>:
Attribute tag specification <* >:
Attribute value specification <*> :
Select attributes:
Value / Position / Height / Angle / Style / Layer / Color / Next <N >:
ATTEXT 63
OPTIONS:
Individual • Specifies the Attributes to edit by their Block name, Attribute tag,
Attribute value, and selection set. If you respond with an asterisk,
you can edit all Attributes regardless of Block name, Attribute tag,
and Attribute value. Only Attributes visible on the screen may be
edited. You can edit the following properties: value, position,
height, angle, style, layer, color.
Global • Only Attribute values may be edited. You may choose to edit only
those Attributes visible on the screen or all the Attributes
regardless of visibility. A screen Regeneration will be performed
after the command has completed unless Regenauto is Off, in
which case you will need to wait until the drawing is regenerated or
force a regeneration with the Regen command to see the results of
your editing.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Edit Attribute values with a dialog box by using the Ddatte command.
t> A null Attribute can be edited by supplying a backslash (\) as the Attribute value
and doing a global edit.
t> Wild-card characters can be used to specify the Block names, tags, and values of
Attributes to edit. These characters are treated literally if used within a string to
change or new string prompt.
~ Attributes defined as Constant cannot be edited.
~ Attribute values are case-sensitive.
RELATED VARIABLES: Attmode

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Ddatte, wild-card
AT TEXT (ATTribute EXTract)

Attext extracts Attribute data from your drawing. See the command equivalent Ddattext
for more detailed information.
64 ATTMODE
I ATTMODE (ATTribute MODE)

Attmode controls the display of all inserted Attributes in the current drawing. Attmode
overrides the visibility settings defined with the Attdef or Ddattdef command. This value
is usually set with the Attdisp command.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY•..

Keyboard ATTMODE
OPTIONS:
o(Oft) • All Attributes are invisible.
1 (normal) • All Attributes default to their Attdef setting.
2 (on) • All Attributes are visible.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You may want to create all Attributes as visible and control their display by
placing them on different Layers. Turn the Layers Off or Freeze them if you want
to have invisible Attributes.
£ If you change the Attmode mode and Regenauto is Off, you will need to
Regenerate your drawing to see the result.
System Variable 1 (normal) Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Aflags
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Attdisp, Ddattdef
ATTREDEF (ATTribute REDEFine)

Attredef modifies existing Attribute definitions (Attdet) contained in Blocks, and updates
any existing Blocks.

Attribute toolbar
Keyboard ATTREDEF
ATTREQ 65
PROMPTS:
Name of Block you wish t o redefine:
Selec t objec t s f or new Bloc k ...
Se lect objects :
Inser t i on ba se point of new Bloc k:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ New Attributes added to existing Blocks receive their default value; existing
Attributes maintain their values; deleted Attribute tags are removed.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attedit, Attdef, Attdisp, Block, Ddattdef, Ddatte
'ATTREQ (ATTribute REQuest)

Attreq determines whether you are prompted for Attribute values during the Insert
command or whether the Attribute's defaults are automatically used.

Keyboard AITREQ
OPTIONS:
o • Attributes are Inserted with their default values.
• You are prompted for Attribute values.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If Attreq is enabled (1) you can enter answers using a dialog box or at the
Command prompt, depending on the Attdia setting.
~ Attributes Inserted with their default values (0) can always be edited with the
Attedit and Ddatte commands.
System Variable Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Aflags, Attdia
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Attedit, Ddatte, Ddattdef, Insert
66 AUDIT
AUDIT
Audit examines a drawing's integrity, checking for errors. The errors can be automatically
corrected or left alone.
An ASCII report file describing any problems and actions taken can be generated by
turning the system variable Auditctl to On. This report is created in the same directory as
the current drawing. Its name is the same as the drawing file, with the extension .Adt.

Pull-down File" Managment .. Audit
Screen menu FILE" MANAGE" Audit:
Keyboard AUDIT
PROMPTS:
Fix any errors detected? <N>:
OPTIONS:
No • Errors are not fixed.
Yes. Errors are fixed.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Use the Recover command if Audit is unable to fix any errors.
t> You can delete an .adt file without doing any harm to its associated drawing file.
£ Every time an .adt report is created it overwrites any existing audit report for that
same drawing file.
RELATED VARIABLES: Auditctl
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Config, Recover
'AUDITCTL (AUDIT ConTroL)

Auditctl determines whether an ASCII file is created when issuing the Audit and Recover
commands. This file is a log of actions and is created in the same directory as the current
drawing. Its name is the same as the drawing file, with the extension .adt.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY.••

Keyboard AUDITCTL
AUNITS 67
OPTIONS:
o • Disables Auditctl and doesn't create .adt files.
• Enables Auditctl and creates .adt files.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can delete audit (.adt) files without affecting the associated drawing file .
~ Every time an .adtreport is created it overwrites any existing audit report for that
same drawing file.
System Variable o Configuration file Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: audit, recover
'AUNITS (Angle UNITS)

Aunits sets the drawing's angle measurement format. This value is typically set with the
Ddunits or Units command.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY ••.

Keyboard AUNITS
OPTIONS:
o • Decimal degrees
• Degrees/minutes/seconds
2 • Grads
3 • Radians
4 • Surveyor's units
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You may get unexpected results if you set both the Aunits to surveyor's units and
you change the Angbase (direction for angle E). Try changing only one of the
settings and see whether you get the desired results.
68 AUNITS

System Variable 0, decimal degrees Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Aogbase, Aogdir, Auprec, Lunits, Luprec
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddunits, Dimaunit, Units
'AUPREC (Angle Units PRECision)

Auprec determines the precision with which angles are displayed. This value is typically
set with the Units or Ddunits command.

Keyboard AUPREC
TIPS & WARNINGS:

I: Don't round off numbers when inputting values. Regardless of the current setting,
entering a number with precision higher than Auprec's setting is remembered in
AutoCAD's database. You never know when you may need the true number for
data extraction.
RELATED VARIABLES: Aogbase, Aogdir, Aunits, Lunits, Luprec
BASE 69
'BACKZ
Backz retains the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport.
This value is usually set with the Dview - Clip - Back command.

Keyboard BACKZ
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, This only has meaning if Viewmode is On.

System Variable 0.0000, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Frontz, Viewmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dview (Clip)
'BASE
Base establishes a reference point for the current drawing. This value is maintained by the
Insbase system variable.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY..•

Keyboard BASE
PROMPTS:
Base point <0.0000,0.0000,0.0000>:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, When creating Wblocks you are prompted to define an insertion base point. You
can always redefme that base point by directly modifying the Wblock or drawing
file with the Base command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Insbase
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Block, Ddinsert, Insert, Wblock
70 BHATCH
BHATCH (Boundary HATCH)

Bhatch cross-hatches or pattern-fills an area enclosed by existing objects. The hatch can
be associative in that it remembers its hatching parameters, and can be dynamically
updated. Bhatch defines the boundary by creating its own Polyline or Region. You can
choose to save this boundary or have it automatically erased, preview the hatch before
making it a part of your drawing, and hatch other areas based on existing hatch patterns.

Draw toolbar ~
Screen menu CONSTRCT -. Bhatch:

Keyboard BHATCH
PROMPTS:
Boundary Hatch
Pa.1tom TlIJ'o
hpname
hpscale ScaB: 10'1"

hpang Anglo. 10
hpspace I
hpdouble r Duuhl
BHATCH 71
Advanced Options
Define Boundlll)' Sel

(i' From e.... ryth'ng on Saean
hpname
Ii< Islllnd Deleebon

r: Relllln Iloundllnea
OPTIONS:
Pattern Type
Predefined e Sets the hatch pattern choices to those defined in the
acad.pat file.
User-defined • Defaults to the current linetype.
Custom • Sets the hatch pattern choices to those defined in any
customized file with the extension .pat.
image tile • Select a cross-hatch pattern. The Predefined pattern
type displays a graphic example of the available
patterns.
Pattern Properties
ISO Pen Width • This box is active only if one of the ISO patterns is
selected. Scroll towards the end of the Pattern list to
locate the ISO patterns. The pattern scaling is based on
the selected Iso pattern pen width.
Pattern • This box is only active if the Pattern Type is set to
Predefined. Lists all the hatch patterns located in the
Predefined pattern type file (acad.pat) . This is directly
linked to the image tile located on the upper left of the
dialog box. Changing the Pattern changes the image
tile; changing the image tile changes the pattern.
72 BHATCH
Custom Pattern • Enter the name of a custom defined hatch pattern when
using the Custom defmed Pattern Type.
Scale • Enter a scaling factor to expand or compress the hatch
pattern. A scale of 1 brings the pattern back to its
original defmed size.
Angle • Enter a hatch pattern angle.
Spacing • Defme the spacing of lines when using the User defmed
Pattern Type.
Double • When this box is checked you create a perpendicular
cross-hatch for the User-defmed Pattern Type.
Exploded • When this box is checked the hatch pattern is Exploded
at the completion of the Bhatch command.
Boundary
Pick Points < • Pick points in enclosed areas to hatch.
Select Objects < • Select objects to hatch.
Remove Islands < • Removes objects defmed as islands during the pick
points option.
View Selections < • Highlights the current boundary.
Advanced... These options help to speed up the hatching process when

working with large drawings.
Object Type • Controls whether the boundary set is created with a
Polyline or Region.
Defme • Controls what is considered part of the boundary set.
Boundary Set
Style • Normal- hatch every other boundary.
• Ignore - hatch everything inside outermost boundary.
• Outermost - hatch only the outermost boundary.
Ray Casting • Determines the way the hatch boundary is defined. This
is available so long as Island Detection is not selected.
Island Detection • Determines whether objects inside the outermost
boundary are part of the boundary or ignored.
BHATCH 73
Retain Boundaries • Specifies whether the boundary remains a part of the

drawing or is removed at the end of the command.
Preview Hatch < • Lets you check the Hatch's outcome before actually
Inserting or Applying it to the drawing.
Inherit Properties < • Lets you select an existing associative hatch pattern and
presets the pattern properties.
Associative • When the box is checked the hatch pattern remains
flexible and can be dynamically edited. When the box
is empty the hatch acts like a Block. See Hatch and
Hatchedit for more detailed information.
Apply • Completes the Hatch command.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

" Bhatch is similar to the Hatch command. However, Bhatch is more flexible.
" Bhatch lines are projected in the current construction plane defined by the UCS.
" If you need precise Bhatch pattern placement, set the system variable Snapbase to
a point where you want the hatch pattern to originate. Be sure to reset it after
Bhatching, because Snap and Grid use it also.
" Moving and Stretching Bhatch boundaries causes the Bhatch to update
dynamically.
" You can bypass the dialog box and answer all the prompts and options from the
Command prompt by typing a hyphen (-) before Bhatch.
£ Moving a Bhatch with Grips (Gripblock = 1) causes the Bhatch to jump back to its
original location. If you move the Bhatch with the Move command, you can then
move the Bhatch with Grips. However, you have lost most of the Bhatch
associativity features.
£ You lose most associativity features under the following circumstances:
You alter a Bhatch pattern so that it is no longer "closed" (i.e. you separate the
Bhatch from the geometry it originally hatched).
You copied just the Bhatch and placed it inside a boundary the same size as the
original boundary.
However, you can still use the Inherit Properties option when Bhatching other
objects.
74 BHATCH
l Every time you edit a Bhatch using Grips you automatically create "Unnamed
blocks." Since this takes up valuable drawing space we recommend that you
Purge (Blocks or All) and remove these Block references. The same situation does
not occur when the hatched area was created with the Hatch command.
l Every time you Bhatch you automatically create "Unnamed blocks." The
unnamed Block references usually remain in the drawing even if you Erase or
Explode the Bhatch pattern. Since this takes up valuable drawing space we
recommend that you Purge (Blocks or All) and remove these Block references.
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpang, Hpdouble, Hpname, Hpscale, Hpspace
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Boundary, Explode, Hatch, Hatchedit, Pline, Region,
Xplode
EXAMPLE:
Select internal point
'BLIPMODE
Blipmode controls the display of the small temporary blips or cross marks that appear
when entering points or selecting objects. The Ddrmodes dialog box provides easy access
for turning this feature on and off. The system variable (Setvar) that maintains this setting
is also named Blipmode.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY.•.

Pull-down Options'" Drawing Aids ...
Screen menu OPTIONS'" DDrmode:
Keyboard BLIPMODE
PROMPTS:
ON/OFF <On):
OPTIONS:
OFF • Suppresses blips.
ON • Generates blips.
BLOCK 75
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Redraw, or any command like Grid On/Off that automatically creates a redraw or
regeneration, will clear away blip marks.
~ You cannot Osnap to blip marks.
RELATED VARIABLES: Blipmode

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Setvar
BLOCK
The Block command defines and fuses one or more of objects as a single object within
the current drawing. The Insert command is used to place copies of blocks into a drawing.
You derme a Block by picking objects, which are then erased from the screen and stored
as a Block definition in the drawing. Each Block is assigned a name and insertion point.
You can globally update all Blocks in a drawing containing the same name by creating
another Block and assigning it the same name. You may have to Regenerate your drawing
to see the changes.

Draw toolbar Q,
Keyboard BLOCK
PROMPTS:
Bl ock name (or ?) :
Inser tio n base point:
Select objects:
OPTIONS:
Block name • Up to 31 characters can be used to name a Block.
? • Lists the names of Blocks currently defined in the drawing.
Wild-card characters can be used to create a more specific or
partial list.
76 BLOCK
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If Grips are enabled and Gripblock is set to 1, only the Grips assigned to
individual objects making up the Block are shown. If Gripblock is set to 0, the
only Grip is the insertion point deftnition. In any case, you cannot change the size
of individual objects making up the Block deftnition.
~ Blocks can include objects assigned to any Layer, Color, and Linetype. Blocks
created with objects on Layer 0 take on the color and linetype of the layer on
which they are inserted. Blocks created with objects that have Color or Linetype
set to Byblock take on the current explicit Color or Linetype setting.
~ Blocks can contain other Blocks. There is no limit to the number of nesting levels.
~ Use the Explode or Xplode to convert Blocks back into separate objects.
~ Use the Wblock command if you want to use a Block in another drawing.
~ Use the Oops command to restore objects erased from the display when they were
copied into a Block deftnition.
~ Any Block you plan to Wblock without changing its name should be created with
no more than eight letters.
~ You can rename Blocks with the Rename or Ddrename command.
~ Creating Blocks 1 (unit) by 1 (unit) gives you the ability to insert the Block with
its actual dimensions by assigning different X, Yand Z values.
~ You can hatch Blocks as though they were individual objects by using the Bhatch -
Pick Points option.
l Blocks created with multiple Layers may react unexpectedly when you Freeze or
turn Off Layers.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddinsert, Explode grips, Group, Insert, wild-Card,
Wblock, Xplode, Xref
EXAMPLE:
Command: BLOCK
Block name (or 7): PUMP
Insertion base point: Pick 1
Select objects: Select the pump objects
BMPOUT see EXPORT

BOUNDARY 77
BOUNDARY (fonnerly named BPOLY)

Boundary converts Lines, Arcs, Circles, Ellipses, Polylines, and Splines into Polylines or
Regions. The objects must form a closed border by sharing vertices or overlapping. Since
the boundary is created on top of the original objects, you can easily edit it using the
selection set option Previous. The command will create more than one Boundary if the
selection set contains more than one closed Boundary, for instance, a Circle inside
another Circle.

Draw toolbar
Screen menu CONSTRCT .. Boundar:

Keyboard BOUNDARY
Boundary Q-eatlon
Qbl0ct Typo'
Define BoundclIY Set
~ From El/.8.yttllng on Saoen
Do nd ry t
Milke Hew Boundcuy Sot <
OPTIONS:
Object Type • Controls whether the Boundary set is created with a
Polyline or Region.
Define Boundary Set • Controls what is considered part of the Boundary set.
Ray Casting • Determines the way the Boundary is defined. This is
available so long as Island Detection is not selected.
78 BOUNDARY
Island Detection • Detennines whether objects inside the outermost

Boundary are part of the Boundary or ignored.
Boolean Subtract • Deletes islands from the Boundary.
Islands
Pick Points < • Picks points in enclosed areas to define the Boundary.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can bypass the dialog box by typing a hyphen (-) before Boundary at the
Command prompt.
~ Splines can convert only to Regions, not to Polylines.
~ Every time you Bhatch you automatically create "Unnamed blocks." The
unnamed Block references remain in the drawing even if you Erase or Explode the
Bhatch pattern. Since this takes up valuable drawing space we recommend that
you Purge (Blocks or All) to remove these Block references.
~ Every time you edit a Bhatch using Grips you automatically create "Unnamed
blocks." Since this takes up valuable drawing space we recommend that you
Purge (Blocks or All) to remove these Block references. The same situation does
not occur when the hatched area was created with the Hatch command.
~ It is easy to think that the Boundary command did not work. Upon completion of
the Boundary command, the objects may look the same. Look at your Command
prompt. If you repeat the Boundary command on the same objects, you will
probably end up with multiple Plines on top of one another.
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpbound
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Area, Bhatch, Explode, Pline, Region
EXAMPLE:
BOX 79
BOX
The Box command creates a 3-D solid box.

Solids toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2" SOLIDS" Box:

Keyboard BOX
PROMPTS:
Center/<Corner of box> <0,0,0>:
Cube / Length /<o ther co rner >:
Height :
OPTIONS:
Comer of box • Specifies the ftrst comer.
Center • Speciftes the center point.
Cube • Determines the length, width, and height.

Length • Speciftes the length in the X axis.
Width • Speciftes the width in the Yaxis.
Height • Specifies the height in the Z axis.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use negative values when referencing the negative direction of the current UCS
X,Y,Zaxes.
~ Use the Rectang command to create a 2-D box and the Ai_box to create a 3-D
Surface mesh box. Extruding a Polyline creates a solid box with the option to
include a taper.
~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Box at different
~ Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to enhance the Box's display.
~ Exploding a Box creates six Regions; Exploding the Regions creates twenty-four
Lines.
80 BOX
RELATED VARIABLES: Isolines

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ai_Box, Extrude, Rectang
EXAMPLE:
[CJ
\. Length • I
BREAK
Break erases portions of objects or separates objects at a designated point.

Modify tool bar c.::J
Screen menu MODIFY -. Break:

Keyboard BREAK
PROMPTS:
Select object:
Enter second point (or F for first point) :
OPTIONS:
1 Point • Separates the object at the point it was picked during the
Select object prompt. The break point and the point picked
during object selection share the same coordinates.
1 Point Select • Separates the object at a specified point. After object
selection you pick a specific separation point. The second
break point uses the same coordinates as the first break
point.
• When using the keyboard enter an "@" at the Second
point prompt.
BREAK 81
2 Points • Breaks the object between two specified points. The Select
object prompt determines the first point and then you pick
the second point.
• This is the default option when typing Break at the

keyboard.
2 Points Select • Breaks the object between two specified points. After
object selection you pick two specific break points.
• This matches the keyboard option " ...F for first point...".
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) You can only Break one object at a time.
\) At times you can substitute Grips, Trim, or Lengthen for the Break command.
\) To Break between a first point and the end of an object pick beyond the end of the
object rather than trying to pick the exact endpoint.
\) Once you pick the object to Break, you do not need to touch the object to show the
actual break points. Instead, your pick points project onto the object you chose to
break.
\) Circles and Ellipses (Pellipse = 0) break counterclockwise. Closed Splines break
in the direction they were created. Breaking Rays results in one Line and one Ray;
breaking Xlines creates two Rays. You can't Break Mlines, Solids, Blocks, 3-D
Solids, and 3-D Meshes.
\) You may get unexpected results when Breaking Polylines. Try using the Edit
Vertex - Break option of the Pedit command.
~ You cannot Break borders of Viewport objects.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Lengthen, Pedit, Trim
EXAMPLE:
82 CAL
c
'CAL (geometric CALculator)
Cal functions as an online calculator for evaluating mathematical and geometric expres-
sions. This command works with any command requesting points, vectors, or numbers.
You can create expressions that access existing geometry using the Osnap options, insert
AutoLISP variables, and assign values to AutoLISP variables. See the AutoCAD Com-
mand Reference guide for more detailed information.

Draw toolbar
Pull-down Tools -. Calculator

Screen menu TOOLS-' GeomCal:
Keyboard CAL
CATALOG
Catalog activates the DOS (Disk Operating System) command listing file names with the
wide Uw) option. Since this was intended for the DOS version of AutoCAD, it may not
work on your Windows version. You can use the File Utilities dialog box (Files) supplied
with AutoCAD or the FileManager program supplied with Windows. Catalog is defined
in a customizable file named acad.pgp.

Keyboard CATALOG
PROMPTS:
File specification:
OPTIONS:
<Enter> • Lists all the files in the default directory.
? • Matches any single character.
* • Matches any string.

CECOLOR 83
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If you type the word Catalog to activate the DOS directory command and you
receive the error message "Unknown command ..." it may be because AutoCAD
cannot locate the file named acad.pgp or you are using third party software that
modified the file. Acad.pgp is usually located in the AutoCAD support directory.
l The available options (wild-card characters) are based on the operating system of
your equipment. These are not necessarily the same as the ones mentioned in the
section titled Wild-card.
Type Initial default Subsequent default
External Command Your current directory Initial default
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Del, Dir, Edit, Files, Sh, Shell, Type
'COATE (Current DATE)

Cdate provides the current date and time in calendar and clock format.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

l Cdate's value is taken from your computer's internal clock. Its value is only as
accurate as your computer's date and time settings.
System Variable System default, Read-only System default Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Date, Tdcreate, Tdindwg, Tdupdate, Tdusrtimer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Time
'CECOLOR (Current Entity COLOR)

Cecolor determines the color of new objects. Changing this value does not affect existing
objects. This value is typically set with the Color, Ddcolor, or Ddemodes command. See
the Color command for more detailed information.

Keyboard CECOLOR
84 CECOLOR
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, You can change a color assigned to an object with the Change, Chprop, Ddchprop,
or Ddmodify commands. Ddmodify only lets you change one object at a time.
RELATED VARIABLES: Celtype, Clayer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Color, Ddcolor, Ddemodes, Ddlmodes, Layer
System Variable Bylayer Last value used in the drawing String
'CELTSCALE (Current Entity LineType Scale)

Celtscale determines the current linetype scale factor for new objects. Changing this value
does not affect existing objects. This value is typically set using the Ddemodes command.

Keyboard CELTSCALE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can change a linetype scale assigned to an object with the Change, Chprop,
Ddchprop, or Ddmodify command". Ddmodify only lets you change one object at
a time.
t, Use the Ltscale variable to set a global scale factor value. All lines are multiplied
by the current Ltscale setting.
System Variable 1.0000 Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Ltscale, Psltscale
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddemodes
'CELTYPE (Current Entity LineTYPE)

CeltYPe determines the linetype for new objects. Changing this value does not affect
existing objects. This value is typically set during the Linetype, Ddltype, or Ddemodes
commands. See the Linetype command for more detailed information.
CHAMFER 85

Keyboard CELTYPE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can change a line type assigned to an object with the Change, Chprop,
Ddchprop, or Ddmodify commands. Ddmodify only lets you change one object at
a time.
System Variable Bylayer Last value used in the drawing String
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddemodes, Ddlmodes, Ddltype, Layer, Linetype
CHAMFER
Chamfer creates a beveled edge from non-parallel Lines, Polylines, Rays, and selected
solid shapes.

Modify toolbar r.
Screen menu CONSTRCT ... Chamfer:
Keyboard CHAMFER
PROMPTS:
(TRIM mode) Current chamfer Distl = 0 . 000, Dis t 2 = 0 . 000
Polyl i ne/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/<Select first line>:
OPTIONS:
Lines, Polylines, and Rays
Polyline • Chamfers all the intersections of a Polyline.
Distance • Enter 1st and 2nd chamfer distances.
• These values are assigned to Chamfera and Chamferb
variables.
86 CHAMFER
Angle • Enter chamfer length on the ftrst line and enter chamfer angle
from the ftrst line.
• Chamfer length is assigned to Chamferc, and angle is assigned

to Chamferb.
Trim/Notrim • Determines whether to trim or extend the original lines to meet
the chamfer edge or to leave the lines intact and add the
chamfer in the appropriate spot.
• This value is assigned to the Trimmode variable.

Method • Toggles between the Distance and Angle mode.
• This value is assigned to the Chammode variable.
Solids
Select base surface • Pick one of the surfaces that will be chamfered.
Enter base surface distance • Enter the chamfer distances.
Enter other surface distance
Select edge • Pick the edge of the second (adjacent) base
surface.
Loop • Chamfers all edges on the base surface.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, When Trim is active - Chamfering a line with a Polyline causes the Line to convert
and join or attach itself to the Polyline. When No Trim is active - Chamfering a
Line with a Polyline lets those objects keep their original deftnition, and the
chamfer object is defmed as a Line.
t, Set the chamfer distances (Chamfera and Chamferb) equal to each other to end up
with a 45-degree bevel; set different chamfer distances for A and B to create other
angles.
~ If you chamfer two Line segments of a Polyline with an Arc in between the
segments, the Arc will be replaced by the chamfer Line. To get this effect you
must use the Polyline option.
~ The chamfered edge resides on the Layer of the picked objects so long as they
share the same Layer; if the two objects are on different Layers, the chamfered
edge is placed on the current Layer. The same rules apply to Color and Linetype.
~ If you need the endpoints of two Lines to meet, set the Chamfer distance to 0 and
set Trim on. You can achieve the same result with the Fillet command.
CHAMFERA 87
~ You cannot Chamfer borders of Viewport objects.
~ Chamfering a Polyline with chamfer distances of different lengths is based on the

direction the Polyline was drawn.
~ Chamfering will not work if Limits is On and the intersection point is outside the
limits.
RELATED VARIABLES: Chamfera, Chamferb, Chamferc, Chamferd, Chammode,
Trimmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Extend, Fillet, Pline, Trim
EXAMPLE:
Distance de Polyline l.Ielhoo
cCJCJ
Anglo Method orslance IIIelhod
EJ~~I. [V~
tJ Trim No Trim 8dore After
@ S~lOOP
Oistance.
80se
~
~~
BClSI
Surface
l:l/ Q/~
Edge
'CHAMFERA (CHAMFER A)
Chamfera sets the first chamfer distance. This value is typically set using the Distance
option of the Chamfer command.

Keyboard CHAMFERA
RELATED VARIABLES: Chamferb, Chammode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Chamfer
88 CHAMFERS
'CHAMFERB (CHAMFER B)
Chamferb sets the second chamfer distance. This value is typically set using the Distance
option of the Chamfer command.

Keyboard CHAMFERB
RELATED VARIABLES: Chamfera, Chammode
'CHAMFERC (CHAMFER C)
Chamferc sets the chamfer length. This value is typically set using the Angle option of the
Chamfer command.

Keyboard CHAMFERC
RELATED VARIABLES: Chamferd, Chammode
'CHAMFERD (CHAMFER D)
Chamferd sets the chamfer angle. This value is typically set using the Angle option of the
Chamfer command.

Keyboard CHAMFERD
System Variable 0 Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Chamferc, Chammode
CHANGE 89
'CHAMMODE (CHAMfer MODE)

Chammode determines whether chamfers are created based on distances or by a specified
length and angle. This value is usually set using the Method option of the Chamfer
command.

Keyboard CHAMMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Uses Chamfera and Chamferb to set the chamfer distance.
• Uses Chamferc and Chamferd to set the chamfer length and angle.
RELATED VARIABLES: Chamfera, Chamferb, Chamferc, Chamferd
CHANGE
Change lets you modify objects and their properties. Once you have completed this
command you may have to Regenerate the screen to see the revisions. You can achieve
the same results using the Ddmodify dialog box.

Modify tool bar p
Screen menu MODIFY - Change:
Keyboard CHANGE
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
Properties / <Change point>:
90 CHANGE
OPTIONS:
Change Point lets you redefme the location (or size) of the following objects:
Lines • Relocates the endpoints of the Lines closest to the new point you
specify. Having Ortho On forces the Lines to be horizontal or
vertical to the current UCS or Snap rotation.
Circle • Lets you modify the radius by picking a point to show the new
circumference.
Block • Lets you relocate the Block insertion point and determine a new
rotation angle.
Text • Lets you relocate the text to the change point. If you press <Enter>
at the Change point prompt, you can redefine the text style, height,
rotation angle, and text string.
Attdef • Attribute Definition - Same as Text option, but you can also change
the Attribute tag, prompt, and default value.
Properties • Lets you redefine any or all of the following properties: Color,
Elevation, Layer, Linetype, Linetype Scale, and Thickness.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When changing the Elevation of a Line, 3-D Polyline, or 3-D Face, all points must
share the same Z value. You can move an object along the Z axis with the Move
command.
~ An alternative to the Change command is to preset the values by using the
individual commands of Color, Elevation, Layer (Ddlmodes), Ltype (linetype),
Ltscale (linetype scale), Thickness, and Text Style, or by using the Ddemodes
dialog box.
~ You must press <Enter> one extra time to end the command.
~ Chprop, Ddchprop, and Ddmodify are alternatives to the Change command.

However, all three commands do not offer the Elevation option, and Chprop and
Ddchprop contain only the Properties option. Chprop issues its options at the
Command prompt; Ddchprop is in the dialog box format. Ddmodify only lets you
modify one object at a time.
~ Alternatives to the Change Point option are Grips, Trim, Extend, and Lengthen.
~ If you choose to elongate or shorten a group of parallel lines, make sure Ortho is
On unless you want the lines to converge at the designated Change Point.
CHPROP 91
~ Use the Change Properties option to assign a Thickness to Text, Dtext, and Attdef.
Presetting the Thickness has no effect on these objects. You can also use
Ddmodify, Chprop, or Ddchprop to achieve the same results.
~ It is easier and faster to use the Ddedit command when modifying attribute
definitions (Attdet) and text (Dtext, Text, Mtext) strings.
~ Assigning a Thickness to the following objects will have no effect: 3-D Solids,
3-D Faces, 3-D Polylines, Polygon Meshes, Splines, Mlines, Mtext, and
Dimensions.
~ If you modify an Attribute definition (Attdet), use the Attredef routine to re-Block,
or else existing Attributes will not inherit the changes.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Chprop, Color, Ddchprop, Ddcolor, Ddedit, Ddemodes,
Ddlmodes, Ddmodify, Extend, grips, Layer, Lengthen, Linetype, Style, Thickness, Trim
EXAMPLE:
CHANGE POIN1 CHANGE TEXT OP110NS

)€HANGE TEXT Insertion point
-x ~(Q CHANGE TEXT Style
Ortho On Ort ho Off CHANGE TEXT Height
NG( ltf'i
C\'ll>- Rotate
Changing Text New text string
CHPROP (CHange PROPerties)

Chprop lets you modify properties assigned to objects. It is a subset of the Change and
Ddmodify commands but does not include Change Point, Elevatioll, and Text
modification options. You can achieve the same results using the Ddchprop dialog box.

Keyboard CHPROP
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
Change what property
(Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/Thickness)?
92 CHPROP
OPTIONS:
Color • Assigns a Color to an object. See Ddcolor for more detailed
information. This value is maintained by the system variable
Cecolor.
LAyer • Moves an object from one Layer to another. See Ddlmodes for
more detailed information. This value is maintained by the system
variable Clayer.
LType • Assigns a Linetype to an object. See Ddltype for more detailed
information. This value is maintained by the Celtype system
variable.
ltScale • Assigns a Linetype Scale to an object. This value is maintained by
the Celtscale system variable.
Thickness • Assigns an extrusion Thickness to an object. This value is
maintained by the Thickness system variable.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You must press <Enter> one extra time to end the command.
t> Use Regen if your drawing does not reflect any changes you made with this
command.
t> An alternative to the Chprop command is to preset the values by using the
individual commands of Color (Ddcolor), Layer (Ddlmodes), Linetype (Ddltype),
Ltscale (Celtscale), and Thickness, or by using the Ddemodes dialog box.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Color, Ddchprop, Ddcolor, Ddemodes,
Ddlmodes, Ddmodify, Layer, Linetype, Thickness
CIRCLE
The Circle command draws circles.

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAWl" Circle:

Keyboard CIRCLE or C
CIRCLE 93
PROMPTS:
3P/2P/TTR/<Center point >:
Diameter/<Radius>:
OPTIONS:
Center point • Specifies the center point.
Diameter • Specifies the diameter by inputting a value or picking two

points.
Radius • Specifies the radius by inputting a value or picking two
points.
3P • Specifies three points on the circumference.
2P • Specifies two points to indicate the diameter.
TTR • Specifies two points (on a Line, Circle, or Arc) that you
want tangent to the Circle, then specify a radius.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If Grips are enabled, the Circle's Grip definition points are on the four quadrants
and the center point. Selecting a quadrant lets you change the Circle's size;
selecting the center lets you move the Circle.
~ The default radius and diameter values are based on the last Circle drawn for the
current session or by setting the Circlerad value.
~ Circles that are Offset share the same center point, but the radius is changed based
on the Offset distance.
~ To create a solid filled circle use the Donut command and set the inside radius to
O.
~ To draw circles in an isometric plane use the Ellipse Isocircle option.
~ You can change the size of Circles using the Grips, Ddmodify, Change, or Scale
commands.
~ Circles are treated as a solid face by the Shade and Hide commands when creating
3-D displays.
~ If circles look like polygons, this may be because of a low Viewres setting. You
can verify that the objects are circles by Regenerating the display. In any case, the
plotted output of the circles will be smooth.
94 CIRCLE
~ If you type the letter C to activate the Circle command and you receive the error
message "Unknown command ... " it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the
~ When using the Break command, the deleted portion of a circle is determined by
the order of your pick points. Circles break in a counterclockwise direction.
RELATED VARIABLES: Circlerad
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Donut, Ellipse
'CIRCLERAD (CIRCLE RADius)

Circlerad sets the Circle's radius and diameter default value for the current drawing. This
value is changed every time you use the Circle command.

Keyboard CIRCLERAD
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Setting the value to 0 removes any default value for the Circle command. If you set
the value to a negative number, the absolute value is used.
System Variable 0.0000 Initial default Real
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Circle
'CLAYER (Current LA YER)

Clayer determines the Layer for new objects. Changing this value does not affect existing
objects. This value is typically set using the Layer, Ddlmodes, or Ddemodes commands.
See the Layer command for more detailed information.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY ..•

Keyboard CLA YER
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Layer must already exist before it can become Current.
~ You cannot set a Layer Current that is Frozen.

CMDDIA 95
System Variable o Last value used in the drawing String

RELATED VARIABLES: Cecolor, Celtype
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddemodes, Ddlmodes, Layer
'CMDACTIVE (CoMmanD ACTIVE)

Cmdactive lists the type of command or action that is active.

Keyboard CMDACTIVE
OPTIONS:
Cmdactive is bit-coded and its value is the sum ofthe following :
• Ordinary command is active.
2 • An ordinary and a transparent command are active.

4 • Script is active.
S • Dialog box is active.

System Variable 1, Read-only Initial default Integer
'CMDDIA (CoMmanD DIAlog)

Cmddia determines whether you set Plot parameters with a dialog box or at the Command
prompt.

Keyboard CMDDIA
OPTIONS:
o • Disables Plot dialog box.
• Enables Plot dialog box.
96 CMDDIA

System Variable 1 Configuration file Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Plot
'CMDECHO (CoMmanD ECHO)

Cmdecho controls whether prompts and input are displayed at the Command prompt
during AutoLISP routines.

Keyboard CMDECHO
OPTIONS:
o • Prompts and variables are not written at the Command prompt when a Lisp
routine is active.
1 • Prompts and variables are written to the Command prompt when a Lisp
routine is active.
System Variable 1 Initial default Integer
'CMDNAMES (CoMmanD NAMES)

Cmdnames displays the current command including any transparent command that is
active.

Keyboard CMDNAMES
System Variable None, Read-only Initial default String
'CMLJUST (Current Multiple parallel Line JUSTification)

Cmljust determines the justification for new Mlines. Changing this value does not affect
existing objects. This value is typically set using the Mline command. See the Mline
command for more detailed information.
CMLSCALE 97

Keyboard CMLJUST
OPTIONS:
o • Top
• Middle (zero)
2 • Bottom

RELATED VARIABLES: Cmlscale, Cmlstyle
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mline, Mlstyle
'CMLSCALE (Current Multiple parallel Line SCALE)

Cmlscale determines the scale for new MIines. Changing this value does not affect
existing objects. This value is typically set using the Mline command. See the Mline

Keyboard CMLSCALE
OPTIONS:
o • Collapses the Mline into a single line.
negative value • Reverses the order of Mlines. The smallest or most negative
are placed on top when drawing from left to right and top to
bottom.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cmljust, Cmlstyle
98 CMLSTYLE
'CMLSTYLE (Current Multiple parallel Line STYLE)

Cmlstyle detennines the style for new Mlines. Changing this value does not affect existing
objects. This value is typically set using the Mline or Mlstyle commands. See the Mline
and Mlstyle commands for more detailed information.

Keyboard CMLSTYLE
System Variable Standard Last value used in the drawing Text string
RELATED VARIABLES: Cmljust, Cmlscale
'COLOR
Color sets the color for new objects. You can also set the Color using the Ddcolor or
Ddemodes dialog box. Depending on your graphics card and its configuration you can
have up to 255 colors defmed in a drawing. The Color's default value is maintained by
the Cecolor system variable.

Screen menu DATA - Color:
Keyboard COLOR
PROMPTS:
New object color <BYLAYER>:
OPTIONS:
BYLAYER • New objects inherit the color assigned to the Layer upon which
they reside.
BYBLOCK • New objects are drawn in white (or black depending on your
display screen's color setting) until they are saved as a Block.
When the Block is Inserted, it inherits the color value set by
the Color command.
COMPILE 99
Color number • New objects are assigned a specific color when you enter the
or name color's name or the corresponding number at the prompt.
• Each color has a standard number assignment:

1 = Red 4 = Cyan 6 = Magenta
2 = Yellow 5 = Blue 7 = White
3 = Green
• You can have up to 255 color assignments, depending on your
graphics card.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You change the display screen colors using the Preference command. Some
Graphic cards have additional features for controlling display colors.
t> To access colors from 8 to 255 you must refer to the number assignment and not
the color name. If you are using the dialog box, enter the color number in the
Color edit box or select the color from the screen.
t> You can reassign an object's color with the Ddchprop, Ddmodify, Change, or
Chprop commands.
~ Layers and Mlstyles have color options built into their commands.
t> You can obtain multiple line weights, linetypes, and color plots by assigning
colors from your drawing to different pens on your plotter or printer.
l Mixing colors on a single layer can become confusing. Using the Layer command
to control color and leaving the Color command set to Bylayer helps you identify
an object's layer assignment. Changing the object's color is then a simple process
of redefining the color with the Layer command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cecolor
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddcolor, Ddemodes, Ddlmodes, Layer, Mlstyle, Plot
COMPILE
Compile compiles shape (.shp) and postscript (.pfb) font files.
100 COMPILE

Pull-down Tools" Compile ...
Screen menu TOOLS" Compile:
Keyboard COMPILE
PROMPTS:
Enter NAME of shape file:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Shape files must be compiled; font files are optional. We recommend that you
compile font files since you will gain speed in the loading of drawing files.
t> If Filedia is set to 1 a dialog box is activated; if Filedia is set to 0 you are
prompted at the Command line. Entering a tilde (-) at the Command line
temporarily activates the File dialog box when it is set to O.
RELATED VARIABLES: Filedia
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Load, Shape
CONE
The Cone command creates a 3-D Solid cone containing a circular or elliptical base.

Solids toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 .. SOLIDS" Cone:

Keyboard CONE
PROMPTS:
Elliptical /< center point) <0,0,0):
Diameter / <Radius):
Apex /< Height) :
OPTIONS:
IA] Center point • Defines the center of the Cone's base.
Diameter • Specifies the diameter of the Cone's base.
Radius • Specifies the radius of the Cone's base.

CONE 101
Apex • Specifies the height and orientation of the Cone.

Height • Specifies the cone's height. Use a negative value
when referencing the negative direction of the
current UCS Z axis.
Elliptical • Creates a Cone with an elliptical base.
Axis endpoint • Defines the first axis.

Axis endpoint 2 • Specifies the second axis defining the diameter of
one axis.
Other axis distance • Detennines the radius of the other axis.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) Use the Ai_cone command to create a 3-D surface mesh cone. Extruding a Circle
with a taper creates a Solid truncated cone shape.
\) Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Cone at different
~ Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to enhance the Cone's display.
l Exploding a Cone creates two Regions. Exploding the Regions creates two
Circles.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dispsilh, Isolines
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ai_Cone, Extrude
EXAMPLE:
Center Option Elliptical Option
Other Axis
endpoint
Radius
102 CON FIG
CONFIG (CONFIGuration)
Config lists the current AutoCAD configuration and lets you make changes to your
system's configuration. The configuration options include video display, digitizer, plotter,
speller dialect, and a variety of other operating parameters. Once you have made changes
the file named acad.cfg is updated.
See your AutoCAD Installation Guide for more detailed information.

Pull-down Options .. Config:
Screen menu OPTIONS" CONFIG
Keyboard CONFIG
PROMPTS & OPTIONS:

O. Exit to drawing editor • Returns to the drawing session. You are
given the option to save or ignore any
changes you may have made during this
command.
1. Show current configuration • Lists the current video display, digitizer,

plotter, and speller dialect.
2. Allow detailed configuration • During other options you are sometimes
asked for more specific information.
3. Configure video display • Defmes the video display.
4. Configure digitizer • Determines the input device.
5. Configure plotter • Defines the output device(s).
6. Configure system console • See the Preference command.
7. Configure operating • Determines various features based on your

parameters particular needs and computer system:
Alarm on error
Initial drawing setup
Default plot file name
Plot spooler directory
Placement of temporary files
Network node name
Automatic-save feature
Speller dialect
COORDS 103
Full-time CRC validation

Automatic audit after DXFIN or DXBIN
Login name
File locking
Authorization
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i:> We recommend that you write down your current configuration before making any
changes. This is in case you need to reference the original configuration file.
RELATED VARIABLES: Audit, Loginname, Plotid, Plotter, Popups, Savefile,
Savetime, Tempprefix
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Plot, Preferences
'Coordinate Entry see POINT ENTRY
'COORDS (COORDinateS)
Coords is a three-way toggle tracking the X,Y coordinates on the status line bar on the
lower left of your AutoCAD display.

Pull-down Options - Coordinate Display
Screen menu OPTIONS - Coords:
Keyboard COORDS or Ctrl D CD) or Function Key F6
Status line Double clicking on the coordinates on the status line toggles the
command among the different modes.
OPTIONS:
o • Coordinate display is updated only when points are picked.
• Coordinate display of absolute coordinates is constantly updated.
2 • Distance and angle from the last point are displayed whenever a command
requests a distance or angle.
104 COORDS
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The coordinates represent the current Units setting.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Units
COpy
Copy creates a replica of one or more objects. The command uses standard object
selection, and the original object or selection set remains unchanged.

Modify toolbar 0
Screen menu CONSTRCT'" Copy:

Keyboard COpy or CP
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
<Base point or displacement> / Multiple :
Second point of displacement:
OPTIONS:
Base point • Determines a point of reference. Think in terms of "From
Where." After locating your reference point, you can drag your
object(s) to the new location at the "Second point" prompt or
enter the absolute or relative coordinates.
Displacement • Enter the distance for X,Y,Z and press <Enter> at the "Second
point" prompt.
Multiple • Copy an object more than one time by giving a designated
reference point and responding to the "Second point" prompts.
Press <Enter> to end.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ To copy in 3-D space, use X,Y,Z points or displacement.
~ Use Osnaps on intersections, center points, or other logical locations to set the
base point.
COpy 105
~ Your base and second point do not need to be on or near the selection set.
~ For multiple copies of complex objects, first Block the selection set, then Insert
and Copy. This reduces the drawing size and gives greater flexibility for future
global revisions.
~ Use Minsert, Array, or 3Darray for multiple copies of equally spaced objects. Use
Offset to make a copy of an object parallel to itself.
~ If Pickfirst is set to 1 you can first select the objects and then issue the Copy
command.
~ Using Grips you have a Copy option with the Stretch, Scale, Move, Mirror, and
Rotate features.
~ You cannot change the size or rotation angle of the copy.
~ If you type the letters CP to activate the Copy command and you receive the error
£ If you accidentally press <Enter> at the "Second point" prompt, your copy may
end up out in outer space. This happens because it is using the X,Y,Z base point as
the displacement.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pickfrrst
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Array, Block, grips, Minsert, Move, Offset, selection
sets
EXAMPLE:
Select objects: Select lower left objects
Base point or displacement/Multiple: M
Multiple Base point: Pick point 1
Second point of displacement: @2(90 or @O,2
Second point of displacement: @2(O or @2,O
Second point of displacement: @2.8284(45 or @2,2
Second po i nt of displacement: (Enter>
@2<90 @2.8284<45
0'
(j))Q,2
@2 <0
@2,0
106 COPYCLIP
COPYCLIP
Copyclip copies objects to the Windows Clipboard. You can save the Clipboard file and
import the objects into most Windows programs using commands such as Paste or Paste
Special.

Draw toolbar
Pull-down Edit -. Copy

Keyboard COpy CLIP or <Ctrl C>
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Copyhist, Copylink, Cutclip
COPYHIST (COpy HISTory)

Copyhist copies text from the current drawing's command line history window to the
Clipboard. You determine the number of text lines that can be retrieved by setting a value
to the Misc - History Lines edit box located in the Preferences dialog box. You can also
import the objects into most Windows programs using commands such as Paste or Paste
Special.

Keyboard COPYHIST
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Copyhist, Copylink, Cutclip, Preferences
COPYLINK
Copylink copies the current drawing display to the Window's Clipboard. This can be used
to link to other Windows programs that also use OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)
technology. Once you are in the other program use the Paste Special to link to the
AutoCAD file.

Pull-down Edit -. Copy View
Keyboard COPYLINK
CVPORT 107
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Linked files are dynamic - editing linked files updates the original and the linked
file.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Cutclip, Pastespec
CUTCLIP
Cutclip copies objects to the Windows Clipboard and erases them from the drawing.
These objects can be embedded to Windows programs that also use OLE (Object Linking
and Embedding) technology. Once you are in the other program use Paste Special to
embed in the AutoCAD file .

Draw toolbar ~
Pull-down Edit - Cut

Keyboard CUTCLIP or <Ctrl X>
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Editing an embedded file only updates that file and is not dynamically linked to
the original file.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Erase
'CVPORT (Current ViewPORT)

Cvport lists the identification number of the current viewport. Changing the value changes
the current viewport. You can also change to different viewports by selecting (with your
pointing device) the inside of other windows.

Keyboard CVPORT
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mview, Viewport, Vport
108 CYLINDER
CYLINDER
The Cylinder command creates a 3-D solid cylinder.

Solids toolbar 1m
Screen menu DRAW 2 -. SOLIDS -. Cylindr:
Keyboard CYLINDER
PROMPTS:
Elliptical/<center point > <0,0,0>:
Diameter/<Radius>:
Center of other end /< Height>:
OPTIONS:
Center point • Defines the center of the Cylinder's base.
Diameter • Specifies the diameter of the Cylinder's base.

Radius • Specifies the radius of the Cylinder's base.
Height • Specifies the Cylinder's height. Use a negative
value when referencing the negative direction of
the current UCS Z axis.
[Q) Elliptical • Creates an elliptical Cylinder.
Axis endpoint • Defines the first axis.

Other axis distance • Specifies the second axis defining the diameter of
one axis.
Center of other end • Determines the radius of the other axis.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ai_cone to create a 3-D surface mesh cylinder. Extruding a Circle creates
a solid cylinder with the option to include a taper.
~ Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Cylinder at different
CYLINDER 109
t> Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to enhance the Cylinder's display.
I Exploding a Cylinder creates three Regions; exploding the Regions creates four
Circles.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dispsilh, Isolines
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ai_Cylinder, Extrude
EXAMPLE:
Elliptical Option Center Option
radius = .5
beigbt = 2
G
110 DATE
'DATE
Date provides the current date and time. The date is represented in Julian format and the
time is shown as a fraction in a real number.

Keyboard DATE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Date's value is taken from your computer's internal clock. Its value is only as
accurate as your computer's date and time settings.
System Variable System default, Read-only System default Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Cdate, Tdcreate, Tdindwg, Tdupdate, Tdusrtimer
DBLIST (DataBase LIST)

Dblist lists all the objects in a drawing, including information such as their coordinates,
layer assignment, size, area, etc.

Keyboard DBLIST
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ We recommend that you use the List command since you can selectively pick
objects, making it easier to associate the description to the object.
~ If your drawing contains many objects, Dblist may hang up your system.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: List
'DBMOD (DataBase MODe)

Dbmod tracks the drawing's modification status.
DCTMAIN 111
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY •..

Keyboard DBMOD
OPTIONS:
Dbmod is bit-coded and its value is the sum of the following:
• Object database modified.
2 • Symbol table modified.
4 • Database variable modified.
8 • Window modified.
6 • View modified.
'DCTCUST (DiCTionary CUSTomized)

Dctcust sets the latest custom spelling file name including its location. This file maintains
any words you add when using the spell check routine. The file is written in ASCII format
and can be modified using the Windows Notepad program. The file's extension must be
.cus. Dctcust's value is typically set using the Spell command.

Keyboard DCTCUST
System Variable "" (none) Configuration file String
RELATED VARIABLES: Dctmain
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Spell
'DCTMAIN (DiCTionary MAIN)

Dctmain sets the latest main dictionary file name. This value is typically set during the
spell check routine. See the AutoCAD Command Reference Guide (Appendix A) for a
listing of the various choices.
112 DCTMAIN

Keyboard DCTMAIN
System Variable varies Configuration file String
RELATED VARIABLES: Dctcust
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Spell
DDATTDEF (Dynamic Dialog ATTribute DEFinition)

Ddattdef defines how Attribute text will be displayed, prompted for, and stored. Once you
defme the Attribute(s), you save it with the Block command. Other objects can be saved
with the Attribute. The Attribute data are requested when the Block is Inserted into the
drawing. You can achieve the same results using the Attdef command, where all prompts
and options appear at the Command prompt.

Attribute toolbar ~
Screen menu CONSTRCT'" DDatDef:

Keyboard DDATTDEF
OPTIONS:
Attribute Definition
8fl8gS t.lode
r: blvis,ble
r: kanstant
r: Yerily
r: Ereset
ILeft
DDATTDEF 113
Mode • Mode settings are stored in the Aflags system variable.

Select the check boxes to activate or clear the following
options.
Invisible • Defines how the Attribute is displayed - visible or
invisible. Regardless of this setting, you can make all
Attributes visible or invisible, or return them to their
original visibility assignment with the Attdisp (attribute
display) command.
Constant • Sets a fixed, uneditable value for the Attribute.
Verify • Prompts you to confirm your responses once you insert a
Block containing Attributes. Any values set to constant
are not verified. This setting is only applicable if you
enter Attributes at the Command prompt. Inserting
Attributes using the dialog box ignores this setting.
Preset • Inserted Attributes automatically take on their default
settings. Unlike Constant, this can be modified.
Attribute • Defines the Attribute.
Tag • Assigns a name to the Attribute. This tag is sometimes
used as a link to an external database. There can be no
spaces in a tag name. You may want to keep tag names
unique for each drawing or for groups of drawings
assigned to the same project.
• Attribute tags are similar to field names used in

databases and spreadsheets. If you plan to link Attributes
with other computer programs you may want to use the
same tag or field names for consistency.
Prompt • This becomes the text you see during Attribute insertion.
Typically this is in the form of a question or statement. If
no Prompt is assigned, the tag becomes the prompt.
Value • Determines the default attribute value. This is optional.
Insertion Point • Specifies the Attribute's location.
Pick Point < • Temporarily hides the dialog box and lets you pick a
location on your drawing for the Attribute.
114 DDTATTDEF
X,Y,Z • Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the Attribute

location.
Align below • This can only be used if you have already entered at least
previous attribute one Attribute definition during the current editing
session.
Text Options • Determines the text characteristics assigned to the
Attribute.
Justification • Specifies the text justification.
Text Style • Assigns a text Style. See the Style command for more
Height < • Determines the Attribute text height. If the Style is preset
with a height, the option is not accessible.
Rotation < • Specifies a rotation angle for the Attribute text.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> When creating a Block with Attributes, select each attribute individually in the
order you want the prompts to appear.
t> When Inserting a Block with Attributes, attribute prompts do not appear until after
the normal prompts for a block insertion have been answered.
t> If you want to edit the information assigned to an Attribute definition use the
Change, Ddedit, or Ddmodify command. You can do this before you include the
Attribute in a Block definition or you Insert and Explode an Attribute. Using
Ddedit lets you edit only the tag, prompt, and default values. Change is similar to
Ddedit, but you can also change the information concerning text style, height,
rotation, and location. Using the Ddmodify command lets you change all values
assigned to the Attribute.
~ Since you cannot edit Constant Attributes, and they do not take advantage of the
Mirrtext variable, we recommend that you use Preset for greater flexibility.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Attdisp, Attedit, Attredef, Block, Ddatte, Insert
DDATTEXT 115
DDATTE (Dynamic Dialog ATTribute Edit)

Ddatte lets you edit Attribute values with a dialog box.

Attribute toolbar
Screen menu MODIFY ~ AttEd:

Keyboard DDATTE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Enter Multiple Ddatte if you wish to edit more than one Block containing Attribute
information. Use <Esc> (cancel) to end the command.
t> Use Attedit to globally edit Attribute values, that is, to change an Attribute's
Location, Height, Angle, Style, Layer, and Color.
RELATED VARIABLES: Attmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdisp, Attedit, dialog boxes, Multiple
DDATTEXT (Dynamic Dialog ATTribute EXTraction)

Ddattext lets you extract Attribute data from your drawing. This information is written to
an ASCII text file in one of three possible formats: CDF, SDF, or DXF. Other programs,
such as databases or spreadsheets, can usually read the extracted file in one of those
formats for analysis and report generation. Either all or selected Attributes can be
extracted. You can achieve the same results using the Attext command, where all prompts
and options appear at the Command prompt.

Screen menu FILE ~ EXPORT ~ DDattEx:
Keyboard DDATTEXT
116 DDATTEXT
OPTIONS:
Attribute Extraction
Fllo Formlll
r. kommll Dalimitod Fila (COF)
Spll.c e Dalom,tad Fila (SDF)
QfllWlng Inlarchanga Fila (DXF)
I!
III Salact QbJocts c j Numbof found· 0
II! Iamplllla F,la _. JI -~
[ Output Bla .. J IUNNAM ED.bel U

I - OK]" I 1 Cancel I I. J:l.alp •• I
File Format • Selects a file format.

Select Objects < • Selects all or specific objects to extract.
Template File ... • Required for COF and SOF files. In order to extract a COF
or SOF file, you must create an ASCII template file. The
template file specifies the type and order of data to be
extracted. Each data item is listed on its own line,
specifying field name, character width, and precision for
numeric fields. See the AutoCAD User 's Guide for more
Output File ... • The COF and SOF output gets written to a file with the
default extension .txt. The OXF option creates a file with
the default extension .dxx. This makes it easier to
distinguish the difference between the Oxfout and Oxfin
files, which have the file extension name .rb!
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The program you will use to manipulate the extracted data determines which
format to use.
~ COF template files can contain records to change the standard single quote and
comma delimiter characters to characters of your choice.
£ Extract file names default to the current drawing name and have the extension .txt.
Make sure you do not use the name of a file already on your hard disk.
DDCHPROP 117
RELATED VARIABLES: Attdef, Attdisp, Attedit, Ddatte, Ddattext

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attext, Export
DDCHPROP (Dynamic Dialog CHange PROPerties)

Ddchprop lets you modify properties assigned to objects. It is a subset of the Change and
Ddmodify commands but does not include Change point, Elevation, and Text
modification options. You can achieve the same results using the Chprop command,
where all prompts and options appear at the Command prompt.

Screen menu MODIFY - Ddchpro:
Keyboard DDCHPROP
OPTIONS:
ceeolor BYlAVER (white)
clayer o
celtype B'r'lAYER
eeltseal
thickness
Color • Assigns a Color to an object. See Ddcolor for more detailed

information.
Layer • Moves an object from one Layer to another. See Ddlmodes for
more detailed information.
Linetype • Assigns a Linetype to an object. See Ddltype for more detailed
information.
Linetype Scale • Assigns a Linetype Scale to an object.
Thickness • Assigns an extrusion Thickness to an object.
118 DDCHPROP
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use Regen if your drawing does not reflect any changes you may have with this
command.
~ An alternative to the Chprop command is to preset the values by using the
individual commands of Color (Ddcolor), Layer (Ddlmodes), Linetype (Ddltype),
linetype scale (Celtscale), and Thickness, or by using the Ddemodes dialog box.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cecolor, Celtscale, Celtype, Clayer, Thickness
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Chprop, Color, Ddcolor, Ddemodes,
Ddlmodes, Ddmodify, Layer, Linetype, Thickness
DDCOLOR (Dialog Dialog COLOR)

Ddcolor sets the color for new objects. You can also set the color using the Color
command or Ddemodes dialog box. Depending on your graphics card and its
configuration, you can have up to 255 colors defined in a drawing.

Pull-down Data'" Color
Screen menu DATA'" Color:
Keyboard DDCOLOR
OPTIONS:
Spied Color
<:<JIg.
cecolor
I 0
DDCOLOR 119
Standard Colors • Detennine the Color setting by selecting one of the colored
boxes. The first seven colors have a standard number
assignment regardless of your graphics card:
I = Red 4 = Cyan 6 = Magenta
2 = Yellow 5 = Blue 7 = White
3 = Green
Gray Shades • Represents gray shades assigned to objects. These are
assigned to color numbers 250-255.
Logical colors
BYLAYER • New objects inherit the Color assigned to the Layer upon
which they reside.
BYBLOCK • New objects are drawn in white (or black depending on
your display screen's color setting) until they are saved as a
Block. When the block is Inserted, it inherits the color value
set by the Color command.
Full Color Palette • Represents color numbers 10-249.
Color • Displays your response to the previous options.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You change the display screen colors using the Preference command. Some
Graphic cards have additional features for controlling display colors.
~ You can reassign an object's Color with the Ddchprop, Ddmodify, Change, or
Chprop commands.
~ Layers and Mlstyles have Color options built into their commands.
~ You can obtain multiple line weights, linetypes, and color plots by assigning
colors from your drawing to different pens on your plotter or printer.
:!: Mixing colors on a single layer can become confusing. Using the Layer command
to control color and leaving the Color command set to Bylayer helps you identify
an object's Layer assignment. Changing the object's color is then a simple process
of redefining the Color with the Layer command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cecolor
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Color, Ddemodes, Ddlmodes, Layer, Mlstyle, Plot
120 DDEDIT
DDEDIT (Dynamic Dialog EDIT)

Ddedit lets you edit Text. This includes all Text except that contained in Blocks, Xrefs,
and Text residing on Locked Layers.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu MODIFY - DDEDIT

Keyboard DDEDIT
PROMPTS:
<Select an annotation object>/Undo:
OPTIONS:
Undo • While in the Ddedit command you can undo the last modified text string
and return to the previous value. Once you end the command, the Undo
will undo every modification completed within the command.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This command repeats until you press <Esc> or <Enter> one extra time.
~ The Text Edit dialog box varies depending on the type of object you are editing.
~ Ddedit lets you modify the tag, prompt, and default values of Attribute definitions
(Attdet).
~ Use Ddatte or Attedit to edit Attribute values in Blocks.
~ You can modify Text using the Ddmodify and Change commands.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Ddmodify, Mtext, Mtprop
'DDEMODES (Dynamic Dialog Entity MODES)

Ddemodes sets the default values for the following commands: Color (Ddcolor), Layer
(Ddlmodes), Linetype (Ddltype), text Style, linetype scale (Celtscale), Elevation, and
Thickness. This dialog box displays the latest settings whether you set the values by going
to each individual command or by setting the individual system variables. Any new
objects you create automatically take on the appropriate values.
DDEMODES 121

Object Properties toolbar
Pull-down Data" Object Creation ...

Screen menu DATA" DDemode:
Keyboard DDEMODES
OPTIONS:
Object Q'eatton Modes
cecolor I ~Ior. 10 BYlAYER
clayer L 1.II)'8r..• ] 0
celtype t l..i.ne1ype .•. ] BYlAYER

textstyle
I, Texl Style ... 1NORMAl..
celtscale L,inetype Scale' 10'1 " II
elevation Elevation: 10'0" II
thickness Dickness: 10'0"
I OK '1 L Cancal J II Help... I
- - ~=-=
Color • Sets the Color for new objects. See Ddcolor for more detailed
infonnation.
Layer • Sets the Layer assignment for new objects. See Ddlmodes for
more detailed infonnation.
Linetype • Assigns a Linetype to new objects. See Ddltype for more
detailed infonnation.
Text Style • Assigns a text Style new objects. See Style for more detailed
information.
Linetype Scale: • Assigns a Linetype Scale to new objects.
Elevation • Assigns an Elevation to new objects. See Elev for more
Thickness • Assigns an extrusion Thickness to an object.
122 DDEMODES
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Regardless of these default settings, you can always edit the values assigned to an
object. You may even find it quicker to work on your drawing and change these
values after the fact using Change, Ddmodify, Ddchprop, or Chprop.
~ If you activate the dialog box while in another command, the changes will take
place once you complete the initial command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cecolor, Celtype, Celtscale, Clayer, Textstyle, Elevation,
Thickness
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Color, Ddcolor, Ddlmodes, Ddltype, Elevation, Layer,
Linetype, Style, Thickness
'DDGRIPS (Dynamic Dialog GRIPS)

Ddgrips sets the various system variables assigned to Grips. See the entry named Grip for
more detailed information.

Pull-down Options - Grips ...
Screen menu OPTIONS - DDgrips:
Keyboard DDGRIPS
OPTIONS:
Grips
Seled Sellings
grips IX Enllble Gnp.
gripbiock IX Enable Gnp. With,n B.locks
Gnp Colors
, - - - -- - , . 5 - Blue
gripcoior
griphol 1--..:::.......,-_---'. 1 - Red
gripslze
a
DDIM 123
Select Settings
Enable Grips • Detennines whether Grips are active or inactive.
Enable Grips • Detenmnes whether the Grip's location for Blocks is based
Within Blocks on the Block's insertion point or on the individual objects
defining the Block.
Grip Colors
Unselected ... • Detenmnes the color of non-selected Grips. Non-selected
Grips show the outline of the Grip. Selecting this button
activates the Ddcolor dialog box.
Selected ... • Detenmnes the color of selected Grips. Selected Grips are
filled in. Selecting this button activates the Ddcolor dialog
box.
Grip Size • Detennines the size of Grip boxes.
RELATED VARIABLES: Gripblock, Gripcolor, Griphot, Grips, Gripsize
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: grip
DDIM (Dialog DIMensions)

Ddim gives you the ability to create, save, restore, and modify dimension styles or
temporarily override the default style settings. Dimension styles define how you want
dimensions displayed on your drawing. You can achieve the same results using the
Dimstyle command, where all prompts and options appear at the Command prompt.
You can create a set of related dimension style families for different dimension types in
the same drawing. Each family contains a parent, which reflects the overall characteristics
or variables. Once you set up the parent you can assign individual characteristics to each
member. There are three categories of variables you can set for each member -
Geometry, Fonnat, and Annotation.

Draw toolbar
Pull-down Data - Dimension Style ...

Screen menu DATA-DDim:
Keyboard DDIM
124 DDIM
OPTIONS:
Dimension Styles
ISTANDARD [!] dlmstyle

~IS-T-AN-O-AR--O---===========~=
Geomeby .•
Lmear
format
Rall.,aJ
Angll.lar ~nolatJon ...
Dimension Style
Current • Pick an existing dimension style from the list box. All new
drawings have a style named Standard already created. If a plus
sign (+) appears as a prefix to the name it is because one or
more variables were changed, overriding the current style
settings. You can Save these changes to the style, thereby
updating all the dimensions, or you can leave it alone.
Name • Enter the name of a new dimension style or pick an existing style
from the Current list box. Style names can have up to 31
characters.
Save • Saves a new or updated style listed in the Name edit box.
Rename • Renames an existing style.
Family • Shows which member is being modified when using the
Geometry, Format, and Annotation dialog boxes. Once changes
have been made, remember to use the Save option.
The following three buttons let you define values for the various dimensioning variables.
We have listed the individual variables around the outside of the dialog boxes. Detailed
information can be found for each variable by looking them up individually.
Geometry ... • Controls the appearance of the geometry and overall scale.
DDIM 125
Format. .. • Determines the location of dimension text.

Annotation ... • Defines the appearance of dimension text.
Geometry
dimsd1 DImension Line dimsah
dlmsd2 Supp...... r lSi dimblk
dlmdle n Is dlmblk1
SpACIng: 2nli; dlmblk2
dlmdll
dimelrd
[ Color••• 1 Size: dlmasz, dimtsz
Exten.,on lone Canter
dlmeen
dlmse1
dlmse2 Suppre .. · r. III r 2nd
dlmexe ElIIen810n
dimexo Ongin Olloet
dlmelre
SCGle
dimscale Ol!.arell Scele : 11.00000
Format
Text
dimupt r; User Dehned
dimtofl r: Foret! Lone Inside

fi
y=~=
dimfit
dimsoxd
IBesl Fil l!J IX lnslde Horozonlel
IX QUIllde Horizontel
dlmtih
dlmtoh
dlmtix Honlont,,/ JU8bhc..tlOn VertoCGI JUlblic..toon
@
dimJust Centered Canlered
dlmtad
126 DDIM
Annotation
All male Un". dlmalt
dlmaltu
dlmunlt
dlmpost i!refiJc dlmapost

dlmpost S.uffIX dlmapost
dlmtol Teld
TolerClJlC8
dlmllm
dimgap l!J Slyte STANDARD dimtxsty
dlmtp I :11 r Helghl 101 800 dlmtxt
dlmtm I 10.0900 dlmgap
,
I
dlmtolJ IMiddle ttl IBYBLOCK dlmelrt
dlmtfae I dlmrnd
ANNOT AnON - Primary Units
Primary Units
UnIts Angles
dlmunlt IDecim",
.~---~~-~~~~=---~
[!] IDecimal Degrees l!J dlmaunlt
Tolerance
PraosllI.n
dlmdee
~~~~~~~~-~-~
[!] 10.0000
~~~~
[!] dlmtdee
Zero Supprenion
III 0 [eel r: Lea Ing III OF.el dlmtzln
dlmzln
III 0 Inches rTrelhl!.g III Oln"'es
Seele
dlmlfae loMelI!; 11.00000 r: Peper SpClCB Only

OK
DDINSERT 127
ANNOTATION - Alternate Units

Alternate Units
!.In,ls Angles
dlmaltu OecimoJ ! IOeci moJ Degrees
Dlmon •• on TolerlltlCB
eJect"on' PrU(:I8iJtrl :
dlmaltd 10 .00
2ero Suppres"on
W 0.00 dlmalttd
2ero Suppres"on
r L.elldlng Iii" OEeel r LeadIng III 0 FM.el
dlmaltz dlmalttz
C IrDlhng Iii" 0 Inches r:i TtDlhng Iii" Oln(;lle.
Seal
dlmaltf Unell£ r
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can remove unused Dimstyles with the Purge command.
l The dimension variables that you cannot save as part of a dimension style are
Dimaso and Dimsho.
l The names of Xref styles cannot be changed, renamed, or be current. You can
create a style containing the Xref defaults. Highlight the Style from the Current
text box, enter a new name in the Name text box, and click on the Save button. An
alternative method is to Xbind the dimension style.
RELATED VARIABLES: See the previous dialog box annotations for a complete
listing.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dim, Diml, Dimstyle
DDINSERT (Dynamic Dialog INSERT)

Ddinsert merges Blocks or other drawing files into the current drawing. You can achieve
the same results using the Insert command, where all prompts and options appear at the
Command prompt.
128 DDINSERT

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - DDinsert

Keyboard DDINSERT
OPTIONS:
Insert
Block. .. • This activates the Defmed Blocks dialog box listing all the
Blocks currently defmed in the drawing. You can control
the listing of Block names by using wild-card characters in
the Pattern edit box.
File ... • This opens the Select Drawing File dialog box listing all
the drives, directories, and drawing file names accessible
by your computer.
Specify Parameters • Checking this box lets you manually complete the
on Screen command by returning you to the display screen. You are
prompted to pick an insertion point, scale factor, and
rotation angle.
• Leaving this box blank lets you enter the insertion point,
scale, and rotation angle before exiting the command.
DDINSERT 129
Explode • This detennines whether to keep the Block or File intact

or insert the Block or File as individual objects. If you
check this box you can only assign one scale factor for X,
Y, and Z which cannot be negative.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can temporarily merge two or more drawings using the Xref (Attach/Detach)
command.
to The insertion point in the drawing corresponds to the Block insertion base point or
a drawing's base point.
~ You can convert a Block back to its original objects using the Explode command.
The only way to turn the objects back into Blocks is to use the Insert command (if
a Block by that name still exists) or create a new Block.
~ Once you Insert a Block, you can edit it with commands such as Move, Copy,
Array, and Mirror. The objects that make up the Block cannot be individually
modified unless they are Exploded.
~ Responding with negative values to the scale factor prompt Inserts the Block
mirrored.
~ A 1 x I-unit Block can be sized dynamically to fill a variety of box drawing needs.
Every time you insert it, you can give the actual size of the desired box. The X
scale factor becomes the width and the Y scale factor the height. If you are
working in 3-D, you can make a 3-D box with a I-unit Z value.
~ You can rename a Block with the Rename or Ddrename command.
~ Inserted blocks reside on the Layer that was current when they were inserted.
Objects brought in with an asterisk reside on the Layers from which they were
created. Exploding Blocks returns each object to its original Layer.
~ The system variable Attreq, if set to 0, lets you insert Attributes without prompting
and applies the Attribute's default values. For normal prompting set the variable to
1.
~ The system variable Attdia, if set to 1, will cause a dialog box to appear when you
insert Blocks with Attributes. The box displays the prompt and default value,
which you can edit freely. A value of 0 causes attribute prompting at the
Command prompt.
130 DDINSERT
~ You can merge two files with the Insert or Xref (Bind). The difference between
these two methods are that named items (Blocks, Layers, Views, etc.) merge when
Inserting but remain separate when Binding (Xref).
~ If you redefme a Block, the drawing must Regenerate before you can see the
changes.
~ If you modify a Block containing Attribute defmitions and insert the modified
Block into a drawing containing old Attributes, any Constant Attributes are
replaced by new Constant Attributes. If an Attribute definition is removed,
Attributes will be removed from existing Blocks. Variable Attributes remain
unchanged even if their defmition is omitted in the new Block. New variable
Attributes will be included in all new insertions, but will not appear in previous
Block insertions.
If you want existing Attributes to be completely updated, you must replace the old
Blocks with new ones or use the Attredef command.
~ You can Insert a Block or drawing file and assign it a different name in your
current drawing. At the Block name prompt, type in the Block name, include an =,
and enter the new Block name. You can only do this using the Insert command;
this does not work with the Ddinsert dialog box.
~ Entering a P before Scale (PS), Xscale (PX), Yscale (PY), Zscale (PZ), or Rotate
(PR) at the Insertion point prompt lets you temporarily preview how the Block will
look while being dragged in the drawing. You cannot preview or preset values if
you are Inserting with the asterisk option. You can only do this using the Insert
command; this does not work with the Ddinsert dialog box.
RELATED VARIABLES: Attdia, Attdisp, Attreq, Expert, Insbase, Insname
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Attedit, Attredef, Base, Block, Ddatte, Explode,
Insert, Minsert, Rename, Wblock, wild-card
'DDLMODES (Dynamic Dialog Layer MODES)

Layers act as transparent drawing overlays. The Ddlmode dialog box is used to control
Layer accessibility, status, color, visibility, and linetype. It also manages the Vplayer
command. You can achieve the same results using the Layer and Vplayer commands,
where all prompts and options appear at the Command prompt.
DDLMODES 131

Object Properties toolbar W~
Draw toolbar ~
Pull-down Data" Layers ...

Screen menu DATA" DDlmode:
Keyboard DDLMODES
OPTIONS:
Layer Control
Curranl layer; 0
leltBrNnma SI,.Ia Color unetypa
n wlti! ou
Current Layer • Lists the Layer name that is current. Most new objects are
automatically assigned to the current Layer.
Layer Name/State/ • Displays the status of each Layer. You can select one or
Color/Linetype more of the Layers listed and modify its Color, Linetype,
and Visibility settings.
• Picks the Layer a second time if you want it unselected.

Select All • Selects all Layers listed in the Layer Name list.
Clear All • Deselects all Layers listed in the Layer Name list.
132 DDLMODES
New • Creates New Layer(s). Enter the Layer's name in the

Layer text box and select New. You can enter multiple
Layer names by placing a comma between each Layer
name, leaving out any spaces.
• Layer names can contain up to 31 characters.
Current • Makes the selected Layer the default. If more than one
Layer is selected this feature is inactive.
• Most new objects are assigned to the Current Layer.
Rename • Renames a Layer. Select a Layer and enter a new name in
the Layer text box and then click on the Rename button. If
more than one Layer is selected this feature is inactive.
On I Off • Turns Layers On (visible) and Off (invisible).
Thaw I Freeze • Thaws (visible) and freezes (invisible) Layers.
Unlock I Lock • Determines whether objects can be displayed but not
modified.
Cur VP: Thw I Frz • When Tilemode is set to 0 you can set the Layer visibility
per viewport.
New VP: Thw I Frz • When Tilemode is set to 0 you can preset the Layer
visibility per viewport for new Layers.
Set Color... • Assigns Colors to Layers.
• See the Ddcolor dialog box for more detailed information.
Set Ltype ... • Assigns Linetypes to Layers.
• See the Ddltype dialog box for more detailed information.
Filters • Controls the list of Layers shown in the Layer name list.
Once you set up parameters you can use the Select All
button and change values such as Linetype, Color, etc.
On • Activate any changes made in the Set Layers Filters dialog
box.
Set... • Control the filters by entering wild-card parameters for
any of the characteristics assigned to Layers (OnfOff,
Freeze/Thaw, etc.). All parameters default back to their
original settings once you end the drawing session.
DDLMODES 133
Set Layer Rlters

Qn/Off: Both
freeze/Thaw: IBoth
Lock/!J..nlock: Both
Cunent yPort: IBoth
HewVports: IBoth
L.ayer Names: 1*
kolorS: 1*
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You cannot Purge (delete) or Rename layer O. However, you can change its Color,
Linetype, display options (On/Off, Freeze/Thaw), and accessibility (Lock/Unlock).
~ If you set Color and Linetype Bylayer, any objects you draw default to the Color
and Linetype of the current Layer.
~ You may fmd it easier and quicker to stay on one Layer while drawing new
objects. Later, you can use one of the following commands: Change, Chprop,
Ddchprop, or Ddmodify, and reassign objects to their proper Layers.
t: Blocks containing objects drawn on Layer 0 adopt the current Layer's properties
upon Insertion.
t: Turning Tilemode Off (0) lets you detennine a Layer's visibility by viewport.
to You can delete unreferenced Layers with the Purge command.
t: You can Rename layers with any of the following commands: Rename, Ddrename,
Ddemodes, or Ddlmodes.
t: You can change the Layer settings for Xref drawings. If you set Visretain to
these settings are retained by the host drawing.
134 DDLMODES
~ You can locate all the objects on specific Layers for editing using the Filter
command.
~ Issuing most of the rendering commands (Light, Render, Scene, etc.) automatically
creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you cancel out of the command
this Layer is still created.
~ The various Layer settings are inactive (gray) if no Layer names are selected.
Once one or more Layer names are selected the options are active and appear bold.
l You can make a Layer Current that is Off, but you cannot make a Frozen Layer
Current.
l Associative dimensioning creates a Layer named Defpoints (definition points).
The following are some of the unique characteristics of this Layer: This Layer will
not Plot even when On and Thawed. Renaming this Layer will cause it to Plot.
Objects on this Layer use the Color and Linetype and Visibility settings of Layer
O.
~ The Ddemodes Layer option also actives the Ddlmodes dialog box.
RELATED VARIABLES: Clayer

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Chprop, Color, Ddemodes, Ddltype,
Ddmodify, Layer, Linetype, Ltscale, Vplayer, wild-card
'DDLTYPE (Dynamic Dialog LineTYPE)

Ddltype assigns a Linetype for new objects and loads Linetype definitions stored in
library files.
You can achieve some of the same fimctionality using the Linetype command. Ddltype
lets you determine the ISO Pen Width by setting the linetype scale (Ltscale) factor. You
must set this manually when using the Linetype command. The Linetype command has a
feature to create New Linetypes. This option is not available when using the Ddltype
dialog box.

Object Properties toolbar III
Pull-down Data ... Linetype ...
Screen menu DATA'" DDltype
Keyboard DDLTYPE
DDLTYPE 135
OPTIONS:
Select Unetype
Loadad linetype5
BYlAYER +
8YBLOCt<.
CONTlNUOUS
----W Llnetyplt SCIlIIt. ILOOOO Itscale
celtype
Loaded a Lists the Linetypes currently loaded into the drawing.

Linetypes Bylayer, Byblock, and Continuous are always present.
a Selecting a Linetype makes it the default or current.

ISO Pen Width a Determines the pen width for ISO Linetypes.
Linetype Scale a Determines the overall scale factor applied to all Linetypes.
This increases or decreases the size of dashes, dots, spaces,
and annotation in complex Linetypes.
Linetype a Displays the name of the current Linetype.
Load ... a Lets you load Linetypes by activating the Load or Reload
Linetypes dialog box.
File a The files acad.lin and ltypeshp.lin supplied with AutoCAD
are located in the AutoCAD support directory. Ltypeshp.lin
defmes complex Linetypes that contain special characters,
along with dashes, dots, and spaces.
Select All/ a You can individually select the Linetypes listed or use the
Clear All Select All and Clear All buttons.
136 DDLTYPE
Load or Reload Unetypes
as
__ " __ " __ " _ 't
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Two special Linetypes are Bylayer and Byblock. Bylayer means that new objects
receive the Linetype of the Layers on which they reside; Byblock means that new
objects are drawn with the Continuous Linetype until they are saved as a Block.
When the block is Inserted, it inherits the Linetype set by the Linetype command"
~ You can reassign an object's Linetype with the Ddchprop, Ddmodify, Change, or
Chprop command.
~ Polylines offer more flexibility by controlling the linetype pattern generation
around the vertices. The linetype can be continuous in that all the inside vertices
are ignored and do not reset the pattern. See the Pedit command for more detailed
information.
~ You can control the spacing of dash, dots, and spaces with the Ltscale and
Celtscale system variables or by creating New Linetypes.
~ You can delete and rename all Linetypes except Continuous, Bylayer, and
Byblock. Delete Linetypes with Purge; Rename Linetypes with Ddrename or
Rename. You can bring in Linetypes from other drawings with the Xbind and Xref
(Bind) commands"
~ Using noncontinuous Linetypes can slow down Redraws and Regenerations. You
can use the Continuous Linetype until you are ready to Plot, and then use the
Change or Chprop command or respecify a Layer's Linetype.
DDLTYPE 137
\) Some plotters can produce their own linetypes based on an object's color. To take
advantage of these hardware linetypes and maximize display speed, use only the
continuous linetype, and key linetypes to different object colors.
\) You can reassign and save an xref layer's linetype by setting Visretain to 1. This is
only saved in the drawing referencing the Xref.
\) Once a Linetype is Loaded it does not need to access the library file from which it
came.
\) You can set Psltscale and control Paper space linetype scaling.
! You must first load the different Linetypes (except Continuous, Bylayer, and
Byblock) before they can be referenced by other commands. The only exception is
the Layer command.
! Mixing Linetypes on a single Layer can become confusing. Using the Layer
command to control Linetype and leaving Linetype set Bylayer helps you identify
the Layer an object is on and makes changing Linetypes a simple process of
respecifying the Linetype with the Layer command.
! Some plotters do not support hardware linetypes based on an object's color
assignment. To use AutoCAD's Linetypes, set your plotter to plot continuous lines
at all times.
! If you change an object's Linetype, the drawing must Regenerate in order for you
to see the results.
RELATED VARIABLES: Celtype, Ltscale, Plinegen, PsItscale
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Bind, Ddemodes, Ddlmodes, Layer, Ltscale, Plot, Xref
EXAMPLE:
Hidden Linetype
Celtsca Ie = .5
--o~----~o~------- Fence Complex Linetype

Celtscale = .5
- - GAS - - GAS - - GAS - - Gas Comple x Linety pe
-GAS-GAS-GAS-GAS-GAS-GAS-GA'- Celtscale = .5
138 DDMODIFY
DDMODIFY (Dynamic Dialog MODIFY)

Ddmodify lets you change existing objects and their properties one at a time.

Pull-down Edit ... Properties ...

Screen menu MODIFY'" Modify:
Keyboard DDMODIFY
OPTIONS:
The type of object you select determines the information displayed in the Modify dialog
box. The following dialog box is an example of the choices for modifying a Line.
Modify Une
Properties
cecolor Handle : 20
clayer Ducknsss: 10.0000
celtype unetype ~caI8 : 1.0000
DsltaXYZ.
X I 0000
Y 00000
2. 00000
leng1h 1 0000
DDMODIFY 139
Properties • Lets you change the color, Layer, Linetype, Thickness,

and Linetype Scale assigned to the object.
From Point, To Point • Assigns new coordinates. The Pick Point < options let
you pick points directly from the drawing; the X, Y, and
Z edit boxes let you type the exact coordinate points.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When changing the Elevation of a Line, 3-D Poly, or 3-D Face, all points must
share the same Z value. You can relocate an object along the Z axis with the Move
command.
~ An alternative to the Ddmodify command is to preset the values by using the
individual commands of Color/Ddcolor, Ddim, Elevation, Layer/Ddlmodes,
Ltype/Ddltype, Ltscale, Thickness, and text Style or by using the Ddemodes dialog
box. Change these values before creating new objects.
~ Chprop, Ddchprop, and Change are alternatives to the Ddmodify command.
However, all three commands do not offer the Elevation option, and Chprop and
Ddchprop contain only the Properties option. Chprop issues its options at the
Command prompt; Ddchprop is in the dialog box fonnat.
~ It may be faster to use the Change, Chprop, or Ddchprop command because you
can manipulate multiple objects whereas with Ddmodify you can only manipulate
one object at a time.
~ As an alternative you may want to use Grips, Trim, Extend, or Lengthen when
modifying coordinate points.
~ It is easier and faster to use the Ddedit command when modifying attribute
definitions (Attdet) and text (Dtext, Text, Mtext, Dimension) strings.
:l Assigning a Thickness to the following objects has no effect: 3-D Solids, 3-D
Faces, 3-D Polylines, Polygon Meshes, Splines, Mlines, Mtext, and dimensions.
:l Once you complete the Ddmodify command, the drawing must Regenerate in
order for you to see the results.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Chprop, Ddchprop, Ddedit, Extend, grips,
Lengthen, Mtprop, Trim
140 DDOSNAP
'DDOSNAP (Dynamic Dialog Object SNAP)

Ddosnap lets you preset one or more object snaps (Osnap) and lets you change the size of
the Aperture box. Object snaps let you locate precise points on objects during point
selection. When you enable Osnap(s), the cursor displays an Aperture box at its cross
hairs. This box is sometimes confused with the Pickbox. You can achieve the same results
using the Osnap and Aperture commands, where all prompts and options appear at the
Command prompt.

Standard toolbar
Pull-down Options -. Running Object Snap ...

Screen menu **** -. DDosnap or OPTIONS -. DDosnap:
Keyboard DDOSNAP
OPTIONS:
Running Object Snap

osmode Select Selbnga
r: EndpOint r; Inlurt.on
r: Midpoint n PerpunJilcul1lf
r kentur r: Iangent
r Jiodu r; NUlll"Bst
r DUlldnlnt
r. lnteraBellon
ApurtUrB SiZB
aperture
Select Settings • Activates one or more Osnaps.

Clear All • Deactivates active osnaps.
Aperture Size • Sets the Aperture box size.
DDOSNAP 141
OSNAPCHART
E M I A C Q P T N I N
N I N P E U E A 0 N E
D D T P N A R N D A COMMENTS
Arc ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./
Circle ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./
Donut I ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ 2 polyline arcs
Ellipse I ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ polyline
Ellipse (true) ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ 1 endpoint & midpoint
Elliptical Arc ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./
Line ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./
M1ine ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ each line is treated separately
Pline I ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ not including pline arcs
Point ./ ./
Polygon I ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./
Ray ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ 1 endpoint
Rectang I same as pline
Region ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ varies
Sketch see line & pline
Solid ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./
Spline ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./
Trace ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ each line is treated separately
Xline ./ ./ ./ ./ ./
Text ./
Tolerance ./
Mtext ./
Block ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ varies
Group ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ varies
Dimension ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ varies
t Polyline objects - Regardless of their widths, the Osnaps are based on their centerline.
142 DDOSNAP
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can override a running mode by typing an Osnap mode (only the first three
characters are required) when a point is requested or by using your pointing device
(see Osnap).
t. Keep your Aperture and Pickbox different sizes to distinguish between them.
t. You will not see rubber band or temporary lines for Tangent and Perpendicular at
the "From point" prompt when going from a line to another object. The rubber
band appears at the "To point" prompt.
t. Grips and Osnaps sometimes share the same locations.
~ When all of the Osnaps are inactive you may still see a box located at the
intersection of the screen's cross hairs. This may be because the system variables
Grips or Pickfrrst are active.
~ Running Osnaps are inactive during object selection. To apply an Osnap, select the
desired temporary Osnap.
RELATED VARIABLES: Aperture, grips, Osmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Aperture, Osnap, point entry
'DDPTYPE (Dynamic Dialog Point TYPE)

Ddptype displays and sets the current Point style and size.

Pull-down Options -. Display -. Point Style
Screen menu OPTIONS -. DISPLAY -. DDptype:
Keyboard DDPTYPE
DDPTYPE 143
OPTIONS:
Point Style • Select a point style icon.
Point Size • Point size is set either relative to the screen or in absolute units.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can locate the center of a Point using the Node Osnap.
~ You can have only one Pdmode and Pdsize setting at a time in a drawing. If you
change the settings, the drawing will globally update at the next Regeneration.
Points that are placed on the Defpoints Layer by associative dimensioning are not
affected by Pdmode and Pdsize and are the only exceptions.
~ Unlike Blips, Points are part of the drawing and will plot. If you do not want the
Points to plot, you can Erase them, turn Off or Freeze the Layer on which they
reside, place on a Layer named Defpoints, or set Pdmode to I.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pdmode, Pdsize
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Divide, grips, Measure, Osnap - Node, Point
144 DDRENAME
DDRENAME (Dynamic Dialog RENAME)

Ddrename renames Blocks, Dimstyle, Layers, Linetypes, Styles, UCS, Views, and
Viewport configurations. You can use the wild-card characters ? and * to rename more
than one item at a time.
You can achieve the same results using the Rename command, where all prompts and
options appear at the Command prompt.

Pull-down Data - Rename ...
Screen menu DATA - Rename:
Keyboard DDRENAME
OPTIONS:
Rename
Named Ob eCls
Block
Oimstyle
--
~
1ems
1000R
lELEC
:,
Ll!YBr ~ 1flOOR
Ltype lFURN :.
Ii
Style 1NOTES
UC;O IWALL
~
View I.,.;.. IW1NOOW
d
QldNome: I" JI
:11 Benome To 1I~:1 JI
Ir OK J II' Concel 1 li tJ.elp._ ]
Named Objects • Lists the groups of named objects that can be Renamed.
Items • Lists the individual items that can be Renamed based on the
Named Objects selection.
Old Name • Lists the item selected from the Items list box.
Rename To • Enter a valid item name.

DDRMODES 145
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Rename drawing files with the File Utilities menu.
~ You can Rename layers with Ddlmodes or Ddemodes, UCS with Dducs, mline
definitions with Mlstyle, and dimension styles with Ddim.
~ If you have to Rename the same items for more than one drawing, create a Script
routine and automate the process.
~ Named items are not case-sensitive.
l You cannot Rename Layer 0; external reference Layers; and the Linetypes
Continuous, Bylayer, and Byblock.
l You can Rename the text Style Standard but you cannot Purge that Style.
l You cannot Rename the Mline style named Standard.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Files, Rename
'DDRMODES (Dynamic Dialog dRawing MODES)

Ddrmodes lets you access a group of drawing tools that are often used to assist other
commands when creating and editing drawings.

Pull-down Options ... Drawing Aids ...
Screen menu OPTIONS'" DDrmode:
Keyboard DDRMODES
146 DDRMODES
OPTIONS:
Drawing Aids
Modes Snop iind
orthomode IX Q1tho IX On grldmode
fill mode IX SolidEili ~SplIClng 0.Z500
gridunit
qtextmode r QUIck TBXI YSpoClng 10.z500
blipmode IX IIhpI SnopAngle
highlight IX HiSlhhghl X BAse snapstyl
pickstyie IX Groups Y BOlli. Iop Ii" Bight snaplsopair
snapmode snapang
snapunlt
Modes
Ortho • Turns Ortho On and Off. See the Ortho command for more
Solid Fill • Turns Fill On and Off. See the Fill command for more detailed
information.
Quick Text • Turns Qtext On and Off. See the Qtext command for more
Blips • Turns Blips On and Off. See the Blipmode command for more
Highlight • Turns Highlighting On and Off. See the Highlight command
Groups • Turns Group Selection On and Off. See the Group command
Snap • Turns Snap On and Off and sets Snap values. See the Snap
DDS ELECT 147
Grid • Turns Grid On and Off and sets Grid values. See the Grid
Isometric • Sets up the drawing environment to work in Isometric mode.
Snap/Grid See the Snap and Isoplane commands for more detailed
information.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When setting the X value for Snap and Grid, the Y defaults to the X value. To
create a different Y value or aspect, set the X value and then set the Y. This is the
same as using the Aspect option when using the Snap and Grid commands.
~ You may find it faster to use control keys, function keys, or the status line bar to
toggle settings on and off and change Isoplanes.
£ If you activate the dialog box while in another command, some changes will not
take place until you complete the initial command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Blipmode, Fi11mode, Gridmode, Gridunit, Highlight,
Orthomode, Pickstyle, Qtextmode, Snapang, Snapisopair, Snapbase, Snapmode, Snapstyl,
Snapunit
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Blipmode, Fill, Grid, Group, Isoplane, keys/toggles,
Ortho, Qtext, Snap, transparent commands
'DDSELECT (Dynamic Dialog SELECT)

Ddselect lets you access a group of settings that help determine the way objects are
chosen. They are the parameters, or rules, used during the selection set process.

Pull-down Options .. Selection ...
Screen menu OPTIONS" DDselec:
Keyboard DDSELECT:
148 DDSELECT
OPTIONS:
Object Selection Settings

Selecbon Modes ~
plckflrst III fioun(Ve,b SelectIon

pickadd r !.lse Sit ," to Add
plckdrag r ~ess ftIId Or..g
pickauto III Implied Windowing

plckstyle III Object GroupIng
II .D.efault ]
PiCkhox~Z8
plckbox
Min Max
0
lOB [] I+l
sortents II Object Sort Melhod _ I
I ( OK ] ! I! Cft/Icel I I tlelp._ I
Selection Modes
Noun/Verb • Detennines the order of execution of certain commands. When
Selection it is enabled, you can first pick objects before issuing
commands; when it is disabled you must first begin the
command before selecting objects. This affects the following
commands:
Array Ddchprop Hatch Rotate
Block Ddmodify List Scale
Change Dview Mirror Stretch
Chprop Erase Move Wblock
Copy Explode
• When this command is enabled you will see the Pickbox
located at the intersection of the screen's cross hairs.
Use Shift to • Controls how objects are added or removed during the
Add selection set process. When the command is enabled you are
required to hold down the shift key to add more objects to a
selection set. This is only when picking individual objects. If
you do not hold down the shift key, every time you select
objects the previous selected objects becomes unselected.
DDUCS 149
• When the command is disabled during select set prompts you

can add as many new objects as you wish to the selection set. If
you want to remove any objects hold down the shift key and
pick those to unselect.
Press and • Determines the method used to define Window and Crossing
Drag object selections. Selecting this box requires you to hold down
the button while defining the two points for the Window and
Crossing options. Once you pick the first point, drag the
pointing devices to the diagonal point and release the button.
Implied • Controls the method by which objects are selected during the
windowing object selection prompt. Selecting this box lets you use the
Window or Crossing selection if your pick fails to select an
object. Moving the cross hairs to the right acts as a Window to
the left a Crossing.
Object • Determines whether an object belonging to a Group is selected
Grouping by itself or whether all the objects assigned to that Group are
also selected.
Default • Resets the Selection Modes to their default settings.
Pickbox Size • Sets the size of the target box used during object selection.
Object Sort • Controls the display of object sort order operations.
Method .. .
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> If NOun/Verb is disabled you may still see a box located at the intersection of the
screen's cross hairs. This may be because the system variables Grips or Osmode
are active.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pickadd, Pickauto, Pickbox, Pickdrag, Pickfirst, Sortents
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Select
DDUCS (Dynamic Dialog User Coordinate System)

Dducs restores, deletes, and renames saved User Coordinate Systems (UCS). This is a
subset of the UCS command, where all prompts and options appear at the Command
prompt.
150 DDUCS

Standard or ues toolbar
Pull-down View'" Named ues ...

Screen menu VIEW'" DDucs:
Keyboard DDues
OPTIONS:
UCS Control
~cs NllITIus
"WORlD'"
"PREVIOUS-
triO-NAME" C4irr8l1t JI ucsname
.....
!
ucsorg
II - Cum'~t
IL ~
H Ljst.. 1 ucsxdlr
ucsydlr
III' Rename To: II"NO NAME'"
I. OK I l Cancel I II tielp ,_ I
ues Names 8 Lists the names of all the user coordinate systems defined in the
drawing; *WORLD* is always the first option. Defining a user
coordinate system without giving it a name causes the word
*PREVIOUS* to be displayed. If your current ues is not
named, the word *NO NAME* appears. This is the same as
using the question mark (?) option of the ues command.
eurrent 8 Restores and sets you to an existing ues selected from the ues
Names list. This is the same as using the Restore option of the
ues command. Selecting Previous lets you backtrack up to ten
previous coordinate systems for paper space and ten previous
coordinate systems for model space. This is the same as using
the Previous option of the ues command.
DDUCSP 151
Delete • Deletes a ues selected from the ues Names list. You cannot
delete *WORLD* and *PREVIOUS*. This is the same as using
the Delete option of the ues command.
List... • Lists the origin point and the direction of its X, Y, and Z axes
relative to the current ues. This is the same as using the
question mark (?) option of the ues command.
Rename To • Renames the ues selected from the ues Names list. You
cannot rename *WORLD* and *PREVIOUS*. This is the same
as using the ues option of the Ddrename or Rename command.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Use Dducsp if you want to use AutoeAD's predefined uess.
~ Each viewport retains its own ues setting.
RELATED VARIABLES: Ucsfollow, Ucsicon, Ucsname, Ucsorg, Ucsxdir, Ucsydir,

Viewctr, Viewdir, Worducs
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrename, Dducsp, Rename, ues
DDUCSP (Dynamic Dialog User Coordinate System Preset)

Dducsp provides a dialog box containing preset user coordinate system (UeS) views.

Standard or ues toolbar
Pull-down View - Preset ues ...

Screen menu VIEW - DDucsp:
Keyboard DDUeSp
152 DDUCSP
OPTIONS:
UCS Orientation
Relative to Current ues • Select an image tile and set the ues relative to the
current ues
Absolute to wes • Select an image tile and set the ues relative to the
absolute wes.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use Dducs or ues if you want to define your own uess.
~ Each viewport retains its own ues setting.

Viewctr, Viewdir, Worlducs
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Plan, ues, Ucsicon
'DDUNITS (Dynamic Dialog UNITS)

Ddunits controls the input and display format of coordinates, distances, and angles. You
specify the system of units, the precision, the system of angle measure, the precision of
angle display, and the direction of angles.
You can achieve the same results using the Units command, where all prompts and
options appear at the Command prompt.
DDUNITS 153

Pull-down Data - Units ...
Screen menu DATA - Units ...
Keyboard DDUNITS
OPTIONS:
Units Control
lunits Units .Mg1a8 aunlts
(i" Oac:unel Oagraas
Oag/Yln/Sac
Greda
iladlllllS
Suryayor
luprec auprec
Units a Specifies the units of measure.
Precision a Specifies the number of digits past the decimal place or the
smallest fraction of an inch to display.
Angles a Specifies the format for angle measurements.
Precision • Selects the precision with which angles are displayed.
154 DDUNITS
Direction Control
angbase Angla 0 OuactJon
Ie ,l;.ast 0.0
900
180.0
2100
Plck/Typa
angdlr
Direction ...
Angle 0 Direction
• Set angle 0 equal to East, North, West, South, or Other. Other
lets you pick an angle on your drawing, or you can enter it in the
Angle text box.
Counter-Clockwise/Clockwise
• Direction for angle measurement.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can change the Units settings as often as you want.
t> The format for entering 3'-5 1/2" is 3'5-1/2 or 3'5-1.5. The inch character is
optional.
t> You can enter angles in radians or grads format even if the current Units setting is
for another format. Enter the suffix "r" for radians or "g" for grads. Do not include
the suffix if the format is current.
t> You can override the current angle format and enter angles in decimal degrees
relative to AutoCAD's default orientation (zero degrees equals 3 o'clock) and
direction (counterclockwise) by preceding the angle with two angle brackets (<<).
Preceding the angle with three angle brackets («<) overrides only the orientation
and direction and allows the angle to be specified in the current angle units format.
DDVIEW 155
t> You can set dimensioning units (primary and alternate) different from the Units
setting.
~ Civil engineering drawings are usually created in decimal units with the
convention that 1.0 equals 1'-0". If you change the units to Architectural, 1.0
becomes 1". If necessary, you can Scale the drawing 12 times to have 1.0 equal to
1'-0".
RELATED VARIABLES: Angbase, Angdir, Aunits, Auprec, Lunits, Luprec, Unitmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Units
DDVIEW (Dynamic Dialog View)

The Ddview command saves the current viewport or a user-definable window, to a name
for future retrieval. It provides a way to return quickly to certain designated portions of
the drawing. You can achieve the same results using the View command, where all
prompts and options appear at the Command prompt.

Standard toolbar
Pull-down View'" Named Views ...

Screen menu VIEW'" DDview:
Keyboard DDVIEW
OPTIONS:
View Control
1 ~8W8
·CURRENr MSPACE ~
II Restore View. "CURRENr
1!lr Bestore l lr Ii- - 'II,-D~ICtO- 'I t DII..aipbOft __ ]

IITID I II Cancel '1 If l::I.elp .., 1
156 DDVIEW
Views • Lists the names of all the Views defined in the drawing,
including the space (Paper space, Model space) they reference.
Restore • Displays a saved View highlighted in the View list. If you
restore a Model space view while working in Paper space, you
are asked to select a Viewport. The Viewport must be On and
Active. You are then switched to Model space.
• You cannot restore a Paper space view when working in Model

space. However, you can do this using the View command if
Tilemode is Off (0).
New... • Opens another dialog box letting you save the current display, or
lets you define a windowed area in your drawing. A text box is
provided for you to enter the View's name. Before exiting you
can Save the View.
Delete • Removes a defined View highlighted in the View list.
Description... • Provides specific information about each View.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ View names can be up to 31 characters long.
~ The Plot command gives you the option of plotting a saved View.
~ You can specify a predefined View for display before beginning a drawing
session. When Filedia is set to 1 you can pick the Select Initial View option. When
Filedia is set to 0, at the "Enter name of drawing" prompt type the drawing name
followed by a comma and the view name.
~ Zoom Previous includes Restored Views.
~ Rename Views with the Ddrename or Rename command.
l The View command does not issue a warning when you give a View the same
name as an existing View. Ddview does provide a warning message.
l If you have difficulty accessing the View as a transparent command, check the
Viewres and Regenauto settings. Set Viewres to Fast Zooms and Regenauto to
Off.
l Most Views can be restored transparently. However, you cannot execute a
transparent View when working in Paper space or during the following commands:
Vpoint, Dview, Zoom, View, or Pan.
DDVPOINT 157
RELATED VARIABLES: Viewctr, Viewdir, Viewsize, Viewtwist, Vsmax, Vsmin

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrename, Rename, View
DDVPOINT (Dynamic Dialog ViewPOINT)

Ddvpoint lets you specify the direction and angle for viewing a drawing by selecting a
3-D viewpoint. Issuing the command regenerates the drawing in parallel projection from
the 3-D point that you specify.
You can achieve the same results using the Vpoint command.

Screen menu VIEW - Vpoint: - DDvpoint
Keyboard DDVPOINT
OPTIONS:
Viewpoint Presets
Set Viewing Angles
@ All.olllle 10 WCS
IMAGE TILES
Set Viewing • Sets the viewing angles absolute to the wes or relative to
Angles the ues.
From: X Axis • Defines the angle from the X axis. Enter the viewing angle
in the text box or select the image tile. The black arm
represents the new angle.
158 DDVPOINT
XY Plane • Defines the angle from the XY plane. Enter the angle in the
text box or select the image tile. The black arm represents
the new angle.
Set to Plan View • Sets you to the Plan View of the current UCS.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Vpoint can only display parallel projection. To generate perspectives, use the
Dview Command.
£ You cannot use the Vpoint command in Paper space.
£ Vpoint resizes the screen to include the entire drawing. Whenever possible, save
the screen display with the View command. Use the View Restore option to bring
back the different Views.
£ You cannot control the distance from which you are viewing an object, only the
orientation. To control the distance, use the Dview command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Target, Viewctr, Viewdir, Viewsize, Vsmax, Vsmin,
Worldview
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Plan, Vpoint
EXAMPLE: See VPOINT
DEL (DELete)
Del is an alias for the OS (Operating System) command Del or Delete. This command
deletes or removes files from your computer. It does not erase objects in your drawing. If
you want to erase objects or parts of objects in your drawing, use commands such as
Erase, Break, or Trim. A safer method for erasing files is to use the File Utilities dialog
box (Files) supplied with AutoCAD or the FileManager program supplied with Windows.
Del is defined in a customizable file named acad.pgp.

Keyboard DEL
PROMPTS:
File to delete:
DELOBJ 159
OPTIONS:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> If you type the word Del to activate the DOS delete command and you receive the
error message "Unknown command ... " it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate
the file named acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modified the
file. Acad.pgp is usually located in the AutoCAD support directory.
t> Delete existing UCS, Views, Vports, Viewports, Xrefs within their own command
options.
t> Use the Purge command to delete unused Blocks, Dimstyles, Layers, Linetypes,
Shapes, Styles, and Mlinestyles.
~ The available options (wild card characters) are based on the Operating System of
section titled wild card.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Catalog, Dir, Del, Edit, Files, Purge, Sh, Shell, Type
'DELA Y see SCRIPT
'DELOBJ (DELete OBJect)

Delobj determines whether objects used to create new objects are kept or deleted from the
drawing.

Keyboard DELOBJ
OPTIONS:
o • Objects are retained.
• Objects are deleted.

160 DELOBJ

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Extrude, Region, Revolve
dialog boxes
Dialog boxes provide an alternative to using the Command prompt for many commands.
They are time-savers since they often provide graphic displays of the various command
options, and you can easily change settings without restarting the Command prompt
sequence. Dialog boxes are made up of combinations of Scroll Bars, Title Bars,
Command Buttons, List Boxes, Text Boxes, Radio Buttons, Check Boxes, and Image
Tiles. When working with dialog boxes, the screen cursor turns into an arrow pointing up
and to the left.
Dialog boxes provide one method of setting drawing parameters and executing
commands. Sometimes a dialog box references only one command or variable, and other
times a dialog box combines multiple commands and variables. Some dialog boxes can be
disabled and you can work from the command line, while others cannot be disabled.
OPTIONS:
Scroll Arrow
chromlLdwg up one line at a time
colorwh_dwg
filt.or.dwg
hVIlc..dwg
linkrods.dwg
Scroll Box
pnid_dwg Scroll Bar
psfil pill dwg one page at a time
Sllsklltch_dwg
soxtllnldwg
strudur_dwg Scroll Arrow
down one line at a time
Scroll Bars
• Some dialog boxes have scroll or slider bars. These let you scroll through
lists of items. Clicking on the UpfDown arrows scrolls the list one line at a
time; selecting and dragging the Scroll Box quickly scrolls through the list;
clicking in the area between the Scroll Box and the Up/Down arrows scrolls
one page at a time. You can tell whether you are near the beginning, middle,
or end of scrolling by the location of the slider box relative to the Up/Down
arrow keys.
dialog boxes 161
Title Bar Dimension Styles

DimensIon Style
list Box
'..:----.. . . -~~===~~L_ Edit Box
Radio Command
Buttons
Command Buttons
::ltyIe. INorm'"
Image Tile
Check Box
Title Bar • Lets you move the dialog box by clicking on the Title Bar and
dragging it to a new location.
List Box • Contains a drop-down list of available responses from which
you choose one of the options.
Edit Box • Lets you enter new information or edit the existing contents.
Radio Buttons • Lets you select only one option at a time.
Command • Initiates an action. Three dots, or an ellipsis (... ), after a

Buttons command button indicates that another dialog box will appear
if the command is chosen. A left arrow «) after the command
button indicates that you temporarily return to the drawing to
complete an action. Once the action is completed you are
automatically returned to the dialog box.
162 dialog boxes
Image Tile • Picking inside an Image Tile causes the tile to display the
various choices graphically.
CheckBox • Toggles settings on and off.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Pressing <Enter> is the same as picking an OK button. Pressing <Ctrl C> or
<Esc> is the same as picking the Cancel button.
t> Options that are grayed out are invalid responses at that particular time.
~ You can activate a dialog box when using the Insert and Minsert commands by
typing a tilde (-) at the "Block name (or ?)" prompt. The dialog box Select
Drawing File lets you select any of your computer's drives, directories, and files.
However, it does not display any of the Blocks already defmed in the current
drawing. For the Insert command, if you want also to select Blocks already defmed
in the current drawing use the Ddinsert command as an alternative.
~ You can disable many of the file dialog boxes by setting the system variable
Filedia to O. Commands are then issued at the Command prompt. You can then
temporarily enable some of those dialog boxes by entering the tilde character (-)
when prompted for information such as file names.
~ If you use a dialog box transparently you may not see any changes until you
complete the original command.
~ AutoCAD interprets all the changes made while a dialog box is active as one
command. Therefore, if you use U (Undo), you will lose any changes that were
made while in the dialog box.
RELATED VARIABLES: Attdia, Cmddia, Filedia, Maxsort
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: See Appendix B
'DIASTAT (DIAlog STATus)

Diastat retains the dialog box exit status.

Keyboard DIASTAT
OPTIONS:
o • Exits the last dialog box by canceling (including <Esc».
1 • Exits the last dialog box with OK (including <Enter».
DIM 163

digitizer see TABLET
DIM (DIMension)
The Dim command changes your Command prompt to Dim and only specific commands
associated with dimensioning are active. You return to the Command prompt using the
Exit option or by pressing <Esc>.
Release 13 provides most of the Dim options directly from the Command prompt. The
Dim command was left in this release to remain compatible with various third party
programs and routines. We have listed only Leader and Undo since they are different
depending on whether they are options of the Dim command or issued at the Command
prompt.

Keyboard DIM
OPTIONS:
Leader • L or Leader is made up of an arrowhead, Lines, and Mtext and is
used to dimension complex areas or add reference notes. Leaders are
drawn from the point of the arrowhead to where you want the
dimension text or notes to be placed. To have no text present, press
the <Esc> key at the dimension text prompt.
• You can use a U response to undo the last Leader segment.
• If the Leader length for the first segment is less than two arrow
lengths, the arrowhead is not drawn.
• You can enter only one line of Text for a Leader. Once the leader
text has been placed in the drawing you can edit it with Ddmodify to
have more than one line.
• Dimension edit commands do not work for any dimensions entered

by the Leader command. This is because Leaders are not associative.
• The Command prompt equivalent is the Leader command.
164 DIM
Undo • Voids the latest dimensioning operation. You can undo one step at a
time until you reach the beginning of the current dimensioning
session.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ While in the dimensioning mode you can use Redraw, Undo, and transparent
commands.
~ Leader uses the latest dimension text value as its default value. To dimension an
object but place the dimension text with a Leader, begin dimensioning the object
with another dimensioning command. Cancel the command before entering or
accepting the dimension text. Then select the Leader command. Once you have
drawn the leader line(s), press <Enter>. The default dimension text will be the
canceled dimension text value; simply accept it.
:l An Undo executed during the Dim prompt will not recognize the Redo command.
:l If you issue an Undo at the Command prompt, everything that was accomplished
during a dimensioning session will be undone. Issuing a Redo will restore the
dimensioning session.
RELATED VARIABLES: see Chapter 1 for a complete listing
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Diml, Leader
DIM!
Diml activates the Dim command for a single command and returns you to the Command
prompt. See Dim for more information.
DIMALIGNED (DIMension ALIGNED)

Dirnaligned creates an aligned linear dimension by constructing the dimension line
parallel to the extension line origin points or to a selected object. Aligned dimensions take
on the current dimension style and dimension variable settings.

Dimensioning toolbar \..
Screen menu DRAW DIM -+ Aligned:

Keyboard DIMALIGNED or DIMALI
DIMALIGNED 165
PROMPTS:
First extension line origin or RETURN to select:
Second extension line origin:
Dimension line location (Tex t/Angle) :
OPTIONS:
First extension • Pick the location for the first and second extension line origins.
line origin
RETURN to • Select the object to dimension. AutoCAD finds the endpoints

select for Lines and Arcs, the two nearest vertices for Mlines and
Plines, and the nearest quadrant for Circles.
Dimension line location (Text/Angle)
• Allows you to specify a dimension line location by dragging

the dimension line and text to its destination.
Text • Use this if you want to change the actual dimension value or if
you want to add text to the dimension. This option activates the
Mtext dialog box. If you wish to enter text in addition to the
default value enter the text and include the angle brackets «
». The brackets represent the actual dimension value.
Angle • Determines a text angle before specifying its location.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> If you type Dimali to activate the Dimaligned command and you receive the error
message "Unknown command .. ." it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dimlinear
166 DIMALIGNED
EXAMPLE:
Dimtih Off Dimtih On Dimtih On

Dimtad 0 Dimtad 0 Dimtad 1
.~
'if
t~A~
<!I
Dimtoh Off;-"o;
Dimtad 0 'r
~
Dimtoh Off
Dimtod 1
Dimtoh On
Dimtad 0
Dimtoh On
Dimad 1
'DIMALT (DIMension ALTernate units)

Dimalt detennines whether alternate units are visible. The alternate units are defmed by
setting the variables Dimaltd, Dimaltf, Dimalttd, Dimalttz, Dimaltu, Dimaltz, and
Dimapost. This variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog
box.

Keyboard DIMALT
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Alternate units are invisible.
On or 1 • Alternate units are visible.
System Variable Off Last value used in the drawing Switch
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimaltd, Dimaltf, Dimalttd, Dimalttz, Dimaltu, Dimaltz,
Dimapost
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim
DIMALTF 167
EXAMPLE:
DimOItOH.
L-2.00---J
DimOItO'. • •
L- 2.00[50.80J -J L- 2.00[50.800J -l L 2.00[50.8rnmJ j
Dimoltf=25.4 T Dimoltd=3 _ _ _T--, Dimoltz= 12 _ _ _T--,
Dirnaltu=decirnal Dimapost=mm
'DIMALTD (DIMension ALTernate Decimal)

Dimaltd sets the number of decimal places for alternate dimension text when Dimalt is
On. This variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMALTD
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimalt, Dimaltf, Dimalttd, Dimalttz, Dimaltu, Dimaltz,
Dimapost
EXAMPLE: See DIMALT
'DIMALTF (DIMension ALTernate scale Factor)

Sets the scale factor or multiplier for alternate units when Dimalt is On. This value is set
using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.
168 DIMALTF

Keyboard DIMALTF
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimalt, Dimaltd, Dimalttd, Dimalttz, Dimaltu, Dimaltz,
Dimapost
EXAMPLE: See DIMALT
'DIMALTTD (DIMension ALTernate Tolerance Decimal)

Dimalttd determines the number of decimal places for alternate tolerance dimension text
when Dimalt is On. This variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim
dialog box.

Keyboard DIMALTTD
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimalt, Dimaltd, Dimaltf, Dimalttz, Dimaltu, Dimaltz,
Dimapost
'DIMALTTZ (DIMension ALTernate Tolerance Zero)
Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate tolerance dimension text when Dimalt is
On. This variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMALTTZ
DIMALTZ 169
OPTIONS:
See DIMZIN for available options.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimalt, Dimaltd, Dimaltf, Dimalttd, Dimaltu, Dimaltz,
Dimapost, Dimzin
'DIMALTU (DIMension ALTernate Units)

Dimaltu defines the units format for alternate dimensions when Dimalt is On. This
variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box .

Keyboard DIMALTU
OPTIONS:
• Scientific
2 • Decimal
3 • Engineering
4 • Architectural (Stacked)
5 • Fractional (Stacked)
6 • Architectural
7 • Fractional
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimalt, Dimaltd, Dimaltf, Dimalttd, Dimalttz, Dimaltz,
Dimapost, Dimunit
EXAMPLE: See DIMALT
'DIMALTZ (DIMension ALTernate Zero)

Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate dimension text values when Dimalt is On.
This variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.
170 DIMALTZ

Keyboard DIMALTZ
OPTIONS:
See DIMZIN for available options.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimalt, Dimaltd, Dimaltf, Dimalttd, Dimalttz, Dimaltu,
Dimapost , Dimzin
EXAMPLE: See DIMALT
DIMANGULAR (DIMension ANGULAR)

Dimangular creates angular dimensions. Angular dimensions take on the current
dimension style and dimension variable settings.

Dimensioning toolbar 1I
Screen menu DRAW DIM -. Angular:
Keyboard DIMANGULAR or DIMANG
PROMPTS:
Select arc, circle, line, or RETURN:
OPTIONS:
Arc • The center of the Arc is considered the angle vertex, and the
endpoints become the origin points for the extension lines. You
determine the location for the dimension arc and the dimension
text.
Text • Activates the Edit Mtext (Ddedit) dialog box.
Angle • Lets you set the angle for the dimension text.
DIMANGULAR 171
Circle • The center of the Circle is considered the vertex of the angle. The
point used to pick the Circle defines the origin of the first extension
line. You are then prompted for the second angle endpoint, which
becomes the origin of the second extension line.
Line • Nonparallel Lines or Polyline segments can be selected. The angle
vertex is the point where the two lines intersect.
Return • You determine the angle vertex and the angle's endpoints.
(3 points)
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ AutoCAD dimensions the complementary angle for angles over 180 degrees when
two Lines are picked.
t> If you type Dimang to activate the Dimangular command and you receive the error
l If ticks are enabled (Dimtsz) you will still get arrowheads.
l If you use dimension angles using the Dim Angular method you are asked to locate
the dimension text. Pressing <Enter> automatically centers the text within the
dimension. If you pick a point and want to place it in the center later, use the
Dimtedit Horne command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtix, Dimtofl
EXAMPLE:
1\ ~
104,66°
liB 07' ~
~ 1BO.00· ~~ ~ 1BO.00·
75.34' 75.34'
24193' ~ ~ 104,66°
172 DIMAPOST
'DIMAPOST (DIMension Alternate Prefix Or Suffix Text)

Dimapost sets the prefix and/or suffix for alternate dimensions (except angular) when
Dimalt is On. You can disable this setting by entering a period (.) for its value. This
variable is typically set by selecting the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMAPOST
System Variable (none) Last value used in the drawing String
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimalt, Dimaltd, Dimaltf, Dimalttd, Dimalttz, Dimaltu,
Dimaltz
EXAMPLE: See DIMALT
'DIMASO (DIMension ASsOciative)

Dimaso controls whether dimension objects (lines, arcs, arrows, and text) are grouped
together to act as one object or are independent of each other. Dimaso affects Linear,
Angular, Diameter, Ordinate, and Radius dimensioning. In addition, the dimension
becomes associated with the dimensioned object and will automatically reflect size
changes if the object is edited. If Dimaso is On when dimensions are created you can
update them based on their assigned dimension style or by changing individual dimension
variables.

Keyboard DIMASO
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Dimension objects act individually. They cannot be updated
when dimension variables are modified, and they are not directly
associated to the objects that are dimensioned.
On or 1 • Dimension objects act as one object.
DIMASO 173
TIPS & WARNINGS:

iJ For the greatest dimensioning flexibility keep Dimaso On. You can always
Explode the dimension and tum them into individual objects. Once the dimension
is exploded you cannot turn the objects back into a single dimension object unless
you erase the individual objects and repeat the dimensioning procedure.
iJ Dimensions are drawn on the current Layer. Exploding a dimension causes the
objects to default to Layer O.
iJ Placing your first associative dimension creates a Layer named Defpoints.
Defpoints (definition points) are points that link the dimension to the object being
dimensioned. Objects residing on the Defpoints Layer are never plotted. If you
want to Plot objects on this Layer, you must first Rename the Layer or move the
objects to another Layer. You can Osnap to Defpoints with the Node option.
~ The following edit commands affect associative dimensions when used on
dimensions and dimensioned objects: Trim (only with linear dimensions), Extend
(only with linear dimensions), Stretch (only with linear and angular dimensions),
Array (only with rotated polar arrays), Mirror, Rotate, and Scale.
~ AutoCAD tracks associative dimensions as "Unnamed Blocks". You see this when
requesting a listing of blocks with the Block (?) or Insert (?) commands.
~ All dimension styles default to the current Dimaso setting.
~ You cannot assign Dimaso to dimension styles. All styles read the current Dimaso
setting at the time of dimensioning.
~ You cannot assign a Thickness to associative dimensions.
~ You can have dimensions act as individual objects by turning Dimaso Off or by
using the Explode command. The difference between these two methods has to do
with the exploded object's Layer assignment. Dimensioning objects with Dimaso
off places the objects on the Current Layer; exploding a dimension sends the
objects to Layer O.
System Variable On Last value used in the drawing Switch
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimaligned, Dimangular, Dimdiameter,
Dimlinear, Dimordinate, Dimradius, Tolerance
174 DIMASZ
'DIMASZ (DIMension Arrow SiZe)

Dimasz determines the size of the arrowheads placed at the end of dimension lines and
leader lines. Multiples of this value (based on Dimscale) help determine whether
dimension lines and text fit between extension lines or are placed on the outside of the
extension lines. Dimasz determines the size of objects defmed by Dimblk, Dimblkl, and
Dimblk2 variables. This variable is typically set using the Geometry option of the Ddim
dialog box.

Keyboard DIMASZ
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ To set the right arrowhead size for the fmished plot set Dimasz to the size you
want on the plotted drawing. Set Dimscale to the appropriate scale factor.
Dimscale acts as a multiplier to the Dimasz value.
~ Dimasz has no effect if Dimtsz (tick size) is set to any number other than o.
Type Initial default SubseqIJent default Value
System Variable 0.1800 Last value used in the drawing Read
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimgap, Dimscale, Dimtsz
'DIMAUNIT (DIMension Angular UNIT)

Dimaunit specifies the angle format for angular dimensions. This variable is typically set

Keyboard DIMAUNIT
OPTIONS:
0 • Decimal degrees
1 • Degrees/minutes/seconds
2 • Grads
3 • Radians
4 • Surveyor's units
DIMBASELINE 175

RELATED VARIABLES: Aunits
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dimangular, Ddim
DIMBASELINE (DIMension BASELINE)

Dimbaseline continues a Linear (Horizontal, Vertical, Rotated, Aligned) or Angular
dimension from the Baseline of the previous or selected dimension. The dimension line
offset distances are based on the Dimdli value.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY .•.

Dimensioning toolbar I§
Screen menu DRAW DIM .. Baselin:
Keyboard DIMBASELINE or DIMBASE
PROMPTS:
Second extension l ine origin or RETURN to s e l ect:
or
Se l ec t next feature or RETURN to se lect:
OPTIONS:
Second extension line origin or Select next feature
• Each dimension is offset from the last using the same first extension line.
RETURN to select
• Lets you create baseline dimensions from an eXlstmg dimension by
pressing <Enter> and picking the base dimension line from which to offset
the rest of the dimensions.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, The following refers to using the Baseline feature from the Dim prompt. Once you
have placed a baseline dimension you can continue the command by pressing
<Enter>. This will enable you to pick successive second extension line origins and
accept default dimension text values and locations.
176 DIM BASELINE
~ When using the Baseline feature from the Command prompt (Dimbaseline), exit
the command by pressing the <Esc> key.
~ If you type Dimbase to activate the Dimbaseline command and you receive the
file. Acad.pgp is located in the AutoCAD support directory.
l The Dim Update command will not modify existing baseline dimension offsets if
Dimdli is changed.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimdli
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimaligned, Dimangular, Dimcontinue,
Dimlinear
EXAMPLE:
dimdli ft---- 3.25 =-------1

dirndl;! '.'01·351~,...,..,""I"'"iI
VI7I7~
'DIMBLK (DIMension BLocK)
Dimblk lets you define your own symbols (Blocks) to place at the ends of dimension
lines, replacing the Autodesk-supplied symbols. The Block must reside in the current
drawing. Return to the system default by entering a period (.) when asked for a new
Dimblk name. This variable is typically set using the Geometry option of the Ddim dialog
box.
The following dimension blocks are built into all drawing files:
1 Oblique Open90 Closed
---, Origin None Dot

DIMBLKl 177

Keyboard DIMBLK
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the Dimblk's value.
~ You can create dimension lines with different Blocks on each end. Assign blocks
to Dimblkl, Dimblk2 and turn Dimsah On. If Dimsah is On and you have not
defined Dimblkl and/or Dimblk2 then Dimblk becomes the default.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimblkl, Dimblk2, Dimsah
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Block, Ddim
'DIMBLKI (DIMension BLocK 1)

Dimblkl places your own symbol (Block) at the first end of the dimension line. The
Block must reside in the current drawing and Dimsah must be On. Return to the system
default by entering a period (.) when asked for a new Dimblkl name. This variable is
typically set using the Geometry option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMBLKI
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the value of Dimblk 1.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimblk, Dimblk2, Dimsah
178 DIMBLK2
'DIMBLK2 (DIMension BLocK 2)

Dimblk2 places your own symbol (Block) at the second end of the dimension line. The
Block must reside in the current drawing and Dimsah must be On. Return to the system
default by entering a period (.) when asked for a new Dimblk2 name. This variable is
typically set using the Geometry option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMBLK2
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the value of Dimblk2.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimblk, Dimblkl, Dimsah
'DIMCEN (DIMension CENter)

Dimcen sets the size of the center marks/lines when dimensioning Circles and Arcs using
the Dimdiameter, Dimradius, and Dimcenter commands. This variable is typically set
using the Geometry option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMCEN
OPTIONS:
o • Center marks/lines are not drawn.
greater than 0 • Center marks are created.
less than 0 • Center lines are created.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the value of Dimcen.
! Changing this value will not affect existing center marks and center lines.
DIMCENTER 179

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimscale
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimcenter, Dimdiameter, Dimradius
EXAMPLE: See DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, DIMRADIUS
DIMCENTER (DIMension CENTER)

Dimcenter constructs center marks or center lines for Circles and Arcs. The size and type
of mark are based on the Dimcen system variable setting.

Dimensioning toolbar +
Screen menu DRAW DIM - Center:

Keyboard DIMCENTER
PROMPTS:
Select arc or circle:
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimcen
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dimradius
EXAMPLE:
dirncen=<O dirncen= > O
,09 -,09
o G0009~~-009
180 DIMCLRD
'DIMCLRD (DIMension CoLoR Dimension lines)

Dimclrd determines the color assigned to dimension lines, arrowheads, and leader lines.
This variable is typically set using the Geometry option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMCLRD
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If you set this variable at the Command prompt you must use the appropriate color
number. You can set it to Byblock by assigning the number 0 or to Bylayer with
the number 256. If you set it at the Dim prompt you can use the color name or
number but you must use the words Bylayer or Byblock.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimclre, Dimclrt
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Color, Ddim
'DIMCLRE (DIMension CoLoR Extension line)

Dimc1re sets the color assigned to dimension extension lines. It is typically set using the
Geometry option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMCLRE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

the number 256. If you set this at the Dim prompt you can use the color name or
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimc1rd, Dimclrt
DIMCONTINUE 181
'DIMCLRT (DIMension CoLoR Text)

Dimclrt detennines the color assigned to dimension text. It is typically set using the

Keyboard DIMCLRT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

the number 256. If you set this at the Dim prompt you can use the color name or
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimclre, Dimclrd
DIMCONTINUE (DIMension CONTINUE)

Dimcontinue continues a Linear (horizontal, Vertical, Rotated, Aligned) or Angular
dimension from the second extension line of the previous or a selected dimension.

Dimensioning toolbar ttl
Screen menu DRAW DIM - Continu:

Keyboard DIMCONTINUE or DIMCONT
PROMPTS:
Second extension line origin or RETURN to select:
or
Select next feature or RETURN to select :
182 DIMCONTINUE
OPTIONS:
Second extension line origin or Select next feature
• Each dimension is drawn in line with the last.

RETURN to select:
• Lets you create Continuous dimensions from an existing dimension by

pressing <Enter> and picking the dimension line from which to continue.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The following refers to using the Continuous feature from the Dim prompt. Once
you have selected the Continuous option you can continue the command by
pressing <Enter>. This will enable you to pick successive second extension line
origins and accept default dimension text values and locations.
~ When using the Continue feature from the Command prompt (Dimcontinue), exit
the command by pressing the <Esc> key.
~ If you type Dimcont to activate the Dimcontinue command and you receive the
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimdli
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimaligned, Dimangular, Dimbaseline,
Dimlinear
EXAMPLE:
DIM DIAMETER 183
'DIMDEC (DIMension DECimal)

Dimdec detennines the decimal precision for the primary units dimension. This variable is
typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMDEC
System Variable 4 Last value used in the drawing. Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimunit, Dimzin
Dimlinear, Dimordinate, Dimradius
EXAMPLE:
1'.2° 1
~~. d;mdec=1/12.
DIMDIAMETER (DIMension DIAMETER)

Dimdiameter creates diameter dimensions for Circles or Arcs. Diameter dimensions take
on the current dimension style and dimension variable settings.

Dimensioning toolbar
Screen menu DRAW DIM .. Diametr:

Keyboard DIMDIAMETER or DIMDIA
184 DIMDIAMETER
PROMPTS:
Select arc or circle:
Dimension location (Text/Angle):
OPTIONS:
Dimension line location (Text/Angle)
• Allows you to specify a dimension line location by dragging the

dimension line and text to. their destination.
Text • Use this if you want to change the actual dimension value or if you
want to add text to the dimension. This option activates the Mtext
dialog box. If you wish to enter text in addition to the default value
enter the text and include angle brackets « ». The brackets represent
the actual dimension value.
Angle • Determine a text angle before specifying its location.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can have more control of the dimension text location if you turn Dimupt On.
t> Dimtofl, if set On, draws a dimension line between the extension lines.
t> If set to a positive value, Dimcen creates center marks inside Circles and Arcs. A
negative value constructs center lines that extend outside the diameter. A setting of
o omits any marks. This variable is active only if the dimension line is placed
outside the Arc or Circle.
t> Leader lines are always at least the length of two arrowheads. If the angle of the
leader line is greater than 15 degrees from the horizontal and the text is drawn
horizontally, a short horizontal leader extension line (the length of an arrowhead)
is drawn next to the dimension text.
t> If you type Dimdia to activate the Dimdiameter command and you receive the
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimcen, Dimfit, Dimjust, Dimtad, Dimtih, Dimtofl, Dimtoh,
Dimupt
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dimradius
DIMDLE 185
EXAMPLE:
".500¥,oob
Dirntoh On Dirntotl On Dirntoh Otf Dirntotl On Dirntotl On
Oirntofl On Dirntofl Off Oirntof I Off Oi rntotl 011 Oimtofl Off
Dirncen 0 Oimcen 0 Oimcen 0 Dimcen -.09 Dirncsn .09
'DIMDLE (DIMension Dimension Line Extension)

Dimdle maintains how far the dimension lines extend past the extension line. This
variable only takes effect when a value is assigned to Dimtsz. It is typically set using the

Keyboard DIMDLE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the default value of Dimdle.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtsz
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimaligned, Dimangular, Dimlinear
EXAMPLE:
186 DIMDLI
'DIMDLI (DIMension Distance LInear)

Dimdli sets the spacing increment between dimension lines for Baseline and Continuous
dimensions. Continuous uses this value to avoid writing on top of a previous dimension.
This variable is typically set using the Geometry option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMDLI
TIPS & WARNINGS:

" The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the default value of Dimdli.
~ Changing this value will not affect existing Baseline and Continuous dimensions.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimbaseline, Dimcontinue
EXAMPLE: See DIMBASELINE
DIMEDIT (DIMension EDIT)

Dimedit lets you edit associative dimension text and extension lines.

Dimensioning toolbar See OPTIONS.
Screen menu MOD DIM -. DimEdit
Keyboard DIMEDIT or DIMED
PROMPTS:
Dimension Edit (Home/New/Rotate/Oblique) <Home>:
OPTIONS:
III Home • Returns associative dimension text to its original location.
Dimension text may have moved from its original location
because of commands such as Stretch and GRIP editing.
DIMEXE 187
New • Lets you revise associative dimension text through the use of the
Mtext Dialog box. The default <> returns any selected
dimension text to its original value. If you wish to enter text in
addition to the default value, enter the text and include angle
brackets «» at the appropriate location.
Rotate • Lets you rotate existing associative dimension text. You can also
do this using the Angle option of the Dimtedit Command.
Dimedit lets you modify one or more dimensions at a time.
Dimtedit lets you edit only one dimension at a time.
Oblique • Lets you redefine the angle of existing associative dimension
extension lines without altering the dimension value. Extension
lines are usually drawn perpendicular to the dimension line. If
you press <Enter> without specifying an angle, the extension
lines return to their original angle.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> The Dimtedit Home option is the same as using the Dimedit Home option, and the
Dimtedit Angle option is the same as using the Dimedit Oblique option. Dimedit
can manipulate more than one dimension at a time, whereas Dimtedit only modifies
one dimension at a time.
t> You can use Grips or Stretch to relocate dimension text, dimension lines, and
extension lines.
~ If you type Dimed to activate the Dimedit command and you receive the error
message "Unknown command ..." it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the
file named acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modified the file .
~ This command only works if the dimension you are editing is associative.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtih, Dimtad, Dimtih, Dimtoh, Dimtvp

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimtedit, Ddedit
'DIMEXE (DIMension EXtension Extend)

Dimexe maintains the distance the extension line extends beyond the dimension line. This
is typically set using the Geometry option of the Ddim dialog box.
188 DIMEXE

Keyboard DIMEXE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, The DiIDScale value is a multiplier to the value of Dimexe.

EXAMPLE:
dimexe
3.25 ==:;--I
1.10 -;35 1 ,. ,. ,. ,. ., .I,
W~
'DIMEXO (DIMension EXtension Offset)
Dimexo specifies the offset distance for the extension lines. This variable is typically set

Keyboard DIMEXO
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the Dimexo's value.

DIMFIT 189
EXAMPLE:
'DIMFIT (DIMension FIT)

Dimfit detennines the location of dimension text and arrowheads. Their location is based
on the available space between extension lines. This variable is typically set using the
Format option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMFIT
OPTIONS:
o • Text and Arrows - Places text and arrowheads inside the extension lines if
there is enough space. If not, the text and arrowheads are placed on the
outside of the extension lines.
1 • Text Only - Places text and arrowheads inside the extension lines if there is
enough space. If not, the arrowheads are placed outside the extension lines
and the text is placed inside. If the text does not fit inside the extension lines
it is also placed to the outside.
2 • Arrows Only - Places text and arrowheads inside the extension lines if
there is enough space. If there is not enough room for both, the arrowheads
are placed inside and the text outside the extension lines. If there is still not
enough space for the arrowheads they are also placed outside the extension
lines.
3 • Best Fit - Places text and arrowheads inside the extension lines if there is
enough space. If there is not enough room for both, text is placed inside and
the arrowheads outside the extension lines. If there is enough space for the
arrowheads (but not text), they are placed between the extension lines and
the text is placed outside the extension lines. If there is no space available
for the text and arrowheads, they are both placed outside the extension lines.
190 DIM FIT
4 • Leader - Constructs leader lines if the text does not fit between the
extension lines. The text's horizontal location is based on the Dimjust
setting.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

&, The dimension variables that determine the available space between extension
lines are Dimtxt, Dimgap, Dimasz, Dimscale, and the Style command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimjust
EXAMPLE:
1 °1 I
~
1 125
.
~A
1.1250
I I'
WPA
'I 1.1250
I 1.1250
~
I H
~A
250
Dimfit=O Dimfit=1 Dimfit=2 Dimfit=3 Dimfit=4
'DIMGAP (DIMension GAP)

Dimgap determines the space between the dimension line and text. This also includes the
Leader command's hook line and text. If Dimgap is set with a negative number a box is
placed around the text.
Dimgap is also used to calculate whether text defaults to the inside of the dimension lines
or is placed outside the dimension line. If text is placed outside the dimension line its
location is based on the second extension line pick point.
Dimension text is kept in the inside of the extension lines so long as the dimension line to
both sides of the text is at least as long as the Dimgap value. If text is set to go above or
below the dimension line (Dimtad, Dimtvp), it is placed inside the extension lines if there
is room for the arrowheads, dimension text, and a space between them as least the size of
Dimgap. The available space must be greater than or equal to 2 * (Dimasz + Dimgap).
DIMJUST 191

Keyboard DIMGAP
OPTIONS:
positive number • Determines the gap between the dimension lines and
dimension text.
negative number • Determines the gap between the dimension lines and
dimension text and places a box around the dimension text.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the value of Dimgap.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimasz, Dimfit, Dimscale, Dimtix, Dimtvp
EXAMPLE:
Dimgap .09 Dimgap -.09
'DIMJUST (DIMension JUSTified)

Dimjust detennines the horizontal dimension text location.

Keyboard DIMJUST
OPTIONS:
o • Text is centered between the extension lines.
• Text is placed next to the first extension line.
2 • Text is placed next to the second extension line.

192 DIMJUST
3 • Text is placed above and aligned with the first extension line.
4 • Text is place above and aligned with the second extension line.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimfit, Dimtad
EXAMPLE:
I Dirnjust=O I IDimjust=l I I i
Dim j ust=2
I0/WAJ I0/WAJ I0/WAJ
'DIMLFAC (DIMension Linear scale FACtor)

Dimlfac defmes a global scale factor used during Linear dimensioning. Each dimension
value is multiplied by the Dimlfac value and becomes the default dimension text. This
variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMLFAC
OPTIONS:
Current value • Multiplier for each dimension text value.
Viewport • Use when dimensioning Model space objects in Paper space.
The scaling of Model space to Paper space is calculated, and the
negative of this value is assigned to Dimlfac.
DIM LIM 193
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, By using Paper space Viewports and the display command Zoom XP, you can
depict different levels of drawing detail and you will not need to set Dimlfac.
~ Dirnlfac has no effect on angular dimensions and the variable settings Dimtm,
Dimtp, and Dimrnd.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Pspace
'DIMLIM (DIMension LIMits)

Dirnlim determines the visibility and display for dimension text tolerance limits (Dimtp
and Dimtm). It is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMLIM
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Disables dimension text limits.
On or 1 • Generates dimension text limits.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Setting Dirnlim On automatically turns Dimtol Off and vice versa.
System Variable Off r 0 Last value used in the drawing. Switch
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimgap, Dirnlim, Dimtfac, Dimtm, Dimtol, Dimtolj, Dimtp
Dimlinear, Dimordinate, Dirnradius
194 DIMLIM
EXAMPLE:
1.8750 1.9250
1.875 1.8750 1.8550 1.875 !8:8~88 1.875;'0.0500
I I I I I I I I
Dimlim ~ Off Dimlim ~ On Dimlim ~ On Dimlim ~ Off Dimlim = Off

Dimtp ~ 0.0500 Dimtol ~ On Dimtol = On
Dimtm ~ 0.0200 Dimtp ~ 0.0500 Dimtp ~ 0.0500
Dimtm = 0.0200 Dimtm = 0.0500
DIMLINEAR (DIMension LINEAR)

Dimlinear creates Linear (horizontal, Vertical, and Rotated) dimensions. The command is
dynamic in that it will dimension horizontally or vertically, based on how you move your
pointing device. You can also choose the angle of the extension lines and angle of
dimension text, and can change the default dimension text. Linear dimensions take on the
current dimension style and dimension variable settings.

Dimensioning toolbar
Screen menu DRAW DIM .. Linear:

Keyboard DIMLINEAR or DIMLIN
PROMPTS:
First extension line orlgln or RETURN to select:
Second extension line origin:
(Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated) :
OPTIONS:
First extension line origin or RETURN to select
• You can dimension a distance either manually by picking points or
automatically by selecting an object. If you pick a point it is used as
the origin for the first extension line, and you are prompted for the
second extension's origin point. If you press <Enter>, a new
prompt appears.
DIMORDINATE 195
Select object to dimension

• Selecting an object will automatically generate extension lines.
Dimension line location (Text! Angle/Horizontal{Vertical{Rotated)
dimension line and text to its destination. Picking to the left or right
of the object creates vertical dimensions; picking up or down
creates horizontal dimensions. You can also choose from the
following options:
enter the text and include the angle « » brackets. The brackets
represent the actual dimension value.
Horizontal • Forces the extension lines horizontally.
Vertical • Forces the extension lines vertically.
Rotated • Draws the dimension line at any angle you specify while keeping
the extension lines perpendicular.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) If the dimension line and text do not fit inside the extension lines, dimension lines
and text are placed on the outside of the extension lines. If Dimupt is Off the
dimension text placement is based on the second extension line pick point. If you
select an object to dimension, the placement is to the side farthest from the pick
point. If Dimupt is On you can pick the side on which to place the dimension text.
\) The Horizontal and Vertical options are similar to Rotated. The dimension line for
Horizontal is rotated at an angle of 0 and the dimension line for Vertical is rotated
at an angle of 90 degrees.
\) If you select a Circle, the diameter is dimensioned. The quadrants at 90 and 270
degrees are considered the two endpoints when moving in the vertical direction,
and the quadrants at 0 and 180 degrees are considered the two endpoints when
moving in the horizontal direction.
196 DIM LINEAR
~ You can dimension Blocks and Xrefs as though they were individual objects so
long as they have equal X, Y, and Z scale factors.
~ Each segment of a Polyline is treated as an individual object when using the
"RETURN to Select" option.
~ A Polyline with a width is dimensioned from its centerline.
~ You can always change the text value and the angle by using the dimensioning edit
commands Dimedit and Dimtedit.
~ If you type Dimlin to activate the Dimlinear command and you receive the error
file named acadpgp or you are using third party software that modified the file.
~ Dimensioning in Model space gives you greater flexibility than dimensioning in

Paper space. Dimensions in Paper space are not associative to objects created in
Model space.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimhorizontal, Dimrotated, Dimvertical
EXAMPLE:
~r-- Horizontal ---j
~~t
I.. ~{\~~
:r
..I
al
DIMORDINATE (DIMension ORDINATE)

Dimordinate (datum) dimensioning lets you dimension individual X and Y distances from
a common origin (0,0). The dimension text is automatically aligned with the leader line.
Once you pick the feature to dimension, either point in the X or Y direction to indicate the
type of dimension, or select Xdatum or Ydatum. Ordinate dimensions use the current
UCS, dimension style, and dimension variable settings.
DIMORDINATE 197

Dimensioning tool bar u;
Keyboard DIMORDINATE or DIMORD
PROMPTS:
Se l ect feature:
Leader endpoint (Xdatum / Ydatum/Text ) :
OPTIONS:
Leader endpoint • When picking a point, the difference between the feature
location and the leader endpoint is used to determine
whether it is an X or Y dimension. If the difference in the
Y axis is greatest, the dimension measures the Y
coordinate; if not, it measures the X.
Xdatum • Creates the X datum regardless of the length and location
of the leader line.
.-
'''''' Ydatum • Creates the Y datum regardless of the length and location
of the leader line.
Text • Use this if you want to change the actual dimension
value or if you want to add text to the dimension. This
option activates the Mtext dialog box. If you wish to
enter text in addition to the default value enter the text
and include the angle brackets « ». The brackets
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can change the location of 0,0 by redefining the UCS.
~ Keep Ortho On for greater control of the Leader line location.
~ If you type Dimord to activate the Dimordinate command and you receive the
error message "Unknown command ..." it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate
~ Datum dimensions are relative to 0,0 at the time of creation. If you change the
current UCS and dimension more points, they will not be accurate relative to any
dimension made while in the previous UCS.
198 DIMORDINATE
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtad, Dimtvp

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dducs, UCS, Ucsicon
EXAMPLE:
o
"'-J
ci
1.30
0.80 - - j - - - - + - +
0.30
DIMOVERRIDE (DIMension OVERRIDE)

Dimvoerride lets you modify individual dimension that variables for existing dimensions
without affecting the current dimension style.

Keyboard DIMOVERRIDE or DIMOVER
PROMPTS:
Dimension variable to override (or Clear to remove
overrides) :
Current value <default> New value:
Dimension variable to override:
Select objects:
OPTIONS:
Dimension variable to override
• Enter individual dimension variables you want to change on existing
dimensions.
Clear to remove overrides
• Reset a dimension to its original style settings.
DIMPOST 199
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i;, Override only changes associative dimensions you select during the command and
does not effect the current dimension style and any new dimensions you create.
Directly changing dimension variables temporarily changes the dimension style
and remains active until you save the save the current Dim Style with the modified
dimension variable(s) or restore an existing dimension style.
i;, If you type Dimover to activate the Dimoverride command and you receive the
J: This command only works if the dimension you are editing is associative.

'DIMPOST (DIMension Prefix Or Suffix Text)

Dimpost assigns a prefix and/or suffix text to dimension text. This variable is typically set
using the Format option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMPOST
OPTIONS:
New value • Sets a dimension text suffix. If Tolerance dimensioning is
enabled, the main dimension and each Tolerance dimension
receives the suffix.
< > New value • Sets a dimension text suffix. If Tolerance dimensioning is
enabled, only the Tolerances receive the suffix.
New value < > • Sets a dimension text prefix.
New value < > • Sets a dimension text prefix and suffix.
New value
(period) • Resets and disables any prefix and suffix text.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i;, You can edit the dimension text and obtain receive the same effect by using the
Dimedit or Ddmodify commands.
200 DIMPOST
;t, You can place spaces between the prefix, dimension text, and suffix using the
space bar key.

DIMRADIUS (DIMension RADIUS)

Dimradius creates radial dimensions for Circles and Arcs. Radius dimensions take on the
current dimension style and dimension variable settings.

Dimensioning toolbar ~
Screen menu DRAW DIM .. Radius:

Keyboard DIMRADIUS or DIMRAD
PROMPTS:
Select arc or circle :
Dimension location (Text/Angle):
OPTIONS:
(Dimension line location (Text/Angle)
dimension line and text to their destination.
enter the text and include the angle «» brackets. The brackets
TIPS & WARNINGS:

;t, You have more control of the dimension text location if you turn Dimupt On.
;t, Dimtofl, if set On, draws a dimension line between the extension lines.
DIMRND 201
~ If set to a positive value, Dimcen creates center marks inside Circles and Arcs. A
negative value constructs center lines that extend outside the diameter. A setting of
o omits any marks. This variable is active only if the dimension line is placed
outside the Arc or Circle.
~ Leader lines are always at least the length of two arrowheads. If the angle of the
Leader line is greater than 15 degrees from the horizontal and the text is drawn
horizontally, a short horizontal extension line (the length of an arrowhead) is
drawn next to the dimension text.
~ If you type Dirnrad to activate the Dirnradius command and you receive the error

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimdiameter
EXAMPLE:
R.25 R.25 R.25 R.25
Dimtoh On Dirntoh On Dimtoh Olf Dirntoh On Dimtoh On

Dimtofl On Dimtotl Off Dimtofl Oft Dimtotl Off Dirntotl Dtf
Dimeen 0 Dimcen 0 Dirneen 0 Dimeen -.09 Dimeen .09
Dimtih On
'DIMRND (DIMension RouND off)

Dimrnd rounds off the dimension value for Linear dimensions. The number of digits
retained after the decimal point is determined by the dimension variable Dimdec. This is
typically set using the Format option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMRND
202 DIMRND
TIPS & WARNINGS:

l Angular dimensions ignore this variable setting.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimdec
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimlinear
'DIMSAH (DIMension Separate Arrow Heads)

,
Dimsah activates the values of Dimblkl and Dimblk2. Using this variable lets you display
separate arrowhead symbols for each dimension. It is typically set using the Geometry
option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMSAH
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Suppresses the Dimblkl and Dimblk2 settings.
On or 1 • Displays the Dimblkl and Dimblk2 settings.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If Dimblkl and Dimblk2 are not defined, Dimsah reads the Dimblk value. If
Dimblk is not defmed, Dimsah uses autoCAD's default arrowhead block.
~ If you keep on getting tick marks regardless of the Dimsah, Dimblk, Dimblkl, and
Dimblk2 settings, verify that Dimtsz is set to O.
System Variable oor Off Last value used in the drawing Switch
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimblk, Dimblkl, Dimblk2
'DIMSCALE (DIMension SCALE)

Dimscale sets the overall dimensioning scale factor applied to most dimensioning
variables having to do with sizes, distances, or offsets. It does not alter the actual
dimension value and tolerances. For best results, set the individual dimension variables to
how you want them to appear on the plotted output and set the Dimscale value equal to
DIMSD1 203
the plot scale factor. This variable is typically set using the Geometry option of the Ddim
dialog box.

Keyboard DIMSCALE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If you decide to change the plot scale factor remember to change Dimscale and
update the dimensions. If Dirnaso was Off when the dimensions were created or
the dimensions were Exploded you may need to redimension your drawing.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dirnasz, Dimblk, Dimblkl, Dimblk2, Dimcen, Dimdle,
Dimdli, Dimexe, Dimexo, Dimgap, Dimtsz, Dimtxt
'DIMSDI (DIMension Suppress Dimension 1st)

Dimsdl determines the visibility of the first dimension line. This variable is typically set

Keyboard DIMSDI
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Displays the first dimension line.
On or 1 • Suppresses the first dimension line.
System Variable Off or 0 Last value used in the drawing Switch
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimsd2
204 DIMSD1
r-
EXAMPLE:
1.00 1 1 .00
r//JA fZI/l/1
'DIMSD2 (DIMension Suppress Dimension 2nd)
Dimsd2 determines the visibility of the second dimension line. This variable is typically
set using the Geometry option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMSD2
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Displays the second dimension line.
On or 1 • Suppresses the second dimension line.

System Variable Off or 0 Last value used in the drawing. Switch
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimsdl
EXAMPLE: See DIMSEI
'DIMSEI (DIMension Suppress Extension 1st)

Dimsel determines the display of the first extension line. This variable is typically set

Keyboard DIMSEI
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Displays the first extension line.
On or 1 • Suppresses the first extension line.
OIMSHO 205

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimse2
EXAMPLE:
-1.001 1 1.00 -
VZlZZ/J VlZVJ
'DIMSE2 (DIMension Suppress Extension 2nd)
Dirnse2 determines the display of the second extension line. This variable is typically set

Keyboard DIMSE2
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Displays the first extension line.
On or 1 • Suppresses the first extension line.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dirnse2
EXAMPLE: See DIMSEI
'DIMSHO (DIMension SHOw)

Dirnsho controls the updating of associative dimensioned text during Grips, Rotate, Scale,
and Stretch commands.
206 DIMSHO

Keyboard DIMSHO
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Does not display dimension text changes as the dimension is dragged
during editing commands.
On or 1 • Displays dimension text dragging and shows any value changes.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ All dimension styles default to the current Dimsho setting.

System Variable On or 1 Last value used in the drawing Switch
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimaso
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: grips, Rotate, Scale, Stretch
'DIMSOXD (DIMension Suppress Outside eXtension Dimension)

Dimsoxd determines the visibility and location of dimension lines when they do not fit in
between the extension lines.. This setting is dependent on the Dimtix (text inside the
extension) variable. This variable is typically set using the Format option of the Ddim
dialog box.

Keyboard DIMSOXD
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Displays dimension lines outside extension lines if they do not fit
inside the extension lines. Dimtix must be On.
On or 1 • Suppresses dimension lines if they do not fit inside the extension

lines. Dimtix must be On.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtad, Dimtix
DIMSTYlE 207
EXAMPLE:
1\0.7960 1\0.7960 IO.796°r 10.796Cl I

~ ~ ~ ~
Dirnsoxd Off Dirnsoxd On Dirnsoxd Off D,rnsoxd On
Dirntix Off Dirntix Off Dirntix On Dirnt lx On
DIMSTYLE (DIMension STYLE)

Dimstyle gives you the ability to create, save, restore, and modify dimension styles or
temporarily override the default style settings. Dimension styles define how you want
dimensions displayed on your drawing. You can achieve the same results using the Ddim
dialog box.

Screen menu DRAW DIM ... DimStyl:
Keyboard DIMSTYLE or DIMSTY
PROMPTS:
dimension style: STANDARD
Dimensi on Sty l e Edit
(Save/Restore/STatus /Var iables/Apply/?) <Res tore >:
?/Enter dimension style name or RETURN to select
dimension :
OPTIONS:
Restore • Retrieves an existing Dimstyle as the current dimension style.
? • Allows you to review named dimension styles saved in the drawing.
Responding with an asterisk (*) gives a sorted listing of all named
styles. You can use any of the wild-card options to create a more
specific list.
RETURN to select dimension
• Allows you to select a dimension directly from your drawing making
its assigned dimstyle the current dimension style.
208 DIMSTYLE
- (stylename)
• Compares the dimension style you entered with the current style and
lists the variables that are different between the two styles.
Save • Saves or updates the current dimension variables to a dimension style.
If you use the name of an existing Dimstyle, you will receive the
following message "That name is already in use, redefme it? <N>." If
you answer yes, all dimensions assigned to that style will update.
specific list.
- (stylename)
lists the variables that are different between the two styles ..
STatus • Lists the current values of all dimension variables.
• Make sure you are in the Dimstyle command before using the status
option. If you are at the Command prompt, you will get the more
generalized status report of your drawing file.
Variables
• Entering an existing Dimstyle name causes a listing of all the
dimension variables and their values assigned to that dimension style.
specific list.
-(stylename)
lists the variables that are different.
RETURN to select dimension
• Allows you to select a dimension directly from your drawing and lists
the dimension variables and values assigned to that dimension.
DIMTAD 209
Apply • Updates the dimension(s) you select to the current dimension style and
dimension variable settings.
specific list.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can rename Dimstyles with the Ddim, Ddrename, or Rename commands.
~ You can remove unused Dimstyles with the Purge command.
~ If you type Dimsty to activate the Dimstyle command and you receive the error
file named acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modified the file .
~ The dimension variables you cannot save as part of a dimension style are Dimaso
and Dimsho.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dim, Diml
'DIMTAD (DIMension Text Above Dimension)

Dimtad determines the vertical dimension text location relative to the dimension line.
This variable is typically set using the Format option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMTAD
OPTIONS:
o • Dimension text is placed in the middle of the dimension line. The space
between the dimension line and the text is determined by the Dimgap
variable.
• Dimension text is placed above the dimension line and the dimension line is
drawn as a single solid line. When the dimension text is not horizontal but
Dimtoh is set to Off, the text is also placed above the dimension line.
210 DIMTAD
2 • Places dimension text on the side of the dimension line furthest from the
deftnition points (defpoints).
3 • Dimension text is based on 1IS (Japanese Industrial Standards).
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimgap, Dimtih, Dimtoh, Dimtvp
EXAMPLE:
I~I I~I Ih.oooo-l

2.0000 I
Dimtad 0
~~J ~Joooo ~3
Dimtad 1 Dimtad 2 Dimtad 3
Dimtih On Dimtih On Dimtih On Dimtih On
Dimtad 0 Dimtad 1 Dimtad 2 Dimtad 3

Dimtih Off Dimtih Off Dimtih Off Dimtih Off
'DIMTDEC (DIMension Tolerance DECimal)

Dimtdec determines the decimal precision for tolerance values for primary units
dimension. This variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog
box.

Keyboard DIMDEC
DIMTEDIT 211
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtzin

DIMTEDIT (DIMension Text EDIT)

Dimtedit lets you change the location of associative dimension text.

Dimensioning toolbar See OPTIONS.
Screen menu MOD DIM .. DimTedit:
Keyboard DIMTEDIT or DIMTED
PROMPTS:
Select dimension :
Ente r t ext l ocation (Left / Right / Home / Angle) :
OPTIONS:
Left • Places associative dimension text as far to the left of the dimension
line as possible and still maintain a two-arrowhead-Iength
dimension line on the left side.
Right • Places associative dimension text as far to the right of the
dimension line as possible and still maintain a two-arrowhead-
length dimension line on the right side.
Home • Places associative dimension text back at its original location.
Dimension text may have moved from its original location because
of commands such as Stretch and Grip editing.
Angle • Gives a new rotation angle for associative dimension text. You can
also do this using the Angle option of the Dimtedit Command.
Dimedit lets you modify one or more dimensions at a time, while
Dimtedit lets you edit only one dimension at a time.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i> The Dimtedit Home option is the same as using the Dimedit Home option, and the
Dimtedit Angle option is the same as using the Dimedit Oblique option. Dimedit
can manipulate more than one dimension at a time, whereas Dimtedit only
modifies one dimension at a time.
:!: This command only works if the dimension you are editing is associative.
212 DIMTEDIT
~ You can use Grips or Stretch to relocate dimension text, dimension lines, and
extension lines.
t> If you type Dimted to activate the Dimtedit command and you receive the error
l The left and right options work only with Linear, Radius, and Diameter
dimensions.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimsho, Dimtad, Dimtih, Dimtoh, Dimtvp
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimedit
'DIMTFAC (DIMension Text FACtor)

Dimtfac sets the scale factor used to determine the dimension text height of tolerance
values and stacked fractions. This scale factor is relative to the dimension text height
(Dimtxt). This value is active when Dimtol is On and Dimtm is not equal to Dimtp, or
when Dimlim is On. This variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim
dialog box.

Keyboard DIMTFAC
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimgap, Dimlim, Dimtfac, Dimtm, Dimtol, Dimtolj, Dimtp
'DIMTIH (DIMension Text Inside Horizontal)

Dimtih determines the text orientation for all dimensions (except Ordinate) when the text
fits between the extension lines. This variable is typically set using the Format option of
the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMTIH
DIMTM 213
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Text is aligned with the dimension line.
On or 1 • Text is displayed horizontally.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtad, Dimtoh
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Dimaligned, Dirnangular, Dimdiameter,
Dirnlinear, Dimradius
EXAMPLE: See DIMTAD and DIMTOH
'DIMTIX (DIMension Text Inside eXtension)

Dimtix defines whether text is placed inside the dimension lines even when it would fit
better outside of the extension lines. This variable is typically set using the Format option
of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMTIX
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Places dimension text inside the extension lines if there is enough
room.
On or 1 • Place (Dirnlinear) text inside extension lines regardless of the amount
of available space.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimgap, Dimsoxd, Dimtofl, Dimupt
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dimlinear
'DIMTM (DIMension Tolerance Minus)

Dimtm maintains the minimum tolerance limit for dimension text. This variable is
214 DIMTM

Keyboard DIMTM
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, Dimtrn is displayed so long as Dimtol or Dimlim is On.
t, If Dimtol is On and Dimtrn and Dimtp have the same value, the ± symbol is listed
next to that value.
l AutoCAD always calculates the negative value for the number you assign to
Dimtrn. If you enter a negative number, AutoCAD displays its positive value.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimgap, Dimlim, Dimtfac, Dimtol, Dimtolj, Dimtp
EXAMPLE: See DIMLIM
'DIMTOFL (DIMension Text Outside Fit Lines)

Dimtofl controls the location of the dimension line. This variable is typically set using the
Format option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMTOFL
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Dimension lines are drawn on the inside of extension lines only when
they fit.
On or 1 • Dimension lines are always drawn between extension lines.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtix
Dimiinear, Dimradius
DIMTOH 215
EXAMPLE:
Dimtofl Off Dimtofl On Dimtofl Off Dimtofl On

Dimtix Off Dimti x Off Dimti x Off Dimtix Off
.375 ----j r-~ .375 .~.~
~
.25~ .250
~ 0.326 ~ ¢.326
'DIMTOH (DIMension Text Outside Horizontal)

Dimtoh detennines the text orientation for all dimensions (except Ordinate) when the text
fits outside the extension lines. This variable is typically set using the Format option of

Keyboard DIMTOH
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Text is aligned with the dimension line.
On or 1 • Text is displayed horizontally.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtad, Dimtih

Dimlinear, Dimradius
216 DIMTOH
EXAMPLE:
o
oL,()
f"-
o
~
~O.7500 ~1 ~l07500
Dimtoh ant Dimtoh Off Dimtoh On
Dimtih On Dimtih Off Dimtih Off
'DIMTOL (DIMension TOLerance)

Dimtol detennines the visibility and display of dimension tolerances to dimension text

Keyboard DIMTOL
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Disables dimension text tolerances.
On or 1 • Generates dimension text tolerances.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i; Setting Dimtol On automatically turns Dimlim Off and vice versa.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimlim, Dimtfac, Dimtm, Dimtp
EXAMPLE: See DIMLIM

DlMTP 217
'DIMTOLJ (DIMension TOlerance Justification)

Dimtolj detemrines the text justification for nominal dimensions relative to its assigned
tolerance values. This variable is typically set using the Annotation option of the Ddim
dialog box.

Keyboard DIMTOLJ
OPTIONS:
o • The Bottom of the nominal dimension matches the bottom of the tolerance
values.
• The Middle of the nominal dimension matches the middle of the tolerance
values.
2 • The Top of the nominal dimension matches the top of the tolerance values.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimgap, Dimlim, Dimtfac, Dimtm, Dimtol, Dimtp
EXAMPLE:
~1a.OOl
~
~-:r.OOl ~:rOOl
~
2.00- 0. 002
~
- 0.002 -0.002
Dimtolj = Botto m Dim t olj = Mi ddle Dimtolj = Top
'DIMTP (DIMension Tolerance Plus)

Dimtp maintains the maximum tolerance limit for dimension text. This is typically set

Keyboard DIMTP
218 DIMTP
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This is displayed only when Dimtol or Dimlim is On.
~ If Dimtol is on and Dimtm and Dimtp have the same value, the ± symbol is listed
next to that value.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimgap, Dimlim, Dimtfac, Dimtm, Dimtol, Dimtolj
EXAMPLE: See DIMLIM
'DIMTSZ (DIMension Tick SiZe)

Dimtsz controls the display of arrowheads, tick marks, and tick size for Linear, Radius,
and Diameter dimensioning. This variable is typically set using the Geometry option of

Keyboard DIMTSZ
OPTIONS:
o • Tick marks are disabled and arrowheads are displayed. Dimasz
and Dimsho are enabled.
any value • Determines the size of tick marks and makes them visible. Dimasz
other than 0 and Dimsho are disabled.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the default value of Dimtsz.
~ Regardless of the Dimtsz value, angular dimensions are still drawn with arrows.
System Variable o Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimasz, Dimscale, Dimsho
DIMTXSTY 219
EXAMPLE:
Dimtsz 0 Dimtsz .125
'DIMTVP (DIMension Text Vertical Position)

Dimtvp sets the vertical position of dimension text in relation to the dimension line. This
value is used when Dimtad is Off. The distance the text is offset from the dimension line
is the product of the text height and Dimtvp. setting Dimtvp to I is equivalent to setting
Dimtad On. The dimension line is broken to accommodate text only when Dimtvp's
absolute value is less than 0.7.

Keyboard DIMTVP
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtad
Dimlinear, Dimordinate, Dirnradius
EXAMPLE:
I' 'II' · '11 °11' 'I

2.00 200
20
. 2.00
~~~~
Dimtvp 1.5 Dimtvp .7 Dimtvp 0 Dimtvp - .7
'DIMTXSTY (DIMension TeXt STYle)

Dimtxsty maintains the current dimension style setting The current style setting is listed
in the Dimension Styles portion of the Ddim dialog box. This variable is typically set
220 DIMTXSTY

Keyboard DIMTXSTY
System Variable Standard Last value used in the drawing String
'DIMTXT (DTIdension TeXT)

Dimtxt sets the dimension text height unless the current Style has a preset text height.

Keyboard DIMTXT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Dimscale value is a multiplier to the default value of Dimtxt.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Style
'DIMTZIN (DIMension Tolerance Zero INches)

Dimtzin controls the zero display for tolerance values. This variable is typically set using
the Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.

Keyboard DIMTZIN
OPTIONS:
o • Feet and inches only - suppresses zero feet and exactly zero inches.
1 • Feet and inches only - displays zero feet and exactly zero inches.
2 • Feet and inches only - displays zero feet and suppresses zero inches.
3 • Feet and inches only - suppresses zero feet and displays zero inches.
DIMUPT 221
4 • Decimal dimensions - suppress leading zeros.
8 • Decimal dimensions - suppress trailing decimal zeros.
12 • Decimal dimensions - suppresses leading and trailing zeros.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtdec
'DIMUNIT (DIMension UNIT)

Dimunit dermes the Units format for all dimensions (except Angular). This variable is

Keyboard DIMUNIT
OPTIONS:
• Scientific
2 • Decimal
3 • Engineering
4 • Architectural (Stacked)
5 • Fractional (Stacked)
6 • Architectural
7 • Fractional
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimaltu
'DIMUPT (DIMension User Position Text)

Determines the flexibility of positioning or locating dimension text during dimension
creation.
222 DIMUPT

Keyboard DIMUPT
OPTIONS:
Off or 0 • Dimension text is automatically placed once you define a dimension
line location.
On or 1 • You determine the location for dimension text after choosing a
dimension line location.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can always send associative dimensioned text to its home location using the
Dimtedit command.
l All dimension styles default to the current Dimupt setting.
l The Dim command has an option named Update. This updates selected associative
dimensions to the current dimension style.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dimtedit
'DIMZIN (DIMension Zero INches)

Dirnzin controls the zero display for dimension text. This is typically set using the
Annotation option of the Ddim dialog box.
Keyboard DIMZIN
OPTIONS:
o • Feet and inches only - suppresses zero feet and exactly zero inches.
1 • Feet and inches only - displays zero feet and exactly zero inches.
2 • Feet and inches only - displays zero feet and suppresses zero inches.
3 • Feet and inches only - suppresses zero feet and displays zero inches.
4 • Decimal dimensions - suppress leading zeros.
DIR 223
8 • Decimal dimensions - suppress trailing decimal zeros.
12 • Decimal dimensions - suppresses leading and trailing zeros.

RELATED VARIABLES: Dimalttz, Dimaltz, Dimtzin
DIR (DIRectory)
Dir activates the DOS (Disk Operating System) command that lists file names. It also
includes the size, date, and time the files were last saved. Since this command was
intended for the DOS version of AutoCAD, it may not work on your Windows version.
You can use the File Utilities dialog box (Files) supplied with AutoCAD (this only list the
file names) or the FileManager program supplied with Windows. Dir is defined in a
customizable file named acad.pgp.

Keyboard DIR
PROMPTS:
File specification :
OPTIONS:
<Enter> • Lists all the files in the default directory.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t , If you type the word Dir to activate the DOS directory command and you receive
the error message "Unknown command ... " it may be because AutoCAD cannot
locate the file named acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modified
the file. Acad.pgp is usually located in the AutoCAD support directory.
224 DIR
l The available options (wild-card characters) are based on the operating system of
section titled wild-card.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Catalog, Dir, Del, Edit, Files, Sh, Shell, Type
'DISPSILH (DISPlay SILhouette)

Dispsilh controls the display of silhouette curves for 3-D Solid objects.

Keyboard DISPSILH
OPTIONS:
o • No silhouette is displayed for curved Solids.
1 • Silhouette is displayed for curved Solids.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Cone, Cylinder, Extrude, Revolve, Sphere, Torus
EXAMPLE:
Dispsilh 0 Dispsilh 1
~. GO
'DIST (DISTance)
Dist determines the distance between two points, the angle they form in the XY plane, the
angle from the XY plane, and the delta X, Y, and Z values.
DISTANCE 225

Screen menu ASSIST" INQUIRY" Dist:

Keyboard DIST
PROMPTS:
First point:
Sec ond point:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> The order in which you pick points determines the angle in the XY plane and
positive or negative values for delta X, Y, Z.
t> The current Units setting determines the format for displaying coordinates,
distances, and angles. Enter a number at the "First point" prompt for an example
of the current Units format.
t, You can determine the distance between the endpoints of a Line with the List
command.
t, Typing the word Distance gives the last distance calculated by the Dist command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Distance

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddunits, List, Units
'DISTANCE
Distance retains the last computed distance resulting from the Dist command.

Keyboard DISTANCE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> The current Units setting determines the format for displaying coordinates,
distances, and angles.
~ Distance defaults back to 0 once you exit AutoCAD.
226 DISTANCE

System Variable 0.0000, Read-only Initial default Real
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddunits, Dist, Units
DIVIDE
Divide marks an object at equal-length segments. The divided object is not physically
separated; rather, Points or Blocks are placed as markers at each division point. You can
Divide Arcs, Circles, Ellipses, Lines, Polylines, 3-D Polys, and Splines. You cannot
divide Mlines, Rays, Regions, Traces, Xlines, wireframe, and Solid objects.

Draw toolbar r7I
~
Screen menu DRAW 2 ~ Divide:

Keyboard DIVIDE
PROMPTS:
Select object to divide:
<Number of segments>/Block:
OPTIONS:
Number of • Enter the number of segments for division.
segments
Block • Divides an object with a Block or Xref currently dermed in the
drawing. After providing the Block name and alignment, you are
prompted for the number of segments.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When dividing Circles, the first marker begins at the angle from the center based
on the current Snap Rotation angle.
~ The first marker location for closed Polylines is placed on the beginning vertex.
~ If you cannot see the Points dividing an object, try adjusting the Pdmode and
Pdsize system variables (you can use the Ddptype dialog box) and issuing a
Regen.
~ The Block option lets you align the Block with the divided object. An aligned
Block is rotated around its insertion point and drawn parallel to the divided object.
An unaligned Block is drawn with a rotation angle to the object of o.
DONUT 227
~ You can Osnap to the points placed by Divide with the Node option.
~ You can manipulate Divide's markers as a group with the Previous selection set
option.
~ You can Divide only one object at a time.
~ You cannot change the X, Y, and Z scale factor of a Block used for object division.
~ When using the Block option, only those Attributes defined as Constant are
brought into the drawing. If you try editing the Attribute, the message "That Block
has no editable attributes" appears.
~ Divide markers are placed in the UCS of the object being divided. They are
always placed on the object regardless of the current Elevation setting.
~ You can Divide an object from 2 to 32,767 segments.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Block, Ddptype, Measure, Node, Point, Xref
EXAMPLE:
Block nO~7ngle/ .
Insertion
Poirlt Not
Aligned Aligned
DONUT (DOughNUT)
Donut draws solid-filled rings and circles. Donut objects are constructed from Closed
Polyline Arc segments. You provide the inside and outside diameters and the center point
location. Once you have located the first Donut, the command repeats by asking for
another center point location. End the command by pressing an extra <Enter> key or use
the cancel «Esc» key.
228 DONUT

Draw toolbar
o
Pull-down DRAW 1 .. Donut
Screen menu Donut or Doughnut
Keyboard DONUT
PROMPTS:
Inside diameter <0.5000>:
Outside diameter <1.0000>:
Center of doughnut :
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) The default inside and outside diameter values are based on the last Donut drawn
in the current session or by setting the Donutid and Donutod values.
\) Convert Donuts into cylinders by assigning a Thickness using the Ddmodify,
Change, or Extrude command.
\) Construct a solid-filled circle by setting the Donut's inside diameter to O.
\) You can edit Donuts with Pedit because they are Polyline Arcs.
to Donuts are wireframed if Fill is set to Off.

\) If Grips are enabled, the Donut's Grip definition points are defined by the two
Polyarcs. Therefore, the Grips are on the vertices and midpoints of the Polyarcs.
Rotating the Donut offsets the Grip location by the rotation angle. Picking any of
the Grip points lets you change the size and shape.
£ The results of exploding a Donut are two Arcs and no width.
RELATED VARIABLES: Donutid, Donutod, Fillmode

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Ddmodify, Fill, grips, Pline, Pedit
DONUTID 229
EXAMPLE:
~~ele,
\L5e
Inside Diameter = .5 Inside Diometer = 0
OQ
Outside Diometer = '.0 Outside Diometer = '.0
o
e><ploded
Thickness .3
,/
'DONUTID (DOughNUT Inside Diameter)

Donutid sets the inside diameter for Donuts.

Keyboard DONUTID
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This value must be nonzero. If the inside diameter is set with a negative number it
is automatically converted to its absolute value.
~ If the value for the Donutid is greater than the value for Donutod, the values are
automatically swapped the next time you draw Donuts.
RELATED VARIABLES: Donutod
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Donut
230 DONUTOD
'DONUTOD (DOughNUT Outside Diameter)

Sets the outside diameter for Donuts.

Keyboard DONUTOD
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This value must be nonzero. If the outside diameter is set with a negative number
it is automatically converted to its absolute value.
~ If the value for the Donutid is greater than the value for Donutod, the values are
automatically swapped the next time you draw Donuts.
RELATED VARIABLES: Donutid
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Donut
DOUGHNUT see DONUT
'DRAGMODE
Controls the way objects are displayed as they are dragged about the drawing. The system
variable (Setvar) that maintains this setting is also named Dragmode.

Keyboard DRAG
PROMPTS:
ON/OFF/Auto <Auto>:
OPTIONS:
On • Enables dragging when requested. You must type Drag at the
appropriate Command prompt option.
Off • Ignores all dragging requests.
Auto • Automatically enables drag for any command that supports dragging.
DRAGP2 231
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Setting Dragmode Off may provide faster draw and edit operations.
~ When using multiple Viewports, you can see the objects drag only in the current
Viewport. If you pick objects in other Viewports, you can watch them drag in the
Viewport from which they were chosen.
~, Psdrag controls the dragging of PostScript images.
i; You can control dimension value dragging with the Dimsho variable. This
determines whether the dimension value dynamically updates on the screen during
editing operations.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dragmode, Dragp 1, Dragp2
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Setvar
'DRAGPI
Determines the regen-drag input sampling rate.

Keyboard DRAGPI
System variable 10 Configuration file Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Dragmode, Dragp2
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dragmode
'DRAGP2
Determines the fast-drag input sampling rate.

Keyboard DRAGP2
RELATED VARIABLES: Dragmode, Dragp 1
232 DSVIEWER
DSVIEWER (DiSplay VIEWER)

Activates the Aerial View window. The Aerial View window provides a way to maneuver
quickly around your drawing using the Zoom and Pan commands. This viewing tool can
be accessed so long as your hardware is configured to use the Whip driver or the
Windows accelerated display driver with the Display List option.

Standard toolbar
Pull-down Tools ~ Aerial View

Keyboard DSVIEWER or AV
OPTIONS:
PAN ~~rn~~lB=rm:rr;;~=~~ DISPLAY LIST

ZOOM MODE GLOBAL
LOCATOR ZOOM IN
ZOOM OUT
View Box
View
Zoom In • Magnifies the drawing in the Aerial View window. Each
time you select this option you continue to Zoom In.
Zoom Out • Shrinks the drawing in the Aerial View window. Each time
you select this option you continue to Zoom Out.
Global • Displays the entire drawing (Zoom All) in the Aerial View
window.
Mode
Pan • Lets you Pan around the drawing by changing the location
of the View Box in the Aerial View window.
DTEXT 233
Zoom • Lets you Zoom around the drawing by selecting two

diagonal points in the Aerial View window.
Options
Auto Viewport • When this option is checked the Aerial View automatically
updates to match the display in the active viewport.
Dynamic • Determines whether the Aerial View window is updated as
Update you edit the drawing.
Locator • Increases or decreases the Zoom magnification up to 32
magnification ... times the area under the cross hairs.
Display • Provides information on the Display List driver.
Statistics ...
Locator button • Determines an area from the drawing to display in the
Aerial view window. Picking this option lets you drag a
round icon onto the drawing.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> If you type AV to activate the Dsviewer command and you receive the error
l This command will not work when Paper space or Dview are active.
l Aerial view is not accessible if Paper space or Dview is active or when fast zooms
are disabled (Viewres).
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Config, Pan, Zoom
DTEXT (Dynamic TEXT) I TEXT

Dtext creates one or more lines of Text on your drawing. Each line of Text is a separate
object. Text creates single lines of text. Although these commands are very similar (the
end results are the same) there are a few differences when inputting the actual text:
• In Dtext the text appears on the screen as you type at the keyboard.
• In Dtext you can move the cursor to different parts of the drawing and enter more
text without exiting the command.
234 DTEXT
• In Dtext you press the <Enter> key once to enter a second line of text; in Text you
must press the <Enter> key twice.

Draw toolbar
~ Dtext J{ IText
Screen menu DRAW 2 ... DText:
Keyboard DTEXT or TEXT
PROMPTS:
Justify/Style /< Start point > :
Align / Fit/Center / Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/ BL/BC/BR:
Height <0.2000 >:
Rotation angle <0 >:
Text:
OPTIONS:
Start point • Text justification is at the bottom left of the first character for
each line of text.
Justify • Specifies the text justification.
Align • Specifies the beginning and ending point of a line of text. The text
height is adjusted to fit between these points.
Fit • Specifies the beginning and ending point of a line of text. You
determine the height. The width is controlled by the two
endpoints, and the text is adjusted to fit.
Center • Specifies the center of the text horizontally and the base of the
text vertically.
Middle • Specifies the middle of the text horizontally and vertically.
Right • Text justification is at the bottom right of the last character for
each line of text.
TL • Text justification is at the top left of the tallest character.
TC • Text justification is at the top center of the tallest character.
TR • Text justification is at the top right of the tallest character.
ML • Text justification is at the middle left, between the top of the
tallest character and the bottom of the lowest descender.
DTEXT 235
MC • Text justification is at the middle center, between the top of the

MR • Text justification is at the middle right, between the top of the
BL • Text justification is at the bottom left of the lowest descender.
BC • Text justification is at the bottom center of the lowest descender.
BR • Text justification is at the bottom right of the lowest descender.
Style • Change the current Style default. The Style must be previously
defined.
<Enter> • Pressing <Enter> causes new text to be placed directly below the
last text already on the drawing. The new text acquires the
existing text Style, height, and rotation. This only works if text
was created during the current drawing session and the last text
created was not erased. This will not work for Mtext objects.
Height • Assigns a text height. You are not prompted for this when using
Align or a text Style with a predefined height.
Rotation • Specifies the text angle.
angle
Text • Enter the text string.
Special Character Codes
You can enter codes in your text string to obtain the following special characters:
Code Description Example Result
%%0 Toggle overscore mode On/off %%oOverscore Overscore
%%u Toggle underscore mode on/off %%uUnderscore Underscore
\U+OOBO Draw degrees symbol 30\U+00BO 30°
\U+OOBI Draw plus/minus tolerance symbol 30\U+OOBI 30±
\U+2205 Draw diameter symbol \U+220530 030
• When entering Dtext, the control characters appear in the drawing. Once you
end the command, the appropriate characters replace the control codes.
236 OTeXT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If Grips are enabled, the text's Grip deftnition points are the lower left comer and
text insertion point. For Align and Fit text the Grips are the lower left and lower
right comers. Align text does not always work as expected. Moving the left Grip
causes the text string to move; picking the right Grip point causes the Grip
deftnition to move but the text remains in the same location. Pick the Grip a
second time and the text adjusts to the new Grip locations.
~ Mtext creates paragraph Text; Attdef creates Attribute Text.
~ When using the same notes for multiple drawings, save time by Wblocking the text
and Inserting it into the other drawings. You can also import ASCn text from a
separate ftle with the Mtext command.
~ You can assign a Thickness to text, but only after the text is on the drawing. Do
this with the Change, Ddmodify, Chprop, or Ddchprop command.
~ The Osnap Insert locates the insertion point of text.
~ Edit text strings with the Ddedit, Ddmodify, or Change command.
~ The spacing between mUltiple lines of text is determined by the individual text font
deftnition ftles.
~ If all your text appears as empty boxes you may have Qtext turned On. To change
this, Turn Qtext Off and Regenerate the drawing.
~ Dtext Only - Text always appears to the right of the insertion point. Once you
press <Enter> to end the command, the text adjusts itself to the correct
justiftcation.
~ Dtext Only - You must press <Enter> one extra time to end the Dtext command.
~ Check your spelling with the Spell command.
l During the Dtext and Text commands the tablet is inactive and the keyboard's
space bar places spaces between text characters.
l Base your text height on the scale with which you plan to plot the drawing. The
text height you specify in AutoCAD should be the height of plotted text multiplied
by the plot scale factor.
l You cannot use the Fit option for text Styles assigned a vertical orientation.
,!, You can evaluate text strings (Texteval) using Text but not with Dtext or Mtext.
RELATED VARIABLES: Texteval, Textftll, Textqlty, Textsize, Textstyle
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Ddedit, Ddmodify, grips, Mtext, Qtext, Spell,
Style, Text
DVIEW 237
EXAMPLE:
T\y
~u · ····· ·N ...· .······M
· · ··A ...·····.....· Ir'
~. . ······1· . ...·..~---:
... . . .···.E·.X.·
. . ...·.·.T - ~~~dle
x -------,
L Left Lc:enter
~Jy rlcJmif:;te xt~ : ~~~dle
~H HHXH H H~ -: Ii~;~~~I,e
L f
Le t
Lcenter
ALIGN TEXT FIT TEXT
hLiGN TEXT BETWEEI:* [IT TEXT BETWEEN<
lWO POINTS xTWO POINTSk
JOU DEfERMINE THE HEIGHk
DVIEW (Dynamic VIEW)

Dview is a tool for viewing 3-D models. Dview is similar to the Ddvpoint and Vpoint
commands. However, in Dview you can dynamically drag and rotate all or part of a 3-D
model. You can display a perspective view of the model and toggle back and forth
between parallel and perspective views. The Dview command is similar to the concept of
using a camera to view objects.

Pull-down View - 3D Dynamic View
Screen menu VIEW - Dview:
Keyboard DVIEWorDV
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
CAmera / TArget / Distance / POints / PAn /Zoom/TWist/CLip/ Hide/
Off/Undo/<eXit>:
238 DVIEW
OPTIONS:
Select • Object selection is used to preview the results of the various Dview
objects options. If no objects are selected, a special 3-D block named
Dviewblock is displayed as the preview image. Once you exit Dview,
the Dviewblock is replaced by your actual drawing and is displayed
with the display new settings.
Enter direction and magnitude angles
• Selects a point on your screen, activating the Enter direction and
magnitude angles option. This option permits you to pick a target
point and rotate your drawing about the screen, or you can enter
angles between 0 and 360 degrees. If you enter the direction and
magnitude angles from the keyboard, separate them with a comma.
The direction angle indicates the front of the view, and the
magnitude angle determines how far the view rolls. The X,Y
Coordinates listed on the screen change to reflect the Direction and
magnitude.
CAmera • Picks a camera angle relative to the target. This is similar to the
Vpoint rotate option. You can move your camera point up, down,
and around the target point.
TArget • Specifies a new target point relative to the camera.
Distance • Determines the distance from the camera to the target. This option
turns perspective viewing on.
POints • Prompts you to specify a camera and target point.
PAn • Pans or scrolls around the screen.
Zoom • When perspective viewing is off, you can Zoom In and Out of the
view based on the Zoom Center option. If perspective viewing is on,
you can change the lens length of the camera. The default is a camera
with a 50mm lens. Increasing the lens length is similar to using a
telephoto lens; decreasing the lens length is similar to using a wide
angle lens.
TWist • Determines the view twist angle by rotating the camera around the
line of sight.
CLip • Specifies the front and back clipping planes. A clipping plane is
perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and target.
Hide • Performs a hidden line removal on the current Dview selection set.
DVIEW 239
Off • Turns perspective viewing off.

Undo • Reverses the last Dview option.
eXit • Ends the command and regenerates the drawing to reflect any
changes.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can customize the Dviewblock by creating your own 3-D drawing with this
name. Keep the geometry simple, but make sure the different sides are unique so
that you can observe the dynamic movement of the symbol.
t> During perspective viewing (Distance), the Ucsicon is replaced by a special icon
resembling a cube drawn in perspective. This is a reminder that perspective
viewing is on and only a subset of commands will work while perspective is
active.
t> Use the View and Vports Save options to restore perspective views. Viewports
retain all the Dview display parameters.
t> Dview becomes part of the Zoom Previous queue.
t> When perspective viewing is enabled you must use the Zoom option of the Dview
command to change the viewing magnification. That is because the Zoom
command is disabled.
t> If you type the letter DV to activate the Dview command and you receive the error
Acad.pgp is usually located in the AutoCAD support directory.
£ Zoom, Pan, Sketch, and transparent 'Zoom and 'Pan commands, as well as many
editing commands, do not work in perspective views.
£ Once you initiate the Dview command you cannot move to another viewport to
complete the command. You can cancel «Esc» the command, select another
viewport, and then reissue the Dview command.
£ Be careful. The Ddview command is a companion to the View command and not
the Dview command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Backz, Frontz, Lenslength, Target, Viewctr, Viewdir,
Viewmode, Viewsize, Viewtwist, Vsmax, Vsmin, Worldview
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddvpoint, View, Vpoint, Vports
240 DVIEW
EXAMPLE:
Command: DVIEW
Select objects: All
CAmera/TArget/Distance/POints/PAn/Zoom/TWist/CLip/Hide/Off/U
ndo/<eXit>: CA
Toggle angle in/Enter angle from XY plane <90.0000>: 30
Toggle angle from/Enter angle in XY plane from X axis <-
90.00000>: -135
CAmera/TArget/Distance/POints/PAn/Zoom/TWist/CLip/Hide/Off/U
ndo/<eXit>: X
'DWGCODEPAGE (DraWinG CODE PAGE)

Dwgcodepage displays the code page of the drawing. Dwgcodepage always has the same
value as Syscodepage and exists for compatibility purposes only.

Keyboard DWGCODEPAGE
DWGTITLED 241
System variable varies, Read-only Initial default String

RELATED VARIABLES: Syscodepage
'DWGNAME (DraWinG NAME)

Dwgname maintains the current drawing name. If the drawing is assigned a drive and/or
directory this information is included. The drawing is called "UNNAMED" unless you
assign it a different name. This value is set with the Save and Saveas command.

Keyboard DWGNAME
RELATED VARIABLES: Dwgprefix, Dwgtitled
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Save, Saveas
'DWGPREFIX (DraWinG PREFIX)

Dwgprefix maintains the drawings drive and/or directory prefix. If the drawing has not
been assigned a drive and/or directory it defaults to the current drive and directory. This
value is set with the Save and Saveas command.

Keyboard DWGPREFIX
RELATED VARIABLES: Dwgname
'DWGTITLED (DraWinG TITLED)

Dwgtitled maintains whether or not the current drawing has been assigned a name.
242 DWGTITLED

Keyboard DWGTITLED
OPTIONS:
o • The current drawing has no assigned name.
I • The current drawing has an assigned name.

System variable 0, Read-only I (as soon as the drawing is saved) Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Dwgname
'DWGWRITE (DraWinG WRITE)

Dwgwrite maintains the read/write drawing status when opening up or editing an existing
drawing.

Keyboard DWGWRITE
OPTIONS:
o • The file is read only.
1 • The file has read/write capabilities.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When Filedia is set to 1 (enabled) you can select the Read Only Mode button.
When Filedia is set to 0 (disabled) you are not given the option to set the Read
Only mode.
System variable Read/Write, Read-only Initial default Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Open
DXBIN (Drawing Interchange Binary)

Imports binary drawing exchange files (.dxb). Even though there is no direct AutoCAD
command to write a DXB file, you do have this capability. Configure AutoCAD for the
plotter selection AutoCAD file output formats, select the DXB file output option, and plot
to a file. DXB files have the file extension .dxb.
DXFOUT 243

Keyboard DXBIN
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Creating a DXB plot file converts a 3-D drawing to 2-D. Set the viewpoint with
Vpoint or Dview before plotting to a file. Once the plot is complete, you can
import the file with the Dxbin command. This type of drawing consists entirely of
Line segments. This process produces a 2-D perspective drawing.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Configure, Plot
DXFIN see IMPORT
DXFOUT see EXPORT

244 EDGE
EDGE
Edge changes the visibility of 3-D Face edges. You can achieve the same results using the
Ddmodify dialog box.

Surfaces toolbar
Keyboard EDGE
PROMPTS:
Display /<S elect edge>:
OPTIONS:
Select edge • Select 3-D Face edges you want invisible.
Display
Select • Highlights the invisible edges of 3-D Face objects you
individually select. Selecting highlighted edges converts them
back to being visible.
All • Highlights the invisible edges of all 3-D Face objects. Selecting
highlighted edges converts them back to being visible.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can make all edges visible by setting Splframe to 1.
~ You may have to update your display by Regenerating the drawing.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dface, Ddmodify
'EDGEMODE
Edgemode determines how Trim and Extend define boundary edges. This variable is
usually set while using the Trim or Extend command.
EDGESURF 245

Keyboard EDGEMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Uses the actual size of the boundary edge.
1 • Extends or Trims objects based on the actual or projected boundary or
cutting edge.
System variable o Initial default Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Extend, Trim
EDGESURF
Edgesurf generates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) by approximating a Coons surface
patch from four adjoining objects. The edges can be made up of Lines, Arcs, or open
Polylines anywhere in 3-D space. The endpoints of each object must share the same
vertices to form a closed path. You can pick the edges in any order. The first edge or
object selected defines the M direction of the mesh. The two edges that intersect the M
edge determine the N direction for the mesh.

Surfaces toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SURFACES - Edgsurf:

Keyboard EDGESURF
PROMPTS:
Select edge 1
Select edge 2
Select edge 3
Select edge 4
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can edit an Edgesurf object with the Pedit command.
l Exploding an Edgesurf results in individual 3-D Faces.
RELATED VARIABLES: Surftabl, Surftab2

246 EDGESURF
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dmesh,3Dface
EXAMPLE:
EDIT
Edit activates the DOS (Disk Operating System) text editor program. This program
creates and edits ASCII text. You can use the Mtext import routine and retrieve files
created with the Edit text editor. Edit is defined in a customizable file named acad.pgp.
See your Operating System documentation for more detailed information on using the text
editor.

Keyboard EDIT
PROMPTS:
File to edit :
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i;. If you type the word Edit to activate the Operating System text editor and you
receive the error message "Unknown command ... "it may be because AutoCAD
modified the file . Acad.pgp is usually located in the AutoCAD Support directory.
i;. You can program the acad.pgp file and replace your own ASCII text editor with
Edit. See the AutoCAD Customization Guide for more detailed information.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Catalog, Del, Dir, Mtext, Sh, Shell, Type
'ELEV
Elev sets the Elevation and extrusion Thickness of new objects. The Elev is the object's
location along the Z axis. The extrusion Thickness (negative or positive) is its height
aboye (or below) the Z elevation. The Elevation setting only affects those objects whose Z
value is not otherwise specified. This value is usually set with the Ddemodes dialog box.
ELEVATION 247

Keyboard ELEV
PROMPTS:
New current el evat ion <0 . 0000 >:
New current th icknes s <0 . 000 0> :
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The current UCS detennines an object's Z location or Elevation. Any Elevation
other than 0 is applied during object construction.
~ You can provide an Elevation and Thickness to existing objects including Text
and Attributes using the Change or Chprop command. You can only provide the
Thickness if you use the Odmodify or Odchprop dialog box.
~ Use the UCS, Oducs, or Odemodes command as an alternative to setting the
Elevation. Use the Thickness system variable for setting the extrusion Thickness.
~ The combination of Elev and UCS can be confusing. It is recommended that you
use UCS and not change the Elevation.
RELATED VARIABLES: Elevation
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Oducs, UCS
'ELEVATION
Elevation sets and maintains the value for the current Elev. This value is usually set with
the Elev or Ddemodes dialog box.

Keyboard ELEVATION

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Odemodes, Elev
248 ELLIPSE
ELLIPSE
Ellipse draws ellipses and elliptical arcs. There are two different type of Ellipses you can
construct. One is considered a true Ellipse (the default) since it can be manipulated by its
center point and the endpoints (quadrant) of its major and minor axes. The other is made
up of 16 Polyline arcs, and therefore you are unable to locate the center and endpoints.
You can locate the center, endpoints, and midpoint of each Polyline arc and use the Pedit
command to modify the arcs. The type of Ellipse drawn is based on the Pellipse variable
setting.

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 1-. Ellipse

Keyboard ELLIPSE
PROMPTS:
Arc / Center/ <Axis endpoint 1>:
Axis endpoint 2 :
<Other axis distance> / Rotation:
OPTIONS:
Axis endpoint • Creates an Ellipse using a specified axis.
Arc • Creates an Elliptical arc. Pellipse must be true (0) to work.
Center • Specifies a center point and one endpoint of each axis.
Rotation • Specifies the rotation around the major axis. The rotation
angle must be between 0 and 89.4 degrees.
Isocircle • When isometric mode is enabled (see Snap), the Ellipse
prompt includes an Isocircle option. Isometric circles are
drawn in the current Isoplane. You provide the center
point and the radius or diameter.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can assign a Thickness to a pline Ellipse but not to a true Ellipse. However,
you can Extrude both types of Ellipses.
END 249
~ A quick way to detenmne whether the Ellipse is true or composed of Polyline Arcs
is to enable the Grips by selecting the objects. True Ellipses only have five Grip
definition points. See the example below.
~ You can use the Break and Trim commands on Ellipses to create elliptical arcs.
~ You can create your own Ellipse by saving a Circle as a Block and Inserting it
with different X and Y values.
t> You can request the area and perimeter/length of an Ellipse by using the Object
option of the Area command.
:l The UCS Object option does not allow a true ellipse object to be used to specify a
user coordinate system.
:l When using the Break command, the deleted portion of a an Ellipse is detenmned
by the order of your pick points. Ellipses break in a counterclockwise direction.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pellipse
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Isoplane, Pline, Pedit, Snap
EXAMPLE:
Polyline Ellipse True Ellipse
00
Pellipse 1 Pellipse 0
END
End saves your drawing, exits AutoCAD, and returns you to Windows.

Keyboard END
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If the drawing's name defaults to "Unnamed" because it is new and has never been
saved, you are given the opportunity to assign a different name to that drawing.
~ Depending on the Isavebak system variable setting you can have the previously
saved copy of the drawing file renamed with the file extension . bak.
250 END
~ If the drawing is read-only and you want to save changes, use the Saveas command
and assign a new name to the drawing.
~ You can control the file size with the system variables Isavebak, Isavepercent, and
Rasterpreview.
~ If you made changes to a drawing that is write-protected and you want to save the
changes, use the Save or Saveas command and create a new drawing with a
different name.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dwgwrite, Filedia, Isavebak, Isavepercent, Rasterpreview
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Qsave, Quit, Save, Saveas
ERASE
Erase deletes objects from the drawing.

Modify toolbar _~
Screen menu MODIFY" Erase:

Keyboard ERASE or E
PROMPTS:
Select objec t s :
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can use the Cut (Cutclip) option found in the Edit pulldown. This places the
deleted objects in the Windows clipboard.
~ Use the U, Undo, or Oops to restore the last group of erased objects. If you
executed commands after erasing objects, use the Oops command.
~ You can delete part of an object using Break, Change, Grips, Lengthen, Mledit
(for multilines only), Stretch, and Trim.
~ If you type E to activate the Erase command and you receive the error message
"Unknown command ..." it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the file named
acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modified the file. Acad.pgp is
located in the AutoCAD support directory.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Cutclip, Break, Change, grips, Lengthen, Mledit,
Stretch, Trim
EXPERT 251
exit
Exit provides two different functions, and it is not an AutoCAD command. The first
function is the use of Exit as a way to end the Dview, Dim, Grip editing, Pedit, and
Sketch commands. You complete each command by typing Exit or X. Depending on the
command, you may even be able to use the <Esc> key. The second function is the use of
Exit as an alias for the Quit command. This use is activated when you pick Exit from the
pUlldown or screen menu or you type Exit at the Command prompt.

Pull-down File - Exit
Screen menu FILE - Exit:
Keyboard EXIT or QUIT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> If you type the word Exit and you receive the error message "Unknown
command .. ." may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the file named acad.pgp or
you are using third party software that modified the file. Acad.pgp is usually
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Quit
'EXPERT
Expert controls the frequency of some of the Command prompt messages such as "Are
you sure?". Suppression of these messages and questions assumes your response is Yes.
Expert mode can also affect scripts, Lisp routines, and macros.

Keyboard EXPERT
OPTIONS:
o • Issues all prompts.
• Suppresses "About to regen, proceed?" and "Really want to turn the current
layer off?"
252 EXPERT
2 • Suppresses the prompts "Block already defined. Redefine it?" when a Block
by that name already exists and "A drawing with this name already exists.
Overwrite it?" when a file by that name already exists in the directory you
assigned to the Wblock.
3 • Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by Linetype Load and
Linetype Create if a linetype that is already loaded or created has the same
name.
4 • Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by UCS and Vport Save
if the name you provide already exists.
5 • Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by Dimstyle Save if the
dimension style name you provide already exists.
System variable o Initial default Integer
'EXPLMODE (EXPLode MODE)

Explmode controls whether Blocks with different X, Y, and Z values can be Exploded.

Keyboard EXPLMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Does not Explode non-uniformly scaled Blocks.
1 • Explodes non-uniformly scaled Blocks.
System variable 1 Last value used in the drawing Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Explode, Xplode
EXPLODE
Explode converts complex objects into their individual components. Exploding some
objects may result in a change in their color and linetype as they return to their original
layer, color, and linetype deftnitions. Use the Xplode command if you want to control the
color, layer, and linetype of the exploded objects.
EXPLODE 253
Explode Converts to Remarks
3-D Mesh 3-D Face

3-D Poly Line
3-D Solid Region You cannot explode a revolved object, a Sphere, or
a Torus.
Block original objects Blocks containing circles and arcs with unequal X,
Y, and Z values become ellipses and elliptical arcs.
Attributes lose their values and convert to their
attribute defmitions.
Dimension Mtext, Solid,
Line, Point
Hatch Line
Mline Lines, Arcs
Mtext Text
Pface 3-D Face
Polyline Lines, Arcs Polylines lose all tangent and width information.
Region original objects

Modify tool bar ,.
Screen menu MODIFY" Explode:

Keyboard EXPLODE
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You cannot Explode a 3-D Face, complex linetype, Ellipse (true), Ray, Revolved
object, Shape, Solid, Sphere, Spline, Tolerance dimension, Torus, Trace, or Xline.
You can Explode groups by using the Group Explode option. You must Bind an
Xref before it can be Exploded.
254 EXPLODE
i> Using Explode places the resulting objects in the Previous selection set.
i> Pre-explode Blocks, Hatch patterns, and drawing files by inserting them with an
asterisk (*) preceding their insertion name. Pre-explode dimensions by turning
DimasoOff.
l You may have to Explode a Block more than once to break it down into its
original components. This is referred to as "Nested Levels" of information. For
example, blocks A, B, and C may make up a fourth block named D. Exploding D
leaves you with the original blocks A, B, and C.
RELATED VARIABLES: Explmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Xplode
EXPORT
Export saves drawings or parts of drawings to other file formats. These formats can often
be imported into other computer programs. See the AutoCAD User's Guide for more

Pull-down File - Export...
Screen menu FILE - EXPORT
Keyboard EXPORT
OPTIONS:
Metafile (*.WMF) • Creates a Windows Metafile. You select the objects to
Export.
• This is the same as using the Wmfout command.
ACIS (*.SAT) • Converts Regions, Solids, and other objects representing
NURB surfaces to ACIS files.
• This is the same as using the Acisout command.
Encapsulated • Creates encapsulated PostScript files. You have many
PostScript (* .EPS) options for defining the objects to export. Most are similar
to the Plot command. See also Psprolog and Psfill.
• This is the same as using the Psout command.
EXPORT 255
DXX Extract • DXX files are a subset of the DXF command. They extract
(*.DXX) data from drawings concerning Block references, Attribute
information, and end-of-sequence objects.
• This is the same as using Ddattext or Attext commands.

Bitmap (* .BMP) • Creates a Bitmapped image of selected objects.
• This is the same as using the Render - Save option,

Bmpout, or the Makepreview command.
DXF(*.DXF) • Creates DXF (Drawing Interchange) file formats. You can
determine the number of decimal places of accuracy.
When working with 3-D, use 16 decimal places for the
greatest accuracy. You can select the objects to export and
have the file written in an ASCII or Binary format. You
can edit the ASCII format, but the Binary format is smaller
and faster when reading and writing to disk.
• This is the same as using the Dxfout command.

3D Studio (* .3DS) • Creates 3-D Studio files.
• This is the same as using the 3Dsout command.
Drawing (*.DWG) • Extracts a Block defined in the current drawing to its own
drawing file. This is similar to the Wblock command.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can create TGA, TIFF, and GIF files using the Saveimg command.
~ You can export DXB files by setting your plotter to the AutoCAD file output
formats option.
~ The Destination option of the Render command lets you create TGA, TIFF, GIF,
PostScript, XII, PBM, BMP, PCX, SUN, FITS, FAX G III, IFF images.
~ Create GIF, TIF, and TGA file formats by using the Replay option.
~ Issuing 3Dsout automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for
use. Since this takes up valuable memory, it may slow down AutoCAD or other
Window programs you may want active. You can unload the rendering software
with the Renderun10ad command. Even the Undo command has no effect on
unloading the rendering software.
256 EXPORT
~ Issuing 3Dsout automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
cancel out of the command this Layer is still created.
l Not all programs can import AutoCAD files created with the Export command.
The code AutoCAD uses to create the export files may not be compatible with
other programs even though they indicate that they can accept those file types.
RELATED VARIABLES: Filedia, Psprolog
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dsout, Acisout, Attext, Bmpout, Ddattext, Dxbin,
Dxfout, Import, Makepreview, Psfill, Psout, Render, Saveimg, Wblock, Wmfout
EXTEND
Extend lengthens an object to a boundary or implied boundary. Objects can be both a
boundary and an object to extend.
The following chart shows the capabilities of each object type:
Object to Boundary Object to Boundary

Object extend Object extend
3-D Face No No Mtext No Yes

3-D Mesh No No Pface No No
3-D Poly Yes Yes Point No No
3-D Solids No No Polylines Yes Yes
Arc Yes Yes Ray Yes Yes
Assoc. Dim. Yes No Region No Yes
Block No No Shape No No
Circle No Yes Solid No No
Ellipse (Pline) No Yes Spline No Yes
Ellipse (True) No Yes Text No Yes
Leader No Yes Trace No No
Line Yes Yes *Viewport No Yes
Mline No Yes Xline No Yes
* Viewports - Only when Paper space is active.

EXTEND 257

Modify toolbar
Screen menu MODIFY -. Extend:

Keyboard EXTEND
PROMPTS:
Select boundary edges: (Projmode=UCS, Edgemode=No extend )
Select objects:
<Select object to extend>/Project/Edge/Undo:
OPTIONS:
Select boundary • Determines the boundary location(s) for the extended
edges object.
Select object to • Selects the object(s) to lengthen. Pick closer to the endpoint
extend being extended. You can select multiple objects by using
the Fence selection set method.
Project • Determines the projection mode used for finding boundary
edges.
• This value is maintained by the Projmode system variable.
None • Specifies no projection. Only objects that intersect with the
boundary edge in 3-D space extend.
ues • Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current ues.
• Objects that do not intersect with the boundary edges in
3-D space. extend.
View • Determines the projection based on the current view
direction.
• Extends all objects that intersect with the cutting edge in the
current view.
258 EXTEND
Edge • Determines whether the object extends to the implied

intersection or whether it must actually intersect the
boundary edge.
• This value is maintained by the Edgemode system variable.
Extend • Extends to the boundary edge or to the implied intersection.
No extend • Extends only if it actually intersects the boundary edge.
Undo • Restores the last object extended.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, At times you can use Chamfer, Change (Point), Break, Ddmodify, Fillet, Grip
editing, and Lengthen to Extend most objects. None of these commands require a
boundary edge.
t, A vertex is added to a Polyline modified with the Pedit Fit option when that
Polyline is extended.
t, You can select more than one boundary edge. The objects you are extending end
at the first boundary. Picking the object again extends it to the next boundary edge.
t, Extending a linear associative dimension automatically updates the dimension.
t, If an object will not extend, pick a new point on the object closer to the endpoint
you are extending.
J: Objects extend to the center of wide Polyline boundaries and to each line of an
MIine object.
J: Ends of wide Polylines are always square. Extending a wide Polyline to an angled
boundary results in a portion of the Polyline extending past the boundary edge.
RELATED VARIABLES: Edgemode, Projmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, grip, Lengthen, Stretch, Trim
EXTMAX 259
EXAMPLE:
Object to
extend.
I / BoundOry
~ edge
-r
Object to ~
extend L
r-1.00 1 1 .:'0
wflJ wflJ
Boundary
edge
Object to J\
exte nd •
80undar~
edge
-I
Extend edge
'EXTMAX (EXTents MAXimum)

Extmax keeps track of the upper right drawing extents. If new objects are drawn past the
latest upper right value, this value increases. If objects are erased or moved inward, this
value decreases. This decrease is registered when Zoom All or Zoom Extents detects the
change.

Keyboard EXTMAX
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Paper space and Model space maintain their own values.
System variable -1.0000E+20,-1.0000E+ Last value used in the 3-D Point
20, -1.0000E+20, Read-only drawing
RELATED VARIABLES: Extmin
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Zoom
260 EXTMIN
'EXTMIN (EXTents MINimum)

Extmin keeps track of the lower left drawing extents. If new objects are drawn before the
latest lower left value, this value decreases. If objects are erased or moved inward, this
value increases. This increase is registered when Zoom Allor Zoom Extents detects the
change.

Keyboard EXTMIN
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Paper space and Model space maintain their own values.
System variable l.OOOOE+20,l.OOOOE+ Last value used in the 3-D Point
20, l.OOOOE +20, Read-only drawing
RELATED VARIABLES: Extmax
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Zoom
EXTRUDE
Extrude generates Solids by extruding 2-D objects. The 2-D objects can be Closed
Polylines, Closed Splines, Circles, Donuts, Rectangs, Polygons, Regions, and Ellipses.

Solids toolbar II
Screen menu DRAW 2 .. SOLIDS" Extrude:
Keyboard Extrude
EXTRUDE 261
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
Path/<Height of Extrusion>:
Extrusion taper angle <0>:
OPTIONS:
Height of Extrusion • Defmes the height along the Z axis. Use a negative value
when referencing the negative direction of the current
UCS Zaxis.
Extrusion taper • Defines the taper angle. Positive angles taper in from the
angle base; negative angles taper out from the base. A zero (0)
angle creates a top perpendicular to its base.
Path • The path defines the angle and length to extrude an
object. The path can be a Line, Arc, Circle, 2-D, or 3-D
Polyline.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can crea~e 2-D closed objects with Lines, Arcs, and Plines and then convert
them into a Closed Pline using the Pedit - Join or the Region command.
~ You can Extrude Poly lines that have between 3 and 500 vertices.
~ You cannot Extrude Blocks and Mline objects.
~ You cannot assign a taper angle to Splines.
~ You cannot Extrude Polylines whose segments intersect.
~ Defining a large taper angle can cause the object to be created before it reaches its
extrusion height.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dispsilh, Delobj
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dview, Hide, Shade, UCS, Vpoint
262 EXTRUDE
EXAMPLE:
Height - 2 Height - 2
E'X'truslon toper angle = 0 Extrusion toper angle = 5
Path
FFLIMIT 263
'FACETRES (FACET RESolution)

Facetres refmes the smoothness of hidden and shaded curved Solids. The Facetres value
can be between 0.01 to 10.0 and is directly linked to Viewres. When Facetres is set to 1
there is a I-to-l correspondence between the Viewres setting and how curved Solids are
displayed. When Facetres is set to 2 its resolution is twice that of the Viewres setting.

Keyboard FACETRES
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Each viewport in Model space and Paper space can contain its own Viewres
settings. However, you can only have one Facetres setting per drawing.
l Facetres affects Solid objects; Viewres affects Solids and other types of objects.

System variable 0.5 Last value used in the drawing Real
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Hide, Shade, Stlout, Viewres
EXAMPLE:
Hidden Line Removal
Viewres 10 Viewres 10 Viewres 10 Vi."",,,,, 10

facetres .01 Facetres 1 Fac.etres :;, Facetres 10
'FFLIMIT (Font File LIMITS)

Ftlimit determines the number of PostScript and TrueType fonts that can be stored in
memory.
264 FFLIMIT

Keyboard FFLIMIT
OPTIONS:
o • There is no limitation to the number of PostScript and TrueType fonts
that can remain in memory.
1 - 100 • Entering a value limits the number of PostScript and TrueType fonts
that can remain in memory.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Style
'FILEDIA (FILE DIAlog box)

Filedia determines whether a Dialog box or the Command prompt is activated for the
following commands:
Acisin End Menuload Qsave Style
Acisout Export Menuunload Recover Vslide
Bmpout Files Mslide Save Wblock
Compile Import New Saveas Wmfm
Dxbin Linetype Load Open Saveasr12 Wmfout
Dxfm Load Psin Script Xref
Dxfout Menu Psout Stlout

Keyboard FILEDIA
OPTIONS:
o • Disables dialog boxes.
1 • Activates dialog boxes.
• Entering a tilde (-) at the Command prompt temporarily activates the dialog
box when it is set to o.
FILES 265
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Plot command's dialog box is controlled by the Cmddia system variable.
~ Filedia has no influence on Bhatch, Boundary, Filter, Group, Help, Insertobj,

Matlib, Mledit, Mlstyle, Mtprop, Olelinks, Plot, Preferences, Reinit, Render,
Replay, Rmat, Rpref, Saveimg, Scene, Spell, Stats, Tolerance, Wmfopts, and
commands that begin with Dd (Dynamic Dialog).
~ You can temporarily disable the dialog box for the Bhatch, Boundary, Group, and
Mtext commands by typing a hyphen (-) before the command.
~ Script and Lisp routines temporarily disable Filedia if it is enabled.
~ Using the Load command when Filedia is enabled lets you select any of your
computer's drives, directories, and files. However, it does not display any of the
Shapes already defined in the current drawing. If you want to select Shapes
already defined in the current drawing, set Filedia to O.
~ You can activate a dialog box when using the Insert and Minsert commands by
typing a tilde (-) at the Block name (or?) prompt. The dialog box Select Drawing
File lets you select any of your computer's drives, directories, and files. However,
it does not display any of the Blocks already defined in the current drawing.
System variable Configuration file Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Cmddia
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: dialog boxes
'FILES
Files provides an alternative to the Windows FileManager and DOS (Disk Operating
System) commands for managing files. When Filedia is set to 0, the File Utility Menu is
displayed; when Filedia is set to 1, the File Utilities dialog box is displayed.

Pull-down File - MANAGEMENT - Utilities ...
Screen menu FILE - MANAGE - Files:
Keyboard FILES
266 FILES
PROMPTS & OPTIONS:

File Utility Menu
O. Exit File Utility Menu
1. List Drawing files
2. List user specified files
3. Delete files
4. Rename files
5. Copy file
6. Unlock file
Enter selection ( 0 to 6) <0>:
0 • Return to the AutoCAD Command prompt.
• Lists AutoCAD drawing files. This is equivalent to the DOS command Dir
*.dwg/w/p.
2 • Lists files based on your specifications. You can include the DOS wild-
card options * and ?
3 • Specifies files to delete individually or with wild-card options * and ? You
are prompted for a N(o) or Y(es) before each file is actually deleted. Since
this command prompts for the deletions, it is safer than using the Del
command.
4 • Renames a file and places the file in a different directory at the same time.
5 • Copies a file from a drive and directory (source) into another drive and
directory (destination). In addition, you can specify a different name for the
copied file.
6 • Unlocks one or more files. You can use the wild-card options.
FIle utilities
III I.Isl filss... Jl J;ppy f.ls . JI Bsn ..... s fils... II
!II UslalB folB _ II Unlock IIls_. II tlalp _ I'
11'- 9!! J I
FILES 267
List files... • Activates the File List dialog box.
Delete file... • Opens the File(s) to Delete dialog box.
Copy file... • Activates the Source and Destination dialog boxes.
Unlock file... • Activates the File(s) to Unlock dialog box.
Rename file... • Opens the Old File Name and New File Name dialog boxes.
All the above options let you search on any drive and directory your computer accesses
and they have a Find File ... option. See the Open command for more detailed information
on using the Find File ... button.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~. When using the File Utilities dialog box to Delete or Unlock files (Filedia 1) you
can choose multiple files by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key. The Shift key lets
you select files listed next to each other; the Ctrl key lets you select files anywhere
on the list.
~ We recommend you use the File Utilities dialog box (Filedia 1) to select files since
you do not have to worry about misspelling file names and forgetting to type the
file extension.
~ Rename moves a file from one location to another (you can keep the same file
name) if you specify a different drive and/or directory.
~ You can Copy a file from one drive and directory to another and rename the file at
the same time. This will not delete the original file .
~ None of the options provide information concerning file size, date, and the time
the file was last modified. Use DOS or the FileManager program if you want this
information.
~ When using the File Utility Menu (Filedia 0) do not forget to include file
extensions (.DWG for drawing files). AutoCAD will not acknowledge a drawing
file unless it has the .DWG extension. If you Copy a file and forget to include the
extension, you must use the Rename option to supply the extension.
~ Make sure you do not delete the active drawing file, temporary files, or lock files
while AutoCAD is in use. Temporary files have the extensions .ac$, or .$a;
Locked file extensions end with a k.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Catalog, Del, Dir
268 FILL
'FILL
Fill controls whether Mline, Polyline, Solid, and Trace are displayed and plotted as filled,
or whether just the outline is displayed and plotted. You can also set this parameter using
the Ddnnodes dialog box. The Fillmode system variable stores this value.

Screen menu OPTIONS" DISPLAY" Fill:
Keyboard FILL
PROMPTS:
ON/OFF <On):
OPTIONS:
On • Mlines, Polylines, Solids, and Traces are displayed, and plotted as filled.
Off • Only the outlines of Mlines, Polylines, Solids, and Traces are displayed
and plotted.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If the object's extrusion direction is parallel to the viewing direction and the hide
option has not been used, you can display and plot objects with Fillmode On.
~ You can save Regen and Redraw time if you keep Fillmode Off.
~ You may fmd it faster to plot broad lines with a wider plotter pen tip rather than
have the plotter try to fill in drawing objects.
~ When you change the Fillmode setting, you will not see the change until the
drawing is Regenerated.
~ The Shade and Render commands fill in regardless of the Fillmode setting.
t> Use the Textfill system variable to control the display of Bitstream, TrueType, and
Adobe Type 1 fonts.
RELATED VARIABLES: Fillmode, Textfill
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddnnodes
FILLET 269
EXAMPLE:
00Donut EII.ipse
PI,r",e
Mline Pline
0 . . . . . %-
Polygon Re ctang Solid Trac.e
00
FILLET
Fillet creates an Arc with a predefined radius between any two Arcs, Circles, Lines,
Polylines, Rays, Splines, and selected Solid shapes. If your selected objects do not meet
or they extend past an intersecting point, Fillet can extend or trim the objects until they
intersect. The Fillet Arc is inserted based on the Fillet Radius value. The Filletrad system
variable stores the value of the radius.

Modify toolbar r
Screen menu CONSTRCT ... Fillet:
Keyboard FILLET
PROMPTS:
(TRIM mode) Current fillet radius; 0.0000
Polyline/Radius/Trim/<Select first objec t >:
Select second object:
OPTIONS:
Arcs, Circles, Lines, Polylines, Rays, Splines
Polyline • Fillets all the intersections of a Polyline. The intersections must
be contiguous segments.
Radius • Sets the Fillet Radius. Once you have set a Radius, press
<Enter> or reselect the Fillet command for execution.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Filletrad.

270 FILLET
Trim/Notrim • Detennines whether to trim or extend the original lines to meet

the fillet edge or to leave the lines intact and add the fillet in the
appropriate spot.
• This value is assigned to the system variable Trimmode.
3-D Solids
Select first object • Once you pick one of the edges for filleting, you are
prompted to enter a radius and to select other edges for
filleting. If you press return without picking other edges, the
adjacent edge fillets.
Chain • Selecting one edge also selects the tangential sequence of
edges.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Filleting a Polyline containing two Line segments separated by an Arc causes the
Arc segment to be replaced with the results of the Fillet command.
~ Circles are not altered when they are filleted.
~ When Trim is active, Filleting a Line with a Polyline causes the Line to convert
and join or attach itself to the Polyline. When No Trim is active, Filleting a Line
with a Polyline lets those objects keep their original definitions, and the filleted
object is defmed as an Arc. This Arc resides on the Current Layer.
~ The Fillet resides on the layer of the picked objects as long as they share the same
layer; if the two objects are on different layers, the Fillet is placed on the Current
Layer. The same rules apply to Color and Linetype.
~ If you need the endpoints of two Lines to meet, set the Fillet Radius to 0 and set
Trim on. You can achieve the same result with the Chamfer command.
l You cannot Fillet borders of Viewport objects.
l Filleting will not work if Limits is On and the intersection point is outside the
limits.
RELATED VARIABLES: Filletrad, Trimmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Chamfer, Extend, Pline, Trim
FILLMODE 271
ctJ ~ TO] dj 2J ~
EXAMPLE:
I ~ri'i",1 I I
Before After After Before After ~
'FILLETRAD (ALLET RADius)
Filletrad sets the current fillet radius value. This value is typically set using the Fillet
command.

Keyboard FILLETRAD
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Fillet
'FILLMODE
Fillmode controls whether Mlines, Polylines, Solids, and Traces are displayed and plotted
as filled, or whether just the outline is displayed and plotted. This value is typically set
using the Ddrmodes or Fill command.

Keyboard FILLMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Only the outline of Mlines, Polylines, Solids, and Traces are displayed and
plotted.
• Mlines, Poly lines, Solids, and Traces are displayed and plotted as filled.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If the object's extrusion direction is parallel to the viewing direction and the Hide
option has not been used, you can display and plot objects with Fillmode On.
~ You can save Regen and Redraw time if you keep Fillmode Off.
272 FILLMODE
~ You may fmd it faster to plot broad lines with a wider plotter pen tip rather than
have the plotter try to fill in drawing objects.
~ When you change the Fillmode setting, you will not see the change until the
drawing is Regenerated.
~ The Shade and Render commands fill in regardless of the Fillmode setting.

System variable Last value used in the drawing Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Donut, Fill, Mline, Pline, Solid, Trace
EXAMPLE: See FILL
FILTER see POINT FILTERS
'FILTER
Filter creates Selection sets based on object properties. Some of these properties include
location, Color, object type, Linetype, Block name, text Style, Thickness, and Layer. You
can combine properties to make the filters very complex, and you can create multiple lists
and retrieve them for future use. You use this in addition to or in place of the Selection set
options. You can activate the Filter command at the Command prompt or transparently
during the actual command. If you defined and located the filtered objects prior to a
command, use Previous as your response to the "Select object" prompt. The Ddlmodes
(Layer) dialog box has its own variation of the Filter command.
Standard toolbar "
Screen menu ASSIST" Filter:

Keyboard FILTER
FILTER 273
OPTIONS:
Object Selection Alters
- HATCH
- Text
Object Selection • Lists the current search parameters.

Filters list
Select Filter • Lists all the possible categories for object selection.
Select... • Lists named items, when appropriate, located in the
drawing.
x, Y, andZ • List X, Y, and Z coordinates and the assignment of
logical operators to each coordinate.
Add to List • Includes the latest object parameters to the Object
Selection Filters list.
Substitute • Replaces the highlighted item in the Object Selection
Filters list with the current Select Filter parameters.
Add Selected Object < • Lets you pick objects directly from your drawing and
adds them to the Object Selection Filters list.
Edit Item • Modifies items in the Object Selection Filters list.
Delete • Removes selected items from the Object Selection
Filters list.
Clear List • Deletes all the items listed in the Object Selection
Filters list.
274 FILTER
Named Filters
Current • Retrieves a saved Filter list.
Save As • Assigns a name to the parameters listed in the Object
Selection Filters list. This creates or appends to a file
namedfilter.nfl for future retrieval.
Delete Current Filter • Deletes the Current Filter list.
Apply • Takes the Current Filter list and applies it to the

current drawing using any of the Selection set options.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Saving Filter lists creates a file namedfilter.nfl. This file is located in the default
directory.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Select, selection set
'FONTALT (FONT ALTernate)

Fontalt defmes an alternate font when AutoCAD cannot locate a font file.

Keyboard FONTALT
System variable Txt Configuration file String
RELATED VARIABLES: Fontmap
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Style
,FONTMAP
Fontmap directs AutoCAD to an ASCII file containing substitute font information. This
file is used by AutoCAD when it is unable to locate fonts. This value is usually set with
the Preferences dialog box.
FRONTZ 275

Pull-down Options - Preferences ... - Misc - Font Mapping File:
Keyboard FONTMAP
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Make sure the file extension for mapping files is fmp.
~ An example of a mapping file is located in the AutoCAD Sample directory.

System variable "" (none) Configuration file String
RELATED VARIABLES: fontalt
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: preferences, style
'FRONTZ
Frontz retains the distance from the front clipping plane to the target plane. This value is
set when using the Clip option of the Dview command.

Keyboard FRONTZ
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) When the value is positive it indicates that the front clipping plane is between the
camera and target; when the value is negative the front clipping plane is beyond
the target.
~ This value only has meaning if Viewmode's bits are set to 2 (Front Clipping On)
and 16 (Front Clip not at eye).
System variable 0.0000, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Backz, Viewmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dview
276 GIFIN
GIFIN see IMPORT
'GRAPHSCR (GRAPH SCReen) /'TEXTSCR (TEXTSCReen)

Graphscr and Textscr flip your screen between graphics mode and text mode. Graphscr
flips the screen to the graphics screen; Textscr flips the screen to the AutoCAD Text
Window. The <F2> key toggles between these two screens. These commands are used to
control the screen when working with macros, Lisp, and script routines.

Keyboard GRAPHSCR or Function Key F2
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Commands such as Status, Time, and List flip your screen into text mode.
~ You can review your last few prompts and responses by flipping to the Textscr
mode.
~ These commands have no effect on a dual-screen system.
'GRID
Grid displays reference dots at any user-dermed increment. It helps you get a perspective
of the space you are working in and the size of your drawing objects. You can modify the
increment value and turn the setting On or Off. You can also change your Grid settings
with the Ddrmodes dialog box.

Screen menu ASSIST -. Grid:
Keyboard GRID or <Ctrl G> or Function Key F7
Status line Double clicking on Grid on the status line toggles the command on
and off.
PROMPTS:
Grid spacing(X) or ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect <0.0000>:
GRID 277
OPTIONS:
Grid • Sets the X and Y Grid increments. If an X is placed after the
spacing (X) number, it makes the Grid a multiple of the current Snap value.
• This value is maintained by the Gridunit variable.

ON • Grid is visible.
• This value is maintained by the Gridmode variable.
OFF • Grid is invisible.
• This value is maintained by the Gridmode variable.

Snap • The Grid increment equals the current Snap increment. This
works the same as if you had set the Grid equal to O.
o • The Grid increment equals the current Snap increment.
Aspect • Set individual horizontal and vertical Grid increments.
• This value is maintained by the Gridunit variable.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Each viewport (Model space) and Paper space contain their own Grid settings.
~ If the Grid does not appear the way you think it should, use any command (such as
Redraw or Regen) that refreshes the current viewport.
~ If you are working in the WCS or a UCS that is the same as the WCS, the Grid is
displayed to the drawing Limits. If you are working in a UCS different from the
WCS, the Grid extends to the edges of your viewport.
t, If the grid is set to an increment that is too small to be shown on the screen, the
message "Grid too dense to display" appears at the Command prompt. Once you
Zoom into a portion of the drawing, you will be able to see the Grid. If the Grid
starts to display but is very dense, you can press <Esc> to cancel the Grid
regeneration and reset its value.
t, To use the Aspect option while in the Ddrmodes dialog box, you must first set the
X spacing and then the Y spacing.
t, When you are editing a drawing, some of the Grid dots may disappear when using
commands such as Move or Erase. Any display command (such as Redraw,
Regen, or Zoom) will cause the Grid dots to reappear.
278 GRID
\) You set your Grid in an isometric mode with the Snap (Style) command.
~ Since Grid is a visual aid, the Grid dots do not plot.
~ Regardless of the Grid setting, it is the Snap setting that helps you place objects
accurately.
RELATED VARIABLES: Gridmode, Gridunit, Snapang
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddnnodes, Snap
EXAMPLE:
..
.. ..
Off .125
.. .. -, ..
.. ..
Aspect
HO(ilontoi .125
.25 Vertico! .25
'GRIDMODE
Gridmode maintains Grid visibility. This variable is typically set using the Grid
command, <etrl G>, <F7> function key, Ddnnodes dialog box, or by picking the Grid
button on the status line at the bottom of your display screen.

Keyboard GRIDMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Grid Off (invisible) for the current viewport.
1 • Grid On (visible) for the current viewport.
grip 279
System variable
°
RELATED VARIABLES: Gridunit
Last value used in the drawing Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Grid
'GRIDUNIT
Gridunit sets the X,Y Grid increment for the current viewport. This value is typically set
using the Ddrmodes or Grid command.

Keyboard GRIDUNIT
System variable 0.0000,0.0000 Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Gridmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Grid
grip
Grips provide a quick method of selecting objects and modifying them. When Grips are
on you can select one or more objects at a blank Command prompt. This places Grip
boxes at predefined strategic positions on the objects. After selecting objects and
activating their Grips, you then select a Grip box for further manipulation. The Command
prompt changes and the active Grip command appears. You can either pick a new
location that only edits that object, press the <Shift> key and pick multiple Grip boxes, or
press <Enter> and edit the group of objects. You can select any of the edit options by
pressing the spacebar or by typing ST (stretch), SC (scale), MO (move), MI (mirror), or
RO (rotate). See the AutoCAD Command Reference guide for more detailed information.
OPTIONS:
The following chart defines the Grip point locations for individual objects. The M desig-
nation indicates that when the Grip is active it moves the whole object, and the R desig-
nation indicates that when the Grip is active it relocates that Grip and therefore changes
the size of the object.
280 grip
GRIP LOCATIONS
I
E V M Q N
N E I U S
D R D C A E
P T P E D R
0 I 0 N R N T
I C I T A 0 I
N E N E N D 0
OBJECTS T S T R T E N COMMENTS
3-D Face R
3-D Mesh R
3-D Poly R R
Arc R R
Block M Grips vary but they always move
Box (3-D Solid) M Eight vertices
Circle M R
Cone (3-D Solid) M Top and base
Cylinder (3-D Solid) M Top and base
Dimension R Dimension line
R Extension Line
R Dimension Text
R Defpoint
Donut R R
Ellipse (Parcs) R R
Ellipse (True) R M
Elliptical Arc R R R
Group Grips vary, each object is independent
Line R M
Mline R R Grips based on MIine justification
Mtext R M
grip 281
GRIP LOCATIONS
I
E V M Q N
N E I U S
D R D C A E
P T P E D R
0 I 0 N R N T
I C I T A 0 I
N E N E N D 0
OBJECTS T S T R T E N COMMENTS
Pline (closed) R Grips based on centerline
Pline (open) R R Grips based on centerline
Point M
Polygon R Grips based on centerline
Ray M R Vertex changes angle
Rectang R Grips based on centerline
Region M
Shape M
Sketch See Line and Pline
Solid R
Sphere (3-D Solid) M
Spline R R
Text (Dtext) M Lower left point is also Move
Align and Fit R Relocate text deflnition points.
Tolerance Dimension M M Far left and far right side vertices
Torus (3-D Solid) M
Trace R Four corner points
Wedge (3-D Solid) M Six vertices
Xline R M Vertex changes angle
282 grip
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t. Exit Grip mode by pressing <Esc>. You may have to do this two to three times.
t. You can create multiple copies with each of the Grip edit commands.
t. The Stretch mode does not require a crossing as does the Stretch command.
t. When Grips are enabled a box appears at the intersection of the cross hairs. This
box also appears when Pickfrrst is On or when picking objects for object selection.
You control the size of this box with the Pickbox system variable.
t. You can use Ortho, Snap, Osnaps, and the normal point entry options when using
the Grips.
~ When object's Grip points overlap, picking the Grip affects both objects.
RELATED VARIABLES: Gripblock, Gripcolor, Griphot, Grips, Gripsize

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddgrips
'GRIPBLOCK
Gripblock determines whether the Grip's location for a Block is based on the block's
Insertion point or on the individual objects deftning the Block. This value is usually set
using the Ddgrips dialog box.

Keyboard GRIPBLOCK
OPTIONS:
o • Grip's location is based on the Block's Insertion point.
1 • Grip's location is based on the individual objects that make up the Block.
System variable 0 Conftguration me Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Gripcolor, Griphot, Grips, Gripsize
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddgrips, grip
GRIPHOT 283
EXAMPLE:
Gripblock = Gripblock = 0
Individual objects Block's insert ion

point
'GRIPCOLOR
Gripcolor determines the color of non-selected Grips. Non-selected Grips show the
outline of the Grip. Use the Ddcolor dialog box to determine color number assignments.
This value is usually set using the Ddgrips dialog box.

Keyboard GRIPCOLOR
System variable 5 (Blue) Configuration file Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Gripblock, Griphot, Grips, Gripsize
'GRIPHOT
Griphot determines the color of selected Grips. Selected Grips are filled in. Use the
Ddcolor dialog box to determine color number assignments. This value is usually set
using the Ddgrips dialog box.

Keyboard GRIPHOT
284 GRIPHOT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

" You can unselect a Griphot by re-selecting the Grip.

RELATED VARIABLES: Gripblock, Gripcolor, Grips, Gripsize
'GRIPS
Grips determines whether Grips are active or inactive. This value is usually set using the
Ddgrips dialog box.

Keyboard GRIPS
OPTIONS:
o • Turns Grips Off.
1 • Turns Grips On.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

" When Grips are active you will see a small box located at the intersection of the
screen's cross hairs. If you disable Grips and the box still appears, check the
Pickfrrst (Ddselect) and Osnap (Ddosnap) settings. These commands also enable a
box to appear at the intersection of the screen's cross hairs.
System variable 1 Configuration file integer

RELATED VARIABLES: Gripblock, Gripcolor, Griphot, Gripsize
GROUP 285
EXAMPLE:
++
Ott On
'GRIPSIZE
Gripsize detennines the size of Grip boxes. Since this size is based on pixel units, the
value can be between 1 and 255. This value is usually set using the Ddgrips dialog box.

Keyboard GRIPSIZE
RELATED VARIABLES: Gripblock, Gripcolor, Griphot, Grips
GROUP
Group creates a named selection set of objects. These grouped objects can be manipulated
together or individually. At the "Select objects" prompt you use the selection method
Group and then enter the Group name assigned to the objects, or you can pick one of the
objects with your pointing device.

Standard toolbar
Screen menu ASSIST" Group:

Keyboard GROUP
286 GROUP
OPTIONS:
Object Grouping
Grou NIlme Selectable
PARTITION Yes
WORKSTAnON No
:=~~=~~:"'-'---""':-r1- plckstyle
r; !,l""Ilmed
. Group Name / Selectable list

• Lists all the groups defmed in the current drawing and their
selectable status.
Group Identification
Group Name • Selecting a name from the Group Name list displays that
name in the Group Name edit box.
Description • Provides a description, if one was assigned, when a group
from the Group Name list is selected.
Find Name < • Provides the group name in the Group Member List pop-up
box assigned to a selected object.
Highlight < • Locates and highlights the objects belonging to the group
selected from the Group Name list.
Include • Determines whether unnamed groups are displayed in the
Unnamed Group Name list.
Create Group
New < • Creates a new group by selecting objects. Group names can
contain up to 31 characters. Enter the new group name in the
Group Name edit box before selecting New.
GROUP 287
Selectable • Determines how objects are selected. Selectable groups are

those that let you select any object defined in a group and the
rest of the objects are automatically selected. Non-Selectable
lets you edit individual objects that are part of a group.
Objects on Locked Layers are never selectable.
Unnamed • Indicates whether new groups will be unnamed. When
creating new groups you can assign a name or let AutoCAD
assign a group name to the objects. When AutoCAD assigns
a group name it begins with *A followed by a number.
• Unnamed groups are also created when you copy an existing

group.
Change Group
Remove • Removes objects assigned to a group. This does not delete
the objects; it makes them independent.
Add < • Includes more objects into an existing group.
Rename • Renames the group highlighted in the Group Name list box.
Re-order ... • Changes the order in which objects were selected and defined
as group members.
Description • Assigns an optional description to a Group. This can be up to
64 characters long.
Explode • Removes the group definition from the drawing, but objects
are not deleted.
Selectable • Specifies whether the selected group is selectable.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can bypass the dialog box by typing a hyphen (-) before Group at the
Command prompt.
t> At first glance Groups and Blocks seem to work similarly, but they are actually
very different. They seem similar since you join objects together and have them
act as one. However, in Groups, you can edit individual objects without them
losing their group membership. If you want to edit objects within a Block, you
must Explode the Block, causing the objects to lose permanently their block
membership. You can repeatedly use the same Block definition in your drawing
and globally update all instances of the block. Since each Group has its own
unique name you cannot globally update Groups.
288 GROUP
l Groups saved as Blocks lose their group deftnitions. Blocks saved as Groups
retain their block deftnitions.
l Removing all objects from a Group does not remove the group name reference.
Use the Explode option to eliminate the name from the Group list.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pickstyle
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Ddselect, Select
EXAMPLE:
Command: Copy
Select objects: G
Enter group name: Workstation
4 found
Select objects: <Enter)
<Base point or displacement> / Multiple: Int (use the Osnap
Intersection and pick Pl)
Second point of displacement: Int (use the Osnap
Intersection and Pick P2)
Intersection 1 2 Intersection
HATCH 289
'HANDLES
Handles assigns a unique label to every drawing object. This label, in hexadecimal
format, is permanently stored in the drawing and is used to access objects. Handles can be
used by AutoLISP programs, or to link objects to external programs like databases.

Keyboard HANDLES
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i;, Use the List command to fmd an object's handle.

System Variable On, Read-only Initial default Integer
HATCH
Hatch, cross-hatches, or pattern-fills an area. For the most accurate results the area should
be enclosed. You can use existing objects or create a temporary or permanent Polyline
boundary from within the Hatch command. The Hatch remembers its pattern name, scale,
and angle so long as it has not been exploded.

Keyboard HATCH
PROMPTS:
Pattern (? or name/U,style) :
Scale for pattern <1.0000>:
Angle for pattern <0>:
Select hatch boundaries or RETURN for direct hatch
option,
Retain polyline? <Y>
From point:
Arc/Close/Length/Undo/<Next point>:
From point or RETURN to apply hatch:
290 HATCH
OPTIONS:
Pattern • Enter a Hatch pattern name. Once a name is given, you enter the
scale and angle for the pattern. When typing the Hatch pattern,
include an asterisk (*) before the name if you want the Hatch
block preexploded.
? or name • Lists one or all of the Hatch pattern names including a short
description. You can use wild-card characters to produce a
specific list.
U • User-defmed; you provide the pattern. You are prompted for the
spacing and angle for straight lines. You can also "double hatch"
an area or create a perpendicular cross-hatch.
style • You can specify the Hatch style by appending a style code to the
Hatch pattern name, separated by a comma. Your choices are:
N Normal; hatch every other boundary
o Outermost; hatch only outermost boundary
I Ignore; hatch everything inside outermost boundary
Select hatch boundaries
• Selects the object(s) that make up the Hatch boundary. If more
than one object makes up the boundary then each object's
endpoints should share the exact coordinates of the adjoining
object.
RETURN for direct hatch option
• Create a boundary from Polylines and Polyline Arcs. You can
trace over existing objects or create a new boundary. In addition,
you can save the boundary or have it automatically deleted once
you complete the command.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t;, It is recommended you use Bhatch as an alternative to the Hatch command. Bhatch
creates associative hatches. Associative hatches automatically adjust to most
changes you make to its boundaries and they can be modified with the Hatchedit
command.
t;, Hatch lines are projected in the current construction plane defmed by the UCS.
HATCH 291
~ If you need precise Hatch pattern placement, set the system variable Snapbase to a
point where you want the Hatch pattern to originate. Be sure to reset Snapbase
after Hatching, since Snap and Grid are also affected by this variable.
~ If you Explode a Hatch pattern, you may consider regrouping those objects into a
Block. It will take up less drawing space and will be easier to manipulate.
~ If you fmd the Hatch pattern is too big or too small while it is generating, halt the
process by pressing <Esc>. You can then issue the Undo or Erase Last commands
and re-enter the pattern.
~ You can Hatch a Block. Blocks are processed as individual drawing objects.
During object selection you just need to pick the Block you want to Hatch. Hatch
style defaults to normal, and every other boundary is hatched.
~ You can Explode a Hatch pattern and turn it back into individual drawing objects.
The objects default to Layer 0, and the Color and Linetype are set to Bylayer.
~ To speed up your drawing Regen and Redraw time, keep the Hatches on their own
Layer, and Freeze that Layer until you are ready to Plot.
~ In Paper space you can use Viewport edges as Hatch boundaries .
.t, You can find out the name of an existing Hatch pattern (so long as it is not
Exploded), the Scale, and Rotation angle using the List command.
~ If you Hatch an area containing Text (Attributes, Text, and Mtext) you can have
the Hatch draw around the Text so long as you include the Text during object
selection.
~ We recommend that you Hatch areas enclosed by a boundary whose endpoints all
intersect precisely. If there is an opening in the boundary, the Hatch pattern may
go beyond the boundary.
~ Exploding a Hatch places all the objects on Layer O. If you use the Xplode routine
you can choose the Layer for the hatched objects.
~ You may get unexpected results if your Hatch pattern defaults to any Linetype
other than Continuous. This is because the Hatch pattern defines its own linetypes.
~ The Hatchedit command does not edit Hatch patterns created with the Hatch
command. However, you can use the Inherit Properties option of the Hatchedit
and Bhatch commands on Hatched objects.
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpang, Hpdouble, Hpname, Hpscale, Hpspace, Snapbase
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Bhatch, Boundary, Explode, Snap, Xplode
292 HATCH
EXAMPLE:
Snapbase at 0.0.0
HATCHEDIT
Hatchedit modifies associative hatch (Bhatch) items by letting you change the pattern
type, scale, angle, and style. This command does not work on hatch patterns created with
the Hatch command or Exploded hatch patterns. Since this command uses the same dialog
box as Bhatch, see the Bhatch command for more detailed information.

Modify toolbar II
Screen menu MODIFY ... HatchEd:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can bypass the dialog box by typing a hyphen (-) before Hatchedit at the
Command prompt.
~ The Hatchedit command does not edit hatch patterns created with the Hatch
command. However, you can use the Inherit Properties option of the Hatchedit
and Bhatch commands on Hatched objects.
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpang, Hpdouble, Hpname, Hpscale, Hpspace
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Bhatch, Hatch
'HELP
Help provides information on commands and how they function, including cross
references to the AutoCAD Users Guide. If you use Help (transparently) while in another
command, you receive information on that particular command.
HIDE 293

Standard toolbar "!
Pull-down Help'" Contents ...

Screen menu Help
Keyboard HELP or ? or F 1
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i:> You can receive Help for each of the pull-down menus by picking the pull-down
menu and pressing <FI>.
~ Most dialog boxes provide a Help button, instantly providing information for that
dialog box. You can also access the generic Help options through these dialog
Help buttons.
HIDE
Hide performs a temporary hidden line removal on all objects in the current viewport.
Normally, 3-D objects are displayed as wireframe. The Hide command determines what
should be hidden from your viewpoint and temporarily removes those edges and objects
from sight. Hide evaluates Circles, Polylines (assigned a width), Solids, Traces, 3-D
Faces, Meshes, and extruded edges of objects assigned a thickness as opaque surfaces. In
addition, Extruded Circles, Polylines (assigned a width), Solids, and Traces are
considered solid objects having top and bottom faces. A Regeneration returns the objects
to their original display.

Render toolbar
Screen menu TOOLS'" Hide:

Keyboard HIDE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Once you have suppressed hidden lines, you may want to create a Slide file for
future reference.
i:> If you want hidden lines suppressed during plotting, you must answer Yes to the
"Remove hidden lines" prompt of the Plot command. If you are using floating
viewports (Tilemode 0) use the Hideplot option of the Mview command.
294 HIDE
l Hide evaluates objects residing on Layers turned Off. However, Hide does not
evaluate objects on Frozen Layers.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dview, Ddvpoint, Mview, View, Vpoint
EXAMPLE:
Hide
Plan View
E2j
'HIGHLIGHT
Highlight detennines whether objects appear dotted (highlighted) during the selection set
process or remain in their original fonnat. You can set this variable with the Ddnnodes
dialog box.

Keyboard HIGHLIGHT
OPTIONS:
o • Disables Highlighting.
1 • Enables Highlighting.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can save time during object selection by turning Highlight Off. This is
because you do not have to wait for each object to be located before selecting the
next object.
~ When working with multiple viewports, objects are Highlighted only in the
viewport from which they were selected. The viewport from which you complete
the command Highlights all the selected objects.
l Highlighting does not affect Grips and noun/verb (Pickfirst = 1) selection.
HPBOUND 295
System Variable Initial default Integer

RELATED VARIABLES: Grips, Pickfirst
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes
'HPANG (Hatch Pattern ANGLE)

Hpang determines the angle for hatch patterns. This is usually set while using the Hatch or
Bhatch command.

Keyboard HPANG
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpdouble, Hpname, Hpscale, Hpspace
'HPBOUND (Hatch Pattern BOUNDary)

Hpbound determines the type of object created with the Boundary and Bhatch commands.
This only applies to the Bhatch command when Retain Boundaries is selected. This
variable is usually set while using the Boundary or Bhatch command.

Keyboard HPBOUND
OPTIONS:
o • Creates a Region.
• Creates a Polyline.
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpdouble, Hpname, Hpscale, Hpspace
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Bhatch, Boundary
296 HPDOUBLE
'HPDOUBLE (Hatch Pattern DOUBLE)

Hpdouble determines whether user-defined hatches during the Hatch and Bhatch
commands have a second set of lines drawn perpendicular to the original line definition.
This variable is usually set while using the Bhatch or Hatch command.

Keyboard HPDOUBLE
OPTIONS:
o • Creates single line hatch patterns.
1 • Creates double line hatch patterns.
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpang, Hpname, Hpscale, Hpspace
EXAMPLE:
Hpdouble 0 Hpdouble 1
'HPNAME (Hatch Pattern NAME)

Hpname remembers the last hatch pattern name used for the current session. This variable
is usually set while using the Bhatch or Hatch command.

Keyboard HPNAME
System Variable none Initial default String
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpang, Hpdouble, Hpscale, Hpspace
HPSPACE 297
'HPSCALE (Hatch Pattern SCALE)

Hpscale detenmnes the scale factor for hatch patterns. This variable is usually set while
using the Bhatch or Hatch command.

Keyboard HPSCALE
RELATED VARIABLES: Hpang, Hpdouble, Hpname, Hpspace
'HPSPACE (Hatch Pattern SPACE)

Hpspace sets the line spacing for user-defined hatch patterns. This variable is usually set
while using the Bhatch or Hatch command.

Keyboard HPSPACE
RELA TED VARIABLES: Hpang, HpdoubIe, Hpname, Hpscale
298 10
'ID (IDentify)
Id identifies the absolute X,Y,Z coordinates of any selected point. The point is identified
graphically with a blip mark if Blipmode is On and becomes the value for the Lastpoint
system variable.

Object Properties toolbar III
Screen menu ASSIST" INQUIRY" ID:
Keyboard ID
PROMPTS:
Point:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Use the Id command to establish a point for relative or polar coordinate input.
Reference the Id point by using the @ symbol for the next command that requests
a point.
RELATED VARIABLES: Lastpoint
IMPORT
Import brings different file formats into AutoCAD. These formats are usually created by
other computer programs. Use the AutoCAD User's Guide for more detailed information.

Pull-down File" Import...
Screen menu FILE" IMPORT
Keyboard IMPORT
IMPORT 299
OPTIONS:
Metafile (*.WMF) • Imports Windows Metafiles.
• Imported files are treated as Blocks contammg vector

information. Wmfopts presets import parameters.
• This is the same as using the Wmfm command.

DXF(*.DXF) • Imports DXF (Drawing Interchange) file formats.
• A complete DXF file loads only into a new drawing file.

When entering a new drawing name place an equal sign
(=) after the file name to use AutoCAD 's original defaults.
• You can load the DXF objects section into an existing

drawing. Information such as Block definitions and
Layering information is not included.
• Use the Audit command to check for corrupt data after

importing a DXF file.
• This is the same as using the Dxfin command.

ACIS (* .SAT) • Imports ACIS files. ACIS files are in ASCII format and
are used to store Solid and Region geometric shapes.
• This is the same as using the Acisin command.

Encapsulated PS • Imports encapsulated PostScript files. See also Psdrag and
(*.EPS) Psquality.
• This is the same as using Psin command.
Paint (* .PCX) • Imports raster image files in the .pcx format. The image
consists of solid objects fused together as a block.
• See also Ribackg, Riedge, Rigamut, Rigrey, Rithresh.

• This is the same as using Pcxin command.
TIFF (*.TIF) • Imports raster image files in the Tagged Image Format
(.tif). The image consists of solid objects fused together as
a block.
• See also Riaspect, Ribackg, Riedge, Rigamut, Rigrey,

Rithresh, and Replay.
• This is the same as using Tiffm command.

300 IMPORT
GIF (*.GIF) • Imports raster image files in the Graphics Interchange

Format (.gif). The image consists of solid objects fused
together as a block.
• See also Riaspect, Ribackg, Riedge, Rigamut, Rigrey,
Rithresh, Replay.
• This is the same as using Gifm command.
3D Studio (*.3DS) • Imports 3-D Studio files (.3ds). These files contain the
following rendering information: meshes, materials,
mapping, lights, and cameras.
• This is the same as using the 3Dsin command.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, You can import DXB files with the Dxbin command.
~ Issuing 3Dsin automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for use.
Since this takes up valuable memory, it may slow down AutoCAD or other
Windows programs you may want active. You can unload the rendering software
with the Renderunload command. Even the Undo command has no effect on
~ Issuing 3Dsin automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
l Not all computer programs use the same code to create the different file formats.
For example, the same file can be exported to .tifby three different programs and
yet only one of them may be imported successfully into AutoCAD.
RELATED VARIABLES: Filedia, Psquality, Psdrag, Riaspect, Ribackg, Riedge,
Rigamut, Rigrey, Rithresh
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dsin, Acisin, Dxbin, Dxfm, Epsin, Export, Gifm,
Pcxin, Psout, Replay, Tifm, Wmfm, Wmfopts
'INSBASE (INSertion BASE)

Insbase maintains the drawings, reference or base point. This value is usually set with the
Base command.

Keyboard INSBASE
INSERT 301
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Drawing files resulting from the Wblock command have their Insbase defined
when selecting an insertion base point.
~> When inserting or attaching Xref files, you can see the Insbase point because it is
located at the intersection of the cross hairs.
System variable 0.000,0.000,0.000 Last value used in the drawing 3-D Point
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Base, Ddinsert, Insert, Wblock, Xref
INSERT
Insert merges Blocks and other drawing files (.dwg) into the current drawing. You can
achieve the same results using the Ddinsert dialog box.

Screen menu DRAW 2 -. Insert:
Keyboard INSERT
PROMPTS:
Block name (o r ?):
Insertion point:
X scale factor <1> / Corner / XYZ:
Y scale factor (default = X) :
Rotation angle <0>:
OPTIONS:
Block name • Specifies the Block or drawing name. Using an asterisk (*)
before the name inserts a Block or drawing as an individual
object. If you insert a Block with an asterisk, you can only give
one scale factor for X, Y, and Z, and it cannot be negative.
? • Activates wild-card options for reviewing the names of Blocks
defined in the current drawing. The default, an asterisk,
displays a sorted listing of all named Blocks. You can use any
of the wild-card options to create a more specific list.
302 INSERT
• Displays the Select Drawing File dialog box. This method

limits you to drawing files (.dwg). It does not let you select
blocks located in the current drawing.
X scale factor • Enter the X scale.
Comer • The Comer option can be selected at the X scale factor prompt.
You specify a scale via two points that form a rubber-band
box. The first point is the insertion point, and the second point
becomes the other comer. The X and Y dimensions of the box
become the X and Y scale factors for the Block.
XYZ • Initiates prompting for X, Y, and Z scale factors.
Preset Features • Preset options provide a way to establish scale and rotation
prior to picking the insert point. These options are used
primarily in menu macros to enable dragging of Blocks at a
preset scale during Insertion. The five options can be used in
two ways. The first is to preset the values by entering one of
the options preceded by a P at the insertion point prompt.
However, if you prefix the option with a P, the values are
temporary, and you are again prompted for the values after the
insertion point has been established. To have preset options
applied after the insertion point has been picked, enter the
preset options without the P prefix.
Scale • Presets an X, Y, Z scale factor.
Xscale • Presets an X scale factor.
Yscale • Presets an Y scale factor.
Zscale • Presets an Z scale factor.
Rotate • Presets a rotation angle.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can activate a dialog box when using the Insert command by typing a tilde (-)
at the "Block name (or ?):" prompt. The dialog box Select Drawing File lets you
select any of your computer's drives, directories, and files. However, it does not
display any of the Blocks already defmed in the current drawing. If you want to
select Blocks already defmed in the current drawing, use the Ddinsert command.
INSERT 303
~ You can temporarily merge two or more drawings using the Xref (Attach/Detach)
command.
t. The Insertion point in the drawing corresponds to the Block insertion base point or
a drawing's Base point.
~J You can convert a Block back to its original objects using the Explode command.
The only way to tum them back into Blocks is to use the Insert command (if a
Block by that name still exists) or create a new Block.
~ Once you insert a Block, you can edit it with editing commands, such as Move,
Copy, Array, and Mirror. The objects making up the Block cannot be individually
edited.
~ If you respond with negative values for the scale factor prompts, the Block will be
inserted mirrored.
t. A 1 x I-unit Block can be sized dynamically to fill a variety of box drawing needs.
Every time you Insert it you can give the actual size of the desired box. The X
scale factor becomes the width, and the Y scale factor becomes the height. If you
are working in 3-D, you can make a 3-D box with a I-unit Z value.
~ You can Rename a Block with the Rename or Ddrename command.
(.) Inserted Blocks reside on the Layer that was Current when they were inserted.
Objects brought in with an asterisk reside on the Layers from which they were
created. Exploding blocks return objects to their original Layers.
t> The system variable Attreq, if set to 0, lets you insert Attributes without prompting
and applies the Attribute's default values. For normal prompting set Attreq to 1.
(.) The system variable Attdia, if set to 1, will cause a dialog box to appear when you
which you can edit freely. A value of

Command prompt.
°
Insert Blocks with attributes. The box displays the prompt and default value,
causes attribute prompting at the
(.) You can merge two files with Insert or Xref (Bind). The difference between these
two methods is that named items (Blocks, Layers, Views, etc.) merge under Insert
but remain separate under Xref (Bind).
304 INSERT
~ You can update a drawing file with a revised Block deftnition by Inserting a new
Block deftnition. Type the Block name and include an equals (=) sign immediately
after the last character. This tells AutoCAD to ignore the existing Block deftnition
and to use the new deftnition. All existing Blocks will be redefmed to the new
Block.
~ If you redefme a Block, you must Regenerate the drawing to see the changes.
~ If you modify a Block containing Attribute deftnitions and Insert the modifted
Block into a drawing containing old Attributes, any Constant Attributes are
replaced by new Constant Attributes. If an Attribute defmition is removed,
Attributes will be removed from existing Blocks. Variable Attributes remain
unchanged even if their defmition is omitted from the new Block. New Variable
Attributes will be included in all new insertions, but will not appear in previous
Block insertions.
~ If you want existing Attributes to be completely updated, you must replace the old
Blocks with new ones or use the Attredef command.
~ You can Insert a Block or drawing file and assign it a different name in your
current drawing. At the Block name prompt type in the Block name, include an
equals (=) sign, and enter the new Block name. You can only do this using the
Insert command; this does not work with the Ddinsert dialog box.
~ Entering a P before Scale (PS), Xscale (PX), Yscale (PY), Zscale (PZ), or Rotate
(PR) at the Insertion point prompt lets you temporarily preview how the Block will
look while it is being dragged in the drawing. You cannot preview or preset values
if you are inserting with the asterisk option.
RELATED VARIABLES: Attdia, Attdisp, Attreq, Expert, Insbase, Insname
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Attedit, Attredef, Base, Block, dialog box,
Ddatte, Ddinsert, Explode, Minsert, Rename, Wblock, wild-cards, Xref
INSERTOBJ (INSERT OBJect)

Insertobj uses the Windows OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) technology allowing
you to place other types of files inside your AutoCAD drawings. The other programs must
also support OLE.

Keyboard INSERTOBJ
INSERTOBJ 305
OPTIONS:
Insert New Object

ObjedType:
Microsoll ClipArt Gallery
Microsoll Orawing
Microsoft Excel 5.0 Chart
Microsoll Excel 5.0 Worksheel
MiClosolI Excel Chart
Microsoll Excel MaClosheel
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can move the OLE object with the pointing device by moving the cross hairs
onto the picture. Clicking once on the picture disables the cross hairs and changes
the pointer to four arrows. Pick and drag the picture to a new location.
~) You can resize the OLE object by manipulating its Windows handles.
~ You can edit the OLE object by clicking twice on the object. This automatically
activates the object's original program or application.
~ You can edit the OLE object by clicking once on the OLE object with the first
mouse button and then clicking once on the OLE object with the second mouse
button. This activates a pop-up dialog box with the options Cut, Clear, Undo, and
the software that the object addresses.
~ You cannot make slide files (Mslide) from OLE objects.
~ OLE objects do not display when opening files using DOS or Unix.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Copyembed
EXAMPLE:
306 INSNAME
'INsNAME (INSertion NAME)

Insname maintains the default Block name for the Ddinsert and Insert commands. This is
usually set by the Ddinsert or Insert command.

Keyboard INSNAME
System variable None Initial default String
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddinsert, Insert
INTERFERE
Interfere creates composite Solids from two or more Solids that overlap or interfere. The
original Solids remain unchanged.

Solids toolbar
Screen menu DRAW -. SOLIDS -. Intrfer:

Keyboard Interfere
PROMPTS:
Select the first set of solids:
Select objects:
Select the second set of solids:
Select objects:
Create interference solids? <N>
Highlight pairs of interfering solids? <N>:
eXit/<Next pair>:
OPTIONS:
Select the first set of solids • If you have one selection set, all the Solid
objects are checked against one another.
Select the second set of solids • If you have a second selection set, the first
group of Solids is compared to the Solids in
the second group. If a Solid was selected for
both groups, it defaults to the first group.
INTERSECT 307
Create interference solids? • Answer Yes if you want the composite Solid
<N> objects highlighted and created from the
selection sets.
Highlight pairs of interfering • Highlights the new composite Solids.
solids?
<Next pair> • If more than one composite Solid is created
you can have AutoCAD highlight and cycle
through each new composite Solid.
eXit • Ends the command.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t , Before using this command you may want to be active on a different Layer from
that of the original Solids. Once you create the composite Solids you can Freeze
the Layers on which the original Solids resided on. This will help you get a better
look at the results.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Intersect, Union, Subtract
EXAMPLE:
Second set of SOli(js

First ~.t of
o
~ol;ds
INTERSECT
Intersect creates composite Solids or Regions from two or more Solids or Regions that
overlap or intersect by combining one set of Solids with another set of Solids or one set of
Regions with another set of Regions.
308 INTERSECT

Modify toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 ... SOLIDS'" Intrsec:

Keyboard Intersect
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Exploding Intersects yields various results depending on the original objects and
on whether part of the objects were deleted due to the intersect process.
t> You can obtain detailed information about the Intersect's result with the Massprop
command.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Interfere, Subtract, Union
EXAMPLE:
'ISAVEBAK (Incremental SAVe BAcKup)

Isavebak determines whether backup (.bak) files are created when drawings are saved.

Keyboard ISAVEBAK
OPTIONS:
o • Do not create backup (.bak) files.
1 • Create backup (.bak) files.
ISAVEPERCENT 309
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Setting this variable to 0 increases the speed if you periodically Save during
drawing sessions. However, you lose the safety net of retrieving a backup (.bak)
file if something happens to your drawing (.dwg) file.
~ Regardless of this setting you still create .bak files when using the Saveasrl2
command.
System Variable Configuration file Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Isavepercent
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: End, Qsave, Save
'ISAVEPERCENT (Incremental SAVE PERCENT)

Isavepercent defines the amount of wasted space (0-100) allowed in a drawing. It
determines whether new drawing information is appended to the end of a drawing or
whether there is a full Save that gets rid of the wasted space. Once a drawing reaches the
Isavepercent amount it performs a full Save as though it were set to zero.

Keyboard ISA VEPERCENT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i;, Setting Isavebak to 0 and Rasterpreview to 3 increases the speed of Isavepercent.
~ The lower the Isavepercent the longer it takes to Save.

RELATED VARIABLES: Isavebak, Rasterpreview
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Qsave, Save, Saveas
310 ISOLINES
'ISOLINES (Incremental SOlid LINES)

Isolines determines the number of lines displayed on Solids. This is for visualization only
and does not affect the actual Solid objects.

Keyboard ISOLINES
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ All Solids are displayed at the current Isoline setting.
~ This setting has no bearing on the Hide, Render, and Shade commands.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Cone, Cylinder, Extrude, Revolve, Sphere, Torus
EXAMPLE:
Isoline 0 ISQline 0 I$oline 4 It.oline 4 I.aline 20 loolino 20
'ISOPLANE (ISOmetric PLANE)

Isoplane defmes which of the three isometric planes (top, left, right) you want to work in
when Isometric mode is enabled. You set the Isometric mode with the Isometric Style
option of the Snap command. Pressing <Ctrl E> is a shortcut to toggling between the
three planes. You also can set the Isoplane with the Ddrmodes dialog box. The Isoplane's
default value is maintained by the Snapisopair system variable.

Keyboard ISOPLANE or <CTRL E>
PROMPTS:
Left / Top / Right /< Toggle>:
ISOPLANE 311
OPTIONS:
Left • Left isoplane is active in the 90-degree and 1S0-degree axis pair.
Top • Top isoplane is active in the 30-degree and ISO-degree axis pair.
Right • Right isoplane is active in the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Keep Ortho On to help you draw in the correct plane.
t You can draw isometric circles with the Isocircle option of the Ellipse command.
We recommend that you verify that Pellipse is set to O. This will give you greater
flexibility when editing Ellipses or Isocircles.
:!: 3-D commands such as hidden line removal and perspective views will not work if
you use the Isometric mode since the drawing objects are 2-D.
RELATED VARIABLES: Lastpoint, Snapisopair, Snapstyl
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Ellipse, Snap
EXAMPLE:
Isoplone Isoplo ne Isoplone

Top Right Left
312 LASTANGLE
'LASTANGLE
Lastangle maintains the location of the last angle of the last drawn arc.

Keyboard LASTANGLE
System Variable 0, Read-only Initial default Real
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Arc
'LASTPOINT
Lastpoint maintains the location of the last point entered.

Keyboard LASTPOINT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When you need to reference the Lastpoint, use the @ symbol for prompts such as,
"From point" or "Insertion point."
System Variable 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Initial default 3-D Point
RELATED VARIABLES: Lastangle
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Arc, Line, Pline, Id
'LAYER
Layers act as transparent drawing overlays. The Layer command is used to control Layer
accessibility, status, Color, visibility, and Linetype. The Current Layer's name is
maintained by the Clayer system variable. You can achieve the same results using the
Ddlmodes or Ddemodes dialog box.
LAYER 313

Keyboard LA YER or LA
PROMPTS:
? / Make / Set / New / ON / OFF / Co l or / Ltype / Fr eez e / Thaw /LOck / Unlock :
OPTIONS:
? • Allows you to review the names of Layers defined in the drawing,
their state (visibility and accessibility), Color, and Linetype. The
default, an asterisk (*), displays a sorted listing of the named Layers.
You can use any of the wild-card options to create a more specific list.
Make • Creates a new Layer and makes it current. This is equivalent to using
the New and Set options.
Set • Makes the Layer current. New objects are assigned to the current
Layer.
New • Creates new Layer(s). Layer names can contain up to 31 characters.
ON • Turns Layer(s) On.
OFF • Turns Layer(s) Off.
Color • Assigns a Color to Layer(s).
Ltype • Assigns a Linetype to Layer(s).
Freeze • Makes the Layer invisible. This prevents the Layer from Regenerating.
Thaw • Unfreezes a Layer.
LOck • Determines whether objects can be displayed but not modified.

Unlock • Disables the lock option.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You cannot Purge (delete), or Rename Layer O. However, you can change its
Color, Linetype, display options (On/Off, Freeze/Thaw), and accessibility
(Lock/Unlock).
314 LAYER
~ When you create new Layers, you can type more than one Layer name at a time so
long as the names are separated by commas. The same applies to setting Color,
Linetype, Off/On, Freeze/Thaw, and Locked/Unlock.
~ If you set Color and Linetype Bylayer, any objects you draw default to the color
and linetype of the current Layer.
~ You may find it easier and quicker to stay on one Layer while drawing new
objects. Later, you can use one of the following commands - Change, Chprop,
Ddchprop, or Ddmodify - and reassign the objects to their proper Layers.
~ Blocks containing objects drawn on Layer 0 adopt the current Layer's properties
upon insertion.
~ Turning Tilemode Off (0) lets you determine a Layer's visibility by viewport. This
is accomplished with the Vplayer command.
~ You can delete unreferenced Layers with the Purge command.
~ You can Rename Layers with any of the following commands: Rename,
Ddrename, Ddemodes, or Ddlmodes.
~ You can change the Layer settings for Xref drawings. If you set Visretain to 1
these settings are retained by the host drawing.
~ If you type La to activate the Layer command and you receive the error message
"Unknown command ... " it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the file named
~ Issuing most of the rendering commands (Light, Render, Scene, etc.) automatically
creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you cancel out of the command
this Layer is still created.
£ You can make a Layer Current that is Off, but you cannot make a Frozen Layer
Current.
£ Associative dimensioning creates a Layer named Defpoints (definition points).
The following are some of the unique characteristics of this Layer: This layer will
not Plot even when On and Thawed. Renaming this Layer will cause it to Plot.
Objects on this Layer use the color and linetype and visibility settings of Layer O.
RELATED VARIABLES: Clayer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Chprop, Color, Ddemodes, Ddltype,
Ddmodify, Ddlmodes, Linetype, Ltscale, Vplayer, wild-card
LEADER 315
EXAMPLE:
Command: LAYER
? / Make /S et / New /ON/OFF /Colo r / Ltype /F re e ze /Thaw : N
New laye r name (s): 2-TEXT,2 -WALLS,2-FURNITURE,2-DlMENSION
?/Make /Set/ New /ON/OFF /Color/L type / Freeze / Thaw : C
Color: blue
Layer name(s) for co l or 5 (blue ) : 2-DIMENSION,2-TEXT
?/Make / Se t/ New /ON/OF F/Co l or/Ltype /F reeze /Thaw: S
New current layer: 1-WALLS
?/Make /S e t/ New /ON/OFF /Color/L type / Freeze/Thaw : F
Layer name (s) to Freeze: ?-TEXT,?-DlMENSION
?/Make/Set/New/ON/ OFF /Color/L t ype/F reeze /Thaw: <Enter)
LEADER
Leader creates leader lines. Leaders are made up of the following: arrowheads, straight or
splined (curved) Line segments, Multi-line Text, Dimension information, or Tolerance
dimensions. All of the parts making up the leader (except the annotation) are associative
or dynamic in that they act as one object.

Dimensioning tool bar ,;A
Screen menu DRAW DIM - Leader:

Keyboard LEADER or LEAD
PROMPTS:
Fr om point:
To point:
To point (Format /Annota tion/Undo ) <Annotation>:
Annotat ion (o r RETURN fo r options):
Tole rance/Copy/B l ock/ None /<Mt ext>:
OPTIONS:
Format • Determines whether there are arrows and whether the
Lines are straight or splined (curved).
316 LEADER
Spline / STraight • Automatically creates straight line segments unless you

enter S for spline (curved line segments). As long as the
format option is available you can toggle between the
two.
Arrow / None • Automatically places an arrowhead at the "From point"
prompt unless you enter "N" for none. As long as the
Format option is available you can toggle between the
two.
Exit • Leaves the Format option and returns to the "To point"
prompt.
Annotation • Lets you add text (Mtext) or symbols (Blocks) at the end
of the Leader. Entering Annotation without going to the
options lets you enter one Mtext line.
Tolerance • Activates the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. See the
Tolerance command for more detailed information.
Copy • Copies existing Text, Mtext, Blocks, and Tolerance and
places it as the Annotation. It does not work for
associative dimensions.
Block • Inserts a Block as the annotation. You can activate a
dialog box if you use a tilde (-) when prompted for the
Block name. See the Insert command for more detailed
information.
None • Ends the Leader command without placing anything at
the end of the leader line.
Mtext • Lets you enter multiple lines of text using the Mtext
dialog box.
Undo • Lets you Undo, one step at a time, whatever was
accomplished up to the annotation option. Once you
proceed to annotation this option is no longer available.
• An Undo, once the command is ended, erases whatever

was accomplished by the Leader command.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, Hook lines are automatically created if the angle of the Leader is greater than 15
degrees from the horizontal.
LENGTHEN 317
~ The Dim command has a Leader option, but it is not as flexible.
~ Leaders use some of the default dimensioning style values such as Dimclrd,
Dimblk, Dimblkl, Dimasz, Dimgap, Dirnscale, Dimgap, Dimtoh, and Dimtad.
~ You can edit leaders created from the Leader command using the Update option of
the Dim command, Ddmodify, and Grips. You can also use Dimedit and Dimtedit
on associative leaders created from the Dimdiameter and Dimradius commands.
t> If you type Lead to activate the Leader command and you receive the error
! You cannot Explode Leaders.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimasz, Dimtad, Dimscale, Dimgap

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Block, Copy, Ddim, Dim, Mtext, Tolerance
EXAMPLE:
LENGTHEN
Lengthen changes the length of objects.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu MODIFY" Lengthn:

Keyboard LENGTHEN
PROMPTS:
DEl ta/Percent / Total/DYnamic/<Select object>:
318 LENGTHEN
OPTIONS:
<Select object> • Lists the object's length. If the object is an Arc it also
provides the included angle.
DElta • Increases or decreases the length of 2-D and 3-D Polylines,
Arcs, Elliptical Arcs, and Lines by the amount specified.
Angle • Changes the angle of Arcs and Elliptical Arcs by increasing
or decreasing the Arc's length by the amount specified.
Percent • Changes the length of 2-D and 3-D Polylines, Arcs, Elliptical
Arcs, Lines, and Splines based on a percentage of its current
length. The percentage you enter defmes the amount of the
object you want to keep.
Total • Specifies the absolute length for 2-D and 3-D Polylines, Arcs,
Elliptical Arcs, Lines, and Splines.
DYnamic • Drag the endopoints of Arcs, Elliptical Arcs, and Lines to
new locations.
Undo • Undoes the last object Lengthened.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The endpoint lengthened is based on the nearest endpoint found during object
selection.
~ Break, Change, Ddmodify, Extend, Trim, and Grip editing let you change an
object's length.
RELATED VARIABLES: Grips

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Break, Change, Ddmodify, Extend, Trim,
EXAMPLE:
1,·00 1
Delta .25 Delta -.25 Percent 60 Total 1.13
LIGHT 319
'LENSLENGTH
Lenslength maintains the lens length (in millimeters) used in perspective viewing. This
value is usually set with the Dview command.

Keyboard LENS LENGTH
System Variable 50.0000, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Real
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dview
LIGHT
Light creates, modifies, and controls the lighting parameters for rendering. For each Light
you create, a Block or light symbol is placed in the drawing. Each Block retains that
light's specific values.

Render toolbar [2]
Screen menu TOOLS - RENDER - Lights:
Keyboard LIGHT
OPTIONS:
Ughts
AmbIent Light
IJ
I Usa Color WhaeL

320 LIGHT
Lights • Lists the Lights dermed in the current drawing.

Modify ... • Modifies the Light highlighted in the Lights list box. The
dialog box this activates varies depending on whether the Light
is Point, Distant, or Spotlight.
Delete • Removes the Light highlighted in the Lights list box. You can
also delete Lights by erasing the Light Blocks from the
drawing.
Select < • Lets you select an existing Light Block from the drawing and
highlights its associated Light name from the Lights list box.
New ... • Creates a new Point Light, Distant Light, or Spotlight.
Point Light • Point Lights emit radiating beams of light. You specify either
the intensity of the light to the distance traveled or the
attenuation parameters. See the Point Light dialog box.
Distant • Distant Lights emit parallel beams of light. There is no
Light attenuation, so the light remains at a constant intensity. See the
Distant Light dialog box.
Spotlight • Spotlights emit directional cones of light. You specify either
the intensity of the light to the distance traveled or the
attenuation parameters. See the Spotlight dialog box.
Ambient Light • Maintains a constant or evenly distributed background light to
all surfaces on the drawing.
Intensity • Controls the intensity of the ambient Light. The value can be
between 0 and 1. 0 is no ambient light; 1 is full brightness.
Enter the intensity value in the text box or use the slider bars.
Color • Sets the color for the ambient light. You can enter the color
values in the Red/Green/Blue text boxes, use the slider bars, or
use the Color Wheel. The color box or swatch next to the Use
color Wheel... button displays the current color.
Use Color • Activates the Color dialog box. See the following dialog box.
Wheel...
LIGHT 321
Color
Color System • Determines whether you are using the Red, Green, Blue (RGB)
or the Hue, Lightness, Saturation (HLS) color system.
RGB (Red/Green/Blue)
• Defines the color by changing the intensity of the Red, Green,
and Blue colors. Setting all three values to 0 results in black;
setting all three to 1 produces white.
HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation)
• Adjusts the hue, lightness, and saturation elements of the

selected color.
Select from • Activates the AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) dialog box. See
ACI... Ddcolor for more detailed information.
322 LIGHT
New Point Ught

AItonullbon
UghtHamo:
No.ne
Inverse SjlUlUe
OK
Light Name • Assigns a name, up to 8 characters, for the new Light.

Intensity • Defines the lights brightness. Setting the value to zero turns
the light off. The maximum value you can assign is directly
related to the attenuation setting and the drawing's extents.
Position • Shows you the current light coordinates and lets you
relocate the light.
Modify • Temporarily brings up your drawing and lets you move the
light to a different location.
Show • Shows the light location by providing the X, Y, and Z
coordinates.
Color • Sets the color for the current light. You can enter the color
values in the Red/Green/Blue text boxes, use the slider bars,
or use the Color Wheel. The color box or swatch next to the
Use color Wheel... button displays the current color.
Use Color • Activates the Color dialog box. See the dialog box labeled
Wheel... Use Color Wheel described earlier in this section.
Attenuation • Determines the way light is diminished over distance. The
further the object is from the Point Light the darker it
appears.
None • All objects are assigned the same brightness.
LIGHT 323
Inverse Linear • The light intensity decreases linearly as the distance from
the light source to the center of the target face increases.
Inverse Square • The light intensity decreases as the square of the distance
from the light source to the center of a target face increases.
New Distant Ught

tiDme
intensIty 11.00
Color
Sed
1ireell
Name • Assigns a name, up to 8 characters, for the new light.

Intensity • Defines the light's brightness. The value for this setting
ranges from 0 to 1. Setting the value to 0 turns the light
off; setting the value to 1 gives the light full intensity.
Color • Sets the color for the current l:.;ht. You can enter the color
values in the Red/Green/Blue text boxes, use the slider
bars, or use the Color Wheel. The color box or swatch
next to the Use color Wheel... button displays the current
color.
324 LIGHT
Azimuth • Defmes the location of the light by using site-based

coordinates. The values range from -180 to 180 degrees.
You can enter the values in the text box, click on the
diagram, or use the slider bars. This value directly affects
the Light Source Vector.
Altitude • Defmes the location of the light by using site-based
coordinates. The values range from 0 to 90 degrees. You
can enter the values in the text box, click on the diagram,
or use the slider bars. This value directly affects the Light
Source Vector.
Light Source • Displays the Light Source Vector based on the Azimuth
Vector and Altitude settings. You can enter the values in the text
box or use the Modify option. Modify lets you pick the
Light location directly from the drawing. Changing these
values changes the Azimuth and Altitude settings.
New Spotlight
Ugh! fillllle: 144 .00
Intensity I I
145_00
I I
NJl.ne
Ii Inverle J.jne ....
Use Color Wheel . Inverse S.llu ....e
OK 1 Cancel
Light Name • Assigns a name, up to 8 characters, for the new Light.

LIGHT 325
Intensity • Defines the light's brightness. Setting the value to zero turns
the light off. The maximum value you can assign is directly
related to the attenuation setting and the drawing's extents.
Position • Shows the current light and target coordinates and lets you
relocate the light and target.
Modify • Temporarily brings up your drawing and lets you move the
light and target to different locations.
Show • Shows the light and target locations by providing the X, r,
and Z coordinates.
Color • Sets the Color for the current light. You can enter the Color
values in the Red/Green/Blue text boxes, use the slider bars,
or use the Color Wheel. The color box or swatch next to the
Use color Wheel... button displays the current color.
Hotspot • Determine the angle that defines the brightest cone of light.
The value ranges from 0 to 160 degrees.
Falloff • Determines the angle that defines the full cone of light. The
value ranges from 0 to 160 degrees.
Attenuation • Determines the way light is diminished over distance. The
further the object is from the spotlight the darker it appears.
None • All objects are assigned the same brightness.
Inverse Linear • The light intensity decreases linearly as the distance from
the light source to the center of the target face increases.
Inverse Square • The light intensity decreases as the square of the distance
from the light source to the center of the target face
increases.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can modify Lights by changing their Location, Scene assignment, Color, and
Intensity, but you cannot change the type (i.e. Point, Distant, or Spot) of light.
~) Light symbols (Blocks) are placed on a Locked Layer named Ashade. You can
change the size of these lights with the Lights option of the Rpref command.
326 LIGHT
t> If necessary, when locating Lights use the X, Y, Z filtering method.

t> Issuing Light automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for use.
t> Issuing Light automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
l When creating Scenes with no defmed lights, AutoCAD assumes an "over-the-
shoulder" distant light source intensity of 1 and an ambient light intensity of O.
l Lights does not work in Paper space.
RELATED VARIABLES: Target
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Matlib, Rmat, Render, Rpref, Scene, Shade
'LIMCHECK (LIMits CHECK)

Limcheck determines whether new objects can be created outside the Limits. This value is
usually set with the Limits command.

Keyboard LIMCHECK
OPTIONS:
o • Creates objects at any location regardless of the Limits.
1 • Only creates objects within the defmed Limits.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Model space and paper space retain their own Limcheck settings.
RELATED VARIABLES: Limmax, Limmin
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Limits
LIMITS 327
'LIMITS
Limits defines the drawing area. This area is defined by the absolute coordinates of the
lower left and upper right comers. The Limits command lets you modify these
coordinates and tum Limits checking On and Off.

Pull-down Data ~ Drawing Limits
Screen menu DATA ~ Limits:
Keyboard LIMITS
PROMPTS:
Reset Model space l imits:
ON/OFF/<Lower left corner> <0.0000,0.0000>:
Upper right co rner <12.0000,9.0000>:
OPTIONS:
ON • Turns Limits checking On; you cannot pick a point outside
the limits.
OFF • Turns Limits checking Off; you can pick a point outside
the limits.
Lower left comer • Changes the lower left comer coordinates.
Upper right comer • Changes the upper right comer coordinates.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Set your Limits to represent the full size of what you plan to draw or a little larger.
~ If you change the Limits, you must use Zoom All to readjust your drawing to the
screen display. If you have objects outside the Limits, the display will include
those objects as well. Zoom All shows you the current Limits or drawing extents,
whichever is greater.
t , There are no Limits in the Z direction.
~ If Grid is On and you are in the WCS, grid dots are displayed to the drawing
Limits.
~, The Status command displays the drawing Limits.
328 LIMITS
t. Model space and Paper space retain their own Limits.
t. You can Plot to the drawing Limits.
I If Limits checking is enabled and you pick a point outside the Limits, you will get
the message "**Outside limits", and your command may not complete.
RELATED VARIABLES: Limcheck, Limmin, Limmax, Vsmax, Vsmin
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Plot, Status
'LIMMAX (LIMmits MAXimum)

Limmax maintains the upper right X,Y limit. This value is usually set with the Limits
command.

Keyboard LIMMAX
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t. Model space and Paper space retain their own Limmax setting.

System Variable 12.0000,9.0000 Last value used in the drawing 2-D Point
RELATED VARIABLES: Limcheck, Limmin
'LIMMIN (LIMits MINimum)

Limmin maintains the lower left X,Y limit. This value is usually set with the Limits
command.

Keyboard LIMMIN
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t. Model space and Paper space retain their own Limmin setting.

System Variable 0.0000,0.0000 Last value used in the drawing 2-D Point
LINE 329
RELATED VARIABLES: Limcheck, Limmax

LINE
Line create 2-D (X,y) or 3-D (X,Y,Z) straight line segments. If the Z value is not given, it
is assumed to be at the current elevation.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY •.•

Draw toolbar
/
Screen menu DRAWl -. Line:
Keyboard LINE or L or 3DLINE
PROMPTS:
From poi nt:
To point:
OPTIONS:
Continue • At the "From point prompt", you can begin a Line at the endpoint
of the most recently drawn Line or Arc by selecting Continue or
pressing <Enter>.
Close • Entering C (close) at the "To point prompt" closes the line
segments created during the command. It connects the last endpoint
to the start point.
Undo • Entering U (Undo) at the "To point prompt" undoes the last line
and returns you to the previous point.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You end the Line command by canceling «Esc» or by pressing <Enter>.
~ Accessing Line from the screen menu offers an additional option, 1 Line. This
creates one Line and returns you to a blank command prompt.
~ Use Sketch to construct freehand lines, Mline to create parallel lines and arcs,
Pline to create lines and arcs connected by their vertices, Trace and Pline to
construct lines with a thickness, and Spline and Pline to create curved lines.
~ You can convert a Line into a Pline (see Pedit) but you cannot convert a Line into
Mline, Ray, Spline, Trace, or Xline.
330 LINE
~ You can construct Lines with different linetypes by using the Linetype (Set) or
Layer (Linetype) commands. Some plotters let you set the linetype based on the
Line's color assignment.
~ If you want to draw Lines with different line weights, use the Pline or Trace
commands. Some plotters and printers let you set different line weights based on
the Line's color assignment.
~ You can continue drawing Arcs and Lines from the last point of an Arc or Line by
pressing <Enter> at the first command prompt. This works best if you are
connecting to a Line or Arc that was just constructed. See Point Entry and Osnap
~ If you turn Ortho On, you can draw Lines at 90 degree angles.
~ You can save time and draw Lines more accurately by using Snap, Osnap, or by
entering the absolute, relative, or polar coordinates of each point.
~ If an Arc is the last object drawn, you can draw a Line tangent to the Arc endpoint
by using the Continue option and specifying only the Line length. The direction is
determined by the endpoint of the Arc.
~ If you type L or 3D1ine to activate the Line command and you receive the error
~ If Grips are enabled, the Line's Grip definition points are the endpoints and
midpoint. Picking the endpoints lets you change the location; picking the midpoint
lets you move the Line.
~ Using the Undo option while in the Line command is different from issuing an
Undo at a command prompt. Undo during the Line command releases you to the
previous point and lets you continue drawing lines. Using the Undo at a command
prompt backsteps to the previous command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Lastangle, Lastpoint
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Pline, Point Entry, Mline, Ray, Spline, Trace, Xline
LlNETYPE 331
EXAMPLE:
Line construction using exact measurements
11.15,
~Jo
Start point ~~
Direction - - -
Absolute Relative Polar

2,2 pick a slo rt point pick 0 start point
3.15,2 @1.15,O @1.15<O
3.15.3 @O.1 @1<90
2.3 @-1.15.0 @1.15<180
2,2 (or Close) !gIO,-l (or close) @1<270 (or close )
'LINETYPE
Linetype assigns a linetype for new objects, loads linetype definitions stored in library
files, and creates new linetype definitions. The default linetype library is acad.lin.
You can achieve some of the same functionality using the Ddltype dialog box. Ddltype
lets you determine the ISO Pen Width by setting the linetype scale (Ltscale) factor. You
must manually set this when using the Linetype command. However, the Linetype
command has a feature to create new linetypes.

Keyboard LINETYPE or Lt
PROMPTS:
?/Create/Load/Set:
OPTIONS:
? • Displays a sorted listing of the named Linetype libraries. You can use
any of the wild-card options to create a more specific list. If Filedia is
set to 1, the? displays the Select Linetype File dialog box.
Create • Creates new Linetypes.
332 LlNETYPE
Load • Loads Linetypes defmed in existing library files. You can use any of
the wild-card options to load Linetypes. You can activate the Filedia
dialog box if you type a - (tilde) at the "Linetype(s) to load" prompt.
Set • Sets a default Linetype for new objects.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Two special Linetypes are Bylayer and Byblock. Bylayer means new objects
receive the linetype of the Layers on which they reside; Byblock means new
objects are drawn with the Continuous linetype until they are saved as a Block.
When the Block is Inserted, it inherits the linetype set by the Linetype command.
t> You do not need to load the different Linetypes located in acad.lin before they can
be referenced.
t> You can reassign an object's Linetype with the Ddchprop, Ddmodify, Change, or
Chprop command.
~ Polylines offer more flexibility since you can control the Linetype pattern
generation around the vertices. The Linetype can be continuous in that all the
inside vertices are ignored and do not reset the pattern. See the Pedit command.
~ You can control the spacing of dashes, dots, and spaces with the Ltscale and
Celtscale system variables or by creating new Linetypes.
~ You can delete and rename all Linetypes except Continuous, Bylayer, and
Byblock. Delete Linetypes with Purge; Rename Linetypes with Ddrename or
Rename. You can import Linetypes from other drawings with the Xbind and Xref
(Bind) commands.
~ Using noncontinuous Linetypes can slow down Redraws and Regenerations. You
can use the Continuous Linetype until you are ready to Plot, then use the Change
or Chprop command or respecify a Layer Linetype for plotting.
t> Some plotters can produce their own linetypes based on the colors assigned to
objects. To take advantage of these hardware linetypes and maximize display
speed, use only the Continuous Linetype and assign linetypes to different object
colors with the plotter.
t> You can reassign and save an Xref Layer's Linetype by setting Visretain to 1. This
is only saved in the drawing referencing the Xref.
LIST 333
~ Once a Linetype is Loaded it does not need to access the library file from which it
came.
~ You can control Paper-space Linetype scaling with the Psltscale system variable.
~ If you type Lt to activate the Linetype command and you receive the error message
~ Mixing Linetypes on a single Layer can be confusing. Using the Layer command
to control Linetype and leaving Linetype set to Bylayer helps you identify the
Layer an object is on and makes changing Linetypes a simple process of
respecifying the Linetype with the Layer command.
~ If you change an object's Linetype, you must Regenerate the screen to see the
results.
RELATED VARIABLES: Celtype, Filedia, Ltscale, Plinegen, Psltscale
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Chprop, Ddchprop, Ddemodes, Ddlmodes,
Ddmodify, Layer, Ltscale, Plot
EXAMPLE: See Ddltype
LIST I DB LIST (DataBase LIST)

List provides detailed information on selected objects within a drawing. Dblist (Data Base
List) provides information on all objects within a drawing.

Object Properties toolbar ill
Screen menu ASSIST ~ INQUIRY ~ List:

Keyboard LIST
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
334 LIST
TIPS & WARNINGS:

iJ It is faster to detennine the length of a Line with the List command than with the
Distance command.
iJ If you set Logfileon you can review the infonnation later with a text editor or word
processor.
~ If you pick too many objects to List, it is hard to tell which descriptions fit which
objects.
LOAD
Load makes Shapes (*.shx) available for the Shape command. Shape files contain symbol
definitions that are similar to Blocks but less flexible.

Pull-down Data" Shape File ...
Screen menu DATA" Load:
Keyboard LOAD
PROMPTS:
Name of shape file to load (or ?):
OPTIONS:
? • Lists currently loaded Shape files if Filedia is enabled (1).
• Temporarily activates the File dialog box if Filedia is disabled (0).
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Using the Load command when Filedia is enabled lets you select any of your
computer's drives, directories, and files. However, it does not display any of the
Shapes already defmed in the current drawing. If you want to select Shapes
already defined in the current drawing, set Filedia to O.
~ If Filedia is set to 1 a dialog box is activated; if Filedia is set to 0 you are
temporarily activates the File dialog box.
~ Before loading Shape files they must first be Compiled. After Shape files are
loaded you can access them with the Shape command.
LOGFILEOFF 335
:l The Shape files that are loaded contain symbol definitions and are different from
the .shx files usually associated with fonts.
:l Shapes placed on a drawing are directly linked to their Shape file (.shx) . If that
Shape file cannot be found when the drawing is opened for editing, the shape
references are invisible. When sharing drawings with others, make sure you give
them the Shape files. For more flexibility and ease of use consider using Blocks.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Compile, Shape
'LOCALE
Locale maintains the ISO language code used by your version of AutoCAD.

Keyboard LOCALE
System Variable en, Read-only Initial default String
LOGFILEOFF I LOGFILEON
Logfileon opens and writes the contents of the text window to a file; Logfileoff closes the
log file. You can achieve the same result by selecting the Log File check box from the
Environment option of the Preferences dialog box.

Keyboard LOGFILEOFF, LOGFILEON
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use a word processor or ASCII text editor (such as NotePad) if you want to access
the file's contents.
~) The default log file name is acad.log and it is located in the AutoCAD support
directory. You can change the file name and directory with the Preference dialog
box. AutoCAD creates a new log file if it cannot locate an existing one.
:l When Logfileon is active, each drawing session appends itself to the contents of
the log file. Each session begins with a line of dashes separating itself from the
previous drawing session.
336 LOGFILEON
LOGFILEON see LOGFILEOFF
,LOGINNAME
Loginname maintains the user's login name. This variable is set during the initial
AutoCAD configuration. You can reset this variable with the Config (Configure
Operating Parameters) command.

Keyboard LOGINNAME
System Variable varies, Read-only Last value set with String
the config command
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Config
'LTSCALE (Line Type SCALE)

Ltscale assigns a global scale multiplier for all Linetypes. The system variable (Setvar)
that maintains this setting is also named Ltscale.

Keyboard LTSCALE
PROMPTS:
New scale factor <1.0000>:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ A rule of thumb for determining a drawing's proper linetype scale is to set it to the
drawing's scale factor. Once you have plotted the drawing, you can fine-tune the
Ltscale value.
~ To decrease Redraw and Regen time, set your Ltscale to a large value and change
the value just before you Plot the drawing. Setting all your Linetypes to
Continuous Bylayer is even faster. When you are ready to plot, change the
Linetypes with the Layer command.
~ Use Psltscale to control Paper space linetype scaling.
LUPREC 337
~ The Change, Chprop, Ddchprop, Ddemodes, and Ddmodify dialog box has
options for Linetype Scale. However, this sets the Celtscale and not the Ltscale.
~ If you change your drawing's Ltscale, you will not see a change until the drawing
regenerates.
RELATED VARIABLES: Celtscale, Ltscale, Psltscale
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddlmodes, Ddltype, Layer, Linetype, Setvar
'LUNITS (Linear UNITS)

Lunits sets the default for the type of Units to display. This is usually set with the Ddunits
and Units commands.

Keyboard LUNITS
OPTIONS:
• Scientific
2 • Decimal
3 • Engineering
4 • Architectural
5 • Fractional
RELATED VARIABLES: Angbase, Angdir, Aunits, Auprec, Luprec
'LUPREC (Linear Units PRECision)

Luprec sets the default for the number of digits to the right of the decimal point or
smallest fraction to display. This is usually set with the Ddunits and Units commands.

Keyboard LUPREC
338 LUPREC

RELATED VARIABLES: Angbase, Angdir, Aunits, Auprec, Lunits
MASSPROP 339
MAKEPREVIEW
Makepreview creates a bitmap file (.bmp) of the current drawing display. This raster
image is what is displayed in the Preview Drawing image tile box when using the
Ddinsert, Open, Recover, Saveas, Wblock, and Xref commands. Drawings saved with
Release 13 (except for the Saveasr12 command) automatically create an internal raster
image depending on the Rasterpreview setting. This command is used when saving files
in a format prior to Release 13.

Keyboard MAKEPREVIEW
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Once a drawing is saved in Release 13 format (End, Qsave, Save, Saveas) any
bitmapped files created with the Makepreview command are ignored and can be
deleted.
l Bitmapped files contain the same name and must reside in the same directory as
the drawing file.
RELATED VARIABLES: Rasterpreview
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Saveasr12
MASSPROP (MASS PROPerties)

Massprop evaluates Regions and Solid objects and provides information such as Mass,
Volume, Moments of Inertia, Products of Inertia, and Radii of Gyration.

Standard tool bar
Screen menu ASSIST -. INQUIRY -. MassPro:

Keyboard MASSPROP
PROMPTS:
Wr ite to a file? <N>:
340 MASSPROP
OPTIONS:
Write to a file? <N>
• If you answer "Yes" an ASCII text file is created containing the mass
properties data. The file extension .mpr is automatically assigned to that
file.
EXAMPLE:
The following information is provided for a Solid one inch cubed box.
Mass 1.00000 lb
Volume 1.00000 cu in
Bounding box X: 11.87500 -- 12.87500 in
Y: 5.37500 -- 6.37500 in
Z: 0.00000 -- 1.00000 in
Centroid X: 12.37500 in
Y: 5.87500 in
Z: 0.50000 in
Moments of inertia X: 34.932291b sq in
Y: 153.55729 lb sq in
Z: 187.822921b sq in
Products of inertia XY: 72.70313 lb sq in
YZ: 2.93750 lb sq in
ZX: 6.18750 lb sq in
Radii of gyration X: 5.91035 in
Y: 12.39182 in
Z: 13.70485 in
Principal moments (lb sq in) and X-Y-Z directions about centroid
I: 0.16667 along [1.00000 0.00000 0.00000]
J: 0.16667 along [0.00000 1.00000 0.00000]
K: 0.16667 along [0.00000 0.00000 1.00000]
MATLIB 341
MATLIB (MATerial LIBrary)

Matlib imports rendering materials from a library file to a drawing and exports rendering
materials from the drawing to a library file. You can also access this command from the
Rmat (Render Materials) dialog box.

Render toolbar
Screen menu TOOLS" RENDER" MatLib:

Keyboard MATUB
OPTIONS:
Materials List • Lists the materials currently defmed in the drawing.
Purge • Removes materials not assigned to objects in the Materials List

box.
Save... • Saves the group of materials from the Materials List box to an
external file (.rnU).
Preview • Shows how materials will be displayed on objects. Only one

material need be highlighted or selected for the Preview button
to be available.
342 MATLIB
<-Import • Assigns materials to the current drawing.

Export -> • Copies material definitions from the drawing to an external
flle.
Delete • Removes materials from the Materials List and Library List
dialog boxes, including materials assigned to objects.
LIbrary List • Lists the materials defmed in library flles (.mli). The default
flle is render.mli.
Open.. . • Opens library flles (.mli).
Save .. . • Save one or more materials to a library flle (.mll).
TIPS & WARNINGS:

to You can select multiple materials in the Materials List and Library List. Picking
the Materials Lists removes the highlighting from the Library List and vice versa.
to You assign materials to objects with the Rmat command.
to Issuing Matlib automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for use.
to Issuing Matlib automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Rmat
'MAXACTVP (MAXimum ACTive ViewPorts)

Maxactvp sets the maximum number of Viewports to Regenerate and display when
Tilemode is enabled (0). Paper space is considered one of the Viewports.

Keyboard MAXACTVP
TIPS & WARNINGS:

to Regardless of this setting, all Viewports will Plot. If any Viewports do not Plot
make sure the Viewports were not set off with the Mview command or Frozen with
the Vplayer command.
MEASURE 343

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mview, Viewports, Vplayer, Vports
'MAXSORT (MAXimum SORT)

Maxsort sets the maximum number of named items (Blocks, Layers, Views, etc.) that are
listed alpha-numerically or sorted. You can sort up to 200 named items.

Keyboard MAXSORT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

:!: If you have more items than the maxsort value, sorting is disabled.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: wild-card
MEASURE
Measure marks an object at equal segment lengths. The object is not physically separated;
rather, Points or Blocks are placed as markers at each segment end point. You can
measure Arcs, Circles, Ellipses, Lines, Polylines, 3-D Polylines, and Splines. You cannot
measure Mlines, Rays, Regions, Traces, Xlines, wireframe, or Solid objects.

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - Measure

Keyboard MEASURE
PROMPTS:
Select object to measu r e:
<Segment l ength>/Block :
344 MEASURE
OPTIONS:
Segment length • Enter the desired segment length. Segments are measured
starting with the endpoint of the object closest to the pick
point you use to select an object.
Block • Measure the object with a Block or Xref currently defmed in
the drawing. After providing the Block name and alignment,
you are prompted for the number of segments.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When measuring Circles, the ftrst marker begins at the angle from the center based
on the current Snap Rotation angle.
~ The ftrst marker location for Closed Polylines is placed on the beginning vertex.
~ If you cannot see the Points measuring an object, try adjusting the Pdmode and
Pdsize system variables (you can use the Ddptype dialog box) and issuing a
Regen.
~ The Block option lets you align the Block with the measured object. An aligned
Block is rotated around its insertion point and drawn parallel to the measured
object. An unaligned Block is drawn with a 0 rotation angle to the object.
~ You can Osnap to the points placed by Measure with the Node option.
~ You can manipulate Measure's markers as a group with the Previous selection set
option.
I You can Measure only one object at a time.
I You cannot change the X, Y, Z scale factor of a Block used for object Measuring.
I When using the Block option, only those Attributes deftned as Constant are
brought into the drawing. If you try editing the Attribute, the message ''That Block
has no editable attributes" appears.
I Measure markers are placed in the UCS of the object being measured. They are
always placed on the object regardless of the current Elevation setting.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Block, Ddptype, Divide, Node, Point, Xref
MENU 345
EXAMPLE:
Block nQ?-X~eQrn ~
Insertion
~~t N~
Aligned Aligned
MENU
Menu activates a dialog box and lets you load and display a Menu file in the current
drawing. This file defmes the Pull-down and Cursor menus, Screen menus, Image tile
menus, Pointing-device Button menus, Digitizing-tablet menus, Toolbars, Keyboard
Accelerators, Help strings, Tool tips, and Menu groups.

Screen menu TOOLS ~ Menu:
Keyboard MENU
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) If you use the Type It option of the dialog box or if Filedia is set to 0, you can
disable all menus by typing a period (.) at the Command prompt.
\) If the Command prompt shows partial prompts try setting Menuecho to 0.
\) If Filedia is set to 1 a dialog box is activated; if Filedia is set to °

you are
prompted at the Command line. Entering a tilde (-) at the Command prompt
temporarily activates the Select Menu File dialog box.
~ You can have the screen Menu change to match commands you type at the
keyboard or have the Menu remain unchanged until you select another command
from the screen. You set this feature with the Menuctl system variable.
RELATED VARIABLES: Filedia, Menuctl, Menuname, Menuecho
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Menuload, Menuunload, Tablet
346 MENUCTL
'MENUCTL (MENU ConTroL)

Menuctl detennines whether the screen menu swaps to the same command entered from
the keyboard.

Keyboard MENUCTL
OPTIONS:
o • Screen menu does not follow commands entered from the keyboard.
1 • Screen menu follows commands entered from the keyboard.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Menu
'MENUECHO
Menuecho controls the frequency and type of prompts provided at the Command prompt.

Keyboard MENUECHO
OPTIONS:
Menuecho is bit coded, and its value is the sum of the following:
o • Normal, all menu items and Command prompts are shown.
1 • Suppresses echo of menu items.
2 • Suppresses printing of Command prompts during menu use.
4 • Disables "P toggle of menu item echoing
8 • Debugging aid for Diesel macros.

MENUUNLOAD 347
MENULOAD see MENUUNLOAD
'MENUNAME
Menuname maintains the current Menugroup name. If the current menu has no
Menugroup name then the base menu name and its location (drive/directory) is
maintained by this variable. This variable is set using the Menu or Menuload commands.

Keyboard MENUNAME
System Variable AutoCAD support directory, Application header String
read-only
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Menu, Menuload
MENUUNLOAD
Menuunload unloads partial menu files from an existing base menu file. Menuload loads
partial menu files to an existing base menu file. Each base menu file and partial menu file
has an associated menu group name. From each menu group you can retrieve the
individual pull-down menus residing in its associated menu file.

Pull-down TOOLS ~ Customize Menus ...
Keyboard MENUUNLOAD and MENULOAD
348 MENUUNLOAD
OPTIONS:
Menu Customlzation
Menu.G.rQUps enuBIIr
Manu Groups:
ACAO
eplaceAJI
Menu Groups • Lists the menu groups currently loaded.

Unload • Removes the files highlighted in the Menu Groups list box.
File Name • Lists the file to load with the Load button.
Replace All • Unloads all files listed in the Menu Groups list box when
loading a new menu file.
Load • Retrieves the file listed in the File Name text box.
Browse • Lets you select a menu file to load using the Select Menu File
dialog box.
Close • Exits from the Menu Customization dialog box.
MINSERT 349
I f~1 Menu Customlzatlon
Menu !:lroups I, Menu Bar
Menu Group:
IACAO W
MenlLS t.4enu B.ar.
Osn!!p
File II Insert » I File
Edit
Edit View
View Data
Data Options
Options Tools
Tools Help
Help I <c Bemove I
0;
I « RJl.move All 1
I ~ose ·1 II Iielp
Menu Group • Displays a menu file from the Menu Groups list box.
Menus • Lists the menus defined in the current Menu Group list box.
Insert» • Imports the highlighted menu(s) from the Menus list box into
the Menu Bar list box. If a menu is highlighted in the Menu
Bar list box then the inserted menu is placed before the
highlighted item. If no menu is highlighted, the inserted menu
is placed at the top of the list.
« Remove • Removes selected items from the Menu Bar list box.
«Remove All • Removes all items from the Menu Bar list box.
Menu Bar • Lists the pull-down menus currently loaded in AutoCAD.

Close • Exits from the Menu Customization dialog box.
MINSERT (Multiple INSERT)

Minsert lets you insert multiple copies of a Block in a rectangular pattern. Minsert is a
combination of the Insert and Array (Rectangular) commands.
350 MINSERT

Screen menu DRAW 2 -. Minsert:

Keyboard MINSERT
PROMPTS:
Block name (or ?):
Insertion point: X scale factor <1> / Corner / XYZ:
Y scale factor (default=X):
Rotation angle <0>:
Number of rows (- - - ) <1>:
Number of columns (III) <1>:
Unit cell or distance between rows (---):
Distance between columns (I I I):
OPTIONS:
Block name • Enter the name of a Block.
? • Allows you to list the names of Blocks defined in the current
drawing. The default, an asterisk, displays a sorted listing of all
named Blocks. You can use any of the wild-card options to
create a more specific list.
• Displays the Select Drawing File dialog box. This method
limits you to drawing files (.dwg) . It does not let you select
Blocks located in the current drawing.
After you enter a Block name, you will receive the standard Insert and Array
command prompts
Insertion point: X scale factor < 1> / Comer / XYZ:
Y scale factor (default=X):
Rotation angle <0>:
Number of rows (---) < 1>:
Number of columns (liD <1>:
Unit cell or distance between rows (---):
Distance between columns (liD:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t. Minsert uses less memory than Inserting and Arraying a Block.
MIRROR 351
~ You can Array at an angle with the Minsert command. In order to do this you must
change your Snap Rotation angle, define a UCS at the desired angle, or use the
Rotate command once the Blocks have been Inserted.
l You cannot edit the individual Blocks that make up a Minsert. You cannot
Explode the Array, nor can you Minsert a Block with a asterisk preceding the
Block name.
l Regardless of the Filedia setting, the dialog box is not activated unless you enter a
tilde (-) when prompted for a Block name.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Array, Block, Ddinsert, Insert
MIRROR
Mirror reflects a copy of selected objects.

Modify tool bar
Screen menu CONSTRCT - Mirror:

Keyboard MIRROR
PROMPTS:
S e lect ob j ects :
Fir st po in t of mirr or line :
Se cond po i nt :
Delete old objects? <N>
OPTIONS:
First point of mirror line • Designates the first point on an axis about which the
objects are mirrored.
Second point • Designates the second point on an axis about which
the objects are mirrored.
Delete old objects? <N> • No - The original objects remain in the drawing.
• Yes - The original selection set of mirrored objects

is erased from the drawing.
352 MIRROR
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, You can have Text remain right side up if the system variable Mirrtext is set to O.
However, Text and Constant Attributes assigned to blocks are always Mirrored,
and Associative Dimensions are never Mirrored.
t, You can Mirror a Block by Inserting it with negative X and Y values.
t, Mirroring viewport objects in Paper space has no effect on Model space views or
objects.
t, Grips has its own mirror routine that also lets you create multiple copies.
RELATED VARIABLES: Mirrtext, Grips
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Insert, Mirror3d
EXAMPLE:
Command: MIRROR
Select objects: Select objects.
First point of mirror line: Pick point 1.
Second point: Pick point 2.
Delete old objects? <N> <ENTER>
MIRROR3D
Mirror3d reflects objects about a specified plane.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu CONSTRCT ~ Mirro3D:

Keyboard MIRROR3D
MIRRTEXT 353
PROMPTS:
Plane by Object/Last/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/ZX/<3points>:
OPTIONS:
<3points> • The mirroring plane is defmed by three points on a plane.
Plane by Object • The mirroring plane is the plane of an AutoCAD planar
object. The planar object can be a Polyline, Arc, or Circle.
Last • Mirrors the object(s) using the last used mirroring plane.
Zaxis • The mirroring plane is defmed by a point on the plane and a

point on the Z axis of the plane.
View • The mirroring plane is aligned to the viewing plane of the

current viewport through a point.
XY, YZ, ZX • The mirroring plane is aligned with one of the standard
planes - XV, YZ or ZX.
Delete old objects? <N>
• No - The original objects remain in the drawing.
• Yes - The original selection set of mirrored objects is erased

from the drawing.
RELATED V ARIABLES: Grips, Mirrtext
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mirror
'MIRRTEXT (MIRRor TEXT)

Mirrtext determines whether mirrored text is reflected or whether it retains the same text
direction.

Screen menu CONSTRCT .. Mirror: .. Mirrtxt:
Keyboard MIRRTEXT
OPTIONS:
o • Retains text direction.
• Reflects text.
354 MIRRTEXT

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mirror
MLEDIT (Multiple parallel Line EDIT)

Mledit edits Mlines (multiple parallel lines). This command edits Mlines by creating
various cross and tee intersections, produces corner joints, adds and deletes vertices,
creates a break in one or all elements of an Mline, and patches a multiline broken by one
of the other Mledit options.

Modify toolbar <1
Screen menu MODIFY - Mledit:
Keyboard MLEDIT
OPTIONS:
Multiline Edit Tools
Closed Cross • Intersecting Mlines - Creates a closed cross

intersection from two intersecting Mlines. The first
Mline elements are broken to the exterior elements
of the second Mline; the second Mline elements are
left intact.
MLEDIT 355
• Nonintersecting Mlines - Extends the first selected

Mline to the closest element of the second selected
Mline.
• Nonintersecting Mlines - Breaks all of the
elements of the first selected Mline based on the
projection of the second selected Mline. The second
selected Mline remains unmodified.
Open Cross • Intersecting Mlines - Creates an open cross
intersection from two intersecting Mlines. The
exterior elements of both Mlines are broken. The
first selected Mline's interior elements are broken at
the intersection; the interior elements of the second
selected Mline remain intact.
Mline. An opening is created on the exterior
elements of the second selected Mline.
Mline. An opening is created on all the elements of
the second selected Mline. The first selected Mline
interior elements remain in their original location .
.§E] Merged Cross • Intersecting Mlines - Creates an open cross
intersection from two intersecting Mlines. The
exterior elements of both Mlines are broken at their
intersection; the interior elements of both Mlines
remain intact.
Mline. An opening is created on the exterior
elements of the second selected Mline. The first
selected Mline interior elements remain in their
original location.
356 MLEDIT
Closed Tee • Intersecting Mlines - Trims the first selected Mline

to the exterior element of the second selected Mline
so that the two do not cross over. The first selected
Mline must be an open Mline.

Mline. The first selected Mline must be an open
Mline.
Open Tee • Intersecting Mlines - Trims the first selected Mline
Mline must be an open Mline. An opening is created
on the second selected Mline exterior element.

Mline. An opening is created on the second selected
Mline exterior element.
Merged Tee • Intersecting Mlines - Trims the first selected Mline
Mline must be an open Mline.
Mline. An opening is created on the second selected
Mline exterior element. The interior elements of the
first selected Mline meet the interior elements of the
second selected Mline.
Corner Joint • Creates a corner joint by extending or trimming two
open Mlines.
Add Vertex • Creates new vertex points. Vertex points can be
modified with Grip editing.
IN3ID Delete Vertex • Removes vertex points.

MLiNE 357
II] Cut Single • Creates an opening on any element of an Mline.
ED Cut All • Creates an opening on all the elements of an Mline.
(ill] Weld All • Repairs openings created with the Mledit command.
Select first Mline/ • All of the options provide the chance to use that
Select Mline option again by repeating the prompts.
Undo • All of the options provide the chance to undo the
previous modification.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, Create Mlines with the Mline command. Customize Mlines with the Mlstyle
command.
t, The Explode command converts Mlines to Lines.
t, If you explode Mlines or you create the same geometry with Lines, you would
need to use combinations of Break, Change point, Extend, Fillet, Grips, Lengthen,
Stretch, and Trim to achieve the same results.
MLINE (Multiple parallel LINEs)

Creates parallel lines and arcs that are fused together and act as one object. Each Mline
component is also known as an element.

Draw tool bar
Screen menu DRAWl - Mline:

Keyboard Mline
PROMPTS:
Justificat ion = Top , Sc ale = 1. 00, Style STANDARD
Justification/Sca l e/STyle/<From poin t ) :
<To poi n t) :
Undo/<To point):
Close/Undo/< To po i nt):
358 MLiNE
OPTIONS:
Justification • Determines the offset direction for the MIines.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Cmljust.
Top • Mlines are drawn to the right of your pick points.
Zero • Your pick points are the centerline for MIines.
Bottom • MIines are drawn to the left of your pick points.
Scale • Determines the width of Mlines and acts as a multiplier to the
current Mlstyle offset settings.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Cmscale.
Style • Change the current MIstyle default. See MIstyle for more
• This value is maintained by the system variable Cmlstyle.
Undo • Entering U (undo) at the "To point" prompt undoes the last
Mline segment and returns you to the previous point.
Close • Entering C (close) at the "To point" prompt closes the Mline
segments created during the command. It connects the last
endpoint to the start point.
TIPS & WARNINGS:
~ Edit Mlines with the MIedit command.
~ You can create your own Mline definitions containing up to 16 parallel lines and
arcs, and preset the width (distance), color, linetype, and endcaps with the Mlstyle
command.
~ You can create parallel Lines, Arcs, Plines, Rays, and Xlines with the Offset,
Copy, and Grip editing commands.
~ You cannot convert Lines to Mlines, but you can convert Mlines to Lines using the
Explode command.
~ You cannot change the MIstyle values assigned to existing MIines.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cmljust, Cmlscale, Cmlstyle
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mledit. Mlstyle
EXAMPLE: SeeMLSTYLE
MLSTYLE 359
MLSTYLE (Multiple parallel Line STYLE)

Mlstyle lets you create your own Mline definitions. These definitions can contain up to 16
parallel lines and arcs, and you can preset the width (distance), color, linetype, and
endcaps. The lines making up an Mlstyle are called elements.

Object Properties toolbar ~
Pull-down Data -. Multiline Style ...

Screen menu DATA -. MLstyle:
Keyboard MLSTYLE
OPTIONS:
Multiline Styles
Mulbhne Style
cmlstyle
(If------ -
Eismani PrOPOrti08 _
Multiline Properties
Multiline Style
Current • Displays the current Mlstyle default. Selecting the down
arrow lists the rest of the Mlstyles defined in the drawing.
Name • Displays the current Mlstyle default, which can be saved or
renamed, or you can enter the name of a new Mlstyle.
Description • This is an optional field where you can assign a description to
new Mlstyles.
360 MLSTYLE
Load ... • Loads a file containing an Mlstyle deftnition and makes it

current.
Save ... • Saves the Mlstyle deftnition listed in the Name text box to a
file. The file's extension is .mln.
Add • Saves the Element Properties and the Multiline Properties
settings to the Mlstyle listed in the Name text box and adds
the definition to the Current list box.
• Once you select Add you cannot modify the Mlstyle.

Rename • Renames the Mlstyle listed in the Current list box to the name
listed in the Name text box. You cannot rename the Mlstyle
named Standard.
current mline • Graphically displays the Mline style Element and Multiline
display Properties.
Element • Lets you defme each of the Mline elements, including offset
Properties ... distance, color, and linetype.
• See the Element Properties dialog box for more detailed
information.
Multiline • Lets you control the display of segment joints, endcaps, and
Properties ... background colors for all the elements of an Mistyle.
• See the Multiline Properties dialog box for more detailed
information.
Element Properties
Offsel Color Ltyp8
0_0 BYlAYER BYlAYER
-0 _25 blu8 HIDDEN
-05 blu8 HIDDEN
MLSTYLE 361
Elements • Lists all the elements defining the current Mlstyle. The list includes
the offset distance, color, and linetype for each element.
Add • Creates a new element based on the value displayed in the Offset
text box.
Delete • Deletes the element highlighted in the Elements list box. You
cannot delete an element if it is the only one in the Elements list
box.
Offset • Determines the offset for the elements. Entering a number and
pressing <Enter> overwrites the highlighted element in the
Elements list box. Entering a number and picking Add creates a
new element in the Elements list box.
Color... • Determines a color for the element highlighted in the Elements list
box. For more detailed information about colors see the Ddcolor
command.
Linetype.. . • Determines a linetype for the element highlighted in the Elements
list box. For more detailed information about linetypes see the
Ddltype command.
Multiline Properties
[j Display JDlnlS
Cop.
SIIlrI End
lin" Ilr Ilr
Ollie. Me Ilr r
Inn". IlfC8 r r;
Angl .. 190.000 190 _000
Fill
Display joints • Controls the display of the Mline segment joints.

Caps • Controls the display and type of end caps assigned to the start
and end of the elements of an Mlstyle.
Fill " Determines whether elements are solid filled as well as the
color used for solid filling.
362 MLSTYLE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Edit Mlines with the Mledit command.
~ You can delete unused Mlines with the Purge command.
:l You cannot Rename, modify, or delete the Mlstyle named Standard. You cannot
modify any existing Mlstyle's elements and properties.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cmlstyle
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mledit, Mline
EXAMPLE:
MODEL SPACE see MSPACE
'MODEMACRO
Modemacro lets you customize the text on the display screen status line.

Keyboard MODEMACRO
MOVE
Move relocates objects anywhere in 3-D space.
MOVE 363

Modify toolbar +
Screen menu MODIFY - Move:
Keyboard MOVE or M
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
Base point or displacement:
Second point of displacement:
OPTIONS:
Base point • Enter a point of reference to apply the displacement distance
(below), or by which to drag the selected object.
Displacement • Enter the distance for X, Y, Z, or drag the object to specify the
displacement.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Grip editing has its own move routine that lets you create multiple copies
simultaneously.
t> If Pickfirst is set to 1 you can first select the objects and then use the Move
command. The Select objects prompt is suppressed.
t> Use Align instead of Move if you plan to move and rotate the same objects.
t> If you want to move objects to another Layer, you must use the Change, Chprop,
Ddmodify, or Ddchprop commands.
t> If you type M to activate the Move command and you receive the error message
J: If you accidentally press <Enter> at the "Second point" prompt, your objects could
end up out of view. This happens because Move uses the X, Y, Z base point
coordinates as displacement distances.
RELATED VARIABLES: Grips, Pickfirst
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Align
364 MOVE
EXAMPLE:
Command: MOVE
Select objects: Select the circle
Select objects: <Enter>
Base point or displacement: pick 1
Second point of displacement: Pick 2
Before After
[}<DO
~2fA
MSLIDE (Make SLIDE)
Mslide creates a snapshot of your current screen display. This snapshot becomes a new
file with the extension .sld. The Slide is of the current viewport and is independent of the
drawing file from which it was created. Use the Vslide command to view Slides.

Pull-down Tools - Slide - Save ...
Screen menu TOOLS - Mslide:
Keyboard MSLlDE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This command is affected by the Filedia setting. When Filedia is set to 1 a dialog
box is activated; when Filedia is set to 0 the dialog box does not appear.
~ Since Slide files do not retain any object data, viewing Slides occurs at Redraw
speed.
~ Slide files are convenient to use as references.
~ You can view any Slide file regardless of the drawing you are currently editing.
~ Making Slides of shaded objects captures the shaded image; making Slides of
rendered objects only captures the wireframe image.
MSPACE 365
~ When Filedia is disabled and you save a Slide file to the name of an existing Slide
file, you will not receive a warning message that you already have a file by that
name.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Script, Vslide
MSPACE (Model SPACE)

Mspace switches from drawing in Paper space (Pspace) to Model space (Mspace).
Mspace is used to create and dimension your model. Pspace is used to annotate, compose,
and plot 2-D or 3-D drawings. The system variable Ttilemode must be off (0) and at least
one Viewport must be created with the Mview command in order to use Mspace.

Standard toolbar ~
Pull-down View" Floating Model Space

Screen menu VIEW" Mspace:
Keyboard MSPACE or MS
Status line Double clicking on MODEL sets Tilemode to 0 and makes
Paper space active. Double clicking on the word PAPER, from
the status line, activates Model space.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ There are two Model space modes. The Tilemode system variable determines the
active mode. When Tilemode is On (1) your Viewports are fixed or tiled, and only
Model space is available and visible. When Tilemode is Off (0) you have floating
Viewports, Paper space is visible, and you can toggle between Mspace and
Pspace.
~ Model space and Paper space each retain their own Limits, Ucsicon, Snap, Grid,
and Views.
t> Plotting in Model space plots only the current Viewport.
~ You can control Layer visibility per Viewport when Tilemode is Off and Mspace
is active.
366 MSPACE
~ If you type the letter MS to activate Mspace (Tilemode set to 1) and you receive
the error message "Unknown command ... " it may be because AutoCAD cannot
locate the file named acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modified
the file. Acad.pgp is located in the AutoCAD support directory.
~ You cannot edit objects created in Mspace while in Pspace and vice versa.
RELATED VARIABLES: Tilemode

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddlmodes, Mview, Pspace, Ucsicon, Vplayer
MTEXT (Multi-line TEXT)

Mtext creates multiple lines of text that are treated as one object. The text is placed inside
a boundary where you specify the width and alignment.
This command is similar to Text and Dtext except that you can assign different properties
(height, color, fonts) to individual characters.

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - Mtext:

Keyboard MTEXTorT
PROMPTS:
Attach/Rotation/Style/Height/Direction/<Insertion point>:
<Other corner>:
OPTIONS:
Insertion point • Determines a corner of the Mtext boundary box.
Other corner • Determines the second corner of the Mtext boundary box. The
width of the boundary box determines the text line length; the
length of the boundary box is not used. Regardless of the
location of the "other corner", text remains right side up .
• You can begin a new line oftext using the <Enter> key.
Attach • Determines how the Mtext boundary box is aligned to the
insertion point and determines text justification inside the
boundary box.
MTEXT 367
Rotation • Detennines the rotation of the Mtext boundary.
Style • Detenrunes the default style (font and fonnatting charac-

teristics) for new Mtext. Text styles are created with the Style
command.
Height • Detennines the default text height for Mtext.
Direction • Detennines the direction in which text is read.
Text box • Displays the text. Entering and editing the text is similar to most
Windows word processors. For example, you can use the cut and
paste features .
Stack • Creates stacked text. Stacked text is often used for fractions or
for text that you want vertically aligned. You must use the
forward slash (j) as a separator.
Import ... • Lets you import ASCII text files via the Import Text File dialog
box.
Properties ... • Activates the MText Properties dialog box. See Mtprop for more
detailed infonnation.
368 MTEXT
Attributes
Overline/ • Places lines above (overline) and/or below (underline) new text
Underline or highlighted text.
Font • Determines the font for new text or highlighted text.
Browse ... • Activates the Change Font dialog box and lets you determine the
fonts for new text or highlighted text.
Color... • Determines the color for new text or highlighted text. See the
Ddcolor dialog box for more detailed information.
Height • Determines the height for new text or highlighted text.
Special Character Codes
You can enter codes in your text string to obtain the following special characters:
Code Description Example Result
%\U+OOBO Draw degrees symbol 30%\U+OOBO 30°
%\U+OOBI Draw plus/minus tolerance symbol 30%\U+OOBl 30±
%\U+2205 Draw diameter symbol %\U+220530 ",30
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can bypass the dialog box and answer all the prompts and options from the
Command prompt by typing a hyphen (-) before Mtext.
~ Dtext and Text creates Text where each line is treated as a single object; Attdef
creates Attribute Text.
~ Edit Mtext strings with the Ddedit or Ddmodify commands. Edit properties
assigned to Mtext with Ddmodify or Mtprop.
~ You can assign your own text editor to the Mtext command by modifying the
Mtexted system variable.
~ You can use the standard Window control keys in the text editor for cutting and
pasting text to the clipboard, etc.
~ The Text assigned to Dimensions, Tolerances, and Leaders are Mtext objects.
~ The Osnap Insert locates the Attach assigned to the text boundary.
MTEXT 369
t> The spacing between multiple lines of text is determined by the individual text font
definition files .
~ You can convert Mtext into Text or Dtext using the Explode command. Each line
of Text is considered a separate object. You cannot convert Text or Dtext into
Mtext. Exploding Mtext on characters, words, or lines that contain various
formatting features causes that Text to be broken up into multiple objects.
t> If Grips are enabled, the Mtext's Grip definition points are the four comers of the
text boundary. Moving any of the Grips in the horizontal direction causes the text
boundary to stretch (longer or shorter) and thereby causes the line lengths to
increase or decrease.
t;, If all your Text appears as empty boxes you may have Qtext turned On. To change
this, turn Qtext Off and Regenerate the drawing.
i:: Check your spelling with the Spell command.
i:: When using the same Block of text for multiple drawings, save time by Wblocking
the text and Inserting it into the other drawings. You can also import ASCII text
from a separate file with the Mtext command.
t , If you type T to activate the Mtext command and you receive the error message
~ Changes made to items in the Mtext Properties dialog box have no effect on
dimension and Tolerance text objects.
~ During Mtext the tablet is inactive and the keyboard's space bar places spaces
between text characters.
~ Base your text height on the scale in which you plan to plot the drawing. The text
height you specify in AutoCAD should be the height of plotted text multiplied by
the plot scale factor.
~ You can evaluate text strings (Texteval) using the Text comand but not with the
Mtext or Dtext command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Fontalt, Fontmap, Mtexted, Textfill, Textqlty, Textsize,
Textstyle
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dtext, Mtprop, Spell, Style, Text
370 MTEXT
EXAMPLE:
Mtext c re ates m ultiple lines of text th at are

treated as one object. Text and Dtext create
mu ltiple lines of text but each lin e is treated as
a sep a ra te obje ct .
'MTEXTED (Multi-line TEXT EDitor)

Mtexted assigns a text editor program to any command creating or editing Mtext objects.
This value is usually set using the Misc option of the Preferences command.

Keyboard MTEXTED
System Variable Internal Configuration file String
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddedit, Ddmodify, Mtext
MTPROP (Multi-line Text PROPerties)

Mtprop changes properties assigned to Mtext objects.

Keyboard MTPROP
OPTIONS:
MText Properties
Contents
Text.5ty1e .
Tnt Helllhl
STANDARD
r---____
0 2000
-===-==J
QlteCIJon ILeft to Right
r:--:-~~--===~
Object
Attachmont
YllJdth
SolatIon'
MULTIPLE 371
Contents
Text Style • Determines the default style (font and formatting charac-
teristics) for new Mtext. text styles are created with the style
command.
Text Height • Determines the default text height for Mtext.
Direction • Determines the direction text is read.
Object
Attachment • Determines how the Mtext boundary box is aligned to the
insertion point and determines text justification inside the
boundary box.
Width • Determines the horizontal size of the Mtext boundary.
Rotation • Determines the rotation of the Mtext boundary.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Ddedit and Ddmodify commands automatically let you access the Mtprop
Properties dialog box when you select Mtext objects for editing.
l Changes made to items in the Mtext Properties dialog box have no effect on
Dimension and Tolerance text objects.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddmodify, Mtext, Style
MULTIPLE
Multiple is a command modifier that causes most commands to repeat. Type the word
Multiple before a command. To end the command press <Esc>. No Command prompts
are issued if you enter Multiple and press return.

Keyboard MULTIPLE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Multiple saves time when Inserting the same Block (Multiple Insert) repeatedly.
l Multiple remembers and repeats the main command, but it does not retain
command parameters or options.
l You cannot use Multiple with Dialog box commands.
372 MULTIPLE
A Be careful of using Multiple before commands like Regen or Redraw. This causes
the command to loop without stopping. You can type <Esc> to cancel so long as
nothing else was entered at the keyboard.
MVIEW (Model space VIEW)

Mview creates and restores Viewports, controls Viewport visibility, and performs hidden
line removal during Paper space plots. Tilemode must be set to 0 in order to use Mview.

Pull-down View -. Floating Viewports >
Screen menu VIEW -. Mview:
Keyboard MVIEW
PROMPTS:
ON/OFF/Hideplot/Fit/2/3/4/Restore/<First Point>:
OPTIONS:
First point • Creates a Viewport by picking two diagonal points. This new
Viewport becomes the current Viewport.
ON • All objects in the selected Viewports are visible.
OFF • All objects in the selected Viewports are invisible.
Hideplot • Selects Viewports for hidden line removal during Plotting.
Fit • Creates a Viewport the size of your current display area.
2/3/4 • Creates Viewport configurations of two, three, or four Viewports.
Restore • Restores Viewport configurations saved with the Vports or
Viewports commands.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Selecting View - Floating Model Space from the pull-down menus without any
Mviews dermed automatically activates the Mview command.
t> You can save time if you turn Off Viewports that you are not using. That is
because you do not have to wait for those Viewports to Redraw or Regen.
MVSETUP 373
~ Invoking Mview while Model space is active causes you to be placed temporarily
in Paper space. Once you have completed the command, you are returned to
Model space.
~ The number of Viewports displayed are based on the value of Maxactvp.
~ When Tilemode is set to 1 (Paper space disabled) you can use only the Vports or
Viewports commands to create and control Viewports. When Tilemode is set to 0
(Paper space enabled) you only can use the Mview command to create and control
Viewports.
~ The number of Viewports displayed is based on the value of Maxactvp.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cvport, Maxactvp, Tilemode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mspace, Pspace, Viewports, Vplayer, Vports
MVSETUP (Model space Viewport SETUP)

Mvsetup helps prepare the initial drawing setup. It combines commands such as Units,
Limits, and Viewports. You can change any of the settings individually or use this
command as often as you like.

Pull-down View - Paper Space
View - Floating Viewports > - MV Setup
Keyboard MVSETUP
PROMPTS:
Enable paper space ? (No / <Yes » :
Align/ Create / Scale viewports / Options / Title block / Undo:
OPTIONS:
Enable paper space? • This option is available if Tilemode is On (1). The
prompts and options differ depending on the Tilemode
setting.
Y e s . Turns Tilemode Off (0).
374 MVSETUP
Align • Aligns Paper space Viewports by panning the view in a

Viewport to align it with a basepoint in another
Viewport.
Create • Lets you delete and create Viewports. You are provided
with the following choices when creating Viewports:
0: None - No Viewports are created.
1: Single - One Viewport is created using the Mview
command.
2: Std. Engineering - Creates four Viewports each
containing its own view angles (Vpoint, Plan).
3: Array of Viewports - Creates a Viewport and
activates the Array command.
Scale viewports • Sets the scale factor of objects displayed in individual
Viewports using the Xp option of the Zoom command.
Options • Determines Layers, Limits, Units, and title block method
(Insert vs Xret) for the current drawing.
Title block • Lets you delete Viewports, resets the origin point for
Inserting title blocks, and creates a border and title block
for the drawing.
Undo • Voids the latest Mvsetup option. You can Undo one step
at a time until you reach the beginning of the current
Mvsetup command.
No
Units type • Determines whether the sizes are translated to inch or
millimeter paper units.
Enter the scale • Enters the scale factor based on what scale you would
factor like to display for your plotted drawing.
• Although you entered a scale factor value, you are
always working in full size. The scale factor value just
helps determine the drawing size or limits. The Plot
command is where you actually tell the computer the
scale you want the drawing to represent.
MVSETUP 375
Enter the paper • Enter the width of the paper you plan to use when you
width use the Plot command.
Enter the paper • Enter the height of the paper you plan to use when you
height use the Plot command.
A Polyline border is place around drawing Limits
This setup routine calculates the drawing's Limits based on the following
formula:
Scale factor X Paper width = X value (upper right of Limits)
Scale factor X Paper height = Yvalue (upper right of Limits)
Limits = 0,0 (lower left corner) and X,Y (upper right corner of Limits)
RELA TED VARIABLES: Acadcfg, Acadprefix, Tilemode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Layer, Limits, Mview, Units
376 NEW
NEW
New lets you begin a new drawing. You can enter a new file name or leave it blank. If you
do not give the file a name it is assigned the name "UNNAMED".

Standard toolbar
Pull-down File -. New ...

Screen menu FILE-' New:
Keyboard NEW or <Ctrl N>
OPTIONS:
Create New Drawing
Ii f1gIaIyp8_ I Ie :\ l-book\lemplat8.dwg J
iJ] tto Prototyp8
Ig 6efain .. 08""'"
III New Ib-ng N_8 _. II~ECH-091 ~~.

JI
II' OK I I Cancel 01
Prototype ... 8 Specifies a prototype drawing name. The default is

acad.dwg.
No Prototype 8 Determines whether the drawing listed in the
Prototype... text box is used as the foundation for new
drawings.
Retain as Default 8 Determines whether the drawing listed in the
Prototype ... text box is listed the next time the Create
New Drawing dialog box is activated.
NEW 377
New Drawing Name... • Enters a new drawing name. The extension, .dwg, is
optional.
• Entering an equal sign (=) after a new drawing's name

is the same as turning on the No Prototype option.
Entering an equal sign and the name of an existing
drawing after a new drawing's name is the same as
selecting a Prototype ... drawing. The equal sign
bypasses the Prototype, No Prototype, and Retain as
Default options.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Saveas creates new drawings by letting you save the current file to another name.
t> If Filedia is set to 1 a dialog box is activated; if Filedia is set to 0 you are
temporarily activates the Create New Drawing dialog box.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Saveas
378 OFFSET
o
OFFSET
Offset lets you copy an Arc, Circle, Line, Spline, or 2-D Polyline parallel to itself by
specifying a distance or a point through which the object will pass. The command repeats
until you press one extra <Enter> or <Esc> key to cancel.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu CONSTRCT .. Offset:

Keyboard OFFSET
PROMPTS:
Offset distance or Through <Through>:
Select object to offset:
Side to offset?
OPTIONS:
Offset distance • Enter the offset distance by typing a value or picking two
points.
Through • Pick a point through which the object will pass.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can create parallel lines using the Copy, Array, and Mline commands.
~ Offsetting Splines may give you unexpected results. New Splines contain more
control points than the original object.
~ You can only Offset one object at a time.
RELATED VARIABLES: Offsetdist

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Array, Copy, MIine
OLELINKS 379
EXAMPLE:
Arc Line Pline Circle Donut Pline/Porc
nIDIDOO~ ~
'OFFSETDIST (OFFSET DISTance)
Offsetdist controls the default value for the Offset command. This value is usually set
with the Offset command.

Keyboard OFFSETDIST
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Setting Offsetdist to a negative number is considered the "Through" option when
using the Offset command.
System Variable -l.0000 Initial default Real
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Offset
OLELINKS (Object Linking and Embedding LINKS)

Updates, modifies, and removes existing OLE links.

Pull-down Edit - Links ...
Keyboard OLELINKS
380 OLELINKS
OPTIONS:
Unks
Links
HiJ,u,klm It BICYClE .WNF HiJaaIt Ima 8 Automatic
.J
Updat. (0 Automatic
Links • Lists infonnation about the linked files. The infonnation varies
depending on the type of link.
Update • Refers to the file(s) currently highlighted in the Links list.
Automatic • Updates the link when the source changes.
Manual • Prompts you to update links when there is a change in the
source. This happens whenever you open up the AutoCAD file.
Update Now • Updates selected links.
Cancel Link • Removes the source from the link. A copy of the link remains
in the drawing.
Change Link... • Change the source's location or file.
Done • Saves and exits the dialog box.
Activate • This varies depending on the linked object.
and Edit
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This command will not display a dialog box if there are no linked files.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Copyclip, Copylink, Insertobj, Pasteclip, Pastespec
OPEN 381
OOPS
Oops restores the last object or group of objects that was deleted by the most recent
Erase, Block, or Wblock command. This applies only to the current drawing session.

Screen menu MODIFY -. Oops:

Keyboard OOPS
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Undo
OPEN
Open lets you edit an existing drawing.

Pull-down File -. Open .. .

Screen menu FILE -. Open:
Keyboard OPEN or <Ctrl 0>
OPTIONS:
110•• ""'....
. - - - - - - -, c\fl3\cam\.........
• fOe:\
fO.1J
ecom
Sel ct Ale
- rasterprevlew
e, . "",pl.
C) db!
pnid.dwg
p tfilpat dwg
. ... kalcll dwg
oextllntdwg • Onye.'
r=-----~
c: dwgwrlte
382 OPEN
FileName • Lists the names of files. Select a file from the list or enter a name
in the text box.
Directories • Lists the names of directories on the current drive.
Drives • Lists the names of the drives connected to your computer.
List Files of • Determines the types of files (based on their extensions)
Type displayed in the File Name text box. In this case the only
available file types are .dwg files.
Preview • Displays a bitmapped image of the file highlighted in the File
Name list. Preview is empty if no file is selected, the file has
never been saved with Release 13 format, or Rasterpreview is
set to 3. Drawings saved with the Saveasr12 command will not
display unless you use the Makepreview command for that
drawing.
Read Only • Write-protects the drawing file. Opens up a drawing that can be
viewed, but any changes to it cannot be saved to that drawing.
You can use Saveas to save a copy of the file to a different
name. This new file is also write protected. Turn off this feature
by opening the drawing without selecting the Read-Only option.
Select Initial • Displays the Select Initial View dialog box. This dialog box lets
View you select any Views saved in the drawing or the last view used
in the drawing, and has the drawing open to that view. The Last
view option brings up the drawing as it was displayed at its last
Save.
Type it... • Disables the dialog box and prompts for a drawing name at the
Command prompt. This is the same as having Filedia set to O.
Find File ... • Lets you search and browse through multiple paths and drives
for drawing files. Browse displays bitmap images of drawings
from a designated drive and directory. Search lets you locate
drawings from any of the drives and directories accessed by your
computer. See the following Search and Browse dialog boxes
OPEN 383
Files • Lists the number of files and displays a bit map image of
the file (when possible), the directory, path, and file
name based on the specified search criteria.
Search Pattern • Specifies the files to search. You can use the DOS wild-
card characters question mark (?) and asterisk (*).
File Types • Determines the file extension when searching for files
listed in the Search Pattern text box.
Date Filter • Determines whether the files being searched were
created or modified before or after the time and date
specified.
Time • Searches for files based on the specified time.
Date • Searches for files based on the specified date.
Search Location • Detennines the drives and paths used to locate files.
Drives • Searches in the drive selected from the drive list.
All Drives • Searches in all the Local Fixed Drives or All Drives. All
Drives refers to any removable and network drives
available to the computer.
Path • Searches for files based on specific paths. You can
include more than one path by placing a semicolon
between each path designation.
Edit • Modifies the path statement.
384 OPEN
Open • Opens the drawing file for editing.

Search / Stop Search • Begins the search based on the Search Pattern, Date
Filter, and Search Location. Once the search has begun
the button changes to Stop Search. You can stop the
search at any time.
I~ Browse/Search
II/OWH Soerdl
F... : ' - - IlI"CIDrie.
• ctwv
Jl ec\rU\w.o\_rittI l,r as- I
I~~~J I- h
kI=} EIII I
\1 U
2> wift
Ii u.Ip I
.
[}-
tr1i;
~
IJr'ltH .
I- e: til
X
u .. F'... ·"'Iwe
I1
10r_o; i DWC) _W
5.,-
,IW.dium
.W
+J ! 1;.+1
FileName • Displays the name of the currently selected file. If no file is

selected the asterisk (*) wild card is displayed.
Directories • Lists the names of directories on the current drive.
Drives • Lists the names of the drives connected to your computer.
List Files of • Determines the type of file (based on extension) displayed in the
Type File Name text box.
Size • Determines the size of the drawing images (small, medium, or
large) displayed in the File Name display box.
Open • Opens the drawing listed in the File Name text box for editing.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> If you do not issue a Save command for work you have done in the current
drawing and you go to Open another drawing, you are automatically given the
opportunity to Save your current work.
ORTHO 385

temporarily activates the Select File dialog box.
\) When Filedia is disabled you can still have the drawing display an existing View.
You do this by typing the Filename followed by a comma (,) and the View name.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dwgwrite, Filedia, Rasterpreview
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Makepreview
'ORTHO
Ortho constrains the construction of most objects (such as Lines, Mlines, Polylines, and
Traces) to horizontal and vertical directions. Ortho also controls the angle at which you
pick the second point in many of the drawing and editing commands. You can toggle
Ortho On and Off while in the middle of other commands. You can also set Ortho with
the Ddrmodes dialog box.

Screen menu ASSIST" Ortho:
Keyboard ORTHO or <F8>
Status line Double clicking on Ortho on the status line toggles the command
On and Off.
PROMPTS:
ON/OFF <On ) :
OPTIONS:
ON • Enables Ortho mode.
OFF • Disables Ortho mode.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ For most draw and edit commands if Ortho is On, your second pick point can be
either horizontal or vertical, depending on how far your cross hairs are from the
first point. The larger of these distances determines the direction.
\) Keyboard coordinate entry and Osnap override Ortho.
~ Ortho angle is based on the Snap Rotation angle and current UCS.
386 ORTHO
t. Keep Ortho On when working in Isometric mode.

~ Ortho is inactive during perspective (Dview) views.
RELATED VARIABLES: Orthomode, Snapangle

'ORTHOMODE
Orthomode maintains the on/Off setting for the Ortho command. This value is usually set
using the Ortho command.

Keyboard ORTHOMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Turns Orthogonal mode Off.
1 • Turns Orthogonal mode On.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes,Ortho
'OSMODE (Object Snap MODE)

Osmode maintains the current Object snap settings. This value is typically set using the
Ddosnap or Osnap command.

Keyboard OSMODE
OPTIONS:
Osmode is bit coded and its value is the sum of the following:
0= None 8 = Node 128 = Perpendicular
1 = Endpoint 16 = Quadrant 256 = Tangent
2 = Midpoint 32 = Intersection 512 = Nearest
4 = Center 64 = Insertion 1024 = Quick
2048 = Apparent Intersection
OSNAP 387

System variable o Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Aperture
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddosnap, Osnap
'OSNAP (Object SNAP)

Osnap lets you locate precise points on objects. You can preset one or more Osnaps or
temporarily activate them during point selection. When you enable Osnaps, the cursor
displays an Aperture box at its cross hairs. This box is sometimes confused with the
Pickbox.
You preset more than one Osnap by entering a comma between each Osnap, omitting all
spaces. You can override any presets by typing an Osnap mode (only the first three
characters are required) when a point is requested or by using your pointing device.
You can achieve the same results using the Ddosnap dialog box. See Ddosnap. It includes
a detailed chart listing objects and their Osnap definition points.

Running Osnaps Temporary
Object Snap toolbar N/A Select individual icons

Mouse N/A Shift + 2nd button
Screen menu **** - Osnap: (you can **** - select individual
select more than one) Osnap
Keyboard OSNAP - enter one or Enter the first three letters
more separated by a comma
PROMPTS:
Object snap modes:
388 OSNAP
OPTIONS:
Apparent intersection X Intersection None
Center Midpoint Perpendicular
Endpoint Nearest Quadrant
Insertion Node Tangent

~
Quick
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Status command and the Ddosnap dialog box display the current Osnap
mode(s).
~ Keep your Aperture and Pickbox different sizes to distinguish between them.
~ You will not see rubber-band lines for Tangent and Perpendicular at the "From
point" prompt when going from a Line to another object. The rubberband appears
at the "To point" prompt.
~ Grips assigned to objects share some of the same locations.
~ The Ddosnap command has the added feature of changing the Aperture size. The
dialog box's Clear All button is equivalent to the Osnap None.
£ Running Osnaps are inactive during object selection. To apply an Osnap, select the
desired temporary Osnap.
RELATED VARIABLES: Aperture, Grips, Osmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Aperture, Ddosnap, grip, point entry
PAN 389
'PAN
Pan lets you scroll around your drawing without altering the current Zoom ratio. It is
similar to repositioning paper on a drafting board for easier access to another part of a
drawing. You do not physically move objects or change your drawing limits; you move
your display window across your drawing.

Standard toolbar
See OPTIONS.
Pull-down View'" Pan>'" Point
Screen menu VIEW'" Pan:
Keyboard PAN or P
PROMPTS:
Displacement:
Second poin t :
OPTIONS:
Displacement • Picking a point on the screen determines the amount to
scroll the drawing or the location of the drawing to be
scrolled.
Second point: • You have two choices: pressing <Enter> scrolls the
drawing by the amount specified in the Displacement
prompt; picking another point Pans the drawing to that
point.
Left • Moves the view of the drawing to the left.
Right • Moves the view of the drawing to the right.
Up • Moves the view of the drawing up.
Down • Moves the view of the drawing down.

~o ~N
Up Left • Moves the view of the drawing up and to the left.
Up Right • Moves the view of the drawing up and to the right.
Down Left • Moves the view of the drawing down and to the left.
Down Right • Moves the view of the drawing down and to the right.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Zoom Dynamic can produce the same results as Pan, and it is more flexible.
t> Pans become part of the Zoom Previous queue.
t> If you type P to activate the pan command and you receive the error message
~ Once you initiate the Pan command you cannot move to another viewport to
viewport, and reissue Pan.
~ You cannot perform a transparent Pan while in the Vpoint, Dview, Zoom, View,
or Pan commands, or while you are in Paper space.
~ Viewres must be set to Fast Zoom in order to use Pan transparently.
RELATED VARIABLES: Viewctr

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dsviewer, Zoom
EXAMPLE:
Before Pan Afte r Pan

PASTESPEC 391
PAPER SPACE see PSPACE
PASTECLIP
Imports the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current drawing file.

Draw tool bar
Pull-down Edit - Paste

Keyboard PASTECLIP or <Ctrl V>
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Imported files are placed in the upper left hand corner of the drawing. If the object
is Text it is converted to Mtext.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Olelinks, Pastespec
PASTESPEC (PASTE SPECial)

Imports the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current drawing. You determine
the format and whether the file is Embedded or Linked.

Pull-down Edit - Paste Special...
Keyboard PASTESPEC
392 PASTESPEC
OPTIONS:
c::::Il _ _ _~_ Paste Special

Source HiJIlIlk Imllgo
C:\WlNOOWS\POWERUP\ARnCOWPASS WWF
I] OK J
As:
II CGncel ]
r. ella'o HiJll1lk Imllao

IPlduro
Plllte Link konvart
Source • Lists the name of the application that created the contents in the
Clipboard, including its file type.
As • Lists the various fonnats that you can use to Paste the contents
of the Clipboard into the drawing.
Paste • Embeds the contents of the clipboard into the current drawing.
Paste Link • Links the contents of the clipboard into the current drawing.
Convert • Converts Windows Metafiles from the Windows clipboard into
AutoCAD objects When this is a valid option, Metafile is listed
for the Source.
rIPS & WARNINGS:

£ If you go to Open a drawing without Saving you are not given the chance to Save
changes. AutoCAD does not acknowledge the changes in linked objects.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Copyclip, Copylink, Cutclip, Insertobj, Pasteclip
PCXIN see IMPORT
'PDMODE (Point Display MODE)

Pdmode determines the shape of Points. This variable is typically set with the Ddptype
dialog box.
PDSIZE 393
Keyboard PDMODE
OPTIONS:
•
0
+2
X
3 4
0 0 $~ C)
32 33 34 35 36
0 0 -EB~ ~
64 65 66 67 68
G D m-~ ~
96 97 98 99 100
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t Pdsize has no effect on Points set to a Pdmode of 0 or 1.
~ You can have only one Pdmode setting in a drawing at a time. If you change the
setting, the drawing will globally update at the next Regeneration. Points that are
placed on the Defpoints Layer by associative dimensioning are not affected by
Pdmode and are the only exception.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pdsize
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddptype, Divide, grips, Measure, Point
'PDSIZE (Point Display SIZE)

Pdsize determines the size of Points. This variable is typically set with the Ddptype dialog
box.

Keyboard PDSIZE
394 PDSIZE
OPTIONS:
o • Points are displayed at 5 % of the graphics area height.
less than 0 • Points are displayed as a percentage of the viewport size.
greater than 0 • Points are displayed as an absolute size.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Pdsize has no effect on points set to a Pdmode of 0 or 1.
~ You can have only one Pdsize setting in a drawing at a time. If you change the
setting, the drawing will globally update at the next Regeneration. Points that are
placed on the Defpoints Layer by associative dimensioning are not affected by
Pdsize and are the only exception.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pdmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddptype, Divide, grips, Measure, Point
PEDIT (Polyline EDIT)

Pedit edits 2-D and 3-D Polylines and 3-D Polygon meshes. The editing options are based
on the type of Polyline you choose to edit. There are two basic sets of editing functions.
The first set operates on the entire Polyline; the second set lets you edit individual
vertices. You can only Pedit one object at a time.

Modify toolbar [1J
Screen menu MODIFY'" Pedit:
Keyboard PEDIT
PROMPTS:
Select polyline:
Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/
Ltype gen/Undo/eXit <x>:
PEDIT 395
OPTIONS:
The following table shows the editing options for the three types of Polyline objects. Pedit
automatically identifies the type of Polyline that is being edited and adjusts its prompts
accordingly.
2-D PUnes 3-D Plines Polygon M hes

Close/Open
./ ./
Join
./
Width
./
Edit vertex
./ ./ ./
Next ./ ./ ./
Previous ./ ./ ./
Break ./ ./
Insert ./ ./
Left ./
Right ./
Up ./
Down ./
Move ./ ./ ./
Regen ./ ./ ./
./ ./
Straighten
./
Tangent
./
Width
./
Fit
./ ./
Spline
./ ./
Decurve
./
Ltype gen
./
Smooth surface
396 PEDIT
2-D Plines 3-D Plines Polygon Meshes

Desmooth ./
Mclose/Mopen
./
Nclose/Nopen
Select • Select a 2-D or 3-D Polyline or a 3-D Polygon mesh. If you

polyline select a Line or Arc you are given the opportunity to convert it
into a Polyline.
Close/ Open • Close - Closes an Open Polyline by drawing a Polyline segment
from the first point of the first Polyline segment to the endpoint
of the last Polyline segment.
• Open - Open removes the closing segment of a Closed Polyline.

Join • Takes individual 2-D Polylines, Lines, and Arcs and combines
them into one 2-D Polyline.
Width • Redefines the Width of an entire 2-D Polyline.
Edit vertex • Individually edit the vertices that make up a Polyline segment.
An X appears at the first vertex for editing. If any of the
segments were drawn with a specified tangent direction, an
arrow is drawn in that direction.
Next • Moves the X or arrow marker to the Next vertex. The order is
based on the initial construction of the Polyline.
Previous • Moves the X or arrow marker to the Previous vertex. The order
is based on the initial construction of the Polyline.
Break • Removes a Polyline between two vertices.
Insert • Inserts a new vertex. The vertex is added ahead of the X marker.
Move • Moves the vertex marked with an X to a new location.
Regen • Regenerates the Polyline.
Straighten • Creates a single segment between two vertices. Any vertices that
are between the two you pick are deleted.
PEDIT 397
Tangent • Attaches a Tangent direction for curve fitting to the vertex

marked with the X.
Width • Edits the Width between two vertices. You can specify a starting
and an ending Width. The current Polyline segment is
considered to be between the X marker and the vertex found
with the Next option. The Polyline must be Regenerated before
you will see the results.
eXit • Exits the Edit vertex submenu and returns you to the Pedit
prompt. You can also use eXit to cancel the Break and
Straighten routines.
Undo • Undoes, one step at a time, the most recent Edit vertex
commands.
Go • Used during the Break and Straighten options to tell the system
you are ready to Break or Straighten the segments between two
vertices.
Left • For 3-D Mesh, move Left to a previous vertex in the N direction.
Right • For 3-D Mesh, move Right to the next vertex in the N direction.
Up • For 3-D Mesh, move Up to the next vertex in the M direction.
Down • For 3-D Mesh, move Down to the previous vertex in the M
direction.
Fit • Fit curve Regenerates the current Polyline, placing two arc
segments between the vertices.
Spline • Spline curve uses the Polyline vertices as control points for a
B-spline curve. The Spline passes through the beginning and
ending points of the Polyline and is pulled towards the other
vertices, but does not pass through them.
Decurve • Removes the curves from any Polyline that was either Fit or
Splined and returns it to its original state.
Ltype gen • Linetype Generation determines whether the linetype pattern
(linetypes other than continuous) begins anew at every vertex
point or whether the linetype ignores all vertices but the first and
last. This value is maintained by the system variable Plinegen.
398 PEDIT
Undo • Takes you back one Pedit option at a time. This is different from
the Undo command, which backsteps to the previous command.
eXit • Leaves the Pedit command and returns to the Command prompt.
You can also press <Esc>.
Smooth surface I Desmooth
• Smooth replaces a 3-D Mesh with a smooth surface.

• Desmooth returns a smooth 3-D Mesh to its original state.
• The type of surface this option fits is based on the Surftype

system variable.
Mopen I Mclose Nopen INclose
• Mopen/Mclose opens or closes a 3-D Mesh in the M direction.

• Nopen/Nclose opens or closes a 3-D Mesh in the N direction.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> To convert Lines and Arcs into Polylines, use the Join option. To convert
Polylines into Lines and Arcs, use the Explode command.
t> Ddmodify offers some of the Pedit options depending on the individual object.
~ Join
In order to Join objects, they must be contiguous. That is, their endpoints must
meet at the same coordinates.
When using the Join option, you can use any of the selection set methods to pick
the items to join. Your selection may include objects you do not want included in
the selection set. As long as these objects are not contiguous with another object,
they will not join.
t> Break
When you Break a Closed Polyline segment it becomes Open, and the closing
segment is removed. If you leave the X on the same vertex for Break and Go, it is
equivalent to using the @ last point with the Break command.
t> Fit
You can Decurve a Fit.
PEDIT 399
~ Spline
View the Spline's frame by turning Splframe on; use Splinesegs to set the number
of Spline segments between vertices; determine the Spline type by setting the
system variable Splinetype.
You can Decurve a Spline curve.
If you use the Edit vertex option, the X marker appears on the frame regardless of
the current Splframe setting.
The following commands recognize the Spline, but not the frame: area (object),
Chamfer, Divide, Hatch, Fillet, Measure.
The greater the value for Splinesegs, the more precise the curve will be, and the
closer to the control points. If you enter a negative number, you end up with a
smoother curve. Setting Splinesegs to a negative number is not allowed for 3-D
Polylines.
If the Polyline is defined with arcs, the arcs are straightened when viewing the
Spline (Splframe set to 1).
If a Polyline is made up of multiple widths, the Spline tapers from the beginning
width definition to the ending width definition.
:l Join
You cannot Join to a Closed Polyline.
If the object's endpoints do not match, the objects will not Join.
:l Width
You cannot specify tapers with this option. You can only assign one Width to the
entire Polyline segment. If you want different Widths between vertices, use the
Width option of Edit Vertex.
:l Fit
If you edit a Fit-Curve Polyline with Break. Explode, or Trim, the Decurve option
is no longer available.
:l Spline
If you edit a Spline-Curved Polyline with the Break, Explode, or Trim commands,
the Decurve option is no longer valid and there is no associated frame.
400 PEDIT
~ Smooth surface I Desmooth

Meshes that contain more than 11 vertices in either the M or N direction cannot be
changed into a Bezier surface.
Cubic B-spline surfaces require a minimum control point mesh size of 4 x 4.
Quadratic B-spline surfaces require a minimum control point mesh size of 3 x 3.
RELATED VARIABLES: Plinegen, Splframe, , Splinesegs, Splinetype, Surftype
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dmesh, 3Dpoly, Pline
EXAMPLE:
'PELLIPSE (Polyline ELLIPSE)

Pellipse determines the type of ellipse created with the Ellipse command.

Keyboard PELLIPSE
OPTIONS:
o • Creates a true Ellipse object.
1 • Creates an ellipse using Polyline Arcs.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When Pellipse is set to 0 you can locate the center and major and minor axes using
Osnap's center and quadrant options. When Pellipse is set to 1 you can only locate
each individual Polyline Arc's endpoint, center, and midpoint.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ellipse
'PERIMETER
Perimeter maintains the last perimeter value set by the Area, List, or Dblist command.
PFACE 401

Keyboard PERIMETER
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~) The Areas of Poly lines are calculated to their centerline regardless of width.
~ Regardless of whether you are beginning a new drawing or editing an existing

drawing, Perimeter retains the last computed value. Once you end the AutoCAD
session and return to the operating system, Perimeter's value defaults back to O.
System Variable 0.0000, Read-only Initial default Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Area
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Area, List
PFACE (PolyFACE)
Pface creates arbitrary polyface meshes. The mesh, composed of vertices and faces, is
mainly used for AutoLISP and ADS applications.

Screen menu DRAW 2 .. SURFACES" Pface:
Keyboard PFACE
PROMPTS:
Vertex 1:
Face 1, vertex 1:
OPTIONS:
Vertex • Specifies the location for each vertex.
Face • Specifies the vertex numbers that define each face.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can enter the vertices as 2-D or 3-D points.
~ You can make the edges of the Polyface mesh invisible by entering a negative
vertex number for the beginning vertex of the edge. Splframe controls the visibility
of the invisible edges.
402 PFACE
~ You can use the Layer and Color commands when defining faces. Enter L or Layer
and C or Color when prompted to define a face. Changing the Layer and Color
does not affect any new objects you create for subsequent commands.
~ You must keep track of each vertex and its number assignment in order to define
the faces.
~ If you press <Esc> before exiting the command, you must start over.
~ Since you cannot use the Pedit command, try manipulating the vertices with Grips.
~ Only part of the mesh becomes invisible when you assign that part of the mesh to a
Layer that is Off or Frozen.
~ A Pface mesh converts into 3-D Faces when exploded.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pfacevmax, Splframe

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dface, grips
EXAMPLE:
Command: PFACE
Vertex 1: 3,2
Vertex 2: 9,2
Vertex 3: 9,6
Vertex 4: 3,6
Vertex 5: 6,4,9
Vertex 6: <ENTER>
Face 1, vertex 1: LAYER
New layer <0>: FRONT
Face 1, vertex 1: 1 5
Face 1, vertex 2: 2
Face 1, vertex 3: 5
Face 1, vertex 4: <ENTER>
Face 2, vertex 1: LAYER
New layer <0>: BACK
Face 2, vertex 1: 3 4
Face 2, vertex 2: 4
Face 2, vertex 3: 5 Plan View 3D View 3D View with Hide
PICKADD 403
'PFACEVMAX (PolyFACE Vertices MAXimum)

Pfacevrnax maintains the maximum number of vertices per face. This variable is typically
used by software developers writing specific customized AutoCAD routines.

Keyboard PFACEVMAX
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Pface
'PICKADD
Pickadd controls how objects are added during the selection set process. This value is
typically set with the Use Shift to Add option of the Ddselect dialog box.

Keyboard PICKADD
OPTIONS:
o • During object selection, picking objects releases those already chosen and
the selection process begins anew.
• During object selection, picking objects adds to those already selected.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When Pickadd's value is 0 you can add and remove objects from the selection set
by pressing <Shift> when selecting objects.
~ When Pickadd's value is 1 you can remove objects from the selection set by
pressing <Shift> or by using the remove option of the selection set modes when
selecting objects.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pickauto, Pickbox, Pickdrag, Pickfirst
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddselect, selection set
404 PICKAUTO
'PICKAUTO
Pickauto controls automatic windowing during "Select objects" prompts. If the pick fails
to select an object, the selection method becomes a Window or Crossing. Moving the
cross hairs to the right acts as a Window, to the left as a Crossing. This value is typically
set with the Implied Windowing option of the Ddselect dialog box.

Keyboard PICKAUTO
OPTIONS:
o • During object selection Auto is disabled.
1 • During object selection Auto is enabled.

RELATED VARIABLES: Pickadd, Pickbox, Pickdrag, Pickfrrst
'PICKBOX
Pickbox sets the size of the target box at the intersection of the cross hairs. This box is
visible during object selection and when Pickfirst and Grips are enabled. This value is
typically set with the Pickbox Size option of the Ddselect dialog box.

Keyboard PICKBOX
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This box is sometimes confused with the Aperture box used during Osnap. For less
confusion set the Aperture and Pickbox to different sizes.
~ Do not make the Aperture setting so large or so small that it is difficult to pick
objects.

PICKFIRST 405
RELATED VARIABLES: Aperture, Grips, Pickfirst

'PICKDRAG
Pickdrag determines the method used to define Window or Crossing during object
selection. This value is typically set with the Press and Drag option of the Ddselect dialog
box.

Keyboard PICKDRAG
OPTIONS:
o • During object selection you are required to pick two diagonal points for the
Window and Crossing methods.
1 • During object selection you are required to hold down the button while
defining the two points for the window and crossing options. Releasing your
finger from the button defines the second diagonal point.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pickadd, Pickauto, Pickbox, Pickfirst
'PICKFIRST
Pickfirst determines the order of execution of certain commands. When enabled, you can
first pick objects before issuing commands; when disabled you must first begin the
command before selecting objects. The following commands are affected:
Array Ddchprop Hatch Rotate
Block Ddmodify List Scale
Change Dview Mirror Stretch
Chprop Erase Move Wblock
Copy Explode
When Pickfirst is enabled you will see the Pickbox located at the intersection of the
screen's cross hairs. This value is typically set with the Noun/Verb Selection of the
Ddselect dialog box.
406 PICKFIRST

Keyboard PICKFIRST
OPTIONS:
o • Creates your selection set after activating commands.
• Creates your selection set before (or after) activating commands.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When Pickfirst is active you will see a small box located at the intersection of the
screen's cross hairs. If you disable Pickfrrst and the box still appears, check the
Grips (Ddgrips) and Osnap (Ddosnap) settings. These commands also enable a
box to appear at the intersection of the screen's cross hairs.
RELATED VARIABLES: Pickadd, Pickauto, Pickbox, Pickdrag
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddselect, grips, selection set
'PICKSTYLE
Pickstyle controls Group and associative Hatch selection. This value is typically set using
the Object Grouping option of the Ddselect dialog box and the Groups option of the
Ddrmodes dialog box.

Keyboard PICKSTYLE
OPTIONS:
o • No Group or associative Hatch selection.
• Group selection.
2 • Associative Hatch selection.
3 • Group and associative Hatch selection.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Ddselect
PLAN 407
PLAN
Plan displays the plan view of the current UCS (User Coordinate System), defmed UCS,
or WCS (World Coordinate System). A Plan view is defined as having a view point of
0,0,1.

Pull-down View" 3D Viewpoint Presets .. Plan View
Screen menu VIEW" Plan:
Keyboard PLAN
PROMPTS:
<Current ucs>/Ucs/World:
OPTIONS:
Current UCS • Restores the Plan view of the current UCS.
UCS • Restores the Plan view of a previously defined UCS.

World • Restores the Plan view ofthe WCS.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Plan only affects the current viewport.
~ Plan turns perspective and clipping off.
~ You cannot use this command while in Paper space.
RELATED VARIABLES: Ucsfollow

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: ues, Vpoint
EXAMPLE:
Pion View - World 30 View with Hide Pion View - Current tJCS
408 PLATFORM
'PLATFORM
Platfonn stores the name of the AutoCAD platfonn in use. This information varies based
on the combination of hardware and software on your system. This information is also
listed when the About dialog box is active.

Keyboard PLATFORM
System Variable varies, Read-only Initial default String
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: About
PLINE (PolyLINE)
A Polyline is a series of 2-D Lines and Arc segments that share the same vertices and are
processed as a single object. It has a line mode and an arc mode, each with different
prompts. You start both modes by specifying a "From point." To edit polylines, you can
use Pedit and most of the regular edit commands.

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 1- Pline

Keyboard PLINEorPL
PROMPTS:
From point:
Current line-width is 0.0000
Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width/<Endpoint of line >:
Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Halfwidth/Line/Radius/
Second pt/Undo/Width/<Endpoint of arc>:
OPTIONS:
Arc • Switches from drawing Polylines to Polyline Arcs and activates
a submenu for the Polyline Arc options.
Angle • A Polyline Arc option whereby you specify the included angle.
Since Arcs are drawn counterclockwise, use a negative angle if
you want to draw the Arc clockwise.
PLiNE 409
CEnter • Specifies the center of the Arc.
Close • Similar to the close option for Lines and Polylines; however, an
Arc is used to close the segments.
Direction • Specifies a starting direction.
Line • Switches you back into Line mode.

Radius • Specifies the radius of the Arc.
Second pt • Allows you to construct a three point Arc.
Close • Closes the Polyline segments created during the Pline command,
connecting the start point to the end point.
Halfwidth • Specifies the width from the center of a Polyline to one of its
edges. The number is doubled for the actual width.
Length • Lets you specify the length of a new Polyline segment at the
same angle as the last Polyline segment. If you use this option
after constructing a Polyline Arc, the Polyline will be tangent to
the Arc.
Undo • Entering U (undo) at the "To point:" prompt undoes the last
Pline segment and returns you to the previous point.
Width • Creates Polylines with width and mitered intersections. You can
even construct Polyline segments with tapers by defining
different starting and ending widths. Once you have drawn a
tapered line segment, the next segment defaults to the ending
width of the previous segment. The default width is zero.
• This value is maintained by the Plinewid system variable.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Before you can select any of the options for creating Polylines, you must first enter
a start point.
~ Donuts, Ellipses (pellipse = 1), and Polygons are created from Polylines.
~ Assign Widths to Ellipses and Polygons with the Pedit command.
~ Chamfer and Fillet have special options for Polylines.

410 PUNE
~ You can convert Polylines into Lines using the Explode command. You can
convert Lines into Polylines using the Join option of the Pedit command.
~ If you draw Polylines with an assigned width just to achieve line weights on the
finished plot, you can get the same effect by assigning colors to represent different
line weights and plotting with different pen point thicknesses.
~ Mlines and Traces also create wide lines.
~ You can request the Area and Perimeter/Length of a Polyline by using the Object
option of the Area command. The List command also provides this information.
~ If Grips are enabled, the Pline's Grip deftnition points are the vertices. Picking any
of the Grip points lets you change that vertex's location.
~ The Sketch command lets you defme the objects as being Plines or Lines.
~ If your Polylines assigned a width are not ftlled it may be because Fill is Off.
~ Plinegen determines whether a Polyline's Linetype pattern begins anew at every
vertex or whether the Linetype ignores all vertices but the ftrst and last.
~ If you type PI to activate the Pline command and you receive the error message
"Unknown command ... " it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the ftle named
acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modifted the ftle. Acad.pgp is
RELATED VARIABLES: Fillmode, Lastangle, Lastpoint, Plinegen, Plinewid, Skpoly
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dpoly, Bhatch, Boundary, Fill, Pedit
EXAMPLE:
!VV\ooo
Different Types of Plines
P"line Pline Sketch Polygon Donut Ellipse

(width = .05) (various width seilings) (Pellipse = 1)
Pline Pline Pline

(Pedil Fil) (Pedil Spline)
PLiNEWID 411
'PLINEGEN (PolyLINE GENerate)

Plinegen detennines whether a Polyline's linetype pattern begins anew at every vertex or
whether the linetype ignores all vertices but the first and last.

Keyboard PLINEGEN
OPTIONS:
o • Polyline linetype pattern begins anew at every vertex.
• Polyline linetype pattern ignores all vertices but the first and last.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can change the value assigned to Polylines using Pedit or Ddmodify.
:l Plinegen does not apply to Polylines with tapered segments nor to 3-D Polys.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddmodify, Pedit, Pline
EXAMPLE:
,--,
U----u
'---I
,_ ,--L ,
Plinegen 0 Plinegen 1
'PLINEWID (PLINE WIDth)

Plinewid detennines the default width for new Polylines. This value is usually set with the
Width option of the Polyline command.

Keyboard PLINEWID
412 PLiNEWID
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can create tapered Polylines if you set the Width while in the Pline command.
l You can change the Width assigned to Polylines using the Width option of the
Pedit command. However, all the polyline segments of the Polyline take the new
value.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Pedit, Pline
PLOT
Plot is the method used to obtain an output, or hard copy, of your drawing file. Plot
directs your drawing to a plotter (including dot matrix, inkjet, and laser printers) or to a
plot file. Use the Config command to configure (modify, add, and delete) plotting
devices.
The system variable Cmddia determines whether the Plot command activates a dialog box
or whether you define the plotting parameters at the command line. When Cmddia is set
to 1, the dialog box is active; when Cmddia is set to 0, the Command line is active.

Standard toolbar B
Pull-down File - Print...

Screen menu FILE - Print:
Keyboard PLOT
PLOT 413
OPTIONS:
Plot Configuration
OIlVlCOl and Oerllutt IntormllllDn Paper S'le and OnentMton
plotld P081SCnpl d8VIC8 ADI 4.2 - by Aulode8k. Inc
D
(i In-"'es
ploner
~
Plot Area 3300 by 43 00 .
plolrotmode
r:; AdlUo1 Arell Fill
Device and Default Infonnation

• Lists the default plotting device.
Device and Default Selection
• Select Device - Lists the various plotter device options defined
during AutoCAD installation or with the Config command.
Selecting a different device can change the rest of the plot
settings. This value is maintained by the Plotter and Plotid
system variables.
• File Defaults - Saves or retrieves various plotting defaults from
a .pcp (Plot Configuration Parameters) file.
• Device Specific Requirements - Displays infonnation con-
cerning the default plotter device and lets you change some of
the specific parameters for that device.
Pen Parameters
Pen Assignments ...
• Controls pen parameters (color, pen no., linetype, speed, pen
width) assigned to each AutoCAD color. The choices vary
depending on the individual plotter devices.
414 PLOT
Optimization ...
• Lets you fme-tune pen motion. The default settings depend on

the individual plotter devices.
Additional Parameters
Display • Plot what is visible in the current viewport in Model space or the
current view in Paper space.
Extents • The Plot is based on the drawing extents. It takes into account
all drawing objects regardless of the Limits setting.
Limits • The Plot is based on the drawing Limits. If the current viewport
is not a Plan view (0,0,1), the Plot is based on Zoom Extents.
View • Plots a previously saved View. This option is available if one or
more views are defined in the drawing. Select a view with the
View ... button.
Window • Plots the area you designate as a window by picking the
Window ... button.
Hide • Model space - Checking this box removes the hidden edges of
Lines 3-D objects.
• Paper space - Use the Hideplot option of the Mview command

to have hidden edges removed.
Adjust • Adjusts the pen width for plotting solid filled objects such as
Area Fill Traces, Mlines, Polylines, and Solids.
Plot To • Checking this box creates plot files instead of sending the plot
File directly to a plotter.
View ... • Plots an area defined by the View or Ddview command.
Window ... • Plots an area defined by a Window or by two diagonal points.
File • This is active if you checked the Plot To File check box. The
Name ... default file name is the same as the drawing file and the
extension is usually .plt. Some plotting devices may not let you
create plot files.
Paper Size and Orientation
Inches or • Checking one of these buttons determines whether the plotting
MM units are based on inches or millimeters.
PLOT 415
Size ... • Lists the paper sizes supported by the current plotter device.
You can select one of the predefined sizes or enter your own in
the User text boxes.
Scale, Rotation, and Origin
Rotation • Plot Rotation - Controls the way drawings are placed on the
and Origin paper. This value is assigned to the Plotrotmode system variable.
• Plot Origin - The origin is determined by the default plotter

device. Changing the origin lets you control the exact location of
the plot. This is usually modified when you want to plot multiple
drawings on one sheet of paper.
Plotted Inches = Drawing Units
• Tells what scale to plot the drawing. You do this by specifying

how many plotted inches equals how many drawing units. You
can change the plotted scale and/or the paper size with each plot.
Scaled to • When this box is checked AutoCAD determines a plotting scale
Fit based on the drawing area selected for the plot and the specified
paper size.
Plot Preview
Preview ... • Displays how the plot will fit on the paper based on current plot
settings. The detail shown is based on the Partial or Full check
box setting.
Partial or • Partial - Displays a quick preview of the plot, showing the plot
Full area (represented as a box) relative to the paper size. A
triangular rotation icon portrays the plot rotation. A rotation of 0
places the icon in the lower left corner.
• Full - Displays a preview of the plot, showing how the actual
drawing objects appear relative to the paper size. You can Pan
and Zoom around the file (similar to the Zoom Dynamic
command).
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~, You can terminate the Plot by pressing <Esc>. Since your plotter may have an
internal or external buffer, the cancel might not be immediate due to the
information already being processed in the buffer.
416 PLOT
~ Issue a Zoom Extents before Plotting. If any changes were made to the drawing
file and caused a reduction to the extents, the drawing must go through a Zoom
Extents or Zoom All to be updated.
~ You can set the various plotting parameters with a dialog box or at the Command
prompt. It is recommended that you use the dialog box because of its added
features. If you use the Command line and make a mistake, you must cancel and
begin the process again. With the dialog box you just pick the error and make your
correction.
~ Plan to spend time testing different plotting media. You may need to try several
different combinations of papers, pens, pen speeds, and colors to get good results.
In addition, room temperature and humidity will affect plotting quality.
~ Plot questions default to the current Model space or Paper space. In Model space,
the plot depends on the current viewport and the chosen plotting options. In Paper
space, the plot depends on how much of the drawing (including viewports) falls
within the chosen plotting options. Viewports turned off with the Mview command
are not plotted.
~ Plot settings frequently change for different types of plots. Each time you plot, the
settings default to the last plotting parameters. Drawings do not retain their own
plot values. You can save the values in files and restore them. These files have the
extension .pcp (plot configuration parameters). These parameters do not include
which plotting device to use. Most plotters require similar responses, so these files
can work for more than just one plotter. If you send your drawing to someone else
you may want to include the .pcp file.
~ You cannot assign a specific scale factor value to a drawing plotted in perspective
(Dview) view.
~ When plotting multiple viewports (Paper space is enabled) the variable Maxactvp
is ignored. So long as the viewport is On (Mview), the viewport is plotted.
~ AutoCAD does not retain plot settings for each drawing. It remembers the last
plotting parameters, whatever the drawing.
~ If you are using AutoCAD's Linetypes, set your plotter to produce continuous
lines only, or you may get unexpected results.
~ There is always an inaccessible margin along the perimeter of a plotted drawing.
Its size depends on the make and model of each plotter.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cmddia, Maxactvp, Plotid, Plotter, Plotrotmode
PLOTROTMODE 417
'PLOTID (PLOT IDentification)

Plotid changes the plotter default based on its description. Plotter descriptions were
defmed when AutoCAD was first configured. You can modify plotter configurations with
the Config command. This value is typically set using the Select Device option of the Plot
command.

Keyboard PLOTID
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~) Changing the Plotid value automatically changes the Plotter value and vice versa.

System Variable varies Configuration file String
RELATED VARIABLES: Plotter
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Config, Plot
'PLOTROTMODE (PLOT ROTate MODE)

Plotrotmode controls the orientation of plots. This value is typically set with the Rotation
option of the Plot command.

Keyboard PLOTROTMODE
OPTIONS:
0,90, 180,270 • Rotates the plotting area so that the corner with the rotation
icon aligns with the paper: lower left for 0 degrees; top-left for
90 degrees; top-right for 180 degrees, and lower-right for 270
degrees.
• Places the lower left corner of the plotting area with the lower
left corner of the paper.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Plot
418 PLOTTER
'PLOTTER
Plotter changes the plotter default based on its assigned number. These numbers were
assigned when AutoCAD was fIrst confIgured. These plotter numbers are arbitrary and
can change whenever plotters are removed with the ConfIg command. You can get a
listing of these numbers using the ConfIg or Plot command. This value is typically set
using the Selected Device option of the Plot command.

Keyboard PLOTTER
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Changing the Plotter value automatically changes the Plotid value and vice versa.

System Variable varies ConfIguration me Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Plotid
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Config, Plot
POINT
Point creates a point in X,Y,Z space. Place a point by absolute, relative, or polar
coordinates, or pick a point in the drawing with your pointing device. (See Point Entry.)
You can Osnap to points using the Node option.
You can change the way Points are displayed with the Pdmode and Pdsize variables.
Pdmode determines the shape; Pdsize determines the size. You can change these settings
with the Ddptype dialog box.

Draw toolbar
o
Screen menu DRAW 2 ~ Point
Keyboard POINT
PROMPTS:
Point:
point entry 419
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If Grips are enabled, the Point's Grip definition point is the centerpoint. Picking
this lets you relocate the Point.
£ You can have only one Pdmode and Pdsize setting in a drawing at a time. If you
change the settings, the drawing will globally update at the next Regeneration.
Points that are placed on the Defpoints Layer by associative dimensioning are not
affected by Pdmode and Pdsize and are the only exceptions.
£ Unlike Blips, Points are part of the drawing and will Plot. If you do not want the
Points to plot, you can Erase them, turn Off or Freeze the Layer on which they
reside, or set Pdmode to 1.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddptype, Divide, grips, Measure
EXAMPLE: See PDMODE
point entry I coordinate entry

Point entry is based on the Cartesian coordinate system; every point has an X,Y,Z value.
The X axis is the horizontal distance; the Y axis is the vertical distance; the Z axis is at
right angles to the plane defmed by the X and Y axes. If you do not specify a Z value, it
defaults to the current elevation.
OPTIONS:
Nearly all AutoCAD commands require you to identify points. Most prompts typically
request "From point" and "To point". Use the following methods to identify points:
Pointing • Pick a point on the screen with your pointing device. You can use
device any of the following to help locate specific points: Grid, Grip,
Ortho, Osnap, point Filters, and Snap.
Arrow keys • Pick a point on the screen with the keyboard arrow keys.
Absolute • Specify a point by entering its absolute coordinates. Absolute
Coordinates coordinates are based on the current UCS origin. Examples are
3,2 or 3,2,0.
420 point entry
Relative • Specify a point by entering its relative coordinates. Relative

Coordinates coordinates are relative to the last entered point and are preceded
with the @ symbol. Examples are @-5,00r @-5,0,0.
Polar • Specify an absolute or relative point by entering polar
Coordinates coordinates. Polar coordinates specify a distance and angle or
direction. The format for an absolute polar coordinate is
distance<direction; precede with an @ for a relative polar
coordinate. Examples are 3<90 or @3<90.
Spherical • Specify a spherical point. This is a 3-D variation of the polar
Coordinates format. A point is specified by its distance from the current UCS
origin, its angle in the XY plane, and its angle up from the XY
plane. Use the < symbol between each value. The format for an
absolute spherical point is distance<direction in the XY
plane<direction up from XY plane; precede with an @ for a
relative spherical point. Examples are 4<90<30 or @4<90<30.
Cylindrical • Specify a cylindrical point. This is another 3-D variation of the
Coordinates polar format. A point is specified by its distance from the current
UCS origin, its angle in the XY plane, and its Z distance. Use the <
symbol to separate the distance and angle; use a comma to
separate the angle and Z distance. The format for an absolute
cylindrical point is distance<direction in the XY plane, Z value;
precede with an @ for relative cylindrical points. Examples are
8<22,5 or @8<22,5.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The status line displays the current coordinates if Coords are enabled. The
coordinates are displayed with the current Units settings.
~ If Limits checking is On and you enter a point outside the Limits, you will receive
the message **Outside limits. Either re-enter a point inside the Limits, turn Limits
checking Off, or change the Limits.
~ Using polar coordinate entry (@distance < direction) is easy and fast since you do
not have to remember to use negative numbers.
~ Specify the last coordinate by entering an @ symbol.
point filter 421
~ Points are expressed in relation to the current UCS. If you are working in a UCS
and want to enter a point based on the WCS, precede the coordinates with an
asterisk. This entry can be used for relative as well as polar input. If used for
relative points, the fonnat is @*X,Y or @*distance<direction.
~ The List commands displays the object's coordinate point location. The Id
command displays the coordinates of a specific point.
RELATED VARIABLES: Aperture, Pickbox, Lastangle, Lastpoint
point filter
Point filtering lets you use the coordinate components of existing points in your drawing
to build a new point. You can use any combination of existing X, f, and Z values and new
values entered from the keyboard.

Standard toolbar See OPTIONS
Screen menu SERVICE - .X, .f,.z, .Xf, .XZ, .fZ
Keyboard .X, .f, .Z, .Xf, .XZ, .fZ
Pointing device Mouse - Shift + 2nd button; Puck - 3rd pick button
OPTIONS:
.X • Accept the X value of the next point.
.Y • Accept the Y value of the next point.
.Z • Accept the Z value of the next point.
Y::I .xy. Accept the X,fvalue of the next point.
.XZ • Accept the X,Z value of the next point.
.YX • Accept the f,Z value of the next point.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

iJ Use Filters to specify a Z value easily when working in 3-D.
422 point filter
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: point entry
EXAMPLE:
Command: CIRCLE Creote a circle in the
3P/2P/TTR/<Center point>: .X of Mid center of the box
pick 1
of (need YZ): Mid
pick 2
of Diameter/<Radius>: .5
POLYFACE see PFACE
POLYGON
Polygon creates 2-D Polygons. The number of sides ranges between 3 and 1,024. You can
draw the Polygon by Inscribing or Circumscribing about an imaginary circle. Since
Polygons are Closed Polylines, you can use the Pedit command for editing.

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 1 .. Polygon

Keyboard POLYGON
PROMPTS:
Number of sides <4>:
Edge/<Center of polygon>:
Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle (I/C) <I>:
Radius of circle:
OPTIONS:
Edge • Specifies the size by picking the endpoints of one edge.
Center of polygon • Specifies the center point about which the Polygon will be
drawn. All vertices are equidistant from the center point.
Inscribed in circle • The vertices touch the circumference of an imaginary
circle.
POLYLINE 423
Circumscribed • The midpoint of each edge touches the circumference of

about circle an imaginary circle.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When you use the Inscribed option and pick a point to show the radius, that point
determines the location for the first vertex as well as the rotation angle.
t , When you use the Circumscribed option and pick a point to show the radius, that
point determines the location for the midpoint of the first edge as well as the
rotation angle.
~ Polygons are drawn with line width 0 regardless of the default Polyline width and
contain no tangent information. You can use the Pedit command and assign widths
and tangents once the Polygon has been created.
t , Polygons are drawn counterclockwise.
t, If Grips are enabled, the Polygon's Grip definition points are at each vertex.
Picking any of the Grip points lets you change the size and shape.
Command 4 Sides, inscribed Initial default
RELATED VARIABLES: Polysides
EXAMPLE:
O· 0
Edge Inscribed Circumscribed
•• •• •••• •• ••• ••••• •• • ••
POL YLINE see PLINE

424 POLYSIDES
'POLYSIDES (POLYgon SIDES)

Polysides sets and maintains the default number of sides (3 - 1,024) for Polygons. This
value is typically set with the Polygon command.

Keyboard POLYSIDES
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Polygon
'POPUPS
Popups maintains the status of the display driver.

Keyboard POPUPS
OPTIONS:
o • Display driver does not support dialog boxes, menu bar, pull-down menus,
and icon menus.
1 • Display driver supports dialog boxes, menu bar, pull-down menus, and icon
menus.
PREFERENCES
Preferences lets you customize some of the AutoCAD settings and features.

Pull-down Options ... Preferences ...
Keyboard PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES 425
OPTIONS:
·sc
AutoCAD GraphICS Wind
screen boxes 019 I \o[e.

!i' OlllJloler /,",OUte
Keyvtrokea
AutoCAD ClIlS.,C
(i ... nu file
Automllbc SIlV8
savetlme mInute.
saveflle
AutoCAD Graphics Window

Screen Men~ • Toggles the screen menu on and off.
Scroll Bars • Toggles the scroll bars on and off.
Window Repair • Determines the method used to clean up the screen
display when an overlaying window is removed. The
AutoCAD driver uses Bitmap, while other display
drivers may provide other choices.
Automatic Save
Every • Checking this box enables the automatic save feature .
minutes • Determines the frequency of the automatic save feature.
Digitizer Input
Digitizer • Accepts input from the configured digitizing device. If
no digitizer is configured it will accept input from a
mouse.
Digitizer/Mouse • Accepts input from the last moved pointing device.
Keystrokes
AutoCAD Classic • Lets you use keystrokes based on previous versions of
AutoCAD. See Appendix A.
426 PREFERENCES
Menu File • Uses accelerator keys that are similar to other Windows
programs. See Appendix A.
Font... • Displays the Font dialog box, where you can change the
font, font style, and size of the screen menu.
Color ... • Assigns colors to different parts of the display. This
includes items such as the screen background, cross
hairs, and Text window background.
Duscmne.
acaddrv Qnvero !C:\R13\W1N\ORV
acadpreflx Support IC:\R13\COI.I\SUPPORT.C:\
acadpagedlr Pall" FIle I C:\R13\W1N
acadhelp Helll IC:\R13\W1N\SUPPOR

acadaltmenu ~ll.Ianu Fila: I
I09111eon III Log File r-1c:-
.\-R-n-\W1-N-V.-CAl)-.-LO-
logflleolf
acadlogflle
Directories
Drivers • Detennines the search path for AD! drivers.
Support • Defines the search path AutoCAD uses for support files.
Support files include fonts, Lisp routines, drawing files,
hatch patterns, etc.
Page File • Determines the directory where the first page file IS
created.
Files
Help • Specifies the path and file name for the Help file.
Alt Menu File • Specifies the path and file name for an alternate tablet
menu when using a digitizer.
PREFERENCES 427
Log File a Selecting the check box enables all the Command prompt
text to write to a file in ASCII fonnat.
Memory
Maximum a Detennines the maximum amount of memory that the
pager can receive from Windows.
Maximum Bytes a Detennines the maximum number of bytes AutoCAD can
in a Page use for the first page file.
Blinder
aveflg Collfill Fila Oir: Ic:\r13\win

Ic:\rl l\win
ccc _- c -,
avefacedlr Ecu:e Fila O.r.

avepagedlr e«uJa Fila Olr Ic:\rl l\win
averdflle "'ap Fila. Po'" I
Roster Pravo8W OpllDns
rasterprevlew
iii' Sovell\lNF Pravo8W J":j Save Q"'P PrevIew
Config File Dir a Specifies the directory for the rendering configuration file.
Face File Dir a Defines the directory for the temporary storage of faces for
meshes.
Page File Dir a Specifies the directory where the first page file is created.
Map Files Path a Defines the directory for map files.
Raster Preview Options
SaveWMF a Saves the preview drawing parameter in Windows Meta File
Preview (WMF) fonnat.
SaveBMP a Saves the preview drawing parameter in Bitmap (BMP)
Preview fonnat.
428 PREFERENCES
IntemftlJonnJ
IntemllbonnJ Seiling,
MellSu,ement r. En~h.h Meine
Prototype O'OWlng
OUllling Type:
O'"W1ng NllfRe Ilcad.dwg
International Settings
Measurement • Detennines the units of measure - English or Metric.
Prototype Drawing
Drawing Type • Determines the default drawing prototype. This can also be
set with the Prototype .. . option of the new command.
,&e
Opbona
IexlEdrtor Eonl Mllpplng Fda :
mtexted
I~nte'nlll [==========~--;;:~~§=~-t fontmap
Iil MlllOmile 6pphellbon On SlllfIup
Iil "'OlPm'le O'llWIng By Oefllult r 1./.se Menu In Hellde,
TextW,ndow etot Spooling

HISlotyi.tne • .
120cked VIsIble un s.
Options
Text Editor • Specifies a text editor to use with the Mtext
command.
PROJMODE 429
Font Mapping File • Specifies the font mapping file used by the Mtext
command.
Maximize Application • Detennines the size of an application window

On Startup started from within AutoCAD.
Maximize Drawing • Controls the size of the AutoCAD drawing window.
By Default
Use Menu in Header • When selected, the menu assigned to an individual
drawing is displayed. When not selected, the loaded
menu file is displayed.
Text Window
History Lines • Detennines the number of lines (25 - 2,048)
displayed in the AutoCAD Text Window. This also
determines the number of lines read by the Coyphist
command.
Docked Visible Lines • Determines the number of Command lines visible
when the Command line is docked. You can also use
your pointing device to change the number of visible
Command lines.
Plot Spooling • Sets the conditions for using the plot spooler. See
the Installation Guide for more detailed information.
RELATED VARIABLES: Acadaltmenu, Acaddrv, Acadhelp, Acadlogfile,
Acadmaxmen, Acadmaxpage, Acadpagedir, Acadplcmd, Acadplcmd, Acadprefix,
Avefacedir, Avefig, Avepagedir, Averdfile, Fontmap, Logfileoff, Logfileon, Mtexted,
Rasterpreview, Rasterpreview, Savefile, Savetime, Screenboxes
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Copyhist
'PROJMODE (PROjection MODE)

Projmode maintains the current projection mode for Extend and Trim. This value is
typically set using the Trim or Extend command.
430 PROJMODE

Keyboard PROJMODE
OPTIONS:
o • No projection, true 3-D mode.
I • Project to the XY plane of the current UCS.
2 • Project to the current view plane.
System Variable I Configuration file Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Extmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Extend, Trim
PSDRAG (PostScript DRAG)

Psdrag determines the display of PostScript images dragged into place with the Psin
command.

Pull-down File - Options - PostScript Display
Keyboard PSDRAG
PROMPTS:
PSIN drag mode <0>:
OPTIONS:
o • The image's bounding box and file name are displayed as it is being
dragged on the screen.
I • The rendered PostScript image is displayed as it is being dragged on the
screen.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t. It is much quicker to have only the bounding box (Psdrag 0) displayed when using
the Psin command.
£ If Psquality is set to 0, Psdrag has no effect.
PSIN 431
RELATED VARIABLES: Psquality

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Import
PSFILL (PostScript FILL)

Fills Polyline outlines with PostScript patterns. The patterns are defined in the file named
acad.psJ The patterns are not displayed on the screen. They only show when printing to
PostScript with Psout.

Draw toolbar
Screen menu CONSTRCT .. PSfill:

Keyboard PSFILL
PROMPTS:
Select polyline:
PostScrip t fill pattern ( . none) <. >/ ? :
OPTIONS:
• Resets the default Psfill to none.
? • Lists the PostScript fill patterns defined in the acad.psJfile.
* • Placing an asterisk (*) before the pattern name omits the Polyline outline
when the PostScript pattern is plotted.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Acad.psJis located in AutoCAD's support directory.
Command none Last value used in the drawing String
RELATED VARIABLES: Psquality
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Export
PSIN see IMPORT

432 PSLTSCALE
'PSLTSCALE (Paper Space LineType SCALE)

Psltscale controls Paper space linetype scaling.

Keyboard PSLTSCALE
OPTIONS:
o • When Paper space is enabled, all Model space viewports display linetype
dash lengths based on their viewport zoom magnification.
1 • When Paper space is enabled, all Model space viewports, regardless of their
magnification, display linetype dash lengths identically. The scaling is based
on Paper space drawing units.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When changing the Psltscale value you may need to regenerate (Regenall) the
viewports in order to see the changes.
~ Use the Ltscale variable to set a global scale factor value. All objects are
multiplied by the current Ltscale setting. Use Celtscale to control individual object
linetype scaling.
RELATED VARIABLES: Celtscale, Ltscale
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ltscale, Ltype
EXAMPLE:
Psltscale 0 Psltscale 1
------!1'f;
M1~-------I-'i ~:::::m
I
I II
I II
I I I I ~:::p;
: u u:::::]
I I I I II I I
~
: :~
I I I I I I II I I
I I I I II II
I I I I
I
' 11
I •
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
at::::.lS
II
~::::::., ~:::::tt=
PSPACE 433
'PSOUT see EXPORT
PSPACE (Paper SPACE)

Pspace (Paper space) switches from drawing in Mspace (Model space) to Pspace. Pspace
is used to annotate, compose, and plot 2-D or 3-D drawings. Mspace is used to create and
dimension your model. In order for Pspace to be active you must set Tilemode to O.
You know you are working in Pspace when the word paper appears on the status line, the
Pspace ucsicon is displayed, and the drawing's cross hairs extend outside any defined
viewports.

Standard toolbar ~
Pull-down View" Paper Space

Screen menu VIEW" Pspace:
Keyboard PAPERSPACE or PS
Status line Double clicking on MODEL sets Tilemode to 0 and makes
Paper space active.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Dimensioning in Model space gives you more flexibility. You can take advantage
of associative dimensioning when editing your drawing.
i;, Paper space and Model space each retain their own Limits, Ucsicon, Snap, Grid,
and Views.
~) If you type Ps to activate the pspace command and you receive the error message
acad.pgp or you are using third party software that modified the file . Acad.pgp is
~ You cannot edit objects created in Pspace while in Mspace and vice versa.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mspace, Mview, Ucsicon
434 PSPACE
EXAMPLE:
CrouHtllrw
~
a
K
r
~ I
~--
00 00
00 00
~
-
"__ cd: pe
I~PACt / Togg'" PapKe and MIPKe on and ott
1 :-.··,
1,;,-,'.1194 .PAPER 1022AM
'PSPROLOG (PostScript PROLOGue)

Psprolog assigns a name for a prologue section to be read from the acad.psJ file when
using the Psout command.

Pull-down File" Options .. PostScript Prolog
Keyboard PSPROLOG
System Variable none Configuration file String
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Export, Psout
'PSQUALITY (PostScript QUALITY)

Psquality controls the rendering quality of imported PostScript images.
PURGE 435

Pull-down File'" Options ... PostScript Quality
Keyboard PSQUALITY
OPTIONS:
o • PostScript image is shown by its outline and file name.
value is greater than 0 • Sets the number of pixels per AutoCAD drawing unit
for the PostScript resolution. PostScript images are
solid filled.
value is less than 0 • Sets the number of pixels per AutoCAD drawing unit
using the absolute value. PostScript image paths are
shown as outlines.
RELATED VARIABLES: Psdrag
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Import
PURGE
Purge deletes or eliminates unused Blocks, Dirnstyles (dimension styles), Layers,
Linetypes, Mlstyles (multiple line styles), Shapes, and Styles (text styles). You are
prompted for a confirmation before each item is removed.

Pull-down Data ... Purge>
Screen menu DATA'" Purge:
Keyboard PURGE
PROMPTS:
Purge unused Blocks/Dimstyles/LAyers/LTypes / SHapes /
STyles/Mlinestyles/All :
436 PURGE
OPTIONS:
Blocks • Deletes unused Blocks.
Dimstyles • Deletes unused Dimstyles.
LAyers • Deletes unused Layers.
LTypes • Deletes unused Lineypes.
SHapes • Deletes unused Shapes.
STyles • Deletes unused Styles.
Mlinestyles • Deletes unused Mlstyles.
All • Deletes all unused items listed above. You are prompted
individually for each item.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, Purging is a good way to reduce drawing file size.
t, You cannot Purge Layer 0, the Continuous Linetype, or the text Style Standard.
t, The following commands have their own methods of removing named items from
the drawing: Group, Rmat, Scene, UCS, View, and Vport.
£ Since Blocks can be nested and drawn on multiple Layers, you can only Purge one
reference level at a time. It is recommended that you issue the Purge command
until you receive the message "No unreferenced ..... found."
aSAVE 437
QSAVE (Quick SAVE)

Qsave saves your drawing file.

Standard toolbar
Pull-down File - Save

Screen menu FILE- Save:
Keyboard QSA VE or <Ctrl S>
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ It is recommended that you periodically save your drawing during each editing
session.
~ If the drawing is new and has never been saved the file name uses the system
default "UNNAMED". The first time you use the Qsave command you are given
the opportunity to assign a different name to that file.
~ Each time you Qsave, the previous saved drawing is renamed as the backup (.bak)
drawing if lsavebak is set to 1.
~ You can also save files by using the automatic save feature (Savetime), Save,
Saveas, End, and Quit commands. Save and Saveas activate the Save Drawing As
dialog box; End and Quit exit the AutoCAD program. End automatically saves
your drawing, and Quit gives you the opportunity to save your file if any
commands were issued after the last Qsave, Save, or Saveas command.
~ Undo will eventually reset your drawing to the state it was in when you first
opened it for editing regardless of the amount of Qsaves and Saves you initiated. If
you know that you do not want to Undo past a certain point you can always Save
and re-Open the file .
RELATED VARIABLES: Filedia, Isavebak, Isavepercent, Rasterpreview, Savetime
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: End, Quit, Save, Saveas
438 QTEXT
QTEXT (Quick TEXT)

Qtext detennines whether Text, Mtext, and Attributes are displayed as text or as boxes
representing the text. Qtext set to On saves time Redrawing and Regenerating text. The
box is the approximate height of the text string. The length is sometimes distorted and
looks much longer then the actual text string. Qtext's value is maintained by the
Qtextmode variable. The Ddrmodes dialog box provides easy access for turning this
feature on and off.

Pull-down Options ~ Display > ~ Text Frame Only
Screen menu OPTIONS ~ DISPLAY ~ Qtext:
Keyboard QTEXT
PROMPTS:
ON/OFF <Off>:
OPTIONS:
ON • Displays text strings as boxes.
OFF • Displays text strings normally.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t. If Qtext is On, any new text you enter displays normally until the drawing
Regenerates and Mtext objects automatically display as boxed.
t. If Qtext is On and you use the Change, Ddedit, or Ddmodify command to edit the
text, or the List command for database information, the actual text is edited or
listed.
l Qtext boxes may take up more space than the actual text string.
l Qtext affects all text strings regardless of their Viewport, Mspace, or Pspace
location.
RELATED VARIABLES: Qtextmode
QTEXTMODE 439
EXAMPLE:
Otext Off Otext On

_ _ _ MAJOR PROCESS
UNE
_ _ _ MINOR PROCESS
UNE
- - - :::::====::J
c::::J
1:::'
......"-'....>''->'>''- INSTRU MENT

PNEUMATIC UNE
_____ INSTRUMENT
,===
_ _ _ _ _ ~
c : = : : '
ELECTRIC LINE
)( )( )( INSTRUMENT )( )( )(
CAPILLARY LINE
'QTEXTMODE (Quick TEXT MODE)

Qtextmode determines whether Text, Mtext, and Attributes are displayed as text strings or
whether boxes representing the text are displayed. This value is typically set using Qtext
or the Ddnnodes dialog box.

Keyboard QTEXTMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Turns Qtextmode Off.
• Turns Qtextmode On.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

i) If Qtextmode is On, any new text you enter displays normally until the drawing
Regenerates, and Mtext objects automatically display as boxed.
t> If Qtextmode is On and you use the Change, Ddedit, or Ddmodify command to
edit the text, or the List command for database information, the actual text is
edited or listed.
l Qtextmode boxes may take up more space than the actual text string.
l Qtextmode affects all text strings regardless of their Viewport, Mspace, or Pspace
location.
440 QTEXTMODE

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Qtext
EXAMPLE: See QTEXT
QUIT
Quit exits AutoCAD and returns you to Windows. If your drawing was modified since the
last automatic save feature, Qsave, Save, or Saveas command, you are given three
choices: Save and Quit, Quit without saving, or cancel the Quit command.

Pull-down File'" Exit
Screen menu FILE'" Exit:
Keyboard QUIT or EXIT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If you type Exit to activate the quit command and you receive the error message
"Unknown command... " it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the file named
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: End, Qsave, Save, Saveas
RAY 441
'RASTERPREVIEW
Rasterpreview determines whether preview drawing images are saved with the file and the
type of images that are created. Preview drawing images are displayed in the Ddinsert,
Open, Recover, Saveas, Wblock, and Xref Dialog boxes. This value is typically set using
the Render option of the Preferences dialog box.

Keyboard RASTERPREVIEW
OPTIONS:
o • Bitmap (BMP) only.
1 • Bitmap (BMP) and Windows Meta Format (WMF).
2 • Windows Meta Format (WMF) only.
3 • Preview image is not created.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, Setting Rasterpreview to 3 speeds the Qsave, Save, and Saveas commands and
creates smaller file sizes.
l Drawings saved in a format prior to Release 13 cannot create a preview drawing
image. See the Makepreview command as an alternative.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: End, Makepreview, Preferences, Qsave, Save, Saveas
RAY
Ray creates semi-infinite lines. Once you create the Ray the command repeats by asking
for another "through point" location. End the command by pressing <Enter> one extra
time or press the <Esc> key.
442 RAY
•
Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAW I-Ray:

Keyboard RAY
PROMPTS:
From point:
Through point:
OPTIONS:
From point • Selects a fixed starting point.
Through point • Selects a second point, determining direction and angle for the
Ray. This second point extends to infinity.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Zoom All and Extents do not take into account Rays. If the drawing only contains
Rays then Zooom All and Extents are based on the Limits. Use Zoom Vmax if you
want to display any Rays outside the Limits.
t> You can change a Ray's properties (layer; location; coordinates; color; linetype;
linetype scale) using Change, Chprop, Ddchprop, and Ddmodify.
t> Rays convert to Lines when edited with commands such as Trim Break, Fillet, etc.
~ You can use the Osnap options Endpoint and Nearest. There is only one Endpoint,
and that is based on the first point picked when the Ray was created.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Xline
RCONFIG (Render CONFIGure)

Rconfig reconfigures the rendering setup for DOS and UNIX based systems. Systems
using AutoCAD for Windows have no options that can be modified.

Pull-down Options - Render Configure...
Screen menu TOOLS - RENDER - Config:
Keyboard RCONFIG
RECTANG 443
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Render, Rpref
RECOVER
Recover activates the Recover Drawing File dialog box and attempts to restore damaged
drawings. If AutoCAD detects a damaged drawing during the Open command, it
automatically goes into the recovery mode by displaying the Recover Drawing File dialog
box.
An ASCII report file describing any problems and actions taken can be generated by
turning on the system variable Auditcd. This report is created in the same directory as the
current drawing. Its name is the same as the drawing file, with the extension .adt.

Pull-down File ~ Management > ~ Recover. ..
Screen menu FILE ~ MANAGE ~ Recover:
Keyboard RECOVER
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Files damaged with versions of AutoCAD earlier than Release 11 cannot be
restored with the Recover command.
~ You can delete .adt files without doing any harm to their associated drawing files.

:!: Every time an .adt report is created it writes on top of any existing audit report for
that same drawing file.
RELATED VARIABLES: Auditcd, Filedia
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Audit
RECTANG (RECTANGular box)

Rectang creates a rectangular Closed Polyline. You define two diagonal points that
determine length and width.
444 RECTANG

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 1-+ Rectang:

Keyboard RECTANG
PROMPTS:
First corner:
Other corner:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Extruding a Rectang creates a Solid box with the option to include a taper.
~ Use the Ai_box command to create 3-D wireframe boxes, and Box to create 3-D
Solid boxes.
! Rectangles default to the variable settings for polyline width (Plinewid) and
polyline linetype generation (Plinegen).
RELATED VARIABLES: Plinegen, Plinewid
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ai-Box, Box, Pline
EXAMPLE:
REDEFINE see UNDEFINE
REDO
Redo reverses the effects of the last Undo or U command.
REDRAWALL 445

Standard toolbar
Pull-down Edit - Redo

Screen menu ASSIST - Redo:
Keyboard REDO
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can Redo only once, and it must be the first command after Undo or U.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: U, Undo
'REDRAW see REDRA WALL
'REDRAWALL I REDRAW
Redraw cleans up the current viewport. Redrawall cleans up all the viewports. Blips are
removed, and any objects or parts of objects that disappeared, or seemed erased due to
editing, are redrawn. Grid dots are redrawn if the Grid is On.

Standard toolbar
Ig) Redraw Redrawall
Pull-down View - Redraw View and Redraw All
Screen menu VIEW - Redraw: and Redrw AI:
Keyboard REDRA WALL / REDRAW or R
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Some commands, like turning Grid On or Off, or turning Layers On automatically,
execute a Redraw .
.~ Objects are redrawn on Layers that are turned Off even though they are not seen;
objects on Frozen Layers are not redrawn.
~ You can stop a Redraw by pressing <Esc>.
446 REDRAWALL
~ If you type R to activate the redraw command and you receive the error message
"Unknown command... " it may be because AutoCAD cannot locate the file named
~ Grid density affects Redraw speed.
~ If curved objects, such as Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses, appear as if they are made up
of straight line segments, use the Regen command to smoothen their appearance.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Regen, Regenall
REGEN see REGENALL
REGENALL (REGENerate ALL) I REGEN (REGENerate)

Regen causes the current viewport to be regenerated. Regenall regenerates all viewports.
When a drawing is regenerated, all the data and geometry associated with each object are
recalculated. Changes made to some existing objects require a regeneration before they
are made visible. You can stop a Regen by pressing <Esc>.

Keyboard REGENALL/REGEN
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can control automatic regenerations with the Regenauto command.
~ Zoom All and Extents always force a Regen. Zoom Vmax never requires a Regen.
~ For best results, regenerate your drawing before it is plotted.
~ Objects on Layers that are Off are regenerated even though they are not seen;
Objects on Frozen Layers are not regenerated.
~ If curved objects, such as Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses, appear as if they are made up
of straight line segments, use the Regen command to smoothen their appearance.
RELATED VARIABLES: Regenmode, Vsmax, Vsmin
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Redraw, Redrawall, Regenauto, Viewres
REGENMODE 447
EXAMPLE:
~
~
'REGENAUTO (REGENerate AUTO)

Regenauto lets you suppress some (not all) regenerations. This value is maintained by the
Regenmode variable.

Keyboard REGENAUTO
PROMPTS:
ON/OFF <On >:
OPTIONS:
ON • Enables all regenerations.
OFF • Suppresses regenerations.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

(;, Zoom All and Extents always force a regeneration regardless of the Regenauto
setting. Zoom Vmax never requires a regeneration.
~ Regenauto off can suppress regenerations caused by changes to Blocks, Styles,
and Ltscale.
RELATED VARIABLES: Regenmode, Expert
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Regen, Regenall, Viewres
'REGENMODE
Regenmode controls the automatic Regens of a drawing. This value is typically set with
the Regenauto command.
448 REGENMODE

Keyboard REGENMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Turns Regenauto Off.
• Turns Regenauto On.
RELATED VARIABLES: Expertmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Regen, Regenall, Regenauto
REGION
Region creates a Solid from existing closed objects. These objects can be any
combination of Arcs, Circles, Ellipses, Elliptical Arcs, Lines, Plines, and Splines. All the
objects must form a closed shape or loop and cannot overlap or leave any gaps.

Draw toolbar •
Screen menu Constrct .. Region:
Keyboard REGION
PROMPTS:
Select Objects:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If you want to keep the original object(s) set Delobj to o.
~ You can create Composite Regions by using the Intersect, Subtract, and Union
commands.
I You can Explode a Region, turning some of the objects back to their original
deftnitions. Plines and any shapes made out of Plines such as Ellipses (Pellipse =
1) and Polygons convert to Lines and Arcs.
RELATED VARIABLES: Delobj
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Boundary, Explode, Intersect, Subtract, Union
REINIT 449
RE-INIT (RE-INITialize)
Re-init reinitializes the I/O ports, plotter, digitizer, display, and program parameters
(acad.pgp) file. This value is usually set with the Reinit dialog box.

Keyboard RE-INIT
OPTIONS:
Re-init is bit coded and its value is the sum of the following:
o • No reinitialization.
• Digitizer port reinitilization.
2 • Plotter port reinitialization.

4 • Digitizer reinitialization.
8 • Display reinitialization.
16 • PGP file reinitialization.
System Variable o Initial value Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Reinit
REINIT (REINITialize)
Reinit reinitializes the I/O ports, plotter, digitizer, display, and program parameters
(acad.pgp) file. A reinitialization dialog box has you check which modes need to be
reinitialized. The Re-init variable controls the various choices for Reinit.

Pull-down Tools -. Reinitialize ...
Screen menu TOOLS -. Reinit:
Keyboard REINIT
RELATED VARIABLES: Re-init
450 RENAME
RENAME
Rename lets you Rename Blocks, Dimstyle, Layers, Linetypes, Styles, UCS, Views, and
Viewport configurations. This can also be accomplished using the Ddrename dialog box.

Keyboard RENAME
PROMPTS:
Block/Dirnstyle/LAyer/LType/Style/Ucs/Vlew/VPort:
OPTIONS:
Old (object) name • Enter the old name.
New (object) name • Enter the new name.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> The Ddrename command lets you use wild-card characters to Rename more than
one item at a time.
t> To rename a drawing file, use the File Utilities menu.
t> You can Rename Layers with Ddlmodes or Ddemodes; UCSs with Dducs; Mline
definitions with Mlstyle; and Dimension Styles with Ddim.
t> If you have to Rename the same items for more than one drawing, create a Script
file to automate the process.
t> Named items are not case sensitive.
l You cannot Rename Layer 0; External reference Layers; and the Linetypes
Continuous, Bylayer, and Byblock.
l You can Rename the style Standard but you cannot Purge that style.
l You cannot Rename the Mline Style named Standard.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrename, Files
RENDER
Render creates a realistic shaded image of objects. The drawing can be rendered based on
predef"med Scenes, selected objects, or on the current display. Light sources and different
types of material can be assigned to the drawing or selected objects. Most of the default
values for the Render command are based on the Rpref (render preference) settings.
RENDER 451

Render toolbar
•
Screen menu TOOLS" RENDER
Keyboard RENDER
OPTIONS:
Render
Bendenng Type: AutoCAO Render
cene 10 R nd r Sere ..n PoIett& Oestlftabon
"current vi~
IBe8\ Map/No Fold I±J IViewport
R ndonng Options
III s.mooth Shading Width 1036
r hi rge Height 686
III ~ply loIatenols
Smoothing Angle:
loIore QpIJDn •..•
II Render Oblects ( Cancel
Rendering Type • See the Rpref command.

Scene to Render • Lists the scenes defined in the drawing. The default,
"current view," uses the current screen display and all
the lights defined in the drawing. If no lights are
defined, it uses an "over the shoulder" distant light
source with an intensity of I and an ambient light
intensity of O.
Screen Palette • See the Rpref command.
Destination • See the Rpref command.
Render Scene • Renders the current scene.
Render Objects < • Renders selected objects.
452 RENDER
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can set the background color for renderings by setting the color of the
Graphics Window background from the System option of the Preferences dialog
box.
~ Rmat attaches rendering material to objects. Saveimg saves a rendered image to a
file. Replay displays rendered files.
~ Issuing Render automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for
use. Since this takes up valuable memory, it may slow down AutoCAD or other
~ Issuing Render automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
cancel out of the command this layer is still created.
~ If the Render dialog box does not display, check the Rendering Procedure option
of the Rendering Preferences (Rpret) dialog box. When the Skip Render dialog
box is checked, it disables the Render dialog box.
:l Changing some of the settings in the Render dialog box affects the Rpref
command and vice versa.
:l You cannot Render models in Paper space.
£ When you use the Render command and the dialog box fails to appear, it may be
caused by the Rendering Procedure setting of the Rpref command.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Light, Rpref, Replay, Rmat, Saveimg, Scene
RENDERUNLOAD
Renderunload unloads the rendering software from your computer's memory. Issuing any
of the rendering commands automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready
for use. Since this takes up valuable memory, it may slow down AutoCAD or other
Windows programs you may want active. You can determine whether the Rendering
program is loaded by pressing and holding down the <Alt> key while pressing the <Tab>
key repeatedly to cycle through the running applications.

Keyboard RENDERUNLOAD
REPLAY 453
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> The following commands load the Rendering software: 3Dsin, 3Dsout, Light,
Matlib, Render, Replay, Rmat, Rpref, Saveimg, Scene, and Stats.
~ The Undo command has no effect on the loading or unloading of the Rendering
software.
REPLAY
Replay displays GIF, TGA, and TIFF images. Using Redraw, or any command that causes
a redraw, clears the image from the screen.

Screen menu Tools'" Replay:
Keyboard REPLA Y
OPTIONS:
Image Specifications
IMAGE 19b199 SCREEN 1036><686
Imllge Off8e\ Screen Offset

l(; roJ v 0
1m ge Sile Screen Size

l(; ~V 199 )( 199 V 199
IMAGE • Determines how much of the image will be displayed on the

screen. The default (in pixels) is to display the whole image. The
values are reflected in the Image Offset and Image Size text
boxes. You can pick two points in the Image tile, graphically
showing which part of the image should be displayed, or enter
values in the Image Offset text boxes.
454 REPLAY
Image Offset • Detennines the X,Y coordinate of the image's lower left comer
position. This value can also be set by selecting points in the
Image tile.
Image Size • Detennines the size of the image area in pixels. This value can
also be set by selecting points in the Image tile.
SCREEN • Detennines the location of the image. The default (in pixels)
displays the whole image starting from the lower left hand
comer. You select a new location point by selecting the Screen
tile.
Screen Offset • Detennines the X,Y coordinate of the image's lower left comer
position in the display. This value can also be set by selecting a
point in the Screen tile.
Screen Size • Detennines the maximum size, in pixels, of the image that can
appear on the screen. This value can also be set by selecting a
point in the Screen tile.
Reset • Restores the Image Offset, Image Size, and Screen Offset to
their original values.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Saveimg and Render commands are able to create TIP, GIF, and TGA files.
&, The image is displayed in the current viewport or in the Render Window based on
the destination setting. The Rpref and Render dialog boxes let you detennine the
destination setting.
&, Issuing Replay automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for use.
~ Issuing Replay automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
RELATED VARIABLES: Saveimages
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Render, Rpref, Saveimg
'RESUME see SCRIPT

REVOLVE 455
REVOLVE
Revolve generates Solids by revolving a 2-D object about an axis. The 2-D objects can be
Closed Polylines, Closed Splines, circles, Donuts, Rectangles, Polygons, Regions, and
Ellipses.

Solids toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 -. SOLIDS -. Revolve:

Keyboard REVOLVE
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
Axis of revolut ion - Object/X/Y/<Sta rt point of ax is> :
<End point of axis>:
Angle of r evo lution <full circle>:
OPTIONS:
Start point of axis • Defines the first point of the axis of revolution.
Endpoint of axis • Defines the second point of the axis of revolution.

Axis of revolution
Object • Selects an existing Line or Polyline that defines the axis.
X • Uses the positive X axis of the current UCS.
Y • Uses the positive Yaxis of the current UCS.
Angle of revolution • Specify an angle of revolution or press Return to revolve
<full circle> the object 360 degrees.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can create 2-D closed objects with Lines, Arcs, and Plines and then convert
them into a Closed Pline using the Pedit - Join option or the Region command.
~ You cannot Extrude objects defined as Blocks.
~ You cannot Extrude Polylines whose segments intersect.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dispsilh, Delobj

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Explode, Hide, Region, Shade, UCS, Vpoint
456 REVOLVE
EXAMPLE:
First axis endPoint~

I
Second axis endPoint)

I
I
REVSURF (REVolved SURFace)
Revsurf generates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) by revolving a selected profile or path
curve around an axis.

Surface toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 -. SURFACES -. Revsurf:

Keyboard REVSURF
PROMPTS:
Select path curve:
Select axis of revolution:
Start angle <0>:
Included angle (+=ccw, - =cw) <Full circle>:
OPTIONS:
Select path curve • The path curve defines the N direction of the surface
polygon mesh. The profile or path curve can be made up of
a single Line, Arc, Circle, Polyline, or 3-D Poly.
Select axis of • The axis defmes the M direction of the surface mesh. The
revolution axis can be a Line, an Open Polyline or 3-D Poly. If you use
a Polyline, the revolution axis is considered a line from the
first vertex to the last vertex, omitting any other vertices.
RIASPECT 457
Start angle • Determines the start of the surface of revolution. It can be

offset from the path curve.
Included angle • Determines the distance of revolution around the axis.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The direction of revolution is determined by the right-hand rule of rotation and the
point used to pick the axis of rotation. In the right-hand rule, with only the thumb
extended and pointing in the positive axis direction, the fingers curve in the
direction of positive rotation.
~ Exploding the Revsurf converts the meshes into 3-D Faces.
RELATED VARIABLES: Surftabl, Surftab2

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dmesh, Explode, Hide, Pedit, Rectang, Render,
Shade, UCS, Vpoint
EXAMPLE:
Path
Curve
RIASPECT (Raster Image ASPECT)

Riaspect controls the aspect ratio for imported raster images.

Keyboard RIASPECT
458 RIASPECT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ PCX files contain no aspect ratio.
~ Setting Riaspect to 0.8333 is recommended when importing VGA or MCGA

images in 320 x 200 mode.
RELATED VARIABLES: Ribackg, Riedge, Rigamut, Rigrey, Rithresh
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Gifin, Import, Tiffin
RIBACKG (Raster Image BACKGround)

Ribackg sets the background color for imported raster images. Use the numbers
associated to the AutoCAD colors. See the Ddcolor dialog box for a listing of the colors
and their number assignments.

Keyboard RIBACKG
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Set the background color to the most widely used image color. This reduces the
size of the imported raster image.
System Variable a Initial default Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Riaspect, Riedge, Rigamut, Rigrey, Rithresh
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Gifin, Import, Tiffin
RIEDGE (Raster Image EDGE)

Riedge determines the raster image edge detection feature for imported .giJ, .pcx, and .tif
files.
RIGREY 459

Keyboard RIEDGE
OPTIONS:
o • Disables raster image edge detection.
1-255 • Sets the threshold for raster image edge detection.
RELATED VARIABLES: Riaspect, Ribackg, Rigamut, Rigrey, Rithresh
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Gifin, Import, Pcxin, Tiffm
RIGAMUT (Raster Image GAMUT)

Rigamut determines the maximum number of colors assigned to imported color .gif, .pcx,
and .tiffiles.

Keyboard RIGAMUT
RELA TED VARIABLES: Riaspect, Ribackg, Riedge, Rigrey, Rithresh
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Gifin, Import, Pcxin, Tiffin
RIGREY (Raster Image GREY)

Rigrey determines whether or not raster files are imported as gray-scale images.

Keyboard RIGREY
460 RIGREY
OPTIONS:
o • Disables gray-scale images.
greater than 0 • Converts each pixel in raster images to a gray-scale value.
RELATED VARIABLES: Riaspect, Ribackg, Riedge, Rigamut, Rithresh
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Gifin, Import, Pcxin, Tiffm
RITHRESH (Raster Image THRESHold)

Rithresh controls the colors imported from raster images based on their brightness.

Keyboard RITHRESH
OPTIONS:
o • Turns off Rithresh.
greater than 0 • Determines the brightness threshold for images.
RELATED VARIABLES: Riaspect, Ribackg, Riedge, Rigamut, Rigrey
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Gifin, Import, Pcxin, Tiffin
RMAT (Render MATerial)

Rmat lets you create, Modify, Preview, Import, Export, and Delete fmishing materials. It
also lets you assign these finishes to individual objects and to layers.

Render tool bar
Keyboard RMAT
RMAT 461
OPTIONS:
Materials • Lists the Materials currently loaded in the drawing.

*GLOBAL* is the default for objects with no material
attached.
Preview • Displays a sample of any of the materials selected from the
Materials list.
Materials Library... • Displays a list of materials defined in the Materials

Library. See Matlib for more detailed information.
Select < • Displays the drawing and lets you select objects to
determine how the material is to be attached. The
information is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box.
Modify... • Modify a material selected from the Materials list. See the
Modify Standard Material dialog box.
Duplicate... • Create a new material based on the values of an existing
material. See the Modify Standard Material dialog box.
New... • Create a new material. See the Modify Standard Material

dialog box.
Attach < • Displays the drawing and lets you assign the current
material to the selected objects.
462 RMAT
Detach < • Displays the drawing and lets you unassign or detach
material assigned to objects.
By ACI... • Lets you attach materials to objects based on the object's
color assignment.
By Layer... • Lets you attach material to objects based on the object's
layer assignment.
ModIfy Slandard Material

1------------r~~~O~O~S-H-IN~G~I~S
YIlIUB fl.iiU 1...........1_ _ _....1 1

'+
....
Color
ri OXACI
ColorSyal m
Red
Gr n
Material Name • When modifying a material, its name is listed in the text box.
If you type over the existing name it will rename the material.
If you are creating a duplicate or new material you must enter
the new material name.
Attributes • Lets you change the individual material attributes for Color,
Ambient, Reflection, and Roughness.
Color • Sets the main or diffuse color of the material. You set this
using the Value or Color control.
Ambient • Sets the material's ambient or shadow color. You set this
ROTATE 463
Reflection • Sets the material's reflective or specular color. You set this
Roughness • Sets the roughness or shininess of the material. You set this
using the Value control.
Value • Adjusts the selected Attribute (Color, Ambient, or Reflection)
value.
Color • Adjusts the selected Attribute (Color, Ambient, Reflection, or
Roughness) value. See the AutoCAD Command Reference
guide for more detailed information.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You import materials and define new materials using the Matlib command.
t> Issuing Rmat automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for use.
with the Renderunload command. Even the undo command has no effect on
~ Issuing Rmat automatically creates a Locked Layer named ASHADE. Even if you
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Matlib, Render
ROTATE
Rotate moves objects around a pivot, or base point.

Modify tool bar (>.
Screen menu MODIFY - Rotate:

Keyboard ROTATE
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
Base point:
<Rotation angle>/Reference:
464 ROTATE
OPTIONS:
Base point • Reference point about which the objects are rotated.
<Rotation angle> • The angle objects are rotated from their current orientation.
A positive number creates a counterclockwise rotation; a
negative number creates a clockwise rotation.
Reference • Prompts for a reference angle and a new rotation angle
relative to the reference angle.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t. You can change the rotation of most objects by using the Change, Ddmodify, and
Grip editing features.
t. The Grips editing feature has its own rotate routine that lets you create multiple
copies at the same time.
t. Use Align instead of Rotate if you plan to Rotate and Move the same set of
objects.
t. When Rotating associative dimension objects the dimension text retains its
original orientation. You can rotate associative dimension text using Dim Trotate,
Dimtedit, or the Dimedit command.
t. The Ddinsert and Insert commands let you Insert Blocks rotated. The Xref
command lets you Insert Blocks rotated. The Minsert command Arrays and
Rotates Blocks.
t. If you want to rotate your drawing's cross hairs and work at a different rotation
angle, use the Rotate option of the Snap command or defme a UCS.
t. Rotating a Viewport in Paper space causes the viewport center point to rotate
about the base point while keeping the viewport border parallel to the edges of the
graphics display area.
t. If you Move or Copy objects and then want to rotate the same objects, you can
quickly select the objects to rotate using the Previous selection set option.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Align, Ddinsert, grips, Insert, Minsert, Rotate3d, Xref
ROTATE3D 465
EXAMPLE:
Before
~O . 38
00.98
Basepoint
45
ROTATE3D
Rotate3d lets you rotate objects about an arbitrary 3-D axis.

Modify tool bar ~
Screen menu MODIFY'" Rotate: ... Rotat3D:

Keyboard ROTATE3D
PROMPTS:
Axis by Object/Last/View/Xaxis/Yaxis/Zaxis/<2points>:
OPTIONS:
Axis by Object • Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object.
Last • The last used axis of rotation.
View • Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction that
passes through the selected point.
Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis • Aligns the axis of rotation with one of the standard axes
that pass through the selected point.
< 2points > • Enters the first of the two points on the axis of rotation.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Align, Rotate
466 RPREF
RPREF (Render PREFerence)

Rpref sets rendering preferences.

Render toolbar
Screen menu TOOLS ~ RENDER ~ Prefer:

Keyboard RPREF
OPTIONS:
Rendering Preferences
IAutoCAO Render l!l
Rendering Procedu.e
S.kip Render dIalog
Bende, enb.a acana
r. l1uary lor selectIOn.
Randanng Options light.

III s.mooth ShadIng leon Scale.
~ Merge
IX APply Material
Intormllljon •.
Ra~nhgu.a <
Rendering Type • Lists AutoCAD Render and other rendering programs

installed on your computer.
Screen Palette • Controls the color map when rendering or replaying
an image to a viewport using a 256 color combined
rendering device. If your computer is set to a
continuous color rendering driver there are no
available options.
RPREF 467
Rendering Procedure
Skip Render dialog • Detennines whether the Render dialog box is dis-
played before the drawing is rendered.
Render entire scene • Renders all the objects in a scene.
Query for selections • Lets you select the objects to render.

Rendering Options
Smooth Shading • Smoothes the edges, by blending colors, between
polygon meshes.
Merge • Combines multiple images. You can select objects to
render, overlaying them on top of existing rendered
images. You can also use the Replay command to
create a background and Render objects on top of that
image. This option does not work when the
Destination is set to Render Windows.
Apply Materials • When selected the Render command applies the
materials assigned to objects or ACI in the drawing.
When this is not selected all the objects assume the
Color, Ambient, Reflection, and Roughness attribute
values defined for the *Global* material.
Smoothing Angle • Detennines the angle for defining edges. The default
is 45 degrees. Angles less than a 45 degrees are
smoothed; angles 45 degrees and over are defined as
edges.
More Options ... • See the dialog box labeled AutoCAD Render Options.
Destination • Detennines the location of the rendering output.
Viewport • Renders the image to the screen.
Render Window • Renders the image to the Render Window.
File • Renders the image directly to a file.
More Options ... • This option activates the File Output Configuration
dialog box. It is only available when the Destination is
set to File. See the dialog box labeled File Output
Configuration.
468 RPREF
Lights • Controls the sizes of the blocks belonging to the Light

command.
Icon Scale • Determines the size of the blocks belonging to the
Light command. The blocks are Overhead, Direct,
and Sh_spot.
Infonnation ... • Displays information about your current configuration
and version of the rendering software.
Reconfigure < • Activates the Rconfig command.
AutoCAO Render Options

Face Contra Is
r:i 12.,scard Back Faces
ehong IX Back FaceliormeJ is Negative
Render Quality • Controls the type of shading - Gouraud or Phong -

when smooth shading is enabled.
Gouraud • Gouraud determines light intensity at each vertex and
intennediate intensities. This shading is faster than
Phong.
Phong • Phong is more sophisticated than Gouraud. It generates
shading with more realistic highlights. Phong shading
calculates light intensity at each pixel.
Face Control • Controls the faces of 3-D Solids.
Discard Back • Controls the calculation of back faces for 3-D Solid
Faces objects. Turning this option on speeds up the rendering
process.
Back Face Nonnal • Controls which faces are considered back faces of
is Negative objects. This is based on how the objects were created.
RULESURF 469
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> If the Render dialog box does not display, check the Rendering Procedure option
of the Rendering Preferences (Rpret) dialog box. When the Skip Render dialog
box is checked, it disables the Render dialog box.
~ Issuing Rpref automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for use.
t> Issuing Rpref automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Light, Rconfig, Render
RULESURF (RULEd SURFace)

Rulesurf generates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) depicting the ruled surface between two
curves.

Surfaces toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 ... SURFACES'" Rulsurf

Keyboard RULESURF
PROMPTS:
Select first defining curve:
Select second defining curve:
OPTIONS:
Select first defining curve • The first defining curve can be a Point, Line, Arc,
Circle, 2-D or 3-D Polyline.
Select second defming curve • The second defming curve can be a Point, Line,
Arc, Circle, 2-D or 3-D Polyline.
470 RULESURF
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> If one deftning curve is a Circle or Closed Polyline, then the other boundary must
be Closed.
t> The ruled surface for a Circle starts at the 0 degree quadrant.
t> The ruled surface for a Closed Polygon starts at the last vertex and is constructed
backwards.
t> When constructing ruled surfaces for open curves, the endpoints nearest the
selection pick points determine the start of the ruled surface.
~ You cannot use a Point to defme both boundaries. However, a Point can be used
with any open or closed boundary.
~ Exploding the Rulesurf converts the Meshes into 3-D Faces.
RELATED VARIABLES: Snapang, Surftabl
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dmesh, Explode, Hide, Pedit, Rectang, Render,
Shade, UCS, Vpoint
----
EXAMPLE:
o ,
SAVE 471
s
SAVE
Save lets you your update your drawing file by using the Save Drawing As dialog box.
The current drawing file is the default name. If you specify another directory and/or file
name a copy is created but your active drawing remains current.

Keyboard SA VE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You do not have to include the drawing extension .dwg. It is assumed.
~ It is recommended that you periodically save your drawing during an editing

session.
~ Each time you Save, the previous saved drawing is renamed as the backup (.bak)
drawing if Isavebak is set to 1.
Rasterpreview.
~ You can also save files by using the automatic save feature (Savetime), Qsave,
Saveas, End, and Quit commands. Qsave simply saves the drawing without
prompts and dialog boxes; Saveas activates the Save Drawing As dialog box; End
and Quit exit the AutoCAD program. End automatically saves your drawing, and
Quit gives you the opportunity to save your file if any commands were issued after
the last Qsave, Save, or Saveas command.
different name.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dwgname, Dwgprefix, Dwgwrite, Dwgtitled, Filedia,
Isavebak, Isavepercent, Rasterpreview, Savename, Savetime
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: End, Quit, Save, Saveas
472 SAVEAS
SAVEAS
Saveas lets you your update your drawing file by using the Save Drawing As dialog box.
The current drawing file is the default name. If you specify another directory and/or file
name a copy is created, which becomes your current drawing.

Pull-down File - Save As ...
Screen menu FILE - SaveAs:
Keyboard SAYEAS
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Qsave and Save act like the Saveas command when the current file status is
Unnamed.
Rasterpreview.
~ If you enter a new name and/or drive or directory, the original file is not updated.
It remains as it was when you first began the drawing session or when you last
Saved that file.
different name.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dwgname, Dwgprefix, Dwgtitled, Dwgwrite, Filedia,
lsavebak, Isavepercent, Rasterpreview, Savename, Savetime
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: End, Qsave, Quit, Save, Saveasr12
SAVEASR12 473
SAVEASR12 (SAVE AS Release 12)

Saveasr12 is similar to the Save and Saveas commands except that your drawing is saved
in a format compatible with the Release 12 version of AutoCAD.
Objects and features not available in Release 12 are converted to the following:
Convert From Convert To Convert From Convert To
3-D Solids Plines, Circles, Arcs Ray Line

Ellipse (True) Plines Region Plines
Group eliminated Spline Plines
Leader Plines, Text, Solid Tolerance Plines, Text
Mline Plines, Solids, Arcs Tolerance Plines, Text
Mlstyle eliminated Xline Line
Mtext Text Xref - Overlaid Xref - Attach

Pull-down File" Save R12 DWG ...
Screen menu FILE" EXPORT" SaveRl2:
Keyboard SA VEASR12
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Mtext objects default to the Standard text Style.
~ Xlines and Rays are clipped based on their current drawing extents. When no other
objects exist, they are clipped based on the current display.
~ Xref circular references are dropped during the conversion.

474 SAVEFILE
'SAVEFILE
Savefile stores the filename for the auto-save feature. You set this variable with the
Config command. Select Option 7 (Configure operating parameters) and then number 7.
(Automatic-save feature).

Keyboard SAVEFILE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t. If you want to retrieve and use the drawing file created with the auto-save feature,
you must rename the drawing file and assign it a .dwg file extension.
t. The drawing file created with the auto-save feature is saved in your default
directory unless you specified a path with the Config command.
~ The Savefile's extension is always .sv$.
System Variable AUTO.SV$, Read-only Configuration file String
RELATED VARIABLES: Savetime
SAVEIMG (SAVE IMaGes)

Saveimg saves images in TGA, TIFF, and GIF formats. The Saveimg option varies
depending on the destination setting of the Rpref or Render command.

Pull-down Tools ~ Image > ~ Save...
Screen menu TOOLS ~ SaveImg:
Keyboard SAVEIMG
SAVEIMG 475
OPTIONS:
Destination set to Viewport
Save Image
Portion
(0 Adrva Viewport
ORlWlng ArOIl
FIiJIScmon
Fonnat • Detennines the file fonnat: TGA, TIFF, or GIF.
Portion • Detennines the portion of the drawing to save.
Active Viewport • Saves the active viewport.
Drawing Area • Saves the complete drawing area.
Full Screen • Saves the entire display including the menu and Command
prompt.
Options... • Gives you the chance to save TGA and TIFF files in a
compressed fonnat.
Reset • Resets the Offset and Size boxes to their default settings.
Offset X, Y • Determines the lower left X,Y position of the image
selection area.
Size X, Y • Determines the upper right X,Y position of the image

selection area.
476 SAVEIMG
Destination set to File or Render Window
Save Image
Format • Determines the file format: TGA, TIFF, or GIF.

Portion • Determines the portion of the drawing to save. The default (in
pixels) is to save the whole image. The values are reflected in
the Offset and Size text boxes. You can pick two points in the
Portion tile, graphically showing which part of the image should
be saved, or enter values in the Offset and Size text boxes.
Options ... • Gives you the chance to save TGA and TIFF files in a
compressed format.
Reset • Resets the Portion tile and the Offset and Size boxes to their
default settings.
Offset X, Y • Determines the lower left X,Y position of the image selection
area.
Size X, Y • Determines the upper right X,Y position of the image selection
area.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

'" Use the Replay command to display the images.
:l This option is only available if your rendering device supports scanline images.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Render, Replay

SAVETIME 477
'SAVENAME
Savename stores the name of the current drawing.

Keyboard SA VENAME

System Variable name of the current file, Read-only Initial default String
RELATED VARIABLES: Savetime
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: New, Qsave, Save, Saveas
'SAVETIME
Savetime determines the frequency of automatic saves. This variable is set with the
Config command. Select Option 7. (Configure operating parameters) and then number 7
(Automatic-save feature) or you can use the Preferences command. Savetime is activated
as soon as you make any changes to the drawing. It is reset every time you issue a Qsave,
Save, or Saveas.

Keyboard SAVETIME
OPTIONS:
o • Disables Savetime.
1 - 600 • Sets the frequency of automatic saves in minutes.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Savetime saves a temporary file set by the Savefile variable. It does not affect the
current drawing's file name.
:l Once the Savetime interval is reached, the next command reactivates the Savetime
feature. Savetime can only work if you are actively using the computer. If the time
has expired and you are not actually using the computer no save is issued.

RELATED VARIABLES: Savefile
478 SAVETIME
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Config, Preferences, Qsave, Save, Saveas
SCALE
Scale changes the size of objects.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu MODIFY" Scale:

Keyboard SCALE
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
Base point:
<Scale factor> / Reference:
OPTIONS:
Base point • Reference point about which the objects are scaled.
Scale factor • Provides a value to multiply the X, Y, and Z dimensions. A value
greater than one enlarges the objects; a value between 0 and 1
reduces the size of the objects.
Reference • Specify a reference length and the new length you want the
reference length to become.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) You can change the size or scale of most objects using the Change, Ddmodify,
Grip, Lengthen, and Stretch editing features.
\) The Grips editing feature has its own scale routine that lets you create multiple
copies simultaneously.
\) If you Move or Copy objects and then want to Scale the same objects, you can
quickly select the objects to scale using the Previous selection set option.
l Drawings are normally drawn full size. When you Plot, use the plot routine to
scale your output to the plotter.
l You cannot scale X, Y, or Z values independently. If you need to have different X,
Y, and Z values you can create a Block and then use the Ddinsert or Insert
command and assign different values to X, Y, and Z.
SCENE 479
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddinsert, grips, Insert
EXAMPLE:
Before After
0 0
~o
Basepoint
0
0
Scale factor = 2
0
SCENE
Scene provides a method of creating, modifying, and deleting scenes. Scenes are created
by combining a named view with 0 to 500 light sources. Once Scenes have been defined
they are used to enhance the rendering of drawings.

Render toolbar
Screen menu TOOLS -. RENDER -. Scenes:

Keyboard SCENE
OPTIONS:
Scenes
Scenes·
"NONE" ~j 1
.,
li--
DOWN
rMNOow
liT tl,iodify_
Ilr nelele J
IlL OK "1 II Cancel I I 1::f.elp •• ! I
Scenes • Lists the names of scenes already created. This list is also displayed
in the Render dialog box.
New ... • Creates new scenes. This activates the New Scene dialog box.
480 SCENE
Modify ... • Makes changes to existing scenes. This activates the Modify Scene
dialog box.
Delete • Removes the scene highlighted or selected from the Scenes list.
New Scene
Scene Name • Assigns a name to a scene.
Views • Lists the views created in Model space. Selecting a view assigns
it to the scene. You can only assign one view to a scene.
Lights • Lists the lights created in the drawing. Select one or more lights
to add to the scene. Selecting a highlighted light removes the
light from the scene. Selecting ALL selects all the lights in the
drawing.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) Use Vpoint and Dview to set up the Views. Use the Ddview or View command to
save the Views.
\) If no Scenes are defmed and you go to Render, the default is the current display
including all the defmed light sources. If there are no defmed light sources
AutoCAD uses an "over the shoulder" distant light source with an intensity of 1
and an ambient light intensity of O.
SCREENMODE 481
~ Issuing Scene automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for use.
~ Issuing Scene automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddview, Light, Render, View
'SCREENBOXES
Screenboxes stores the maximum number of lines that can be displayed on the screen
menu. This number varies based on the AutoCAD platform and your video configuration.
The value is set using the System option of the Preferences command.

Keyboard SCREENBOXES
System Variable 38, Read-only Configuration file Integer
'SCREENMODE
Screenmode keeps track of the current graphics/text state of your AutoCAD display.

Keyboard SCREENMODE
OPTIONS:
Screenmode is bit coded and its value is the sum of the following:
o • Text screen is displayed.
• Graphics screen is displayed.
2 • Dual Screen display configuration.
482 SCREENMODE

System Variable varies, Read-only Configuration file Integer
'SCREENSIZE
Screensize maintains the size of the current viewport (X,y) in pixels.

Keyboard SCREENSIZE
System Variable varies, Read-only Initial default 2-D point
SCRIPT I DELAY I RESUME

Script files automate routine tasks. A script file is an ASCII text file created with a text
editor that contains commands and responses in the exact order of execution. The file has
the extension .scr. The script can be executed with the Script command to perform the
series of commands. The default script name is the current drawing file name. Delay,
Resume, and Rscript are commands that control the running of the script.

Pull-down Tools - Run Script...
Screen menu TOOLS - Script:
Keyboard SCRIPT
OPTIONS:
DELAY. Creates a pause, in milliseconds, between commands. The
maximum delay is 32,767, or just under 33 seconds. The actual
number of seconds may vary depending on the computer's
hardware.
RESUME • Reactivates a script that was interrupted. If the script stopped in the
middle of a command, you may need to type Resume with a leading
apostrophe ('Resume).
SECTION 483
rscript • Repeats the script file. This command is placed as the last entry of a
script file. You stop the script using the <Esc> (cancel) or Back-
space key.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Scripts are often used to display slide shows, plot drawings, and reset system
variables. If you change drawing standards and need to update existing drawings,
use script files to do the work.
t> When using the Rscript option you may want to turn off the Undo (Control -
None) and Log file features since the files will continuously increase in size and
take up disk space.
prompted at the Command line. Entering a tilde (- ) at the Command line
l The Undo command considers a Script sequence as one group. Therefore, you can
reverse the effects of a Script with a single U command.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Vslide
SECTION
Section creates a Region from the cross section of a 3-D Solid at a designated plane.

Solids toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 ~ SOLIDS ~ Section:

Keyboard SECTION
PROMPTS:
Object/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/ZX/<3 points >:
484 SECTION
OPTIONS:
<3 points> • Identifies three points on a sectioning plane. See Example.
Object • Aligns the sectioning plane with an Arc, Circle, Ellipse, Polyline,
or Spline.
Zaxis • Determines the sectioning plane by an origin point on the Z axis of
the plane.
View • Aligns the sectioning plane with the current Viewport's viewing
plane.
XY • Aligns the sectioning plane with the XY plane of the current UCS.
YZ • Aligns the sectioning plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS.
ZX • Aligns the sectioning plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Region, Slice
EXAMPLE:
3 Points
SELECT
Select lets you pick objects that are retained and can be recalled when using the previous
selection set option. See the following entry named SELECTION SETS for more detailed
information.
selection sets 485

Standard toolbar See OPTIONS for SELECTION SETS.
Screen menu ASSIST -. Select:
Keyboard SELECT
PROMPTS:
Se lec t obje c ts :
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Select is often used in macros and in AutoLiSP and other types of programs.
l You cannot select Model space objects when working in Paper space and vice
versa.
selection sets
Selection sets are used to locate object(s) for editing and inquiry commands. You form a
selection set at the 'Select objects' prompt displayed by most commands. You create
selection sets using the various choices listed in the following options section. As a
selection set is formed the objects are usually highlighted on-screen.

Standard toolbar See OPTIONS.
Screen menu SERVICE
Keyboard See OPTIONS for a complete listing.
OPTIONS:
~ Add • Add objects to the selection set. This is only used after using the
Remove option and you want to include more objects in the
selection set.
ALL • Selects all objects in the drawing except those on Locked or
Frozen Layers.
AUto • If the pick fails to select an object, the selection method
becomes the Box option.
BOX • Moving the cross hairs to the right defines a Window; to the left
defines a Crossing.
486 selection sets
Crossing • Selects objects crossing or totally enclosed within a windowed

~ area.
f.§) CPolygon
orCP
• You create an irregular polygon boundary, and all objects
crossing or totally enclosed within the area are selected. The
polygon can not intersect itself.
Fence • Similar to the Cpolygon option except it is not a closed polygon.
You draw a line through the desired objects.
Group • Selects all objects within a specified group.
Last • Selects the last object drawn and displayed in the current
~ viewport. If the last object is on a Locked Layer it cannot be
chosen.
Multiple • Allows you to pick multiple points before the drawing is
searched for objects at those points.
Pick point • Selects one object at a time. The size of the target box is
determined by the Pickbox value.
Previous
~ • Selects the Previous selection set.
Remove
"
• Removes objects from the selection set.
<Return> • Completes the selection set process unless the single option is
active.
SIngle • Ends the selection process after the object or objects are found.
Undo • Removes the last group of selected objects.
Window • Selects objects totally enclosed within a windowed area.
WPolygon • You create an irregular polygon boundary, and all objects totally
orWP enclosed within the area are selected. The polygon can not
intersect itself.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Undo and Ending a session clear the Previous selection set.
~ Previous selects all the Points or Blocks drawn by the Divide or Measure
command.
~ You cannot use the Previous option when moving back and forth between Model
space and Paper space.
SETVAR 487
:l You cannot select objects from Model space that were created in Paper space and
vice versa.
:l You cannot select objects on Locked Layers.
:l When Pickfirst is set to 1 you can either select objects before or after issuing
commands. If you pick objects before issuing an edit or inquiry command, you can
select objects individually and use the Auto method. The rest of the choices are
not available.
RELATED VARIABLES: Highlight, Pickadd, Pickauto, Pickbox, Pickdrag, Pickfirst
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddselect, Filter, grips, Pickbox, Select
'SETVAR (SET VARiable)

Setvar sets system variables. These are variables or data that are saved as integers, reals,
points, or text strings. Some of the variables are saved in the drawing file and a few in the
general configuration file. Some are only retained for the current editing session, and
others are read-only. Scripts, macros, AutoLISP, and other programming routines
frequently access system variables.
Most variables are automatically modified through AutoCAD commands. See the
individual variables for more detailed information.
,Acadprefix 'Dimblk 'Dragpl 'Maxactvp 'Snapmode
'Acadver 'Dimblkl 'Dragp2 'Maxsort 'Snapstyl
'Aflags 'Dimblk2 'Dwgcodepage 'Menuctl 'Snapunit
'Angbase 'Dimcen 'Dwgname 'Menuecho 'Sortents
'Angdir 'Dimclrd 'Dwgprefix 'Menuname 'Splframe
Aperture 'Dimclre 'Dwgtitled 'Mirrtext 'Splinesegs
Area 'Dimclrt 'Dwgwrite 'Modemacro 'Splinetype
'Attdia 'Dimdec 'Edgemode 'Mtexted 'Surftab 1
'Attmode 'Dimdle 'Elevation 'Offsetdist 'Surftab2
'Attreq 'Dimdli 'Expert 'Orthomode 'Surftype
'Auditcd 'Dimexe 'Explmode 'Osmode 'Surfu
'Aunits 'Dimexo 'Extmax 'Pdmode 'Surfv
'Auprec 'Dimfit 'Extmin 'Pdsize 'Syscodepage
488 SETVAR
'Backz 'Dimgap 'Facetres 'Pellipse 'Tabmode

Blipmode 'Dimjust 'Fflimit 'Perimeter 'Target
'Cdate 'Dimlfac 'Filedia 'Pfacevmax 'Tdcreate
'Cecolor 'Dimlim 'Filletrad 'Pickadd 'Tdindwg
'Celtscale 'Dimpost 'Fillmode 'Pickauto 'Tdupdate
'Celtype 'Dimrnd 'Fontalt 'Pickbox 'Tdusrtimer
'Chamfera 'Dimsah 'Fontmap 'Pickdrag 'Tempprefix
'Chamferb 'Dimscale 'Frontz 'Pickfirst 'Texteval
'Chamferc 'Dimsdl 'Gridmode 'Pickstyle 'Textfill
'Chamferd 'Dimsd2 'Gridunit 'Platform 'Textqlty
'Charnmode 'Dimsel 'Gripblock 'Plinegen 'Textsize
'Circlerad 'Dimse2 'Gripcolor 'Plinewid 'Textstyle
'Clayer 'Dimsho 'Griphot 'Plotid 'Thickness
'Cmdactive 'Dimsoxd 'Grips 'Plotrotmode Tilemode
'Cmddia 'Dimstyle 'Gripsize 'Plotter 'Tooltips
'Cmdecho 'Dimtad 'Handles 'Polysides 'Tracewid
'Cmdnames 'Dimtdec 'Highlight 'Popups 'Treedepth
'Cmljust 'Dimtfac 'Hpang 'Projmode 'Treemax
'Cmlscale 'Dimtih 'Hpbound 'Psltscale 'Trimmode
'Cmlstyle 'Dimtix 'Hpdouble 'Psprolog 'Ucsfollow
'Coords 'Dimtm 'Hpname 'Psquality Ucsicon
'Cvport 'Dimtofl 'Hpscale 'Qtextmode 'Ucsname
'Date 'Dimtoh 'Hpspace 'Rasterpreview 'Ucsorg
'Dbmod 'Dimtol 'Insbase 'Regenroode 'Ucsxdir
'Delobj 'Dimtolj 'Insname 'Savefile 'Ucsydir
'Diastat 'Dimtp '!savepercent 'Saveimages 'Undoctl
'Dimalt 'Dimtsz 'Isavebak 'Savename 'Undomarks
'Dctmain 'Dimtvp 'Isolines 'Savetime 'Undoondisk
SETVAR 489
'Dctcust 'Dimtxsty 'Lastangle 'Screenboxes 'Unitmode
'Dimaltd 'Dimtxt 'Lastpoint 'Screenmode 'Viewctr

'Dimaltf 'Dimtzin 'Lenslength 'Screensize 'Viewdir
'Dimalttd 'Dimunit 'Limcheck 'Shadedge 'Viewmode
'Dimalttz 'Dimupt 'Limrnax 'Shadedif 'Viewsize
'Dimaltu 'Dimzin 'Limmin 'Shpname 'Viewtwist
'Dimaltz 'Dispsilh 'Locale 'Sketchinc 'Visretain
'Dimapost 'Distance 'Loginname 'Skpoly 'Vsmax
'Dimaso 'Donutid Ltscale 'Snapang 'Vsmin
'Dimasz 'Donutod 'Lunits 'Snapbase 'Worlducs
'Dimaunit Dragmode 'Luprec 'Snapisopair 'Worldview
'Xrefctl

Pull-down Options ~ System Variables
Screen menu OPTIONS ~ Sys Var:
Keyboard SETVAR
PROMPTS:
variable name or ?:
OPTIONS:
Variable • Enter the name of a variable to change.
name
? • Activates the wild-card options for reviewing variable settings. The
default, an asterisk, displays a sorted listing of all variables. You can
use any of the wild-card options to create a more specific list.
490 SETVAR
You can access the variables with the Setvar command or by typing the variable name
directly at the Command prompt. Since a few of the variables share the same names with
commands, you can only access those variables by ftrst issuing the Setvar command. The
following variables can only be accessed by ftrst issuing the Setvar command:
Aperture • Aperture controls the size of the target box located at the intersection
of the cross hairs during Object Snap (Osnap) selection. The size of
the Aperture box may be changed by specifying its height in pixels
(1-50). A pixel is the smallest visible dot that appears on the screen.
You can set this value with the Ddosnap command.
Initial default Subsequent default Value
10 Configuration me Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Osmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Aperture, Ddosnap, Osnap
Area • Area maintains the latest value of the Area command.

0.0000, Read-only Initial default Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Perimeter
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Area, Dblist, List, Massprop
Blipmode • Controls the display of the small temporary blips or cross marks
that appear when entering points or selecting objects.
o • Off - Suppresses blips.
1 • On - Generates blips.
2 • Auto - Automatically enables Drag for any command that
supports dragging.
Initial default Subsequen~ default Value
1 Last value used in the drawing Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Blipmode, Ddrmodes
SETVAR 491
Dragmode • Controls the way objects are displayed as they are dragged about
the drawing.
° • Off - Ignores all dragging requests.
• On - Enables dragging when requested.
2 • Auto - Automatically enables drag for any command that

supports dragging.
2 Last value used in drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Dragp 1, Dragp2
Ltscale • Assigns a global scale multiplier for all Linetypes.

1.0000 Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Celtscale, Psltscale
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddlmodes, Ddltype, Layer, Linetype, Ltscale
Ucsicon • Determines the visibility and location of the ues icon.

Ucsicon is bit coded and its value is the sum of the following:
° • The UCS icon is invisible and set to no-origin.
• The ues icon is visible.
2 • Displays the Ucsicon at the origin of the current ues (0,0,0). If the
origin is off the screen viewing area, the icon is shown in the lower
left comer.
Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Ucsfollow, Ucsname, Ucsorg, Ucsxdir, Ucsydir, Worlducs
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Dducsp, Dview, Mspace, Pspace, UCS, Ucsicon
492 SETVAR
TIPS & WARNINGS:

l All system variables are Transparent except for Tilemode.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: transparent commands and variables
SH see SHELL
SHADE
Shade produces a shaded rendering of the current viewport. Only one light source is used
and the only control over this command is by changing the settings of the system variables
Shadedge and Shadedif.

Render toolbar
Screen menu TOOLS - SHADE

Keyboard SHADE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Create slides (Mslide) of Shaded viewports for later viewing (Vslide).
l You cannot Plot a shaded viewport.
l You cannot select objects that are displayed as shaded unless you Regenerate the
drawing.
RELATED VARIABLES: Shadedge, Shadedif
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Render
'SHADEDGE (SHADe EDGE)

Shadedge specifies how faces and edges are displayed when shaded.

Screen menu TOOLS - SHADE - Shadedge
Keyboard SHADEDGE
SHADEDIF 493
OPTIONS:
o • Faces are shaded and the edges are not highlighted.
• Faces are shaded and the edges are drawn in the background color.
2 • Faces are not filled and the edges are in the object's color.
3 • Faces are in the object's color and edges are in the background color.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Shadedge affects all viewports.

RELATED VARIABLES: Shadedif
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Shade
'SHADEDIF (SHADE DIFfuse)

Shadedif specifies how the model is illuminated. It is the ratio of diffuse reflective light to
ambient light. The value can be set anywhere from 0 to 100. A higher setting increases
diffuse lighting and adds more reflectivity and contrast to the image.

Screen menu TOOLS - SHADE - Shadedif
Keyboard SHADEDIF
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Shadedif affects all viewports.

RELATED VARIABLES: Shadedge
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Shade
494 SHAPE
SHAPE
Shape inserts shapes into the drawing. Shapes are an alternative to Blocks, and their
definitions are stored in shape files. Each shape file can contain numerous symbol
definitions. The shape file (extension .shp) must be compiled with the Compile command.
The extension for a compiled shape file is .shx. Once the shape file is compiled, it must be
loaded with the Load command before it can be used.

Miscellaneous toolbar [i]
Screen menu DRAW 2 .. Shape
Keyboard SHAPE
PROMPTS:
Shape name (or ?):
OPTIONS:
? • Activate wild-card options for reviewing the names of shapes defined in the
drawing. The default, an asterisk, displays a listing of all loaded shapes. You
can use any of the wild-card options to create a more specific list.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Shape files can be used to produce special text fonts and symbols.
~ Shapes regenerate much faster than the same symbols stored as Blocks and take up
less memory.
~ If Grips are enabled, the shape's Grip definition point is the insertion point.
Picking this point lets you relocate the shape.
l Even though shape definitions require less memory, they are not as desirable as
Block definitions. They cannot be Exploded or scaled differently in X and Y
directions. Shape files are external to the drawing file and must always accompany
the drawing file.
l You can only Osnap to a shape's Insertion point.
l Shapes cannot include Attribute definitions, but Blocks may contain both Shapes
and Attributes.
l Complex shape definitions are tedious and time-consuming to create.
SHEll 495
RELATED VARIABLES: Shpname

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Blocks, Compile, Load, Purge
EXAMPLE:
Some sample shape files come with your AutoCAD software. These files are named
es.shp, pc.shp, st.shp. and can be found in the Sample directory. Complete the following
steps if you want to view the shape files in your drawing.
Step 1. Compile at least one of the shape files with the Compile command.
Step 2. Load the shape file(s) with the Load command.
Step 3. Execute the Shape command. Use the question mark (?) option to find
out the shape names.
SHELL I SH
Shell or Sh functions as a gateway between AutoCAD, DOS (Disk Operating System),
and other external programs. Pressing <Enter> once after typing Shell or Sh allows you to
issue a single DOS command and then immediately returns to AutoCAD. Pressing
<Enter> at the DOS Command prompt keeps you in DOS until you type Exit, returning
you to AutoCAD. Once in the operating system, you can execute most operating system
commands. It is also possible to access other software programs via Shell, depending on
their memory requirements.
Since Shell and Sh were intended for the DOS version of AutoCAD, they may not work
on your Windows version. It is recommended that you use Windows based programs
when possible.

Keyboard SHELL or SH
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If you type the word Sh or Shell to activate the Disk Operating System and you
receive the error message "Unknown command ... " it may be because AutoCAD
modified the file. Acad.pgp is usually located in the AutoCAD Support directory.
l Do not delete any temporary AutoCAD files. These files usually have a $ symbol
in the file name or extension, or they are lock files where the last character in the
extension is a K. Only delete such files after you have exited from your AutoCAD
session.
496 SHELL

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Catalog, Del, Dir, Edit, Type
SHOWMAT (SHOW MATerial)

Showmat lists the material and the attachment method assigned to selected objects.

Keyboard SHOWMAT
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Rmat
'SHPNAME (SHaPe NAME)

Shpname sets and maintains the default Shape name. This value is usually set with the
Shape command.

Keyboard SHPNAME
OPTIONS:
• Resets the value to no default.
System VariabIe none Initial default String
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Shape
SKETCH
Sketch lets you draw freehand, creating contiguous short line segments, with an imaginary
pen. You first specify line segment length, then sketch temporary line segments. A record
option stores the line segments when you are finished. You have the option of setting a
system variable (Skpoly) to sketch either Lines or Polylines. You must have a pointing
device such as a mouse or digitizer.
SKETCH 497

Miscellaneous toolbar ~
Screen menu DRAWl -. Sketch:

Keyboard SKETCH
PROMPTS:
Record increment <0.1000>:
Sketch. Pen eXit Quit Record Erase Connect.
OPTIONS:
Record increment <0.1000>:
• Determines the length of the sketch lines. When Snap is On the
segment lengths are based on the Snap value.
• This value is maintained by the Sketchinc variable.
Pen • Is a toggle switch for the up or down pen position. Sketching

proceeds while the pen is down until you press P on the keyboard
or release the pick button on your pointing device.
eXit • Records temporary line segments and exits the Sketch command.
Quit • Discards temporary line segments and exits the Sketch command.
Record • Records temporary line segments and remains in the Sketch
command.
Erase • Erases temporary line segments in the opposite order in which they
were entered as you move your pointing device back over the line
segments.
Connect • Connect to an existing sketch object.
(period) • Draws a single line segment from the last point to the current
pointing device location.
498 SKETCH
The buttons on a pointing device are redefmed during the sketch mode to the following:
Puck Keyboard Function
0 P pen up/down
1 single line
2 R record lines
3 X exit
4 Q quit
5 E erase
6 C connect
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can toggle Snap, Grid, and Ortho On and Off while sketching. To get
smoother sketch lines, keep Snap Off.
~ If an extrusion value (Thickness) is set, line segments are extruded once the record
option is selected. You can also extrude sketch lines by using the Change, Chprop,
or Ddchprop commands.
£ You cannot turn Tablet mode On and Off while sketching.
£ Since the Sketch command requires a lot of disk space, try using the Line or Pline
command as an alternative.
RELATED VARIABLES: Sketchinc, Skpoly
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Line, Pline
EXAMPLE:
Command: SKETCH
Record increment <0.1000>: <ENTER)
Sketch. Pen eXit Quit Record
Erase Connect. .P
<Pen down> Sketch lines.
P
<Pen up> <ENTER)
58 lines recorded.
SKPOLV 499
'SKETCHINC (SKETCH record INCrement)

Sketchinc retains the record increment for the Sketch command. This value is usually set
with the Sketch command.

Keyboard SKETCHINC
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> When Snap is On it overrides the Sketchinc setting.
t> If the increment accuracy is important set the value with a negative number. This
number is considered positive but the negative sign activates a special error
checking mode.
RELATED VARIABLES: Skpoly
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Sketch
'SKPOLY (SKetch POLYline)

Skpoly determines the type of lines generated by the Sketch command.

Screen menu DRAWl - Sketch: - SkpoIOn: or SkpolOf:
Keyboard SKPOLY
OPTIONS:
o • Sketch with Lines.
• Sketch with Plines.
RELATED VARIABLES: Sketchinc
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Line, Pline, Sketch
500 SLICE
SLICE
Slice cuts a 3-D Solid with a cutting plane.

Solids toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SOLIDS - Slice:

Keyboard SLICE
PROMPTS:
Slicing plane by Object/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/ZX/<3 points>:
Both sides/ <Point on desired side of the plane>:
OPTIONS:
<3 points> • Identifies three points on the cutting plane. See Example.
Object • Aligns the cutting plane with an Are, Circle, Ellipse, Polyline, or
Spline.
Zaxis • Determines the cutting plane by an origin point on the Z axis of the
plane.
View • Aligns the cutting plane with the current viewport's viewing plane.
XY • Aligns the cutting plane with the XY plane of the current UCS.
YZ • Aligns the cutting plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS.
ZX • Aligns the cutting plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS.
Both sides/<Point on desired side of the plane>
• You can save both sides of the 3-D Solid or select one side to
remain in the drawing.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Section
SNAP 501
EXAMPLE:
3 Points
SNAP
Snap restricts your cross hairs' movement to a specified increment. You can modify the
increment value and turn the setting On or Off. Snap also lets you work in Isometric
mode. You can change your Snap settings with the Ddrmodes dialog box.

Screen menu ASSIST" Snap:
Keyboard SNAP or <Ctrl B> or Function Key F9
Status line Double clicking on Snap on the status line toggles the command On
and Off.
PROMPTS:
Snap spacing or ON/OFF/Aspect/Rotate/Style <1.0000>:
OPTIONS:
Snap • Sets the X and Y Snap increment. Changing Snap settings turns Snap
spacing On.
• This value is maintained by the Snapunit variable.
ON • Turns Snap On.
• This value is maintained by the Snapmode variable.
502 SNAP
OFF • Turns Snap Off.

• This value is maintained by the Snapmode variable.
Aspect • Set individual horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) snap increments. This
option is not available if you are in Isometric mode. (See below.)
• This value is maintained by the Snapunit variable.
Rotate • Rotates the snap (and Grid) by any specified angle about a base
point.
• This value is maintained by the Snapbase and Snapang variables.
Style • Allows selection of the Standard or Isometric styles.
Standard/Isometric
• Isometric sets the isometric Snap and Grid style On. Standard sets
the normal drawing mode on.
• This value is maintained by the Snapstyl variable.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

iJ Each Model space viewport and Paper space contain their own Snap settings.
~ You can create a rotated rectangular Array by setting the Snap Rotation Angle.
iJ Typed coordinates, typed distances, and Osnaps override Snap.
~ You will not Snap to a Grid point unless Snap is On and is set to an even multiple
of the Grid increment.
iJ To use the Aspect option while in the Ddrmodes dialog box, you must first set the
X spacing and then the Y spacing.
iJ Screen cross hairs are oriented to the current Snap rotation angle. Ortho forces
lines to be drawn orthogonally in relation to the crosshair orientation.
iJ Use the Snap Style Isometric command when working in the Isometric mode.
Setting the Snap Rotate is not as flexible.
~ You can control Hatch pattern placement by setting the Snap base point (use the
Rotate option) or the variable Snapbase to a point where you want the hatch
pattern to originate.
! Snap is inactive during perspective views.
SNAPANG 503
RELATED VARIABLES: Snapang, Snapisopair, Snapbase, Snapmode, Snapstyl,

Snapunit
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Grid, Isoplane
'SNAPANG (SNAP ANGle)

Snapang sets the Snap/Grid rotation angle for the current viewport. This value is typically
set with the Rotate option of the Snap command or by using the Ddrmodes dialog box.

Keyboard SNAPANG
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Keeping Ortho On forces the cross hairs to maintain the Snapang setting unless
you use Osnap overrides or you manually enter numeric values from the keyboard
or from the digitizing tablet.
~ The Grid is displayed at the same angle as the Snap angle. When changing the
Snapang value you must Redraw the screen to see the change in the Grid's
appearance.
~ You can create a rotated rectangular Array by setting the Snap rotation angle.
~ Use the Snap Style Isometric command when working in the Isometric mode.
Setting the Snapang is not as flexible.
System Variable o Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Snapbase, Snapisopair, Snapmode, Snapstyl, Snapunit
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Snap, Grid, Snap
Snopong 0 Snopong 4-5
... . ... .
504 SNAP BASE
'SNAPBASE
Snapbase sets the Snap/Grid origin point for the current viewport. This value is typically
set with the Rotate option of the Snap command or with the Ddnnodes dialog box.

Keyboard SNAPBASE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Grid locations are based on the Snapbase value. When changing the Snapbase
value you must Redraw the screen to see the change in the Grid's appearance.
~ You can control Hatch pattern placement by setting Snapbase to a point where you
want the hatch pattern to originate.
System Variable 0.0000,0.0000 Last value used in the drawing 2-D
point
RELATED VARIABLES: Snapang, Snapisopair, Snapmode, Snapstyl, Snapunit
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddnnodes, Grid, Snap
'SNAPISOPAIR (SNAP ISOmetric PAIR)

Snapisopair determines the isometric plane for the current viewport. This value is
typically set using the keyboard combination <Ctrl E> or with the Ddnnodes dialog box.

Keyboard SNAPISOPAIR
OPTIONS:
°• Left plane.
1 • Top plane.
2 • Right plane.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Set Snapstyl to 1 (Isometric) or the Style option of the Snap command to Isometric
to see the cross hairs rotate to the different isometric planes.
SNAPSTYL 505

RELATED VARIABLES: Snapang, Snapbase, Snapmode, Snapstyl, Snapunit
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Grid, Isoplane, Snap
'SNAPMODE
Snapmode sets Snap On and Off in the current viewport. This value is typically set using
the <F9> function key, double clicking on Snap on the status line, or with the Ddrmodes
dialog box.

Keyboard SNAPMODE or <Ctrl B> or <F9>
Status line Double clicking on Snap on the status line toggles the command On
and Off.
OPTIONS:
o • Snap Off.
• Snap On.
RELATED VARIABLES: Snapang, Snapbase, Snapisopair, Snapstyl, Snapunit
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Grid, Snap
'SNAPSTYL (SNAP STYLe)

Snapstyl determines whether the Standard or Isometric mode is active in the current
viewport. This value is typically set using the Style option of the Snap command or with
the Ddrmodes dialog box.

Keyboard SNAPSTYL
506 SNAPSTYL
OPTIONS:
o • Standard mode is active.
• Isometric mode is active.
RELATED VARIABLES: snapang, snapbase, snapisopair, snapmode, snapunit
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Grid, Isoplane, Snap
'SNAPUNIT
Snapunit sets the Snap spacing for the current viewport. This can also be set with the
Aspect option of the Snap command or with the Ddrmodes dialog box.

Keyboard SNAPUNIT
System Variable 1.0000,1.0000 Last value used in the drawing 2-D point
RELATED VARIABLES: Snapang, Snapbase, Snapisopair, Snapmode, Snapstyl
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrmodes, Grid, Snap
SOLID
Solid draws solid filled Polygons. These areas can be triangular or quadrilateral. If Fill or
the system variable Fillmode is On, the areas are filled.

Draw toolbar ~
Screen menu DRAW 1 .. Solid:

Keyboard Solid
SORTENTS 507
PROMPTS:
First point:
Second point :
Third point:
Fourth point:
Third point:
Fourth point:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can save time during Regenerations and Redraws by turning Fill Off. To see
the results of turning Fill On or Off requires a drawing Regeneration.
t> If Grips are enabled, the Solid's Grip definition points are the vertices. Picking
any of the Grip points of the Solid lets you change the size and location.
~ You must be in Plan view to see the Solid filled in.
RELATED VARIABLES: Fillmode

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Fill, grips
AX'
EXAMPLE:
First point: pick point 1- A B
Second point pick point 2.
Third point: pick point 3.
Fourth point pick point 4. D C C D
Third point: pick point 5.
Fourth point: <ENTER> Defines 5
triangular area.
Third point : <ENTER>
4 :3
'SORTENTS (SORT ENTiTieS)

Sortents controls the display of object sort order operations. This value is usually set
using the Object Sort Method of the Ddselect dialog box.

Keyboard SORTENTS
508 SORTENTS
OPTIONS:
Sortents is bit coded and its value is the sum of the following:
0 • Disables sortents.
1 • Sorts for object selection.
2 • Sorts for object snap.
4 • Sorts for redraws.
8 • Sorts for mslide creation.
16 • Sorts for regens.
32 • Sorts for plotting.
64 • Sorts for PostScript output.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

:!: Sorting can slow down certain operations depending on how many objects are
being sorted.
System Variable 96 (Plotting & PostScript) Configuration file Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Treedepth
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddselect
SPELL
Spell checks the spelling in a drawing.

Standard toolbar ~
Pull-down Tools - Spelling ...

Screen menu TOOLS - Spell:
Keyboard SPELL
SPELL 509
onIONS:
Check Spelling
Cumlnt didtonllly. Bntish English (.Zlt)
Illnom All
Chang All
Lookup
o.u:lionlllllts
AN Fl.R. ElEV. 4765'· 11/2"
Current word • Lists the word that is not listed in the dictionary.
Suggestions • Suggests alternatives to the word listed in the Current
word text box. If the correct spelling is listed, select
that word so it becomes the first in the list.
Ignore • Skips the Current word.
Ignore All • Skips the Current word and all other references to the
Current word.
Change • Changes the Current word to the first word listed in the
Suggestions box.
Change All • Changes all words that are spelled the same as the
Current word and replaces them with the word listed
first in the Suggestions box.
Add • Adds the Current word to the custom dictionary. The
maximum word length is 63.
Lookup • Checks the spelling of the word in the Suggestions box.
510 SPELL
Change Dictionaries... • Displays the Change Dictionaries dialog box. See be-
low for more information.
Context • Displays the phrase where the Current word was lo-
cated.
Olange DIctionaries
IlIn d.ctionllry
C\lslDm d.ctionllry !!Dlds
III t.dd J
~~------------------I
III [l01018 J
Main dictionary • Selects a dictionary to use used for spell checking.

Custom dictionary • Lists the name of the current custom dictionary. You
can start a new custom dictionary by entering a
name in the text box.
Browse... • Selects a custom dictionary to use with the main
dictionary for spell checking.
Custom dictionary words • Lists the words in the custom dictionary.
Add • Adds the word listed in the custom dictionary words

text box to the custom dictionary.
Delete • Removes the word listed in the custom dictionary
words text box from the custom dictionary.
SPHERE 511
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If all the words are spelled correctly the Spell dialog box does not appear. If you
want to change the main dictionary default or the custom dictionary default you
can change the individual variables Dctmain and Dctcust or you can enter text that
is not a word in order to activate the Spell dialog box.
~ Spell does not check text that is part of a Block that includes Attributes, Xrefs, or
associative dimensions.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dctcust, Dctmain
SPHERE
Sphere creates a 3-D Solid sphere.

Solids toolbar 0
Screen menu DRAW 2 ... SOLIDS'" Sphere:

Keyboard SPHERE
PROMPTS:
Center of sphere <0,0,0>:
Diameter/<Radius> of sphere:
OPTIONS:
Center of sphere • Defines the sphere's center.
Diameter • Defines the sphere's diameter.
Radius • Defmes the sphere's radius.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Ai_sphere command to create 3-D wireframe spheres.
~ You cannot Explode a Sphere.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ai_Sphere, Explode, Hide, Region, Render, Shade,

UCS, Vpoint
512 SPHERE
EXAMPLE:
Radius 1
'SPLFRAME (SPLine FRAME)

Splframe determines the display of spline fit Polyline frames and edges of 3-D Faces.

Pull-down Options .. Display> .. Spline Frame
Keyboard SPLFRAME
OPTIONS:
o • Hides spline frames and invisible edges of 3-D Faces.
1 • Displays spline frames and invisible edges of 3-D Faces.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can change the visibility of 3-D Faces with the Ddmodify dialog box.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dface, Edge, Pedit, Pline, Pface, Spline
EXAMPLE:
Splfrome 0 Splframe 1
.----...,
tJv
SPLINE 513
SPLINE
Spline creates a smooth curved object. This spline type is known as NURBS (nonuniform
rational B-spline).

Draw toolbar
Screen menu DRAWl -. Spline:

Keyboard Spline
PROMPTS:
Ob ject/< En ter f i rs t poin t >:
En te r point :
Cl ose/F it Tol e r ance/< Enter po int >:
OPTIONS:
Object • Converts spline fitted Plines (including 3-D Poly) to Spline
objects.
Close • The starting and ending points are coincident and tangent.
Fit Tolerance • Determines how close the Spline fits to the control points you
specified. The lower the tolerance the closer the spline is drawn
to the control points. Zero tolerance places the Spline through
your control points.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Entering U (Undo) at the "Enter point" prompt undoes the last Spline segment and
returns you to the previous point.
~ You can edit Polylines and create Splines, but these are linear spline
approximations. In addition, Splines use less memory than Polyline Splines.
~ Use Splinedit and Grip editing to edit Splines.
RELATED VARIABLES: Delobj

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dpoly, Pedit, Splinedit
514 SPLINE
EXAMPLE:
Splines with different Pline Spline

ond end tangent'S
~ t ort
End
Tangent
)II
1I )II
~
)0.
)l
Start
Tangen'
SPLINEDIT (SPLINe EDIT)

Splinedit edits Spline objects by modifying the control and fit data points.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu MODIFY" SplinEd:

Keyboard SPLINEDIT
PROMPTS:
Fit Data / Close / Move Vertex / Refine / rEverse / Undo / eXit <X >:
OPTIONS:
Fit Data • Edits fit data points using the following options:
Add • Creates new fit data points.
Close! Open • Close - Closes an open Spline, making its tangent
continuous at its endpoints.
• Open - Opens a portion of the closing segment of a

Spline if one was added with the close option.
SPLINEDIT 515
Delete • Removes fit data points and adjusts the Spline through
the remaining points.
Move • Moves fit data points to a new location.
Purge • Removes a Spline's fit data from the drawing's database.
This also exits you from the fit data submenu and returns
you to the Splinedit prompt.
Tangents • Modifies the first and last tangents of a Spline.
toLerance • Refits the Spline to the existing points with new
tolerance values.
eXit • Exits the fit data submenu and returns to the Splinedit
prompt.
Close / Open • Close - Closes an open Spline, making it tangent
continuous at its endpoints.
• Open - Opens a portion of the closing segment of a

Spline if one was added with the close option.
Move Vertex • Relocates control points.
Next • Moves to the next control point.

Previous • Moves back to the previous control point.
Select Point • Selects a control point.
eXit • Exits the move vertex submenu and returns to the

Splinedit prompt.
Refine • Increases the Spline's precision.
Add control point • Adds control points to the Spline.
Elevate Order • Increases the number of control points for the whole
Spline. This number must be greater than or equal to the
current setting. Using the same value has no effect on the
Spline. Using a greater value increases the number of
control points. The maximum value is 26. Once a Spline
is "elevated" it cannot be reduced.
516 SPLINEDIT
Weight • Changes the weight at various control points. Weight is

the distance between the Spline and a given control
point.
eXit • Exits the refine submenu and returns to the Splinedit
prompt.
rEverse • Reverses the Spline's direction.
Undo • Takes you back one Splinedit option at a time. This is
different from the Undo command, which back-steps to
the previous command.
eXit • Exit the Splinedit command and return to the Command
prompt. You can also press <Esc>.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Selecting Splines to edit causes the control points to display in the current Grip
color setting.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Spline
'SPLINESEGS (SPLINE SEGmentS)

Splinesegs determines the number of line segments generated for each Polyline spline.

Keyboard SPLINESEGS
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Pedit, PUne
STATS 517
'SPLINETYPE
Splinetype detennines the type of spline curve to generate with the Pedit Spline
command.

Keyboard SPLINETYPE
OPTIONS:
5 • Quadratic B-Spline
6 • Cubic B-Spline
EXAMPLE:
//
Cubic S-Spline Quadratic S-Spline
STATS (STATisticS)
Stats displays a dialog box containing information about your last rendering for that
drawing during the current drawing session. This information includes scene name, last
rendering type, rendering time, total faces, and total triangles. You can also save the
information by writing it to a file.

Render tool bar
Screen menu TOOLS - RENDER - Stats:

Keyboard STATS
518 STATS
OPTIONS:
Statistics
Scene Name. FRONT
Lut Rendering Type' AaIoCAD Reader
Rendenng Time 0.80:02
DItII Face.' 213

TotBl Tnllftg'e.· 51&
~1IY8 S1atistics to Fde
Save Statistics to File • Saves the dialog box information to an ASCII file when
the check box is selected and a file name is entered in
the text box. If the file exists, the information is
appended to that file.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Issuing Stats automatically loads the rendering software, making it ready for use.
~ Issuing Stats automatically creates a Locked Layer named Ashade. Even if you
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Render, Scene
'STATUS
Status displays a text screen of information on the current drawing's Limits, extents,
display, drawing aid settings (Ddrmodes), and some system information.

Pull-down Data" Status
Screen menu DATA" Status:
Keyboard STATUS
STLOUT 519
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Status numeric display format is based on the current Units system.
~ The information is based on the current space - Model space or Paper space.
~) Drawing extents specify the actual size of the drawing regardless of the Limits
setting.
~ Issuing the Status command at the Dim prompt gives you a listing of the current
dimension variable settings.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cecolor, Celtype, Clayer, Elevation, Extmax, Extmin,
Fillmode, Gridmode, Gridunit, Insbase, Limcheck, Limmax, Limmin, Orthomode,
Osmode, Qtextmode, Snapunit, Snapmode, Tabmode, Thickness
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Base, Color, Ddcolor, Ddlmodes, Ddosnap, Ddrmodes,
Ddunits, Elev, Fill, Grid, Layer, Limits, Linetype, Mspace, Ortho, Osnap, Pspace, Qtext,
Snap, Tablet, Units
STLOUT (STereoLithography fonnat OUT)

Stlout creates a file (.stl) in the Stereo-Lithography Apparatus format.

Screen menu FILE - EXPORT - STLout:
Keyboard STLOUT
PROMPTS:
Select a single solid for STL output:
Select ojbects :
Create a binary STL file? <Y>:
OPTIONS:
Create a binary STL file? <V>:
• Yes, creates a binary file; No, creates an ASCII file.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The Facetres variable determines how the Solid is triangulated. A higher value
creates a finer mesh and a more accurate representation of the Solid. However, it
also creates a larger file.
520 STLOUT
~ If Filedia is set to 1 a dialog box is activated; if Filedia is set to 0 you are prompt-
ed at the Command line. Entering a tilde (-) at the Command line temporarily
activates the File dialog box.
RELATED VARIABLES: Facetres
STRETCH
Stretch dynamically lengthens or shortens objects by placing a Crossing window (C) or
Crossing Polygon (CP) around the endpoints of the objects to be stretched and specifying
a displacement by keyboard entry or dragging.
You can Stretch 3-D Faces, 3-D Meshes, Arcs, Lines, Leaders, Mlines, Polylines, Rays,
Solids, and Traces. Object endpoints that lie outside the Crossing window or Crossing
Polygon remain fixed. Endpoints inside the Crossing window or Crossing Polygon
change. Text, dimension text, Blocks, and Circles and Ellipses move if their definition
points are within the Crossing window or Crossing Polygon. The definition point for
Blocks, Shapes, and Text is the Insertion point; for dimension text the Node or Defpoint
at the end of the extension lines; for Circles the Center point. Unlike other editing
commands, you must use a Crossing window or Crossing Polygon in selecting objects.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu MODIFY - Stretch:

Keyboard STRETCH
PROMPTS:
Select objects to stretch by window or polygon ...
Select objects: C
First Corner:
Other Corner :
Select Objects:
Base point:
New point:
OPTIONS:
Base point • Enter a point of reference to apply the new point (below), or by
which to drag the selected object.
New point • Enter the distance for X,Y,Z, or drag the object to specify the
new point.
STRETCH 521
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) If dimension text was created with associative dimensioning (Dimaso On), then
Stretch updates the dimension text. A definition point (Defpoint) must be within
the crossing at the time of the Stretch.
\) Stretching dimension text may leave the text offset from the dimension line. If the
dimension line no longer has a reason to be split the line closes up and becomes
one object. You can restore the dimension text to the center of the dimension line
with the Hometext or Tedit option of the Dim command, Dimedit, or Dimtedit.
\) The Lengthen, Extend, and Trim commands are similar to Stretch. However,
Extend and Trim require a boundary line.
\) Using the Change point command is similar to using Stretch. However, if you
Change to a point with Ortho Off, all the selected Lines converge at one point.
\) Unless you leave one endpoint outside the Crossing window, Stretch acts just like
the Move command.
\) Stretching a Viewport border in Paper space increases or decreases the area of
Model space that is visible in the viewport. Placing the Crossing window or
Crossing Polygon at a comer stretches the Viewport both horizontally and
vertically.
\) The Grips variable has its own stretch routine that even lets you create multiple
copies at the same time.
\) You cannot Stretch Circles, Ellipses (Pellipse 0), Regions, and 3-D Solids. If you
use the Mledit cut options on a Multiline, the Stretch command does not work on
the ends that were edited.
£ If you enter the Stretch command from the keyboard, or repeat the command by
pressing <Enter>, you must type a C (Crossing window) or CP (Crossing Polygon)
to select objects.
£ If you pick more than one Crossing window or Crossing Polygon, Stretch only
uses the last crossing selection.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Extend, Lengthen, Trim
522 STRETCH
EXAMPLE:
Command: STRETCH
Select objects to stretch by window or polygon ...
Select objects: C
First corner: Point 1
Other corner: Point 2
8 found.
Base point: Pick any point.
New point: @1'<180
r-----~ t 12'
(1 '
t
I
I
...... ,
' . ..... I .... ·
.... . I
: ,
~--
'STYLE
Styles defme text fonnats. They determine the font, height, width, angle, and other
properties that defme the way text is displayed on the drawing.

Pull-down Data - Text Style
Screen menu DATA - Style:
Keyboard STYLE
STYLE 523
PROMPTS:
Text style name (or ?) <STANDARD):
Font file <txt):
Height <0 . 0000):
width factor <1.0000):
Obliquing angle <a):
Backwards? <N)
Upside-down? <N)
Vertical? <N)
OPTIONS:
Text style name • Creates a new Style or edits an existing Style. Once you end
the command, that Style becomes the default. Style names
can be up to 31 characters long.
? • Activates the wild-card options for reviewing the names of

Styles defined in the current drawing. The default displays a
sorted listing of all named Styles. Use any wild-card option to
create a more specific list.
Font • Assign a font to the Style.
• If Filedia is set to 1 a dialog box is activated; if Filedia is set

to 0 you are prompted at the Command line. Entering a tilde
(-) at the Command line temporarily activates the File dialog
box.
Height • Sets a fixed height, or 0 for a variable height.

Width factor • Specifies a width factor to expand or compress text.
Obliquing angle • Slants the text angle. A positive number slants toward the
right; a negative number slants towards the left. Values can
be between -85 and 84.9 degrees.
Backwards • Mirrors text horizontally.
Upside-down • Mirrors text vertically.
Vertical • Text is drawn vertically.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The last style referenced during the Style or Ddemodes command is the default for
Text.
524 STYLE
~ You can rename Styles, including Standard, with the Ddrename or Rename
command.
\) You can Purge unused Styles except for Standard and the default style. Even if
you Rename Standard, it still cannot be Purged.
\) You can reassign a new Style to existing Text with the Ddmodify, Change,
Mtprop, and Ddim commands. Mtprop changes Mtext; Ddim changes associative
dimensions.
~ If you redefme a Style's font and/or its horizontal or vertical orientation, all Text
strings created with that Style will globally update. If you change the other
settings, they only affect new Text. If you use the Change or Ddmodify command
and re-enter the Style name, the Text takes on all the latest settings of that Style.
~ Unlike Blocks, font file definitions (.shx, .pjb, .pia, .tt!) are stored external to the
drawing file and must accompany the drawing file. This includes drawings
converted to DXF format.
~ Fonts take up different amounts of horizontal space, and the more complex the
font, the longer it takes to display.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dimtxt, Textstyle, Textsize, Filedia
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Dtext, Text, Mtext
SUBTRACT
Subtract creates a composite Solid or Region by subtracting one set of Solids from
another set of Solids or one set of Regions from another set of Regions.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 ~ SOLIDS ~ Subtrac:

Keyboard SUBTRACT
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) Exploding subtracted objects has various results depending on the original object
and whether part of the object was deleted due to the subtract process.
~ You can obtain detailed information concerning the Subtract's result with the
Massprop command.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Interfere, Intersect, Union
SURFTAB2 525
EXAMPLE:
Subtract
from : Subtract
d
~ ~
) ------,>-C D
~
'SURFTABI (SURFace TABulations 1)
Surftab 1 sets the number of tabulations generated for Rulesurf and Tabsurf and the mesh
density in the M direction for Revsurf and Edgesurf.

Keyboard SURFfABI
RELATED VARIABLES: Surftab2
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Edgesurf, Revsurf, Rulesurf, Tabsurf
EXAMPLE: See SURFfAB2
'SURFT AB2 (SURFace TABulations 2)

Surftab2 sets the mesh density in the N direction for Revsurf and Edgesurf.

Keyboard SURFfAB2
RELATED VARIABLES: Surftabl
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Edgesurf, Revsurf
526 SURFTAB2
EXAMPLE:
Surftob 1 6 Surftob 1 = 2
Surftob2 6 Surftob2 = 2
c
o
.. ..
N direction
'SURFTYPE (SURFace TYPE)

Surftype determines the type of surface fitting when using the Smooth option of the Pedit
command.

Keyboard SURFfYPE
OPTIONS:
5 • Quadratic B-Spline surface
6 • Cubic B-Spline surface
8 • Bezier surface
RELATED VARIABLES: Surfu, Surfv
EXAMPLE:
Surftype 5 Surftype 6 Surftype 8
system variables 527
'SURFU (SURFace U)
Surfu sets the surface density in the M direction for 3-D Meshes.

Keyboard SURFU
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dmesh
'SURFV (SURFace V)
Surfv sets the surface density in the N direction 3-D Meshes.

Keyboard SURFV
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3Dmesh
'SYSCODEPAGE (SYStem CODE PAGE)

Syscodepage indicates the system code page used by your version of AutoCAD. See the
AutoCAD Command Reference Guide for a listing of the various codes.

Keyboard SYSCODEPAGE
RELATED VARIABLES: Dwgcodepage
system variables see SETVAR

528 TABLET
TABLET
Tablet configures and calibrates a digitizing tablet. Configuring with the Tablet command
defines tablet areas for tablet menus and the screen pointing area. Calibrating aligns the
tablet to a paper drawing for digitizing or tracing. The tablet and screen menus are inter-
active; you can pick commands off the tablet that activate screen menus. When digitizing,
use <Ctrl T> or <FlO> to toggle the Tablet Mode On and Off.

Pull-down Options .. Tablet
Screen menu OPTIONS" Tablet:
Keyboard TABLET
PROMPTS:
Option (ONjOFFjCALjCFG):
OPTIONS:
ON • Enables tablet (digitizing) mode.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Tabmode.
OFF • Disables tablet (digitizing) mode.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Tabmode.
CAL • Calibrates the tablet with the coordinates of a paper drawing. Cali-
bration is only effective in the space where the calibration took place.
You can defme the tablet transformation type as either orthogonal,
affme, or projective.
CFO • Reserves portions of the tablet for menus and the screen pointing area.
You can have a maximum of four tablet menu areas.
TABMODE 529
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The current ues is the digitizing plane when calibrating a tablet. You will need to
recalibrate the tablet if you change the ues. Otherwise digitized points will be
projected onto the ues.
~ Before calibrating, configure for 0 tablet menu areas and enlarge the screen
pointing area. This gives you more digitizing space for your paper drawing.
~ Snap, Ortho, and Grid remain active when digitizing.
~ When Tablet is On you cannot change viewports or select commands from the
screen.
~ When using the tablet as a digitizer, you lose the coordinate settings once you End
the drawing session.
RELATED VARIABLES: Tabmode
'TABMODE (TABlet MODE)

Tabmode sets the tablet on and off. This value is typically set using the On/Off option of
the Tablet command.

Keyboard T ABMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Disables tablet mode.
• Enables tablet mode.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Your pointing device must be a digitizer to access this command.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Tablet
530 TABSURF
TABSURF (TABulated SURFACE)

Generates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) by extruding an object (path curve) through
space along a direction vector.

Surfaces toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 .. SURFACES" Tabsurf:

Keyboard TABSURF
PROMPTS:
Select path curve:
Select direction vector:
OPTIONS:
Select path curve • The path curve can be a Line, Arc, Ellipse, Circle,
Polyline, or 3-D Poly.
Select direction vector • The direction vector can be a Line or an Open
Polyline or 3-D Poly.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The surface starts at the endpoint nearest your pick point on the path curve. If you
use a Polyline for the direction vector, only the first and last vertices are
recognized.
~ Exploding the Tabsurf converts the Meshes into 3-D Faces.
RELATED VARIABLES: Surftabl
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dmesh, Explode, Extrude, Hide, Pedit, Rectang,
Render, Shade, UCS, Vpoint
TDCREATE 531
EXAMPLE:
Oirection Veclor
/
Path Curve Perl" Curve Perlh Curve
I 0 (]
'TARGET
-~
Target maintains the location of the target point for the current viewport.

Keyboard TARGET
System Variable 0.000,0.000,0.000 Last value used in the drawing 3-D
Read-only Point
RELATED VARIABLES: Viewdir, Worldview
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Dview, UCS
TBCONFIG (Tool Bars CONFIGure)

Tbconfig creates and customizes toolbars.
See Appendix A, "Customizing Toolbars," in the AutoCAD User's Guide for detailed
information.
'TDCREATE (Time Date CREATE)

Tdcreate maintains the time and date the drawing was created. This is given in Julian
format.
532 TDCREATE

Keyboard TDCREATE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Time command for regular time and date formats.

System Variable varies, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Cdate, Date, Tdindwg, Tdupdate, Tdusrtimer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: New, Time
'TDINDWG (Time Date IN DraWinG)

Tdindwg lists the total amount of editing time in the drawing. This is given in Julian
format.

Keyboard TDINDWG
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the Time command for regular time format.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cdate, Date, Tdcreate, Tdupdate, Tdusrtimer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Open, Time
'TDUPDATE (Time Date UPDATE)

Tdupdate lists the time and date the drawing was last Saved. This is given in Julian
format.

Keyboard TDUPDATE
TEMPPREFIX 533
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, Use the Time command for regular time and date formats.

RELATED VARIABLES: Cdate, Date, Tdcreate, Tdindwg, Tdusrtimer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Qsave, Saveas, Save, Time
'TDUSRTIMER (Time Date USeR TIMER)

Tdusrtimer lists the time spent during the current drawing session. This can be Reset and
turned On and Off with the Time command.

Keyboard TDUSRTIMER
RELATED VARIABLES: Cdate, Date, Tdcreate, Tdindwg, Tdupdate
'TEMPPREFIX (TEMPorary PREFIX)

Tempprefix lists the directory where temporary files are stored. You set this variable with
the Config command. Select Option 7 (Configure operating parameters) and then nwnber
5 (Placement of temporary files). By default, temporary files are stored in the drawing's
directory.

Keyboard TEMPPREFIX
534 TEXT
TEXT see DTEXT
'TEXTEVAL (TEXT EVALuation)

Texteval detennines whether text strings are evaluated literally.

Keyboard TEXTEV AL
OPTIONS:
o • All responses to prompts for Text strings and Attribute values are taken
literally.
1 • Text strings starting with "(" or "!" are evaluated as AutoLISP expressions.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Dtext and Mtext always reads the leading "(" and "!" as text strings regardless of
the Texteval setting.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Text
'TEXTFILL
Textfill controls the filling of Bitstream, Adobe Type 1, and TrueType fonts.

Pull-down Options -. Display -. Filled Text / Outline Text
Screen menu OPTIONS -. DISPLAY -. TxtFill:
Keyboard TEXTFILL
OPTIONS:
o • Displays the outline of text.
1 • Displays text filled in.
TEXTSIZE 535

RELATED VARIABLES: Textqlty
EXAMPLE:
O~~~~Wil~ Filled
T~~m (Q) Textfill1
'TEXTQLTY (TEXT QuaLiTY)

Textqlty determines the resolution of Bitstream, Adobe Type 1, and TrueType fonts.
Resolution values are between 0 to 100.

Keyboard TEXTQLTY
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The higher the setting the finer the resolution but the longer it takes to display the
text on the screen and to plot. The lower the setting the coarser the resolution but
the less time it takes to display the text on the screen and to plot.
System Variable 50 Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Textfill
'TEXTSCR see 'GRAPHSCR
'TEXTSIZE
Textsize sets the default text height for Attdef, Dtext, Mtext, and Text. This value is
typically set using the Attdef, Dtext, and Text commands.
536 TEXTSIZE

Keyboard TEXTSIZE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

I Styles containing a preset text height override the Textsize setting.
RELATED VARIABLES: Textstyle
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Dtext, Mtext, Text
'TEXTSTYLE
Textstyle sets the default text style for Attdef, Dtext, Mtext, and Text. This value is
typically set using the Attdef, Dtext, Mtext, Style, and Text commands. The various
Textstyle options are created with the Style command.

Keyboard TEXTSTYLE
System Variable Standard Last value used in the drawing String
RELATED VARIABLES: Textsize
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Attdef, Ddim, Dtext, Mtext, Style, Text
'THICKNESS
Thickness sets the current 3-D thickness (height) for the following objects:
Arc Line Shape
Block - varies Pline Solid
Circle Point Tabsurf
Donut Polygon Trace
Ellipse (pellipse 1) Rectang
This value is typically set with the Elev command or the Ddemodes dialog box.
TILEMODE 537

Keyboard THICKNESS
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can reassign an object's Thickness with the Change, Chprop, Ddchprop, or
Ddmodify dialog box.
~ You can assign a Thickness to Text, Dtext, and Attdef once the text is placed on
the drawing. Use the Change, Chprop, Ddchprop, or Ddmodify dialog box to
assign a Thickness to those objects.
~ The Sketch command does not show a Thickness until the lines are recorded.
~ You cannot assign a Thickness to

3-D Face Dimension (associative) Mtext Spline
3-D Mesh Ellipse (pellipse 0) Ray Viewport
3-D Poly Mline Region Xline
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Elev
EXAMPLE:
I Donut Pllne
(fit CUrve) Circle Unes Point Text
TIFFIN see IMPORT
TILEMODE
Tilemode determines whether tiled Model space or floating Model space / Paper space is
enabled.
538 TILEMODE

Standard toolbar See Options.
Pull-down View ~ Tiled Model Space, Floating Model Space, Paper
Space
Screen menu VIEW ~ Tilemod:
Keyboard TILEMODE
Status line Double clicking Tile on the status line toggles between Tiled
Model space and Floating Model space / Paper space.
OPTIONS:
o • Tiled Model space is enabled.
~ and • Floating Model space and Paper space are enabled.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When Tilemode is set to 0 you cannot see or access Paper space objects. This may
save you Regen and Redraw time.
t. When Tilemode is set to 1 you can control layer visibility per viewport
(VPLA YER) and overlap and plot multiple Viewports.
~ The Vports and Viewports commands work only when Tilemode is set to 0; the
Mview command works only when Tilemode is set to 1. Mview can restore saved
Viewports.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mspace, Pspace
'TIME
Time displays the current date and time, the date and time the drawing was created, the
date and time the drawing was last updated, the amount of time spent in the current
editing session, and the amount of time left before the next automatic save. In addition,
you can set an elapsed timer.
TOLERANCE 539

Pull-down Data'" Time
Screen menu DATA'" Time:
Keyboard TIME
PROMPTS:
Disp l ayjONjOFFjReset:
OPTIONS:
Display • Current status of the time command.
ON • Activates the elapsed timer.

OFF • Stops the elapsed timer.
Reset • Resets the elapsed timer to zero.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Time is displayed to the nearest millisecond using military format.
~ The date and time are based on the date and time maintained by your computer.
~ Inserting a drawing or Block and the time spent plotting the drawing does not add
to the existing time.
~ The time you work on a drawing will not be saved if you Quit.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cdate, Date, Savetime, Tdcreate, Tdindwg, Tdupdate,

Tdusrtimer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: End, Qsave, Save
TOLERANCE
Tolerance creates Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) annotations.

Dimensioning toolbar mn
Screen menu DRAW DIM'" Toleran:
Keyboard TOLERANCE or TOL
540 TOLERANCE
OPTIONS:
Symbol • Selects a symbol representing the various geometric constraints.

You can select OK even if you do not select a symbol. Once you
are in the next dialog box named Geometric Tolerance you can
still access the Symbol dialog box.
SyID :r-':.1
Otn v ...... Me
Sym • Redisplays the Symbol dialog box.

Tolerance 1 • Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame.
Dia • Inserts the diameter symbol.
Value • Enter the tolerance value in the text box.
MC • Displays the Material Condition dialog box.
TOOLBAR 541
Datum 1 • Creates the primary datum reference in the feature control frame.
Datum • Enter the datum reference value.
MC • Displays the Material Condition dialog box.
Matertal QlndltJon
Height • Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the

feature control frame.
Projected Tolerance Zone • Inserts a projected tolerance zone symbol.
Datum Identifier • Creates a datum-identifying symbol.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can activate the Tolerance command when using the Annotation option of the
Leader command.
~ You can modify Tolerance objects with the Ddmodify command.
~ If you type Tol to activate the Tolerance command and you receive the error
~ You cannot Explode Tolerance objects.
RELA TED VARIABLES: Dimclre, Dimclrt, Dimgap, Dimtxsty, Dimtxt

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Leader
TOOLBAR
Toolbar displays, hides, and positions toolbars.

Keyboard TOOLBAR
542 TOOLBAR
PROMPTS:
Toolbar name (or ALL) :
Show/Hide/Left/Right/Top/Bottom/Float: <Show>:
OPTIONS:
Toolbar name or (ALL) • Enter the name of a toolbar to display or hide. All
selects all the toolbars. Tbconfig provides a listing
of the toolbar names.
Show • Displays the toolbar(s).
Hide • Closes the toolbar(s).
Left • Docks the toolbar at the left side of the display.
Right • Docks the toolbar at the right side of the display.
Top • Docks the toolbar at the top of the display.
Bottom • Docks the toolbar at the bottom of the display.
Position <0,0> • Sets the position of the toolbar in columns and rows
relative to a toolbar docking area. The ftrst number
is horizontal; the second number is vertical.
Float • Switches the toolbar from docked to floating.
Position <0,0> • Speciftes the location of the floating toolbar in
screen coordinates.
Rows < 1> • Speciftes the number of rows in the floating toolbar.
RELATED VARIABLES: Tooltips

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Tbconfig
,TOOLTIPS
Tooltips controls the visibility of tool tips.

Keyboard TOOLTIPS
TORUS 543
OPTIONS:
o • Tooltips are not displayed.
• Tooltips are displayed.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Tbconfig, Toolbar
TORUS
Torus creates a 3-D Solid torus.

Solids toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 .. SOLIDS" Torus:

Keyboard TORUS
PROMPTS:
Center of torus <0,0,0>:
Diameter /< Radius> of torus:
Diameter /< Radius> of tube:
OPTIONS:
Center of torus • Defmes the torus's center.
Torus
Radius • Defines the torus's radius.
Diameter • Defines the torus 's diameter.
Tube
Radius • Defmes the tube's radius.
Diameter • Defmes the tube's diameter.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Use the AUorus command to create 3-D wireframe tori.
544 TORUS
to Create a Torus without the center hole by assigning the tube's diameter greater
than the torus's diameter.
l You cannot Explode a Torus.
RELATED VARIABLES: Dispsilh

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ai_Torus, Explode, Hide, Region, Render, Shade, UCS,
Vpoint
EXAMPLE:
Rodius of Torus .5
Radius of Tube 1
TRACE
•
Trace creates line segments that can be assigned a width. Trace also automatically
calculates the miter for adjacent segments, but only after the endpoint of the next segment
is entered. If Fill is On, all Traces are displayed as solid filled.

Screen menu DRAW 2 - Trace

Keyboard TRACE
PROMPTS:
Trace width <0 . 0500 >:
From point:
To point:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

to Polylines also creates line segments that can be assigned a width, but they are
much more flexible and versatile than Traces.
to Object snap modes treat Traces the same as solid fills. You can Osnap to the four
vertices and midpoint of a Trace.
transparent commands 545
~ While drawing a Trace, you do not have Undo and Close options like those in the
Line, Polyline, Mline, and Spline commands.
~ The Grip definition points for Traces are at the four vertices. Picking any of the
Grip points lets you change the size, location, and width.
~ You cannot use the following editing commands on a Trace: Offset, Extend, Trim,
and Change point. However, you can use Grips and achieve most of the
functionality of these commands.
~ See the Digitizer command it you want to trace over a drawing on paper.
l Traces cannot be Exploded.
RELATED VARIABLES: Fillmode, Tracewid

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mline, Pline
EXAMPLE:
FiliOn Fill Off
'TRACEWID (TRACE WIDth)

Tracewid sets the default width of Traces. This value is typically set using the Trace
command.

Keyboard TRACEWID
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Trace
transparent commands and variables

Transparent commands and variables are commands and variables that can be accessed
while in the middle of other commands. An apostrophe must precede the command or
variable name.
546 transparent commands
The following commands and variables are transparent:

'About 'Dimalttz 'Dwgcodepage 'Luprec 'Snapmode
,Acadprefix 'Dimaltu 'Dwgname 'Maxactvp 'Snapstyl
'Acadver 'Dimaltz 'Dwgprefix 'Maxsort 'Snapunit
'Aflags 'Dimapost 'Dwgtitled 'Menuctl 'Sortents
'Angbase 'Dimaso 'Dwgwrite 'Menuecho 'Splframe
'Angdir 'Dimasz 'Edgemode 'Menuname 'Splinesegs
'Aperture 'Dimaunit 'Elev 'Mirrtext 'Splinetype
'Appload 'Dimblk 'Elevation 'Modemacro 'Status
'Attdia 'Dimblkl 'Expert 'Mtexted 'Style
'Attdisp 'Dimblk2 'Explmode 'Offsetdist 'Surftab 1
'Attmode 'Dimcen 'Extmax 'Ortho 'Surftab2
'Attreq 'Dimclrd 'Extrnin 'Orthomode 'Surftype
'Auditctl 'Dimclre 'Facetres 'Osmode 'Surfu
'Aunits 'Dimclrt 'Fflimit 'Osnap 'Surfv
'Auprec 'Dimdec 'Filedia 'Pan 'Syscodepage
'Backz 'Dimdle 'Files 'Pdmode 'Tabmode
'Base 'Dimdli 'Fill 'Pdsize 'Target
'Blipmode 'Dimexe 'Filletrad 'Pellipse 'Tdcreate
'Cal 'Dimexo 'Fillmode 'Perimeter 'Tdindwg
'Cdate 'Dimfit 'Filter 'Pfacevmax 'Tdupdate
'Cecolor 'Dimgap 'Fontalt 'Pickadd 'Tdusrtimer
'Celtscale 'Dimjust 'Fontmap 'Pickauto 'Tempprefix
'Celtype 'Dimlfac 'Frontz 'Pickbox 'Texteval
'Chamfera 'Dimlim 'Graphscr 'Pickdrag 'Textfill
'Chamferb 'Dimpost 'Grid 'Pickfirst 'Textqlty
'Chamferc 'Dimmd 'Gridmode 'Pickstyle 'Textscr
'Chamferd 'Dimsah 'Gridunit 'Platform 'Textsize
transparent commands 547
'Chammode 'Dimscale 'Gripblock 'Plinegen Textstyle
'Circ1erad 'Dimsdl 'Gripcolor 'Plinewid 'Thickness
'Clayer 'Dimsd2 'Griphot 'Plotid Time
'Cmdactive 'Dimsel 'Grips 'Plotrotmode Tool tips

'Cmddia 'Dimse2 'Gripsize 'Plotter Tracewid
'Cmdecho 'Dimsho 'Handles 'Polysides Treedepth
'Cmdnames 'Dimsoxd 'Help ('?) 'Popups Treemax
'Cmljust 'Dimtad 'Highlight 'Projmode Trimmode
'Cmlscale 'Dimtdec 'Hpang 'Psltscale 'Ucsfollow
'Cmlstyle 'Dimtfac 'Hpbound 'Psprolog 'Ucsicon
'Color 'Dimtih 'Hpdouble 'Psquality 'Ucsname
'Coords 'Dimtix 'Hpname 'Qtextmode 'Ucsorg
'Cvport 'Dimtm 'Hpscale 'Rasterpreview 'Ucsxdir
'Date 'Dimtofl 'Hpspace 'Redraw 'Ucsydir
'Dbmod 'Dimtoh 'Id 'Redrawall 'Undoctl
'Dctcust 'Dimtol 'Insbase 'Regenauto 'Undomarks
'Dctmain 'Dimtolj 'Insname 'Regenmode 'Undoondisk
'Ddemodes 'Dimtp 'Isavebak 'Resume 'Unitmode
'Ddgrips 'Dimtsz 'Isavepercent 'Savefile 'Units
'Ddlmodes 'Dimtvp 'Isolines 'Saveimages 'Useril - 5
'Ddltype 'Dimtxsty 'Isoplane 'Savename 'Userrl - 5
'Ddltype 'Dimtxt 'Lastangle 'Savetime 'Usersl - 5
'Ddosnap 'Dimtzin 'Lastpoint 'Screenboxes 'View
'Ddptype 'Dimunit 'Layer 'Screenmode 'Viewctr
'Ddrmodes 'Dimupt 'Lenslength 'Screensize 'Viewdir
'Ddselect 'Dimzin 'Limcheck 'Setvar 'Viewmode

'Ddunits 'Dispsilh 'Limits 'Shadedge 'Viewsize
'Delay 'Dist 'Limmax 'Shadedif 'Viewtwist
548 transparent commands
'Delobj 'Distance 'Limmin 'Shpname 'Visretain

'Diastat 'Donutid 'Linetype 'Sketchinc 'Vsmax
'Dimalt 'Donutod 'Locale 'Skpoly 'Vsrnin
'Dimaltd 'Dragmode 'Loginname 'Snap 'Worlducs
'Dimaltf 'Dragpl 'Ltscale 'Snapang 'Worldview
'Dimalttd 'Dragp2 'Lunits 'Snapbase 'Xrefctl
'Snapisopair 'Zoom
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Filters and the individual object snap (Osnap) modes are always Transparent.
~ It is best if you turn Regenauto Off and Viewres to Fast Zooms to decrease the
number of Regenerations. This increases the chances of transparent commands
working properly.
~ You know you are using a command transparently when two arrows (») are
shown at the Command prompt.
! You cannot use Transparent commands during the following: Attdef, Config,
Dtext, Dview, Mtext, Plot, Sketch, Text, Vpoint, Zoom Dynamic, when working
with a dialog box, or while you are in another transparent command.
£ Zoom All and Extents or any command that causes a Regen are never transparent.
! Most of the transparent changes will not take effect until after you complete the
main command.
£ You cannot perform a transparent Pan, View, or Zoom in Paper space.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Setvar
'TREEDEPTH
Treedepth determines the maximum number of times the tree-structured spatial index may
divide into branches.

Keyboard TREEDEPTH
TREESTAT 549
OPTIONS:
° • Suppresses the spatial index. Objects are always processed in

database order. The Sortents system variable is inactive.
greater than °• Enables Treedepth. The value can be an integer of up to four

digits. The first two numbers refer to Model space; the second
two numbers refer to Paper space.
less than ° • Model space objects are treated as two-dimensional. This is used
for two-dimensional drawings and provides a more efficient use
of memory without a loss in performance.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ This command cannot be used transparently.

RELATED VARIABLES: Sortents, Treemax
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Treestat
'TREEMAX (TREE MAXimum)

Treemax limits memory usage during drawing Regenerations. This setting is based on the
amount of available RAM.

Keyboard TREEMAX
System Variable 10,000,000 Configuration file Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Treedepth
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Treestat
'TREESTAT (TREE STATus)

Treestat displays information concerning the drawing's current spatial index.
550 TREESTAT

Keyboard TREESTAT
RELATED VARIABLES: Treedepth, Treemax
TRIM
Trim clips portions of objects to the cutting edge or implied cutting edge of objects. You
can have more than one cutting edge, and an object can be both a cutting edge and an
object to trim.
The following chart shows the capabilities of each object type:
Object Cutting Object Cutting

Object to trim Edge Object to trim Edge
3-D Face No No Mtext No Yes
3-D Mesh No No Pface No No
3-D Poly Yes Yes Point No No
3-D Solids No No Polylines Yes Yes
Arc Yes Yes Ray Yes Yes
Assoc. Dim. Yes No Region No Yes
Block No No Shape No No
Circle Yes Yes Solid No No
Ellipse (Pline) Yes Yes Spline Yes Yes
Ellipse (True) Yes Yes Text No Yes
Leader No Yes Trace No No
Line Yes Yes *Viewport No Yes
Mline No Yes Xline Yes Yes
* Viewports - Only when paper space is active.
TRIM 551

Modify toolbar 'of.
Screen menu MODIFY" Trim:

Keyboard TRIM
PROMPTS:
Select cutting edges: (P rojmode=UCS , Edgemode=No extend
Select objects:
<Select object to trim>/Project/Edge/Undo:
OPTIONS:
Select cutting • Determines the cutting edge(s) for the objects you want to trim.
edges
Select object • Selects the part of the object to delete. You can select multiple
to trim objects by using the Fence selection set method.
Project • Determines the projection mode used for finding cutting edges.
• This value is maintained by the Projmode system variable.

None • Specifies no projection. Only objects that intersect with the
cutting edge in 3-D space are trimmed.
ues • Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current ues.

• Objects that do not intersect with the boundary edges in 3-D
space trim.
View • Specifies projection along the current view direction. Trims all
objects that intersect with the cutting edge in the current view.
Edge • Determines whether the object trims to the implied intersection
or whether it must actually intersect the boundary edge.
• This value is maintained by the Edgemode system variable.

Extend • Trims to the cutting edge or to the implied cutting edge.
No extend • Trims only if it actually intersects the cutting edge.
Undo • Restores the last object trimmed.

552 TRIM
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> At times you can use Chamfer, Change (point), Break, Ddmodify, Fillet, Grip
editing, and Lengthen to trim most objects. None of these commands requires a
boundary edge.
t> It is possible to select more than one cutting edge per object. The object will trim
to the ftrst edge and stop. Pick the object again and it will trim to the next cutting
edge.
~ Trimming circles requires two intersections with a cutting edge.
~ Objects trim to the center of wide Polyline cutting edges and to each line of an
MIine object.
~ Ends of wide Polylines are always square. Trimming a wide Polyline at an angle
results in a portion of the Polyline width extending past the cutting edge.
t> When Trimming a Linear dimension, the entire dimension updates.
~ You cannot Decurve a Splined Polyline that has been trimmed. The Polyline
becomes pennanently curved polyline segments.
RELATED VARIABLES: Edgemode, Projmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Change, Extend, Lengthen, Stretch
EXAMPLE:
Before After
Cutting '"' ~
Edge ~
I
Cutting,",
Edge ~
i
Cutting
Edge
gl
Implied '-..1\.1
Cutting Edge _ ~
TYPE 553
'TRIMMODE
Trimmode detennines whether the original objects being Filleted and Chamfered are
modified. This value is typically set using the Trim / No Trim option of the Chamfer and
Fillet command.

Screen menu CONSTRCT" Chamfer: or Fillet: .. Trim / No Trim
Keyboard TRIMMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Does not modify selected edges.
• Trims selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer lines and fillet arcs.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Chamfer, Fillet
EXAMPLE:
Origi nal C-.J od

.
Tnmmade 0 I '
L.-J DO
Trimmode 10 0 0
TYPE
Type activates the DOS (Disk Operating System) command named Type. This command
displays the contents of files. Usually you would request the contents of files written in
ASCII or text format.
Since Type was intended for the DOS version of AutoCAD, it may not work on your
Windows version. It is recommended that you use Notepad, a program supplied with
Windows, as an alternative.
554 TYPE

Keyboard TYPE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ If you type the word Type to activate the DOS Type command and you receive the
file. Acad.pgp is usually located in the AutoCAD support directory.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Catalog, Del, Dir, Edit, Sh, Shell
u 555
u
U (Undo 1)
U reverses the effects of the last command. You can Undo back to the beginning of the
drawing session. U is the default for the Undo command.

Standard toolbar If>
Pull-down Edit .. Undo

Screen menu ASSIST" Undo: or SERVICE" Undo
Keyboard U or <Ctrl Z>
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> The Redo command reverses the effects of the U command. You can Redo only
once and it must be the first command after U.
! Ddedit, Dim, Dview, Extend, Grip editing, Leader, Lengthen, Line, Mledit, Mline,
Mvsetup, Pedit, Pline, Splinedit, and Trim have an Undo option built into their
commands. If you use U without exiting the command, the last change or action is
undone. If you exit the command and issue a U, whatever was done during that
command sequence is undone.
! Even though you may use the Qsave and Save commands, you can still undo past
those commands until you return to the beginning of the drawing session. If you
want to make sure you do not undo past a certain point, use Save and then re-Open
your drawing for editing.
! The Undo command views a Script command sequence as a group. Therefore, you
can reverse the whole Script with one U command.
! Some commands such as Attext, Dxfout, Mslide, Plot, Preferences, Syswindows,
Wblock, and the loading and unloading of rendering software cannot be undone.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Redo, Undo
556 ucs
ues (User Coordinate System)

ues redefmes the location of 0,0 and the direction of the X, Y, and Z axes.
Standard or ues toolbar See Options.
Pull-down View'" Set ues
Screen menu VIEW'" ues:
Keyboard ues
PROMPTS:
Origin / ZAxis / 3point / OBject / View/ X/ Y/ Z/ Prev/ Restore /
Save / Del /?/< World >:
OPTIONS:
Origin • Specifies a new origin point while retaining the direction of the
X, Y, and Z axes. If a Z coordinate is not given it uses the
current elevation value.
ZAxis • Specifies a new origin point and a positive Z axis.
3 3point • Specifies a new ues origin and the direction of its positive X
and Yaxes.
OBject • Defmes a new ues with the same orientation as a selected
object. The origin is determined by the object type.
• This option does not work for 3-D Polylines, Ellipses (Pellipse
0), Leader, Meshes, Mline, Mtext, Polygon, Ray, Region,
Solids, Spline, Viewport borders, and Xline.
View • Defines a new ues parallel to the screen. The origin point
does not change.
ucs 557
x • Rotates the current ues around the X axis.
y • Rotates the current ues around the Yaxis.
Z • Rotates the current X and Yaxes about the Z axis.
Previous • Restores the previous ues. You can backtrack up to ten

previous coordinate systems for Paper space and ten previous
coordinate systems for Model space.
• This is the same as selecting *PREVIOUS* and Current from
the ues Names list of the Dducs dialog box.
Restore • Retrieves a previously saved ues. Responding with a question
mark (?) is the same as ues ?
• This is the same as using the Current option of the Dducs

dialog box.
• This value is maintained by the Ucsname variable.
Save • Stores the current ues with a name you specify, up to 31
characters long. Responding with a question mark (?) is the
same as ues?
• This is the same as using the Rename To option of the ues
Names list of the Dducs dialog box.
Delete • Deletes a saved ues. You cannot delete *WORLD* and
*PREVIOUS*.
• This is the same as using the Delete option of the Dducs dialog
box.
? • Activates the wild-card options for reviewing the names of
uess defined in the current drawing. The default, an asterisk,
gives a sorted listing of the named ues. You can use any of
the wild-card options to create a more specific list. If the
current ues is unnamed, it is listed as *WORLD* or *NO
NAME*, depending on its orientation.
• This is the same as the ues Names list of the Dducs dialog
box.
558 ucs
III World • Restores the Word Coordinate System (WCS).

• This is the same as selecting *WORLD* and Current from the
UCS Names list of the Dducs dialog box.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Only one UCS can be current.
~ If you get lost when locating a UCS, return to the WCS and start over. The
location of the WCS can never be altered.
~ You can rename a saved UCS with the Dducs, Ddrename, or Rename command.
~. Use Dducsp if you want to use AutoCAD's predefmed UCSs.
~ Each viewport retains its own UCS setting.
Viewctr, Viewdir, Viewmode, World
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrename, Dducs, Dducsp, Ddview, Plan, Rename,
Ucsicon, Vpoint
EXAMPLE:
Command: UCS
Origin/ZAxis/3point/OBject/View/X/Y/Z/Prev/Restore/Save/
Del/?/<World>: 3
Origin point <0,0,0>: Point 1
Point on positive portion of the X-axis
<-1.0000,0.0000, -1.0000>: Point 2
Point on positive-Y portion of the UCS
XY plane <-2.0000,1.0000,-1.0000>: Point 3
Command: UCS
Origin/ZAxis/3point/Object/View/X/Y/Z/Prev/Restore/Save/
Del/?/<World>: S
?/Name of UCS: RIGHT
UCSPOLLOW 559
'UCSFOLLOW (User Coordinate System FOLLOW)

Dcsfollow controls the display whenever the DeS is modified.

Pull-down Options ... Des> Follow
Screen menu OPTIONS'" UeSfoll: or VIEW'" ues: ... Follow:
Keyboard ueSFOLLOW
OPTIONS:
o • A change in the ues does not affect the view.
1 • A change in the DeS causes an automatic change to the plan view of the
newUeS.
560 UCSFOLLOW
TIPS & WARNINGS:

" Each viewport retains its own Ucsfollow setting.
~ Paper space treats this variable as though it were always set to O.
RELATED VARIABLES: Viewmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Plan, ues
'UCSICON (User Coordinate System ICON)

Ucsicon determines the visibility and location of the ues icon. It is used as a marker to
graphically display the origin and viewing plane of the current ues. When the marker is
L-shaped you are in Model space; when the marker is triangular you are in Paper space.
The system variable (Setvar) that maintains this setting is also named Ucsicon.

Pull-down Options" ues > .. Icon (on/off) and Icon Origin (or/no)
Screen menu OPTIONS" UeSIeON or VIEW" ues: .. Ucsicon:
Keyboard ueSIeON
PROMPTS:
ON/OFF/All/Noorigin/ORigin <ON>:
OPTIONS:
ON • Displays the Ucsicon.
OFF • Turns the Ucsicon display Off.
All • Displays changes to the Ucsicon in all active viewports.
Noorigin • Displays the Ucsicon at the lower left side of the viewport regardless
of the current ues definition.
ORigin • Displays the Ucsicon at the origin of the current ues (0,0,0). If the
origin is off the screen's viewing area, the icon is shown in the lower
left comer.
UCSNAME 561
World Coordinote Ucsicon set XY Plane is

Syslm (WCS) 10 Noorigin Perpendicu 10 r
bb
10 your Viewing Plane
Ucsicon Vie wing the UCS Perspec1ive Paper

sel to Origin from below Viewing is On Space
Following are the different icon features:

W • The ues is the same as the wes.
+ • The icon is located at the origin point of the ues.
Box • The ues is viewed from a positive Z direction.

Box with a broken pencil • The XY plane of the ues is perpendicular to your
viewing plane.
Cube in perspective • Perspective viewing is on. This is a result of the
Distance option of the Dview command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Ucsicon, Worlducs
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Dducsp, Dview, Mspace, Pspace, Setvar, UCS
'UCSNAME (User Coordinate System NAME)

Ucsname maintains the name of the current ues. This value is a result of the latest Save
or Restore/Current option of the Dducs or ues command.

Keyboard UeSNAME
TIPS & WARNINGS:

l This value is blank when the current ues is unnamed.

System variable none, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Text string
562 UCSNAME
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Dducsp, ues
'UCSORG (User Coordinate System ORiGin)

Ucsorg maintains the origin point of the current ues. The value is always given in world
coordinates. This value is set with the Dducs, Dducsp, or ues command.

Keyboard UeSORG
System variable 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Last value used in the 3-D point
Read-only drawing
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Dducsp, ues
'UCSXDIR (User Coordinate System X DIRection)

Ucsxdir gives the X direction of current ues. This value is set with the Dducs, DducSp,
or ues command.

Keyboard UeSXDlR
System variable 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000, Last value used in the 3-D point
Read-only drawing
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, ues
'UCSYDIR (User Coordinate System Y DIRection)

Ucsydir gives the Y direction of current ues. This value is set with the Dducs, Dducsp, or
ues command.
INITIATE THE eOMMAND BY...

Keyboard UeSYDlR
UNDO 563

System variable 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Last value used in the 3-D point
Read-only drawing
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, UCS
UNDEFINE I REDEFINE
Undefine disables built-in AutoCAD commands so they can be replaced with other
commands of the same name. Undefine is usually used in conjunction with AutoLISP,
ADS, or ARX programs. Redefine restores the original AutoCAD command.

Keyboard UNDEFINE / REDEFINE
PROMPTS:
Command name:
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Redefine and Undefine are only valid for the current editing session.
~ Preceding an undefined command name with a period C.) recalls the original
AutoCAD command for that single condition.
l You can only use Undefine and Redefine for commands, not for command
options. For example, you can undefine the complete Layer command, but not the
specific layer options.
l Attempting to execute an undefined command causes an "Unknown command"
error message.
UNDO
Undo lets you sequentially reverse previous commands individually, in groups, or to the
beginning of the current drawing session.

Keyboard UNDO
564 UNDO
PROMPTS:
Auto/Control/BEgin/End/Mark/Back/<number>:
OPTIONS:
<number> • Enter the number of commands to Undo.
Auto • Auto On marks a menu macro as one command. Auto Off treats
each command in a menu macro as an individual command.
Control • Limits or disables the Undo command.
• This value is maintained by the Undoctl variable.
All • Enables all the Undo prompts and options.
None • Disables the Undo and U commands. Auto, Begin, and Mark
options are not available when None is active.
One • Allows only the last command to be undone. Auto, Begin, and
Mark options are not available when One is active.
BEgin I End • Begin treats a sequence of commands as one. End terminates
this process. This is similar to the way Auto behaves with menu
macros.
• This value is maintained by the Undoctl variable.
Mark I Back • Mark sets a marker before issuing a series of commands. You
can have as many markers as you want. The Back option undoes
commands back to the last marker. Once you reach the first
marker, you will receive the message "This will undo
everything. OK? <Y>."
• This value is maintained by the Undomarks variable.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The default of the Undo command is U. Although U is not listed as an option,
pressing <Enter> means U (or Undo 1).
£ Ddedit, Dim, Dview, Extend, Grip editing, Leader, Lengthen, Line, Mledit, Mline,
Mvsetup, Pedit, Pline, Splinedit, and Trim have an Undo option built into their
commands. If you use a U without exiting the command, the last change or action
is undone. If you exit the command and issue a U, whatever was done during that
command sequence is undone.
UNDOMARKS 565
l Even though you may use the Qsave and Save commands, you can still undo past
those commands until you return to the beginning of the drawing session. If you
want to make sure you do not undo past a certain point, use Save and then re-Open
your drawing for editing.
l The Undo command views a Script command sequence as a group. Therefore, you
can reverse the whole Script with one U command.
l Some commands such as Attext, Dxfout, Mslide, Plot, Preferences, Syswindows,
Wblock, and the loading and unloading of rendering software cannot be undone.
RELATED VARIABLES: Undoctl, Undodisk, Undomarks
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: U
'UNDOCTL (UNDO ConTroL)

Undoctl maintains the settings for the Undo command.

Keyboard UNDOCTL
OPTIONS:
Undoctl is bit coded and its value is the sum of the following:
• Undo is enabled.
2 • Only one command can be undone.

4 • Auto group mode is enabled.
8 • A group is currently active.
System variable 5, Read-only Initial default Integer
'UNDOMARKS
Undomarks tracks the number of marks that have been placed with the Undo command.
566 UNDOMARKS

Keyboard UNDOMARKS
System variable 0, Read-only Initial default Integer
'UNDOONDISK (UNDO file ON DISK)

Undoondisk determines where the Undo file is stored.

Keyboard UNDOONDISK
OPTIONS:
o • Undo file is stored in RAM.
1 • Undo file is stored on disk.
System variable 0 Last value used in the drawing Integer
UNION
Union creates a composite Solid or Region from two or more Solids or Regions by
combining one set of Solids with another set of Solids or one set of Regions with another
set of Regions. The objects do not have to share the same coordinates.

Modify toolbar
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SOLIDS - Union:

Keyboard UNION
UNITMODE 567
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) Exploding Unions has various results depending on the original object and
whether part of the object was deleted due to the union process.
\) You can obtain detailed information concerning the Union's result with the
Massprop command.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Interfere, Intersect, Subtract
EXAMPLE:
Bef ore After
~(D (~~)
(,","",--I)
'UNITMODE
Unitmode controls the displays of fractions, feet and inches, and surveyor's angles. You
can have the Units displayed with a hyphen separating the feet and inches (standard
format) or without the hyphen (user input format). You can have angular units displayed
with spaces between values (standard format) or without spaces (user input format).

Keyboard UNITMODE
OPTIONS:
o • Displays Units in standard format.
1 • Displays Units in user input mode.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Unitmode affects commands such as List, Area, and the menu status bar
coordinates. However, dimensioning always shows the standard format as the
default.
568 UNITS
'UNITS
Units controls the input and display fonnats of coordinates, distances, and angles. You
specify the system of units, the precision, the system of angle measure, the precision of
angle display, and the direction of angles.
You can achieve the same results using the Ddunits dialog box.

Keyboard UNITS
OPTIONS:
Format • Specifies the units of measure: Scientific, Decimal, Engineering,
Architectural, or Fractional.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Lunits.
Precision • The number of digits past the decimal place or the smallest fraction
of an inch to display.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Luprec.
Systems of angle measure
• Specifies the fonnat for angle measurements: Decimal degrees,
Degrees/minutes/seconds, Grads, Radians, or Surveyor's units.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Aunits.
Number of fractional places for display of angles:
• Select the precision with which angles are displayed.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Auprec.
Direction for angle 0
• Set angle 0 equal to East, North, West, South, or enter an angle.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Angbase.
Do you want angles measured clockwise?
• No measures angles counterclockwise; Yes measures angles
clockwise.
• This value is maintained by the system variable Angdir.
USERR1·5 569
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can change Units settings after you begin a drawing.
~ The format for entering 3'-5 1/2" is 3'5-1/2 or 3'5-1.5. The inch character (") is
optional.
t, You can enter angles in radians or grads fonnat even if the current units setting is
for another fonnat. Enter the suffix "r" for radians or "g" for grads. Do not include
the suffix if the fonnat is current.
t, You can override the current angle fonnat and enter angles in decimal degrees
relative to AutoCAD's default orientation (zero degrees equals 3 o'clock) and
direction (counterclockwise) by preceding the angle with two angle brackets (<<).
Preceding the angle with three angle brackets ««) overrides only the orientation
and direction and allows the angle to be specified in the current angle units fonnat.
! Civil engineering drawings are usually created in decimal units, with the
convention that 1.0 equals 1'-0". If you change the Units to architectural, 1.0
becomes 1". If necessary, you can Scale the drawing 12 times to have 1.0 equal to
1'-0".
RELATED VARIABLES: Angbase, Angdir, Aunits, Auprec, Lunits, Luprec, Unitmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddim, Ddunits
'USERIl·5 (USER Integer)

Useril, Useri2, Useri3, Useri4, and Useri5 are five variables that are available for storing
and retrieving integer values. These variables are usually used by application developers.

Keyboard USERIl, USERI2, USERI3, USERI4, USERI5
System Variable none Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Userrl - 5, Usersl- 5
'USERRl·5 (USER Real)

Userrl, Userr2, Userr3, Userr4, and Userr5 are five variables that are available for storing
and retrieving real numbers. These variables are usually used by application developers.
570 USERR1-5

Keyboard USERR!, USERR2, USERR3, USERR4, USERR5
System Variable none Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Useri! - 5, Users! - 5
'USERSl-S (USER String)

Users!, Users2, Users3, Users4, and UsersS are five variables that are available for
storing and retrieving text string data. These variables are usually used by application
developers.

Keyboard USERS!, USERS2, USERS3, USERS4, USERS5
RELATED VARIABLES: Useri! - 5, Userr! - 5
VIEW 571
v
'VIEW
View saves the current viewport or a user-defmable window to a name, for future
retrieval. It provides a way to return quickly to certain designated portions of the drawing.
You can achieve the same results using the Ddview dialog box.

Keyboard VIEW
PROMPTS:
?/Delete/Restore/Save/Window:
OPTIONS:
? • Activates the wild-card options for reviewing the names of Views
defmed in the drawing. The default, an asterisk, displays a sorted
listing of all named Views. You can enter View names separated by
commas or you can use any of the wild-card options to create a more
specific list. An M (Model Space) or P (Paper Space) indicates in
which space the View was defined.
Delete • Removes a defined View. You can enter View names separated by
commas or you can use any of the wild-card options to create a more
specific list.
Restore • Displays a saved View in the current viewport. If you restore a
Model Space view while working in Paper Space, you are asked to
select a Viewport. The Viewport must be On and Active. You are
then switched to Model Space.
• You can restore a Paper Space view while working in Model Space if
Tilemode is Off (0). Ddview will not let you restore any Paper space
views if Model Space is active.
Save • Saves the current viewport display.
Window • Specifies a window area to save as a View. Restoring the View may
display more than the windowed area up to the current display size;
Plotting the View only plots the windowed area.
572 VIEW
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ View names can be up to 31 characters long.
~ The Plot command gives you the option of plotting a View.
~ You can specify a predefmed View for display before beginning a drawing
session. When Filedia is set to 1 you can pick the Select Initial View option. When
Filedia is set to 0, at the "Enter name of drawing" prompt type the drawing name
followed by a comma and the view name.
~ Zoom Previous includes restored Views.
~ Rename Views with the Ddrename or Rename command.
~ The View command does not issue a warning when naming a View to the same
name as an existing View. Ddview does provide a warning message.
~ Once you initiate the View command you cannot move to another viewport to
viewport, and then reissue the View command.
~ If you have difficulty accessing the View as a transparent command, check the
Viewres and Regenauto settings. Set Viewres to Fast Zooms and Regenauto to
Off.
~ Most Views can be restored transparently. However, you cannot execute a
transparent View when working in Paper space or during the following commands:
Vpoint, Dview, Zoom, View, or Pan.
RELATED VARIABLES: Viewctr, Viewdir, Viewsize, Viewtwist, Vsmax, Vsmin
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddrename, Ddview, Rename
EXAMPLE:
Command: VIEW
?/Delete/Restore/Save/Window: W
View name to save: RM128
First corner: pick point 1
Other corner: pick point 2
Command: VIEW
?/Delete/Restore/Save/Window: R
View name to restore: RM128
VIEWDIR 573
'VIEWCTR (VIEW CenTeR)

Viewctr maintains the current viewport's center point.

Keyboard VIEWCTR
System variable varies, Read-only Last value used in the drawing 3-D Point
RELATED VARIABLES: Target, Viewdir, Viewtwist
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Dducsp, Ddview, Ddvpoint, Dview, Pan, UCS,
View, Vpoint, Vports, Zoom
'VIEWDIR (VIEWing DIRection)

Viewdir maintains the current viewport's viewing direction in DeS coordinates.

Keyboard VIEWDIR
System variable varies, Read-only Last value used in the drawing 3-D Vector
RELATED VARIABLES: Target, Viewdir, Viewtwist
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Dducsp, Ddview, Ddvpoint, Dview, UCS, View,
Vpoint, Vports
574 VIEWMODE
'VIEWMODE
Viewmode maintains the current viewport's viewing mode. This value is set using the
Dview command.

Keyboard VIEWMODE
OPTIONS:
Viewmode is bit coded and its value is the sum of the following:
0 • Viewmode is disabled.
1 • Perspective view is active.
2 • Front clipping is on.
4 • Back clipping is on.
8 • Ucsfollow mode is on.
16 • Front clipping is not at eye level.
System variable 0, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Backz, Frontz, Ucsfollow
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddview, Dview, View, Vports
VIEWPORTS see VPORTS
VIEWRES (VIEW RESolution)

Viewres controls the speed and display resolution of Arcs, Circles, Ellipses, and
Linetypes in the current viewport.

Screen menu OPTIONS" Viewres:
Keyboard VIEWRES
VIEWRES 575
PROMPTS:
Do you want fast zooms? <Y>:
Enter circle zoom percent (1-20000) <100>:
OPTIONS:
Do you want fast zooms? <Y>
Yes • Yes - Most Zoom, Pan, and View (Restore) commands are
performed at Redraw speed.
No • No - All Zoom, Pan, and View (Restore) commands are performed at

Regen speed.
Enter circle zoom percent (1-20000) <100>
• This value controls the display resolution of Arcs, Circles, Ellipses,

and Linetypes in the current viewport. Entering a value greater than
100 gives you smoother resolution display but increases Regeneration
times. Lower values decrease the resolution display (objects are drawn
with short line segments) but also decreases Regeneration time.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Regardless of the Viewres setting, Circles and Arcs are always plotted at the
plotter's resolution.
~ To produce the best rendering quality, set Viewres to a higher number.
~ Changing the value of Viewres has a direct effect on the Facetres variable.
~ Broken linetypes can appear as Continuous lines due to Viewres and the current
Zoom level. Forcing a Regeneration or Zooming in closer may display the linetype
correctly.
~ Each viewport (Model space) and Paper space contains its own Viewres setting.
However, you can only have one Facetres setting per drawing.
RELATED VARIABLES: Facetres
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Pan, Render, View, Zoom
EXAMPLE:
576 VIEWSIZE
'VIEWSIZE
Viewsize maintains the height of the current viewport.

Keyboard VIEWSIZE
System variable varies, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Real
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddview, Ddvpoint, Dview, View, Vpoint, Vports,
Zoom
'VIEWTWIST
Viewtwist maintains the view twist angle for the current viewport. This value is set with
the Dview command.

Keyboard VIEWTWIST
System variable 0, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Real
RELATED VARIABLES: Viewctr, Viewsize
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddview, Dview, View, Vports
'VISRETAIN (VISibility RETAIN)

Visretain determines whether an Xref's layer settings are based on its original values or
those of the current drawing.

Screen FILE ~ Xref: ~ Visretn:
menu
Keyboard VISRETAIN
VPLAYER 577
OPTIONS:
o • The Xref's layer settings are defined and displayed by the Xref file settings.
• The Xref's layer settings are defined and displayed by the current drawing.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When Visretain is set to 0 you can temporarily change the Xref's Linetype, Color,
and Layer visibility. However, this is only temporary. Once you Reload, Attach, or
End the session, that information is forgotten.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddlmodes, Layer, Xref
VPLAYER (ViewPort LAYER)

Vplayer controls layer visibliity per viewport. You can achieve the same results using the
Ddlmodes or Ddemodes dialog box.

Pull-down Data -. Viewport Layer Controls>
Screen menu DATA -. VPlayer:
Keyboard VPLAYER
PROMPTS:
? / Fre eze / Thaw / Reset / New f r z / Vpv i sd f l t:
Al l / Se le ct / <Curren t > :
OPTIONS:
? • Displays a listing of the Frozen Layers for the current viewport. If
you are in Model space you are temporarily switched to Paper
space for viewport selection.
Freeze • Specifies Layers to Freeze. You can list Layer names separated by
commas or use wild-card characters. Once you name the Layers,
you select the viewport(s).
Thaw • Selects Layers to Thaw. You can list Layer names separated by
commas or use wild-card characters.
578 VPLAYER
Reset • Restores the default visibility setting for Layers based on the
Vpvisdflt setting.
Newfrz • Creates New Layers that are Frozen in all viewports. Create more
than one Layer at a time by separating each layer name with a
comma.
Vpvisdflt • Viewport visibility default determines Layer visibility defaults
before creating viewports. You can set more than one layer by
using wild-card characters.
All • Selects all Paper space viewports including those that are not
visible.
Select • Selects Paper space viewports using standard object selection

methods. If you are in model space you are temporarily switched to
Paper space for viewport selection.
Current • Selects the current viewport.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

l Tilemode must be set to 0 (oft) in order to activate this command.
l Vplayer cannot override Layer command settings. Layers must be Thawed and On
in order to be affected by the Vplayer command.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddemodes, Ddlmodes
VPOINT (View POINT)

Vpoint lets you specify the direction and angle for viewing a drawing by selecting a 3-D
viewpoint. Issuing the command regenerates the drawing in parallel projection from the 3-
D point that you specify. You have three ways to define a viewpoint: enter X,Y,z values;
supply an angle in the XY plane and from the XY plane; or pick a point on the compass
icon.
You can achieve the same results using the Ddvpoint dialog box.
VPOINT 579

View toolbar
Top, ~ Bottom, ~ Left, Ii] Right, Front,
Back, SW Iso, SE Iso, NE Iso, ~ NW Iso

Pull-down View - 3D Viewpoint
Screen menu VIEW - Vpoint:
Keyboard VPOINT
PROMPTS:
Rotate/<View point) <0.000 0,0.0000,1.000 0>:
OPTIONS:
Rotate • Specifies the viewpoint by entering two angles - the angle in the
XY plane from the X axis and the Z angle from the XY plane.
Viewpoint • Specifies a view direction by entering X,Y,Z coordinates relative to
0,0,0.
If you press <Enter> at the prompt, a compass and axes tripod are displayed to
assist in selecting a viewpoint.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Specify a viewpoint of 0,0,1 to return to plan view, or use the Plan command.
t> Vpoint can only display parallel projection. To generate perspectives, use the
Dview Command.
~ You cannot use the Vpoint command in Paper Space.
~ Vpoint resizes the screen to include the entire drawing. Whenever possible, save
the screen display with the View command. Use the View Restore option to bring
back the different views.
~ Once you initiate the Vpoint command you cannot move to another viewport to
viewport, and then reissue the Vpoint command.
~ You cannot control the distance at which you are viewing an object, only the
orientation. To control the distance, use the Dview command.
580 VPOINT
l The Viewpoint is always viewed through 0,0,0 of the wes or ues depending on
the setting of the Worldview system variable. If you want to view your drawing
through a different point, use the Dview command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Target, Viewctr, Viewdir, Viewsize, Vsmax, Vsmin,
Worldview
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddvpoint, Dview, Plan
EXAMPLE:
The following options can be located from the Pull-down menu View - 3D Viewpoint
Presets.
-1, 1, 1 0,1,0
0",
Back
~~C)rnetric
I" I -b<
-1,1,0 l / ' 1,0,0
o
Right
cCJ
Lett
-r- ~ --r-
~
i
I
"
~-"'~
Front
JX~-1'1
O. -1. 0 ~oom~'
~l,wrnetr;c I I I
VPORTS I VIEWPORTS
Vports or Viewports create, restore, and delete viewports. Vports lets you divide your
screen into several viewing areas commonly referred to as tiled viewports. Each viewport
can display a different view of your drawing and has independent Dview, Grid, Snap,
Ucsicon, Viewres, Vpoint, and Isometric settings. You can independently Pan, Redraw,
Regen, and Zoom in each viewport.
Viewports are interactive. You can begin most drawing and editing commands in one
viewport and click into another viewport to complete the drawing or editing command.
Only one viewport can be current at a time. The current viewport is surrounded by a
wider border, and the cross hairs are only present within that viewport. You can only Plot
the current viewport.
VPORTS 581
When Tilemode is set to 0 the Vports and Viewports commands are inactive. However,
you can use a similar command named Mview. Mview creates and restores viewports,
controls viewport visibility, and performs hidden line removal during Paper space plots.
Viewports are called "tiled" when Tilemode is set to 1. They cannot overlap and you
cannot dynamically Move, Copy, or change their size. Viewports are called "floating"
when Tilemode is set to O. These Viewports can overlap, and you can dynamically Move,
Copy, or change their size. You can control Layer visibility per Viewport and Plot
multiple Viewports at multiple scales.
INITIATE THE COMMAND BY •..

Pull-down View ~ Tiled Viewports >
Screen menu VIEW ~ Vports;
Keyboard VPORTS or VIEWPORTS
PROMPTS:
Save/Restore/Delete/Join/SIngle/?/2/<3>/4:
OPTIONS:
<3> • Splits the current Viewport into anyone of a variety of three-
viewport configurations. This is the default.
Save • Saves the current viewport configuration with a name. A viewport
name can be up to 31 characters long.
Restore • Retrieves a saved viewport configuration. Responding with a ?
activates the wild-card options for reviewing the names of viewports
defined in the current drawing. The default, an asterisk, displays a
listing of the saved viewport configurations. You can use any of the
wild-card options to obtain a more specific list.
Delete • Deletes a saved viewport configuration.
Join • Combines two adjacent viewports into one viewport provided they
form a rectangle.
SIngle • Turns multiple viewports off and returns to one viewport. The
current viewport is the default.
? • Activates the wild-card options for reviewing the names of viewports
defined in the current drawing. The default, an asterisk, gives a
complete listing of all saved viewport configurations. You can use
any of the wild-card options to create a more specific list.
582 VPORTS
2 • Splits the current viewport into two horizontal or vertical viewports.

4 • Splits the current viewport into four viewports.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can pick preset viewport configurations by doing one of the following:
• From the View pull-down menu select Tiled Viewports and Layout.
• From the Screen menu select VIEW and TileVpt:.
• From the Screen menu select VIEW, Vports:, and DDvport:.
~ When working with multiple viewports, objects are highlighted only in the
viewport from which they were selected. The viewport from which you complete
the command shows all selected objects highlighted.
~ Redraw and Regen only affect the current viewport. You can redraw and regen-
erate all the displayed viewports with the Redrawall and Regenall commands.
~ You can use the edges of viewports in Paper space as hatching boundaries.
I You cannot switch viewports during the following commands: Snap, Grid, Vports,
Zoom, Pan, Vpoint, and Dview.
RELATED VARIABLES: Cvport, Maxactvp, Tilemode, Viewctr, Viewdir, Viewsize,
Vsmax, Vsmin
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mview, Redrawall, Regenall
EXAMPLE:
IIII IIII I III I

VSMAX 583
VSLIDE (View SLIDE)

Vslide displays a slide file in the current viewport. A slide file has the extension .sld. You
create slides with the Mslide command. Using Redraw or any command that causes a
redraw clears the slide.

Pull-down Tools - Slide - View ...
Screen menu TOOLS - Vslide:
Keyboard VSLIDE
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t, Slides can be used as an invisible "layer" to trace over onto the current drawing.
t, Since slide files do not retain any of the data associated with objects, recalling
slides is accomplished at Redraw speed.
t, Slides are often used for slide show presentations and as references.
t, This command is affected by the Filedia setting. When Filedia is set to 1 a dialog
box is activated; when Filedia is set to 0 a dialog box does not appear.
l Slides cannot be edited or plotted.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Delay, Mslide, Script
'VSMAX (Virtual Screen MAXimum)

Vsmax maintains the upper right corner of the current viewport's virtual screen.

Keyboard VSMAX
System variable varies, Read-only Last value used in the drawing 3-D
Point
RELATED VARIABLES: Vsmin
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddview, Ddvpoint, Dview, Limits, Regen, View,
Vpoint, Vports, Zoom
584 VSMIN
'VSMIN (Virtual Screen MINimum)

Vsmin maintains the lower left comer of the current viewport's virtual screen.

Keyboard VSMIN
System variable varies, Read-only Last value used in the drawing 3-D Point
RELATED VARIABLES: Vsmax
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddview, Ddvpoint, Dview, Limits, Regen, View,
Vpoint, Vports, Zoom
WBLOCK 585
WBLOCK (Write BLOCK)

Wblock writes a drawing, part of a drawing, or a Block to a file as a New drawing. The
Wblock is assigned to Model space. This file can be inserted into other drawings using
Insert or Xref or can be recalled with the Open command.

Screen menu FILE ~ EXPORT ~ Wblock:
Keyboard WBLOCK
PROMPTS:
File name:
Bl oc k name:
Ins ertion base point:
OPTIONS:
File name • The name can be up to eight characters for DOS-based systems
and include a drive and path specification. The file extension
.dwg is applied automatically. When Filedia is set to 1 the
Create Drawing File dialog box is activated, when Filedia is set
to 0 the prompts and options appear at the Command prompt.
Block name • Specifies the name of a Block in the current drawing to be
written to a new file. You cannot use the name of an Xref or any
Blocks assigned to an Xref.
• Any existing block in the current drawing with the same name as
the Wblock file name is written to the file. You cannot use this
method on DOS-based systems if the Block name contains more
than eight letters.
* • Writes the entire drawing to a file. This is similar to the Save

command. However, this Purges any unused Blocks, Layers,
Linetypes, Mlstyles, Styles, and dimension styles. Model space
objects are written to Model space, and Paper space objects are
written to Paper space.
586 WBLOCK
<Enter> • If you do not give a Block name, you are prompted to enter an
insertion base point and to select the objects to Wblock. This is
similar to creating a Block, except that the block definition is
saved to a file instead of saved within the current drawing. Use
the Oops command to restore the deleted objects.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Wblocking in Paper space only writes those objects created in Paper space.
Wblocking in Model space only writes those objects created in Model space.
Using the * option writes those objects created in Model space to Model space and
those objects created in Paper space to Paper space.
~ This command is affected by the Filedia setting. If Filedia is set to 1 a dialog box
is activated; if Filedia is set to 0 you are prompted at the Command line. Entering
a tilde (-) at the Command line temporarily activates the File dialog box.
~ You cannot Wblock an external reference (Xref) or one of its dependent Blocks in
response to the Block name prompt.
~ Make sure the desired UCS or WCS setting is current before Wblocking objects.

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Base, Block, Ddinsert, Export, Insert
EXAMPLE:
Command: WBLOCK
File name: PUMP
Block name: <ENTER>
Insertion base point: pick point 1
Select objects: Select pump objects
WEDGE
Creates a 3-D Solid wedge.

Solids toolbar ~
Screen menu DRAW 2 - SOLIDS - Wedge:

Keyboard Wedge
WEDGE 587
PROMPTS:
Center /< Corner of wedge > <0, 0 ,0 >:
Cube / Length /<o ther corner >:
Height:
OPTIONS:
Comer of wedge • Specifies the first comer.
Center • Specifies the center point.
Cube • All sides have equal lengths.
Length • Specifies the length along the X axis.
Width • Specifies the width along the Yaxis.
Height • Specifies the height along the Z axis.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> Use negative values when referencing the negative direction of the current UCS X,
Y, and Z axes.
t> Use the Ai_wedge command to create a 3-D Surface mesh wedge.
t> Use the Ddvpoint, Vpoint, and Dview commands to view the Wedge at different
t> Use the Hide, Render, and Shade commands to enhance the Wedge's display.
£ If the second comer point specification has a different Z value than the first, the
difference between the two becomes the height of the Wedge.
£ Exploding a Wedge creates five Regions; exploding the Regions creates 18 Lines.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ai_Wedge, Explode, Hide, Region, Render, Shade,

UCS, Vpoint
588 WEDGE
EXAMPLE:
Center Option Corner Option
2
hei = 2
(j)
wild-card characters
Wild-card characters are available for certain commands that retain lists of information or
named objects. They help you search for information by using approximate criteria
instead of exact criteria and provide complete or partial lists based on those criteria.
The commands taking advantage of wild-card characters are the following:
-Bhatch Files (Filedia = 0 or 1) Minsert View
Block Filter Open (valid for only? or *) Viewports
Ddrename -Group Save (valid for only? or *) Vplayer
Dim: Save Hatch Saveas (valid for only? or *) Vports
Dim: Restore Insert Setvar Xref
Dim: Variables Layer Shape
Dimstyle Linetype Style
Ddlmodes Load (Filedia = 0) ues
OPTIONS:
Typically a ? (question mark) is the option that activates use of wild-cards. The default,
an asterisk, displays a complete list of information. There are 10 different wild-card
characters that can be used to form specific search patterns.
? • Question mark - Matches any single character.
* • Asterisk - Matches any string. It can be used anywhere in the search

pattern.
• Tilde - When used as the first character in the pattern, it matches
everything but the characters in the string.
WMFOPTS 589
# • Number or Pound - Matches a single numeric character.
@ • At - Matches a single alpha character.

• Period - Matches a single nonalphanumeric character.
[... ] • Matches anyone of the characters enclosed in the brackets.
[-... ] • Matches any of the characters not enclosed in the brackets. Characters
such as # or @ are taken literally.
• Hyphen - Specifies a range when used within brackets.
• Reverse quote - Escapes special characters (reads next character
literally).
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You can include more than one wild-card parameter by placing a comma between
each search pattern. Do not enter any spaces.
~ Entering a ? at the command prompt displays AutoCAD's general help text
screens. Using a '? in the middle of a command provides help on that particular
command.
RELATED VARIABLES: Maxsort
WMFIN see IMPORT
WMFOPTS (Windows Metafile OPTionS)

Controls the way objects are defined when Importing WMF files.

Screen File - Options - WMF Options ...
menu
Keyboard WMFOPTS
590 WMFOPTS
OPTIONS:
WMF Import Optlons
IX Wi,e frame (No F1I18)

IX ufe une.
Wire Frame (No Fills) • When the box is checked objects are imported as
wireframes.
• When the box is empty objects are Imported as filled.
Wide Lines • When the box is checked objects are imported
maintaining their relative line widths.
• When the box is empty object's line widths are set to O.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ Importing files as wire-frame and with 0 line width helps speed up display (i.e.,
Regen, Zoom) and editing commands.
RELATED VARIABLES: Fillmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Fill, Import, Wmfm
WMFOUT see EXPORT
'WORLDUCS (WORLD User Coordinate System)

Worlducs maintains the relationship between the UCS and WCS.

Keyboard WORLDUeS
OPTIONS:
o • ues does not equal the wes.
• Des equals the wes.
WORLDVIEW 591
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ When the ues equals the wes the letter W is displayed inside the ues icon.
System variable 1, Read-only Last value used in the drawing Integer
RELATED VARIABLES: Ucsicon
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Dducs, Dducsp, ues, Ucsicon
'WORLDVIEW
Worldview determines whether the ues temporarily changes to the wes when using the
Dview, Ddvpoint, and Vpoint commands.

Keyboard WORLD VIEW
OPTIONS:
o • ues remains unchanged.
• ues changes to the wes.
System variable Last value used in the drawing Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddvpoint, Dview, Vpoint
592 XBIND
x
XBIND (eXternal reference BIND)
Xbind makes selected external reference (Xret) file information a permanent part of the
current drawing file. When specifying the referenced items, you can type in the name, list
multiple names separated with commas, or use wild-card characters. A similar command,
Xref Bind, adds the entire external reference file to your drawing.

External Reference toolbar See Options.
Screen menu FILE" Xbind:
Keyboard XBIND
PROMPTS:
Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Style:
OPTIONS:
Block • Adds selected Xref Blocks permanently to your drawing file.
Dimstyle • Adds selected Xref Dimstyles permanently to your drawing file.
LAyer • Adds selected Xref Layers permanently to your drawing file.
LType • Adds selected Xref Linetypes permanently to your drawing file.
Style • Adds selected Xref Styles permanently to your drawing file.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The added items are given names comprised of the external reference file name
followed by a dollar sign ($), a sequential number, and another dollar sign. The
number is incremented if an item by the same name already exists.
~ If the Xbind command needs more than 31 characters for renaming an item, the
command ends and undoes the effects of the entire Xbind command.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Xref
XLiNE 593
XLINE (eXtend LINE)

Xline creates a line whose endpoints extend into infinity. The command repeats itself,
asking for a new through point and using the same angle. End the command by pressing
<Enter> one extra time, or press the <Esc> key.

Draw tool bar /'
Screen menu DRAWl'" Xline:

Keyboard XLINE
PROMPTS:
Hor / Ver / Ang / Bis ect / Offset /< From point ) :
Thr ough poi nt :
OPTIONS:
<From point> • Select a fixed starting point.
Hor • Creates a horizontal Xline passing through a selected point.

Ver • Creates a vertical Xline passing through a selected point.
Ang • Creates an Xline at a specified angle.
Bisect • Creates an Xline that bisects an angle.

Offset • Creates an xline parallel to another object. You detennine the
offset distance.
Through point • Select a second point detennining direction and angle for the
Xline.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

to Zoom All and Extents do not take into account Xlines. If the drawing only
contains Xlines, then Zoom All and Extents are based on the Limits. Use Zoom
Vmax if you want to display any Xlines outside the Limits.
to You can change an Xline's properties (layer; location; color; linetype; linetype
scale) using the Change, Chprop, Ddchprop, and Ddmodify commands.
594 XLiNE
~ Xlines convert to Rays or Lines when edited with commands such as Trim Break,
Fillet, etc.
~ When editing with Grips the middle Grip lets you reposition the Xlil)e. The two
Grips to either side of the middle Grip let you change the Xline's angle.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ray
XPLODE (eXPLODE)
Xplode converts complex objects into their individual components. Xploding some
objects may result in a change in their color and linetype as they return to their original
Layer, Color, and Linetype definitions. Unlike the Explode command, when you Xplode,
you can control the Color, Layer, and Linetype of the exploded objects.
For more details concerning Xploded objects and what they convert to, see the Explode
command.

Keyboard XPLODE
PROMPTS:
Select objects:
XPlode Individually/<Globally>:
OPTIONS:
XPlode Individually/<Globally>
• When selecting more than one object to explode you can
continue with the command and have the following options
perform individually or globally.
<Explode> • This is the same as in the Explode command where the objects
are converted to their individual components.
All • All gives you the opportunity to change the Color, Layer, and
Linetype for the Xploded objects. If All is not selected, once
you change the Color, Layer, or Linetype, the command
automatically ends.
Color • Determines the Color of the Xploded object(s). See the
Ddcolor or Color command for more detailed information.
XREF 595
LAyer • Detennines the Layer of the Xploded object(s). See the

Ddlmodes or Layer command for more detailed information.
LType • Detennines the Linetype of the Xploded object(s). See the

Ddltype or Linetype command for more detailed information.
Inherit from parent block
• Sets the color, layer, and linetype of the Xploded object(s) to
the current Color, Layer, and Linetype settings if the object's
original Layer assignment was 0 and its Color and Linetype
settings were set to Byblock.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ You cannot Xplode a 3-D Face, complex Linetype, Ellipse (True), Ray, Revolved
object, Shape, Solid, Sphere, Spline, Tolerance dimension, Torus, Trace, or Xline.
You can explode Groups by using the Group Explode option. You must Bind an
Xref before it can be Xploded.
~ Preexplode Blocks, Hatch patterns, and drawing files by Inserting them with an
asterisk (*) preceding the insertion name. Preexplode dimensions by turning
Dimaso Off.
~ You may have to Xplode a Block more than once to break it down into its original
components. This is referred to as "Nested Levels" of information. For example,
blocks A, B, and C may make up a fourth Block named D. Xploding D leaves you
with the original Blocks A, B, and C.
~ If you cancel from the Xplode command after making some changes you will still
need to Undo whatever was performed from the time you began the command to
the time you canceled the command.
~ The Undo command does not automatically undo all the changes that were
accomplished during the Xplode command. You may have to use Undo multiple
times to reset the drawing back to its state when the Xplode command was issued.
RELATED VARIABLES: Explmode
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Explode
XREF (eXternal REFerence)

Xref attaches and manages external drawing files to your current drawing. These
references are loaded into your drawing file each time you open the file for editing or
initiate a plot.
596 XREF

External Reference toolbar See Options.
Screen menu FILE" Xref:
Keyboard XREF
PROMPTS:
?/Bind/Detach/Path/Reload/Overlay/<Attach>:
OPTIONS:
Attach • Attaches a reference drawing to your current drawing. The
Select File to Attach dialog box is displayed if the Filedia
variable is set to 1. Once the file is selected you receive the same
options as the Ddinsert and Insert commands.
? • Lists the Xrefs in a drawing file. You can use wild-card
characters to specify a subset or press <Enter> and receive a
complete listing.
Bind • Makes the Xref a permanent part of the drawing file. You can
enter a single Xref name, multiple names separated by commas,
or wild-card characters. Nested Xrefs are also included.
Detach • Removes Xrefs from the drawing. You can enter a single Xref
name, multiple names separated by commas, or wild-card
characters. Nested Xrefs are also detached.
Path • Modifies the path to search for reference file names. You can
enter a single Xref name, multiple names separated by commas,
or wild-card characters.
~ Reload • Reloads reference files without exiting the drawing editor. You
can enter a single Xref name, multiple names separated by
commas, or wild-card characters. Nested Xrefs are also
reloaded.
~ Overlay • Overlays a reference drawing to your current drawing. The
Select File to Overlay dialog box is displayed if the Filedia
variable is set to 1. Once the file is selected you receive the same
options as those for the Ddinsert and Insert commands. Overlaid
references are similar to attached references. When Xrefing a
file containing overlaid references, the overlaid references are
not displayed in the current drawing.
XREF 597
TIPS & WARNINGS:

t> You can easily locate referenced items in lists because their names are modified in
the drawing reference to the file name followed by a vertical bar (I) symbol and the
item name. This keeps any blocks, linetypes, styles, etc. containing the same
names in both files from conflicting. Layer 0 does not get renamed when
referenced into another drawing.
~ Each time you make changes directly to the reference file, the latest version is
loaded when you edit drawings referencing them.
~ You can permanently merge two files with the Insert or Xref (Bind). The
difference between these two methods is that named items (Blocks, Layers, Views,
etc.) merge when Inserting but remain separate when Binding (Xref).
~ If you want to bind items selectively, not the entire reference file, use the Xbind
command.
~ Binding a reference file causes the names of referenced items to change. The
referenced item names are prefaced with the name of the external reference file
followed by a dollar sign ($), a sequential number, and another dollar sign. The
sequential number is incremented if an item by the same name already exists.
~ Reference files can be nested. In other words, one reference file can reference
another. Overlaid references cannot be nested.
t> You can use most editing commands such as Copy, Scale, and Rotate on Xref
objects.
t; External reference files help keep individual file sizes to a minimum.
to If the layer named Defpoints exists in the Xref file but not the current drawing,
that layer name is created in the current drawing even if you Detach the Xref.
to You can assign another name to referenced drawings with the following format -
xrefname=filename. Xref name is the new name for the external reference only
within the current drawing. The actual file name remains unchanged. You may
want to do this when attaching references with the same name located in different
directories, or when an item exceeds the 31 character limit.
to Setting Visretain to 1 retains any changes you make to the Color, Linetype, or
Layer visibility of referenced items. However, this is only used when you
reference drawings and does not change the original drawing settings.
~ You cannot Insert or Explode reference files. You can merge the Xref file using
the Bind option.
598 XREF
~ If you encounter an error when using the Path or Reload option, the Xref
command is tenninated and the entire sequence is undone.
~ You can maintain a log file each time you use the Xref command. The file (in
ASCII format) has the same name as the current drawing, but with the file
extension .xlg. You may want to print and/or erase these files periodically. You
activate the log file by setting Xrefctl to 1.
~ Only Model space objects can be referenced; Paper space objects are ignored.
~ If the Bind option needs more than 31 characters for renaming an item, the
command ends and undoes the effects of the Bind up to that point.
RELATED VARIABLES: Filedia, Visretain, Xrefctl
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Xbind, Xrefclip
XREFCLIP (eXternal REFerence CLIP)

Xrefclip automates the process of Xrefmg a file into a viewport border at a Zoom XP
value. You window the area of the Xref you want to see enclosed with the viewport
border.

External Reference toolbar
Keyboard XREFCLIP
PROMPTS:
Enable paper space? <Y>:
Xref name:
Clip onto what layer?
First corner of clip box:
Other corner:
Enter the ratio of paper space units to model space
units ...
Number of paper space units <1.0>:
Number of model space units <1.0>:
Insertion point for clip:
XREFCTL 599
OPTIONS:
Enable paper space? <Y>
• This prompt only appears if Tilemode is set to 1. Answering No returns

you to the Command prompt. Answering Yes sets Tilemode to 0,
enabling Paper space. Layers and Viewports are temporarily Hidden or
turned Off until you reach the "Insertion point for clip:" option.
Xrefname
• Enter the name of the file to Xref.

Clip onto what layer?
• Enter a Layer on which to place the Xref and Paper space Viewport. The
layer name must be new to the current drawing.
First corner of clip box / Other corner
• When the entire Xref drawing is displayed on the screen you are asked to
place a window around the area you want displayed in the Viewport.
Enter the ratio of paper space units to model space units ...
• The values must be nonzero and positive.

Insertion point for clip
• Enter the location for the Viewport containing the clipped Xref.
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Mview, Xref, Zoom
'XREFCTL (eXternal REFerence ConTroL)

Xrefctl determines whether an ASCII file is created when using the Xref command. This
file is a log of actions and is created in the same directory as the current drawing. Its name
is the same as the drawing file, with the extension .xlg.

Screen menu FILE'" Xref: ... XrefCtI:
Keyboard XREFCTL
600 XREFCTL
OPTIONS:
a • Disables Xrefctl and does not create a .xlg file.
1 • Enables Xrefctl and creates a .xlg file.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

\) When Xrefctl is enabled only one .xlg report is created for every drawing file.
Every time you use the Xref command, that information is appended to the end of
that drawing's .xlg file.
\) You can delete reference (.xlg) files without affecting the associated drawing file.
System variable o Configuration file Integer
ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Xref
ZOOM 601
z
'ZOOM
Zoom magnifies (zooms in) or shrinks (zooms out) the display in the current viewport. It
does not physically change the size of the drawing; rather, it lets you view a small part of
the drawing in detail, or look at a greater part with less detail.

Standard toolbar See Options.
Pull-down View" Zoom>
Screen menu VIEW" Zoom:
Keyboard ZOOM or Z
PROMPTS:
All /Cente r / Dynami c / Extents / Left / Pr evi ous / Vmax / Window/
<Scale (X/ XP» :
OPTIONS:
x scale • Enter a magnification number. The magnification number is rela-
tive to the Limits setting. A scale factor of 1 displays the drawing
Limits, 2 displays the drawing twice as big, and .5 displays the
drawing half its size.
+ in • Increases the size of the current viewport display screen 2 times
(2X), or twice as big.
out • Decreases the size of the current viewport display screen .5 times
(.5X), or half its size.
scaleX • Zooms relative to the current viewport display. Enter the value
followed by an X (times). The display center remains fixed.
scaleXP • Scales the magnification of a Model space view relative to Paper
size when Tilemode is set to 0 and Model space is active.
602 ZOOM
Window • Specifies a window area for the new display. Often you will see
more than the window area because the display area is extended
to fill the graphics screen.
limits • Zooms to the Limits of the drawing. This option is not available
from the Command prompt.
All • Plan view - The drawing is displayed to the Limits or to the
drawing extents, whichever is greater. See Zoom Extents.
• 3-D - The drawing is displayed to the extents. See Zoom
Extents.
Center • Specifies a center point and a new display height or magnification
in drawing units. If you pick a new center and press <Enter>, the
new point becomes the center of the screen without changing the
zoom magnification. If you enter a magnification value, it is
considered an absolute zoom. Entering a magnification value
followed by an X zooms relative to the current factor. Entering a
magnification value followed by an XP scales the magnification
of the Model space view relative to Paper space.
Dynamic • Dynamic is a graphical combination of the Zoom All, Pan, and
Window options. The entire generated portion of your drawing is
displayed with a box representing the last zoom magnification.
This box can be moved around the screen to simultaneously pan
to another drawing area. You can change the size of the box by
pressing the pick button and moving the pointing device to resize
the zoom box. Clicking the pick button toggles you from
relocating to resizing the box. Once the box size and location are
satisfactory, press <Enter>.
~ Extents • Displays all the drawing objects as large as possible.
ZOOM 603
Left • Specifies a lower left corner and a new display height or magni-
fication in drawing units. If you pick a new lower left corner and
press <Enter>, the new point becomes the lower left corner of the
screen without changing the zoom magnification. If you enter a
magnification value, it is considered an absolute zoom factor.
Entering a magnification value followed by an X zooms relative
to the current value. Entering a magnification value followed by
an XP scales the magnification of the Model space view relative
to Paper space when Tilemode is set to 0 and Model space is
active.
Previous • Restores a previous Zoom, Pan, View, or Dview. The Zoom com-
mand retains the last ten Views for each viewport.
Vmax • Zooms to the limits ofthe virtual screen's display space. This dis-
plays the maximum drawing area possible without causing a Re-
generation.
TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ The default for Zoom is Window although it does not appear in brackets on the
Command line.
~ All Zooms work transparently except All, Extents, or Zooms that cause a Regen-
eration. Make sure Viewres is set to Fast Zooms and turn Regenauto Off.
to Plot multiple scaled views of the same drawing in one drawing by setting up
Viewports in Paper space and using the Zoom XP option.
~ When perspective viewing is enabled you must use the Zoom option of the Dview
command to change the viewing magnification.
~ If you type Z to activate the Zoom command and you receive the error message
~ Once you initiate the Zoom command you cannot move to another viewport to
viewport, and then reissue the Zoom command.
~ You cannot invoke a transparent Zoom while using Vpoint, Dview, View, Pan, or
another Zoom command.
604 ZOOM
RELATED VARIABLES: Extmax, Extmin, Viewctr, Viewsize, Vsmax, Vsmin

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Ddview, Dview, Limits, Pan, View
EXAMPLE:
Command: ZOOM
All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Left/
Previous/Window/<Scale(X»: C
Center point: Pick point 1
Magnification or Height <4.0000>: 2X
Command Shortcuts 605
APPENDIX A
Command Shortcuts
There are various ways to access commands. With your pointing device you can activate
commands from the pull-down, screen, toolbar, and status line menus. If your pointing
device is a digitizer and puck you can select commands from the tablet or from the puck
buttons. If you are using a mouse you have the mouse buttons, and by combining the Shift
key with the mouse buttons you have even more options.
Function Keys • The FI to FI2 buttons located on the top row of your
keyboard.
Menu File • Either option requires you to press the <Ctrl> key and then at
Keystrokes the same time to press another key from the keyboard. The
only exception is the Cancel command, where you press the
or
<Esc> key. The Menu File Keystrokes are based partially on
Classic Menu Windows standards, and the Classic Menu Keystrokes are
Keystrokes based on previous AutoCAD versions.
Alias • Provides a shortcut for typing some of the commands at the
keyboard.
Screen Status Line • A group of commands that can be toggled on or off. These
commands are located at the bottom of your AutoCAD
display screen.
Description Function Menu File Classic Alias Screen Shift +

Keys Keystrokes Menu (ACAD.PGP) Status 2nd
Keystrokes line Mouse
Button
.x ./
.XY ./
.XZ ./
.Y ./
.YZ ./
.Z ./
Apparent ./
Intersection
Arc A
Backspace <Ctrl H> <Ctrl H>
606 Appendix A

Keys Keystrokes Menu (ACAD.PGp) Status 2nd
Button
Cancel <Esc> <Esc> or
<CtrIC>
Center ./
Circle C
Coordinate F6 <CtrID> <CtrID> ./
display on/off
Copy CP
Delete the entire <CtrIX>
line of input
Dimaligned Dimali
Dimangular Dimang
Dimbaseline Dimbase
Dimcontinue Dimcont
Dimdiameter Dimdia
Dimedit Dimed
Dimlinear Dimlin
Dimordinate Dimord
Dimoverride Dimover
Dimradius Dimrad
Dimstyle Dimsty
Dimtedit Dimted
Dsviewer AV
Dview DV
Endpoint ./
Erase E
Flip Screen F2
From ./
Grid on/off F7 <CtrIG> <CtrIG> ./
Help FI
Insertion ./
Intersection ./
lsoplane <CtrIE> <CtrIE>
left/top/right
Layer LA
Leader Lead
Line L
Linetype LT
Command Shortcuts 607

Keys Keystrokes Menu (ACAD.PGP) Status 2nd
Button
Midpoint ./
Move M
Mspace MS ./
Mtext T
Nearest ./
Node ./
None ./
Ortho on/off F8 <CtrIO> ./
Pan P
Perpendicular ./
Pkser Serial
Pline PL
Plot <Ctrl P>
Pspace PS ./
Quadrant ./
Quick, ./
Quit Exit
Redraw R
Snap on/off F9 <Ctrl B> <Ctrl B> ./
Tablet on/off FlO <Ctrl T> <CtrIT>
Tangent ./
Tilemode ./
Tolerance Tol
Viewport - <Ctrl V>
Change the active
viewport (model
space)
Zoom Z
Open <CtrIO>
New <CtrIN>
Qsave <CtrIS>
U (undo)o <CtrIZ>
CutcIip <CtrIX>
Copyclip <Ctrl C>
PastecIip <CtrIV>
608 Appendix B
APPENDIX B
Dialog Boxes
Dialog Box Command prompt Disable Dialog Box Command prompt Disable
Equivalent Dialog Box Equivalent Dialog Box
3Dsin Ddmodify Change, Chprop,
Extend, Grips,
3Dsout
Lengthen, Mtprop,
About Trim
Acisin Filedia Ddosnap Aperture, Osnap
Acisout Filedia Ddptype
Appload Ddrename Rename
Bhatch -Bhatch Ddnnodes Blipmode, Fill, Grid,
Group, lsoplane,
Bmpout Filedia
Ortho, Qtext, Snap
Boundary -Boundary
Ddselect
Compile Filedia
Dducs Rename, Ucs
Config
Dducsp Plan, Ucs
Ddattdef Attdef
Ddunits Units
Ddatte Attedit
Ddview Rename, View
Ddattext Attext Ddvpoint Plan, Vpoint
Ddchprop Change, Chprop,
Dimaligned
Color, Layer,
Linetype, Thickness DimanguIar
Ddcolor Color, Layer Dimdiameter
Ddedit Change, Mtext, Dimedit
Mtprop
Dimlinear
Ddemodes Color, Elevation,
Dimordinate
Layer, Linetype,
Style, Thickness Dimradius
Ddgrips Dsviewer
Ddim Dimstyle Dxbin Filedia
Ddinsert Insert Dxfm Filedia
Ddlmodes Layer Dxfout Filedia
Ddltype Linetype, Ltscale End Filedia
Dialog Boxes 609
Dialog Box Command prompt Disable Dialog Box Command prompt Disable
Equivalent Dialog Box Equivalent Dialog Box
Export 3Dsout, Acisout, Filedia Open Filedia
Attext, Bmpout,
Pcxin
Ddattext, Dxbin,
Dxfout, Import, Plot Cmddia
Makepreview, Psfill,
Preferences
Psout, Render,
Saveimg, Wblock, Psin Filedia
Wmfout
Psout Filedia
Files Dir, Rename Filedia
Qsave Filedia
Filter
Rconfig
Gifm
Recover Filedia
Group -Group
Reinit
Hatchedit -Hatchedit
Render
Help
Replay
Import 3Dsin, Acisin, Filedia
Rmat
Dxbin, Dxfin,
Epsin, Export, Rpref
Gifin, Pcxin, Psout,
Save Filedia
Replay, Tifin,
Wmfin, Wmfopts Saveas Filedia
Insertobj Saveasrl2 Filedia
Leader Saveimg
Light Scene
Linetype Filedia Script Filedia
Load Filedia Spell
Matlib Stats
Menu Filedia Stlout Filedia
Menuload Filedia Style Filedia
Menuunload Filedia Tbconfig
Mledit Tolerance
Mlstyle Vslide Filedia
Mslide Filedia Wblock Filedia
Mtext -Mtext Wmfin Filedia
Mtprop Wmfopts
New Filedia Wmfout Filedia
Olelinks Xref Filedia
m
......
APPENDIX C o
Scale Factor Chart and Drawing Limits
Architectural
Drawing Scale A B C D E lIS" Plotted Plotted Paper Space
Scale Factor S.5X 11 11X17 17X22 22X34 34X44 Text Height Scale ZoomXP
(7.5 X 10) (lOX 16) (16 X 21) (21 X 33) (33 X 43)
1"=1" 1 7" x 10" 10" x I' I' x I' I' x 2' 2'x3' .125 1=1 lxp
3"=1' 4 2' x 3' 3' x5' 5' x l' l' x 11' 11' x 14" .5" 1=4 1/4xp or .25xp
1 1/2"=1' 8 5'x6' 6' x 10' 10' x 14' 14' x 22' 22' x 28'" 1" 1=8 1/8xp or .0125xp
1"=1' 12 l' x 10' 10' x 16' 16' x 21' 21' x 33' 33' x 43' 1.5" 1=12 1/12xp or .08333xp
3/4"=1' 16 10' x 13' 13' x 21' 21' x 28' 28' x 44' 44' x 57'" 2 1=16 11 16xp or .0625 xp
1/2"=1 24 15' x 20' 20' x 32' 32' x 42' 42' x 66' 66' x 86' 3" 1=24 1/24xp or .04166xp
3/8"=1' 32 20' x 26' 26' x 42' 42' x 56' 56' x 88' 88' x 114'" 4" 1=32 1/32xp or .03125xp
1/4"=1' 48 30' x 40' 40' x 64' 64' x 84' 84' x 132' 132' x 172' 6" 1=48 1/48xp or .02083xp
3/16"=1' 64 40' x 53' 53' x 85' 85' x 112' 112' x 176' 176' x 229'" 8" 1=64 1/64xp or .01562xp
1/8"=1' 96 60' x 80' 80' x 128' 128' x 168' 168' x 264' 264' x 344' 12" 1=96 1/96xp or .01041xp
3/32"=1' 128 80' x 106' 106' x 170' 170' x 224' 224' x 352' 352' x 458' 16" 1=128 1/128xp or .OO781xp »
'a
'a
1/16"=1' 192 120' x 160' 160' x 256' 256' x 336' 336' x 528' 528' x 688' 24" 1=192 1/192xp or .OO520xp CD
:1
Q.
1/32"=1' 384 240' x 320' 320' x 512' 512' x 672' 672' x 1056' 1056' x 1376' 48" 1=384 1/384xp or .OO260xp >C"
n
en
n
D)
Mechanical
CD
Drawing Scale A B C D E 1/8" Plotted Plotted Paper Space ."
D)
Scale Factor 8.5 X 11 11 X 17 17 X22 22X34 34X44 Text Height Scale ZoomXP
(7.5 X 10) (10 X 16) (16 X 21) (21 X 33) (33 X 43)
g~
D)
2"=1" .5 3" x 5" 5" x 8" 8" x 10" 10" x 16" 16" x 21" .0625 1=.5 2xp :::J
Q.
3/4"= 1" 1.33 9" x 13" 13" x 21" 21" x 27" 27" x 43" 43" x 57" .167 1=1.33 3/4xp or .75xp C
42" x 66" 66" x 86" .25 1=2 1/2xp or .5xp
ii1
1/2"=1" 2 15" x 20" 20" x 32" 32" x 42" :::e
3'
3/8"= 1" 2.67 22" x 29" 29" x 42" 42" x 56" 56" x 88" 88" x 114" .33 1=2.67 3/8xp or .375xp CC
1/4"=1" 4 30" x 40" 40" x 64" 64" x 84" 84" x 132" l32" x 172" .5 1=4 1/4xp or .25xp
c:
3
;::;:
3/16"= 1" 5.33 39" x 53" 53" x 85" 85"xl11" Ill" x l75" 175" x 229" .66 1=5.33 3/16xp or .1875xp tA
L ---- -
Civil
Drawing Scale A B C D E 1/8" Plotted Plotted Paper Space
Scale Factor 8.5 X 11 11 X 17 17 X22 22X34 34X44 Text Height Scale ZoomXP
(7.5 X 10) (10 X 16) (16 X 21) (21 X 33) (33 X 43)
1"=10' 120 75' x 100' 100' x 160' 160' x 210' 210' x 330' 330' x 430' 15" 1=120 1/120xp or .00833xp
1"=20' 240 150' x 200' 200' x 320' 320' x 420' 420' x 660' 660' x 860' 30" 1=240 1/240xp or .00416xp
1"=30' 360 225' x 300' 300' x 480' 480' x 630' 630' x 990' 990' x 1290' 45" 1=360 1/360xp or .00277xp
1"=40' 480 300' x 400' 400' x 640' 640' x 840' 840' x 1320' 1320' x 1720' 60" 1=480 1/480xp or .00208xp
1"=50' 600 375' x 500' 500' x 800' 800' x 1050' 1050' x 1650' 1650' x 2150' 75" 1=600 1/600xp or .00166xp
1"=60' 720 450' x 600' 600' x 960' 960' x 1260' 1260' x 1980' 1980' x 2580' 90" 1=720 1/720xp or .00l38xp
1"=80' 960 600' x 800' 800' x 1280' 1280' x 1680' 1680' x 2640' 2640' x 3440' 120" 1=960 1/960xp or .00104xp
1"=100' 1200 750' x 1000' 1000' x 1600' 1600' x 2100' 2100' x 3300' 3300' x 4300' 150" 1=1200 ~~~xp or .OOO8~ 0')
_ .. ---- ----------- - ,.....
'----- .......
.......
612 Appendix D
APPENDIX D
Trouble-Shooting
The AutoCAD Commands are broken!
When you find that some commands are working differently than documented, it may be
because you are using an AutoCAD add-on package that redefined the way commands
work. You can override these command redefinitions by typing the command at the key-
board preceded by a period C.).
Everything is the same Color no matter what layer I'm on!

If the color of new objects does not match the color of the current Layer setting it is be-
cause the Color command is set to that specific color. If you want the objects to default to
the current Layer's color setting you must set the Color to Bylayer.
Everything is the same Line type no matter what layer I'm on!
If the linetype of new objects does not match the linetype of the current Layer setting it is
because the Linetype command is set to that specific linetype. If you want the objects to
default to the current Layer's linetype setting you must set the Linetype to Bylayer.
I used various line types but they all look continuous!

Change the Ltscale (linetype scale) in relation to the plot scale factor. See Appendix C
for a listing of plot scale factors. Once you change the Ltscale make sure you Regenerate
the drawing.
Whenever I enter text it doesn't prompt me for the text height!

If you enter text and you are not given the option to set the text height it is because that
text style is set with a predefined text height. Use the Style command and reset the style's
text height to O.
All my text looks like rectangles!

Set Qtext Off and Regenerate the drawing.
My text is missing!
Text appears to be missing in a drawing when AutoCAD cannot locate the font files the
drawing references. When opening a file referencing fonts other than those provided with
the AutoCAD software, you are given the option to temporarily replace the font with a
substitute font. If you do not assign a substitute or the substitute is insufficient, the text
will not appear on the screen. Try re-opening the file and assigning one of the fonts such
as Txt or Romans. If the text still does not appear find out the name of the text font with
Trouble-Shooting 613
the Style command and verify whether a third party font was used. If so, ask the person
who originated the drawing to use the fonts supplied by Autodesk or ask them for the font
files associated to that drawing.
My text should be solid filled. What happened?

Set Textfill to 1 and Regenerate the drawing.
My dimensions are so small I can barely see the dimension text and arrow heads!
My dimension text and arrowheads are too large for the drawing!
Change the Dimscale variable in relation to the plot scale factor. See Appendix C for a
listing of plot scale factors.
Dimensions display the wrong type of units!

If your dimensions display the wrong type of Units (i.e. Decimal, Architectural,
Scientific, Engineering) you need to set the Units using the Annotation option from the
Ddim dialog box.
Why isn't the Osnap Intersection option working?

The two objects may be on different Elevations; use the Apparent Intersection Osnap.
My drawing turned into the size of a postage stamp. Why?

There could be a stray object around the perimeter of the drawing. Issue a Zoom .6x to
shrink the drawing display and then look for stray objects. If no objects are found, turn on
any Layers that are turned off. If that does not work, check to see whether the Limits are
set appropriately.
Changing the following variables affects all drawing files:

Aperture Fontalt Loginname Plotid Screenmode
Auditctl Fontmap Maxsort Plotrotmode Sortents
Cmddia Gripblock Menuctl Plotter Tooltips
Dctcust Gripcolor Mtexted Projmode Treemax
Dctrnain Griphot Pickadd Psprolog Xrefctl
Dragpl Grips Pickauto Psquality
Dragp2 Gripsize Pickbox Savefile
Fflimit Isavebak Pickdrag Savetime
Filedia Isavepercent Pickfirst Screenboxes

The Auto Cad Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Auto Cad Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The AutoCAD®Reference Guide

ACAD and DXF are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Printed on acid-free paper.

© 19%, 1991, 1989 Dorothy Kent

Production managed by Francine McNeill; manufacturing supervised by Jeffrey Taub.

Why This Book Is Different

Who Does This Book Benefit?

How to Use the AutoCAD Reference Guide

How to Get Information From the AutoCAD Screen

What the Guide Tells You About Each Command

About the Author

Commands by Function ...................................................... .

Drafting Tools I Drawing Aids

Create Accurate Drawings

Geometric Construction or Draw Commands

Rendering and Shading

Printing Your Drawing

Managing Your Drawings: File Maintenance

Managing Your Drawing's Environment

TIPS & WARNINGS:

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY...

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY•.•

Screen menu DRAW 2 - SURFACES" 3Dface:

TIPS & WARNINGS:

~ All meshes are made up of one or more 3-D Faces.

RELATED VARIABLES: Splframe

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY ...

Screen menu DRAW2'" SURFACES'" 3Dmesh:

TIPS & WARNINGS:

RELATED VARIABLES: Surftype

3DPOLY (3-D POLYline)

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY...

Screen menu DRAW2 ~ SURFACES ~ 3Dpoly:

TIPS & WARNINGS:

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: Pedit, Spline

3DSIN see IMPORT

3DSOUT see EXPORT

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY...

TIPS & WARNINGS:

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY...

TIPS & WARNINGS:

Type Initial default Subsequent default Value

'ACADVER (ACAD VERsion)

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY...

ACISIN see IMPORT

ACISOUT see EXPORT

'AFLAGS (Attribute FLAGs)

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY...

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY•••

TIPS & WARNINGS:

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D, 3Dmesh, Box, Rectang

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY••.

Screen menu DRAW 2 - SURFACES - Cone:

TIPS & WARNINGS:

base radius base radius

INITIATE THE COMMAND BY••.

Screen menu DRA W 2 - SURFACES - Dish:

Radius • Specifies the Dish's radius.

Diameter • Specifies the Dish's diameter.

Number of longitudinal segments • Determines the number of line segments

TIPS & WARNINGS:

ASSOCIATED COMMANDS: 3D,3Dmesh

Ai_dome creates a 3-D Polygon mesh (surface) Dome.